D10 Hemoglobin Service Manual

Service Manual
™
REF 220-0318
D-10
Hemoglobin
Testing
System
L20015501
October 2004
D-10 Hemoglobin Testing System
Bio-Rad Laboratories
Diagnostic Group
4000 Alfred Nobel Drive
Hercules, California
94547
USA
Technical Assistance Contact Information:

CSD_techsupport@Bio-Rad.com
CAUTION
Please read through and familiarize yourself with the contents of the service
manual.
All personnel using the D-10 should wear standard laboratory safety apparatus
(e.g. safety glasses, laboratory coat and gloves).
All reference material (i.e. standards and controls) and patient samples should be
considered as biohazardous material and must be handled with caution.
Waste material contains sample waste plus reagents: treat and dispose of as
directed by your laboratory safety guidelines or by local ordinance.
TRADEMARKS AND REFERENCES
D-10 is a trademark of Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective companies.
L20015501 Service Manual iii

ABOUT THIS MANUAL:

This manual is intended for service engineers and other appropriately trained
personnel. The following topics are included:
• Principles of Operation
• Technical Specifications
• Installation and De-installation
• Service Software
• Maintenance Procedures
• Parts Replacement Procedures
• Troubleshooting Guide
Also included are electrical and mechanical drawings along with the spare parts
list.
iv Service Manual L20015501

Table of Contents
1 Introduction
1.1 General Description 1-1
1.2 High Performance Liquid Chromatography 1-1
1.2.1 Definition 1-1
1.2.2 General Principle 1-1
1.3 HPLC Applied to the D-10 1-2
1.3.1 General Principle 1-2
1.3.2 Stationary Phase: the Cartridge 1-3
1.3.3 Mobile Phase: the Buffers 1-3
1.3.4 Separation 1-3
1.3.5 Bio-Rad D-10 Hemoglobin A1c 1-4
1.3.6 Bio-Rad D-10 Dual Program 1-4
1.4 Operating Principles 1-5
1.4.1 Theory of Operation 1-5
1.4.1.1 Overview 1-5
1.4.1.2 Sample Preparation 1-5
1.4.1.2.1 Functions 1-5
1.4.1.2.2 Description of the Sample Fluid Pathway 1-6
1.4.1.2.3 Operation of the Sampling Components 1-7
1.4.1.3 Sample Analysis 1-8
1.4.1.3.1 Functions 1-8
1.4.1.3.2 Description of the Sample Analysis Components 1-8
1.4.1.3.3 Operation of the Sample Analysis Components 1-9
1.4.1.4 General Fluidic Diagram 1-14
1.4.1.5 Sample Arm 1-14
1.4.1.5.1 Functions 1-14
1.4.1.5.2 Components 1-16
1.4.1.5.3 Operation of the Sample Arm Components 1-17
1.4.1.6 Rack Handling Functions 1-19
1.4.1.6.1 Functions 1-19
1.4.1.6.2 Description of the Rack Handling Components 1-19
1.4.1.6.3 Operation of the Rack Handling System 1-20
1.4.1.7 User Interface 1-21
1.4.1.8 Device Control/Processor Architecture 1-21
1.4.1.9 Power Supplies 1-22
1.4.2 Physical Organization of the Device:
Mechanical, Electrical and Flow Architecture 1-23
1.4.2.1 Modular Architecture 1-23
1.4.2.2 List of Modules 1-23
1.4.2.3 Electrical Architecture 1-24
1.5 Safety Symbols 1-24
L20015501 Service Manual v

2 Specifications
2.1 Physical Specifications 2-1
2.1.1 Dimensions 2-1
2.1.2 Weight 2-1
2.2 Technical Specifications 2-1
2.2.1 General Specifications 2-1
2.2.2 Throughput 2-1
2.2.3 Buffer Bottle Volumes 2-1
2.2.4 Waste Bottle Volume 2-1
2.2.5 Sample Rack 2-2
2.2.6 Sample Preparation 2-2
2.2.7 Probe Movements 2-3
2.2.8 High Pressure Pump/Proportioning Valve 2-3
2.2.9 Pressure Sensor 2-4
2.2.10 Injection Valve 2-4
2.2.11 Degasser Module 2-4
2.2.12 Cartridge Module 2-5
2.2.13 Detector 2-5
2.2.14 Tubing and Material in Contact with Liquid 2-6
2.2.15 Rack Door 2-6
2.2.16 Front Cover 2-6
2.2.17 Onboard PC 2-7
2.2.18 User Interface 2-7
2.2.19 Printer 2-7
2.2.20 Barcode Reader 2-7
2.2.21 Micro-controller Automation 2-7
3 System Description
3.1 System Overview 3-1
3.2 Frame 3-2
3.3 Modules 3-2
3.3.1 Syringe Module 3-2
3.3.2 High Pressure Module 3-5
3.3.3 High Pressure Pump 3-8
3.3.4 Cartridge Module 3-9
3.3.5 Detector Module 3-11
3.3.5.1 Description 3-11
3.3.5.2 Detector Module Evolution 3-13
3.3.5.2.1 Identification 3-13
3.3.5.2.2 Reference Photodiode 3-13
3.3.5.2.3 Detector Board Evolution 3-14
3.3.5.2.4 Jumper Configuration 3-15
3.3.5.2.5 Part Replacement 3-16
vi Service Manual L20015501

3.3.6 Sample Arm Module 3-16

3.3.7 Electronic Module 3-19
3.3.8 Thermal Printer Module 3-26
3.3.9 Degasser Module 3-28
3.3.10 User Interface Module 3-30
3.3.11 Rack Drive Module 3-32
3.3.12 Rack Door Module 3-35
3.3.13 External Shell 3-37
3.4 Tubing List 3-40
3.5 Accessories 3-42
4 Installation Procedure
4.1 Installation Requirements 4-1
4.2 Installation 4-1
4.2.1 Unpacking and Inspection 4-1
4.2.2 Set Up 4-1
4.2.3 Barcode Labels 4-1
4.2.4 Performing Test Runs 4-1
4.3 De-installation 4-2
4.3.1 Decontamination 4-2
4.3.1.1 Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path 4-2
4.3.1.2 Clean the Dilution Well 4-2
4.3.1.3 Clean the Sample Probe 4-2
4.3.1.4 Clean the Internal Waste Bottle 4-2
4.3.1.5 Repeat Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path 4-2
4.3.2 Storage Fluid in the Instrument 4-2
4.3.3 Sample Arm Locking and System Shutdown 4-3
4.3.4 Packing 4-3
4.3.4.1 Removal of the External Components 4-3
4.3.4.2 Packing Accessories 4-3
4.3.4.3 Packing the Waste Tank 4-4
4.3.4.4 Packing the D-10 4-4
5 Software Overview
5.1 D-10 Application 5-1
5.2 User Software 5-1
5.3 *.ini Files 5-1
5.3.1 'Dia.ini' File 5-2
5.3.2 'instrument.ini' File 5-2
5.3.2.1 High-Pressure Pump Parameters 5-2
5.3.2.1.1 Flow Rate Calibration Parameters 5-2
5.3.2.1.2 High-Pressure Sensor Calibration Parameters 5-3
L20015501 Service Manual vii

5.3.2.1.3 High-Pressure Pump Parameters 5-3

5.3.2.2 Sample Arm Parameters 5-3
5.3.2.3 Temperature Control Parameters 5-3
5.3.3 'Profile.ini' File 5-3
5.3.4 'Profile2.ini' File 5-4
5.3.5 'DiaLIS.ini' File 5-4
5.4 \Log Folder 5-4
5.5 \Result Folder 5-4
5.6 \Param Folder 5-5
5.7 Other Folders 5-5
5.8 Initialization Sequence 5-5
5.9 Shutdown Sequence 5-6
5.10 Service Software 5-7
5.10.1 Objective 5-7
5.10.2 Access 5-7
5.10.3 Exit 5-8
5.10.4 Parameters of the 'DiaSer.exe' Tool 5-8
5.10.5 General Features in the Use of the Screens 5-8
5.10.6 Main Screens 5-12
5.10.7 SYRINGE Button 5-14
5.10.8 DEGASSER Button 5-19
5.10.9 DETECTOR Button 5-23
5.10.10 RACK DOOR Button 5-27
5.10.11 RACK INTRO. Button 5-28
5.10.12 FRONT COVER Button 5-29
5.10.13 ALL STATUS Button 5-31
5.10.14 LAUNCH INIT Button 5-34
5.10.15 SHUT DOWN Button 5-34
5.10.16 HP: PUMP + VALVE Button 5-34
5.10.16.1 AUTOMATIC TESTS Button 5-48
5.10.16.2 SETTING Button 5-51
5.10.16.3 RESULTS Button 5-52
5.10.17 HP: SENSOR CALIB. Button 5-53
5.10.18 HP: FLOW CALIB. Button 5-54
5.10.19 THERMAL CONTROL Button 5-61
5.10.20 SAMPLE ARM Button 5-66
5.10.20.1 TH MOVE Button 5-67
5.10.20.2 Z MOVE Button 5-70
5.10.20.3 X MOVE Button 5-74
5.10.20.4 BARCODE Button 5-77
5.10.20.5 ALL STATUS Button 5-78
5.10.20.6 SAMPLE ARM STATUS Button 5-78
5.10.20.7 PROBE REPLACEMENT Button 5-80
5.10.20.8 DILUT./WASH STAT. REPLA. Button 5-80
5.10.20.9 SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION Button 5-80
5.10.20.10 HALL SENSOR TEST Button 5-80
5.10.20.11 TUBE IDENTIFICATION Button 5-81
viii Service Manual L20015501

5.10.21 MISC. Button 5-84

5.10.21.1 SETUP Button 5-85
5.10.21.2 LANGUAGE Button 5-86
5.10.21.3 LIS Button 5-87
5.10.21.4 COUNTERS Button 5-87
5.10.21.5 REPORT Button 5-88
5.10.21.6 TOUCH SCREEN CALIB. Button 5-88
5.10.22 MACRO Button 5-90
5.10.23 VERSIONS Button 5-91
5.10.24 ERRORS Button 5-92
5.10.25 Default Values Table 5-92
5.10.26 Typical Sense Values Table 5-95
6 Replacement Procedures
6.1 List of Procedures 6-1
6.2 Front Cover Assembly 6-5
6.3 Thermal Printer 6-6
6.4 Buffer Bottle Support 6-8
6.5 Syringe Module 6-10
6.6 Electronic Module 6-13
6.7 Cartridge Module 6-17
6.8 Sample Probe 6-21
6.9 Dilution/Wash Station 6-21
6.10 Syringe 3-Way Valve 6-22
6.11 1mL Motorized Syringe 6-26
6.12 Thermal Fuse 6-28
6.13 Degasser Module 6-29
6.14 Vacuum Pump 6-33
6.15 Interface Board 6-35
6.16 Rack Door Module 6-37
6.17 Proportioning Valve 6-39
6.18 High Pressure Pump 6-42
6.19 7-Port, 3-Position HP Valve + 23µL Sample Loop 6-45
6.20 Pressure Sensor 6-49
6.21 Column Heater Coil 6-53
6.22 Z Position Sensor 6-56
6.23 CCFL Backlight 6-60
6.24 Power Supplies 1 & 2 6-62
6.25 Motherboard (PCM-5896) 6-65
6.26 LCD Interface Board 6-71
6.27 LCD Display 6-73
6.28 Waste Manifold 1 6-74
6.29 Waste Manifold 2 6-76
6.30 Hard Disk 6-78
L20015501 Service Manual ix

6.31 Barcode Reader 6-82

6.32 Detector Module 6-88
6.33 Rack Input Sensor 6-90
6.34 Rack Output Sensor 6-95
6.35 User Interface Module 6-99
6.36 Arm 6-101
6.37 Rack Drive Module 6-112
6.38 HP Pump Head 6-116
6.39 HP Pump Piston 6-119
6.40 HP Pump Piston Seals 6-121
6.41 Tube Height Sensor 6-122
6.42 HP Valve Rotor and Stator 6-132
6.43 Degasser Buffer Tubing 6-135
6.44 Degasser Wash Tubing 6-138
6.45 Memory DIMM (64MB) 6-141
6.46 LCD Internal Board 6-142
6.47 HPLC Module 6-145
6.48 HPLC Module Board 6-152
6.49 Z Board 6-152
6.50 X Board 6-156
6.51 Syringe Module Board 6-158
6.52 Degasser Module Board 6-161
6.53 Rack Positioning Motor Assembly 6-163
6.54 Rubber Disk 6-166
6.55 Temperature Sensor 6-167
6.56 Peltier Module 6-169
6.57 Upper Front Door 6-172
6.58 Lower Front Door 6-175
6.59 Gas Spring 6-176
6.60 Micro-Switch 6-177
6.61 Front Cover Solenoid/Sensor 6-179
6.62 Front Cover 6-182
6.63 Rack Door Solenoid 6-184
6.64 Open Door Sensor 6-186
6.65 Closed Door Sensor 6-189
6.66 HP Pump Check Valves 6-192
6.67 X Home Sensor 6-194
6.68 X Position Sensor 6-200
6.69 TH Home Sensor 6-205
6.70 TH Position Sensor 6-209
6.71 Z Home Sensor 6-212
6.72 30-Tooth Pulley 6-218
6.74 Z Gear Belt 6-224
6.75 TH Gear Belt 6-226
6.76 Liquid Pump Supply Cable 6-227
6.77 Liquid Pump 6-229
x Service Manual L20015501

6.78 Internal Waste Bottle 6-230

6.79 LUER Fittings for Internal Waste Bottle 6-232
6.80 Pinch Valves Supply Cables 6-233
6.81 Pinch Valve Tubing 6-235
6.82 Pinch Valve 6-237
6.83 Detector Board 6-239
6.84 Reference Board 6-241
6.85 Absorption Board 6-244
6.86 LED Board 6-246
6.87 Flow Cell 6-250
6.88 Floppy Drive 6-254
6.89 Floppy Drive Supply Cable 6-256
6.90 Hard Disk Supply Cable 6-259
6.91 Thermal Printer Supply Cable 6-260
6.92 Main Fan 6-262
6.93 Link Cable: Motherboard > LAN Connector 6-264
6.94 Link Cable: Motherboard > VGA Connector 6-265
6.95 Link Cable: Motherboard > RS Connectors 6-267
6.96 Link Cable: Motherboard > MS & KB Connectors 6-269
6.97 Link Cable: Interface Board > Rack Feeder Port 6-271
6.98 Processor Fan (K6) 6-273
6.99 Processor (K6-2E 350MHz) 6-275
6.100 Flat Cable: Motherboard > Hard Disk 6-276
6.101 Flat Cable: Motherboard > Floppy Drive 6-279
6.102 Flat Cable: LCD Internal Board > LCD Interface Board 6-282
6.103 Link Cable: Z Board > Hall Effect Adapter Sensor 6-285
6.104 Hall Effect Adapter Sensor 6-289
6.105 Power Entry Module 6-290
6.106 Cable: Power Block > Switch 6-292
6.107 Cable: Switch > Power Boards 6-295
6.108 Supply Cable: Interface Board > Motherboard 6-299
6.109 Supply Cable: Power Boards > Interface Board 6-301
6.110 LCD Contrast Potentiometer 6-304
6.111 Flat Cable: Interface Board > HPLC Module Board (24-pin) 6-306
Flat Cable: Interface Board > HPLC Module Board (34-pin)
6.112 Flat Cable: Interface Board > X Board 6-307
6.113 Flat Cable: Interface Board > Detector Board 6-308
Flat Cable: Interface Board > Degasser Module Board
6.114 Flat Cable: Interface Board > Syringe Module Board 6-309
6.115 Vacuum Pump Supply Cable 6-310
6.116 23µL Sample Loop 6-312
6.117 Bubble Detectors 6-318
6.118 Sample Arm Flex Cable (12-pin) 6-319
6.119 Sample Arm Flex Cable (8-pin) 6-322
6.121 X Gear Belt 6-332
6.122 Link Cable: HPLC Module Board > Front Cover Solenoid 6-335
L20015501 Service Manual xi

6.123 +24VDC Security Cable 6-338

6.124 Reference 6-343
7 Adjustments
7.1 List of Procedures 7-1
7.2 Detector Adjustment 7-2
7.2.1 Preparation 7-2
7.2.2 Adjustment Trimmers and Test Point Locations 7-2
7.2.3 Procedure 7-3
7.3 Automatic WC/FC Determination 7-5
7.3.2 Automatic Tests 7-11
7.3.3 Returning the Instrument to Operating Condition 7-13
7.4 WC/FC Verification 7-14
7.4.2 Procedures 7-16
7.4.2.1 Static Absorption Measurement (18 minutes) 7-16
7.4.2.2 Dilamex+ Gradient Test (~14 minutes) 7-17
7.4.2.3 Step Gradient Test (36 minutes) 7-18
7.4.2.4 Continuous Gradient Test (~12 minutes) 7-20
7.4.2.5 Entering the WC and FC Values 7-21
7.4.3 Automatic Sequence 7-21
7.4.4 Returning the Instrument to Operating Condition 7-22
7.5 Pressure Sensor Verification 7-22
7.5.2 Procedure 7-23
7.6 Pressure Sensor Calibration (Field Procedure) 7-24
7.7 Flow Rate Verification 7-27
7.7.2 Volumetric Method 7-28
7.7.3 Gravimetric Method 7-30
7.8 Flow Rate Calibration 7-31
7.8.2 Volumetric Method 7-32
7.8.3 Gravimetric Method 7-35
7.9 Thermal Module Check 7-38
7.10 Thermal Module Calibration 7-39
7.10.2 Interface Board Gain and Offset Measurements 7-40
7.10.3 Sensor Offset Correction Measurement 7-42
xii Service Manual L20015501

7.10.4 Gradient Offset Correction Measurement 7-42

7.10.5 Verification 7-43
7.11 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check 7-45
7.11.1 Vacuum Level Check 7-45
7.11.2 Result Examination 7-46
7.11.3 Vacuum Rise Time and Fall Time Check 7-46
7.11.4 Result Examination 7-47
7.12 Hall Effect Sensor Check 7-47
7.13 Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment 7-49
7.14 TH Offset Determination 7-51
7.15 Tube Identification Check 7-52
7.16 Barcode Reader Check 7-53
7.17 Touch Screen Calibration 7-55
7.18 Front Cover Sensor: Interface Board Update 7-56
7.19 'instrument.ini' File Backup 7-58
7.20 Software Imaging 7-60
7.21 LIS Setup 7-68
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Error Messages 8-1
8.2 Troubleshooting Guide from Operation Manual 8-3
8.3 Diagnostics and Checks 8-7
8.4 Sensor Check 8-17
8.5 Warning Messages 8-18
9 Maintenance
9.1 Tools/Materials 9-1
9.2 Maintenance Procedures 9-2
9.2.1 Safety 9-2
9.2.3 Dilution/Wash Station 9-3
9.2.4 Tube Holder Cleaning 9-3
9.2.5 Vertical Lead Screw Lubrication (Z and TH movements) 9-5
9.2.6 Flow Cell Cleaning 9-6
9.2.7 Inspection and Cleaning 9-7
9.2.7.1 HPLC Module 9-7
9.2.7.2 Cartridge Module 9-7
9.2.7.3 Syringe Module 9-7
9.2.7.4 Wiring 9-8
9.2.7.5 Barcode Reader 9-8
L20015501 Service Manual xiii

9.2.7.6 External Waste Tubing 9-9

9.2.7.7 Rear Panel Fan 9-9
9.2.7.8 Sample Rack Track 9-9
9.2.8 Liquid Pump Inspection and Cleaning 9-9
9.2.9 Pinch Valve Tubing Replacement 9-10
9.2.10 Firmware Verification 9-11
9.2.11 7-Port, 3-Position HP Valve 9-11
9.2.12 HPLC Pump 9-11
9.2.13 Sample Probe Replacement 9-11
9.3 Checks and Adjustment Procedures 9-12
9.3.1 Detector Flush and Internal Waste Bottle Check 9-12
9.3.2 7-Port, 3-Position HP Valve Check 9-12
9.3.3 Sample Rack Track Check 9-12
9.3.4 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check 9-12
9.3.5 Detector Adjustment 9-12
9.3.6 Temperature Check 9-13
9.4 Post Maintenance 9-13
9.5 Performance Verification 9-13
9.7 Maintenance Report 9-13
10 Spare Parts 10-1
Appendix A: File Examples

Dia.ini A-1
instrument.ini A-3
Profile.ini A-4
Profile2.ini A-6
DiaSer.ini A-9
DiaLIS.ini A-13
*.csv (partial) from Service software A-14
Appendix B: Diagrams
D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position) B-1
D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in inject position) B-2
D-10: HP Circuit (HP valve in load position) B-3
D-10: HP Circuit (HP valve in inject position) B-4
D-10: General Fluidic Diagram B-5
D-10: Electrical Block Diagram, Sheet 1 B-6
xiv Service Manual L20015501

Appendix C: Electronic Diagrams

Detector Board, Sheet 1 C-1
Detector Board: List of Components C-5
Sampling Arm Connection Board Z C-8
Sampling Arm Connection Board X C-9
High-Pressure Connection Board C-10
Syringe Connection Board C-11
Degasser Connection Board C-12
LCD Internal Board and LCD Interface Board C-13
Interface Board, Sheet 1 C-14
Adaptator Sensor Board C-21
Photodetector and LED Board C-22
L20015501 Service Manual xv

List of Figures
Number Title Page
Section 1
Figure 1-1: Sample Elution in Cartridge 1-2

Figure 1-2: Cartridge Material 1-3
Figure 1-3: HbA1c Gradient 1-4
Figure 1-4: Dual Program Gradient 1-4
Figure 1-5: D-10 Detector Diagram 1-12
Figure 1-6: D-10 Detector Board Diagram 1-13
Figure 1-7: D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 1 (front view) 1-15
Figure 1-8: D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 2 (rear view) 1-16
Figure 1-9: D-10, Rack Door System (internal view) 1-19
Figure 1-10: D-10, Rack Insertion and Ejection System 1-20
Section 3
Figure 3-1: Exploded View of the Frame and All Modules 3-1
Figure 3-2: Frame, Drawing 1 3-2
Figure 3-3: Frame, Drawing 2 3-2
Figure 3-4: Syringe Module, Front 3-2
Figure 3-5: Syringe Module, Rear 3-2
Figure 3-6: Syringe Module, Location and Fastening 3-3
Figure 3-7: Syringe Module, Fluidic Connections 3-4
Figure 3-8: Syringe Module Board, Electrical Connections 3-4
Figure 3-9: High Pressure Module 3-5
Figure 3-10: High Pressure Module, Location and Fastening 3-6
Figure 3-11: High Pressure Module, Fluidic Connections 3-6
Figure 3-12: High Pressure Module Board, Electrical Connections 3-7
Figure 3-13: High Pressure Pump, Fluidic Connections 3-8
Figure 3-14: High Pressure Pump, Electrical Parts 3-8
Figure 3-15: Cartridge Module, Internal View 3-9
Figure 3-16: Cartridge Holder 3-9
Figure 3-17: Cartridge Module, Fluidic Connections 3-10
Figure 3-18: Cartridge Module, Electrical Parts 3-10
Figure 3-19: Detector Module, Internal View 1 3-11
Figure 3-20: Detector Module, Internal View 2 3-11
Figure 3-21: Detector Module, Fluidic Connections 3-12
Figure 3-22: Detector Board Connections, Adjustments and Test Points 3-12
Figure 3-23: Detector Module Label 3-13
xvi Service Manual L20015501

Figure 3-24: Small Reference Photodiode 3-13

Figure 3-25: Large Reference Photodiode 3-14
Figure 3-26: Detector Board, version 1 3-14
Figure 3-27: Detector Board, manually installed Pins, Resistor and Jumper 3-15
Figure 3-28: Detector Board, Modified Printed Circuit Board 3-15
Figure 3-29: Detector Board, Jumper setting 1 3-15
Figure 3-30: Detector Board, Jumper setting 2 3-16
Figure 3-31: Sample Arm Module, Front 3-16
Figure 3-32: Sample Arm Module, Rear 3-16
Figure 3-33: Sample Arm Module, Location and Fastening 3-17
Figure 3-34: Sample Arm Module, Fluidic Connections 3-18
Figure 3-35: Sample Arm Module, X Board 3-18
Figure 3-36: Sample Arm Module, Z Board 3-19
Figure 3-37: Electronic Module, Front with and without Grid 3-19
Figure 3-38: Electronic Module, Rear and Inside 3-20
Figure 3-39: Electronic Module, Rear Panel 3-20
Figure 3-40: Electronic Module, Location and Fastening 3-21
Figure 3-41: Power Boards, Electrical Connections 3-22
Figure 3-42: Interface Board, Electrical Connections 3-23
Figure 3-43: PC Motherboard, Electrical Connections 3-24
Figure 3-44: PC Mezzanine Board, Electrical Connections 3-25
Figure 3-45: Interface Board, Electrical Test Points 3-25
Figure 3-46: Thermal Printer Module 3-26
Figure 3-47: Thermal Printer Module, Location and Fastening 3-26
Figure 3-48: Thermal Printer Module, Electrical Connections 3-27
Figure 3-49: Degasser Module, Front 3-28
Figure 3-50: Degasser Module, Rear 3-28
Figure 3-51: Degasser Module, Location and Fastening 3-29
Figure 3-52: Degasser Module, Fluidic Connections 3-29
Figure 3-53: Degasser Module Board, Electrical Connections 3-30
Figure 3-54: User Interface Module 3-30
Figure 3-55: User Interface Module, Location and Fastening 3-31
Figure 3-56: User Interface Module Board, Electrical Connections 3-32
Figure 3-57: Rack Drive Module, Front 3-32
Figure 3-58: Rack Drive Module, Rear 3-32
Figure 3-59: Rack Drive Module, Location and Fastening 3-33
Figure 3-60: Rack Drive Module, Fluidic Connections 3-34
Figure 3-61: X Board, Rack Drive Module Electrical Connections 3-34
Figure 3-62: Rack Door Module, Inside 3-35
Figure 3-63: Rack Door Module, Outside 3-35
Figure 3-64: Rack Door Module, Location and Fastening 3-36
Figure 3-65: X Board, Rack Door Module Electrical Connections 3-36
Figure 3-66: External Shell, Exploded View 3-37
Figure 3-67: Front Cover Assembly 3-37
Figure 3-68: External Shell with Frame 3-37
Figure 3-69: External Shell with Frame, Front Doors Open 3-38
Figure 3-70: Front Cover Assembly, Electrical Connections 3-38
L20015501 Service Manual xvii

Figure 3-71: Interlock Connector Locations, Last Chassis Version 3-39

Figure 3-72: Interlock Connector Locations, First Chassis Version 3-39
Figure 3-73: 'instrument.ini' File Backup 3-40
Section 5
Figure 5-1A: Numeric Keyboard 5-9
Figure 5-1B: Alphanumeric Keyboard 5-9
Figure 5-2A: File Export 5-10
Figure 5-2B: File Import 5-10
Figure 5-3A: File Selection, Save 5-10
Figure 5-3B: File Selection, Open 5-10
Figure 5-4: Example of Sensed Information 5-11
Figure 5-5: Graphic Screen 5-11
Figure 5-6: Password Screen 5-12
Figure 5-7: Main Screen 1 5-13
Figure 5-8: Main Screen 2 5-13
Figure 5-9: D-10 Syringe module (1/6) 5-14
Figure 5-12: D-10 Syringe module (3A/6) 5-16
Figure 5-16: D-10 Degasser module (1/4) 5-20
Figure 5-20: D-10 Detector module (1/4) 5-23
Figure 5-24: D-10 Rack Door module (1/2) 5-27
Figure 5-25: D-10 Rack Door module (2/2) 5-28
Figure 5-26: D-10 Rack Introduction module (1/1) 5-29
Figure 5-27: D-10 Front Cover module (1/2) 5-30
Figure 5-28: D-10 Front Cover module (2/2) 5-30
Figure 5-29: D-10 All Status (1/2) 5-31
Figure 5-30: D-10 All Status (2/2) 5-33
Figure 5-31: D-10 HP module: pump, valve (1/17) 5-34
xviii Service Manual L20015501


Figure 5-48: D-10 Automatic Tests (1/2) 5-49
Figure 5-49: D-10 Automatic Tests (2/2) 5-51
Figure 5-50: D-10 WC/FC Determination test setting 5-52
Figure 5-51A: D-10 WC/FC Determination test results 5-52
Figure 5-51B: D-10 WC/FC Determination test results 5-52
Figure 5-51C: D-10 WC/FC Determination test results 5-53
Figure 5-51D: D-10 WC/FC Determination test results 5-53
Figure 5-52: D-10 HP module: sensor calibration (1/2) 5-54
Figure 5-53: D-10 HP module: sensor calibration (2/2) 5-54
Figure 5-54: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (1/4) 5-55
Figure 5-55A: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (2/4) 5-56
Figure 5-55B: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (2/4) 5-57
Figure 5-56: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (3/4) 5-58
Figure 5-57A: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (4/4) 5-59
Figure 5-57B: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (4/4) 5-60
Figure 5-58: D-10 Thermal module control (1/7) 5-61
Figure 5-65: D-10 Sample arm module 5-67
Figure 5-66: D-10 Sample arm module: TH (1/4) 5-67
Figure 5-70: D-10 Sample arm module: Z (1/4) 5-71
Figure 5-74: D-10 Sample arm module: X (1/4) 5-74
Figure 5-78: D-10 Sample arm module: barcode (1/2) 5-77
L20015501 Service Manual xix

Figure 5-79A: D-10 Sample arm module: barcode (2/2) 5-78

Figure 5-79B: D-10 Sample arm module: barcode (2/2) 5-78
Figure 5-80: D-10 Sample arm module: status (1/2) 5-79
Figure 5-81: D-10 Sample arm module: status (2/2) 5-80
Figure 5-82: D-10 Sample arm module: Hall effect (1/1) 5-81
Figure 5-83: D-10 Sample arm mod.: Tube Ident. (1/3) 5-82
Figure 5-84: D-10 Sample arm mod.: Tube Ident. (2/3) 5-82
Figure 5-85A: D-10 Sample arm mod.: Tube Ident. (3/3) 5-83
Figure 5-85B: D-10 Sample arm mod.: Tube Ident. (3/3) 5-83
Figure 5-86: D-10 Miscellaneous (1/2) 5-84
Figure 5-87: D-10 Miscellaneous (2/2) 5-85
Figure 5-88: D-10 Setup 5-86
Figure 5-89: D-10 Language 5-86
Figure 5-90: D-10 LIS 5-87
Figure 5-91: D-10 Counters (1/1) 5-88
Figure 5-92: D-10 Report 5-88
Figure 5-93: D-10 Touch screen calibration: warning message 5-89
Figure 5-94: D-10 Touch screen calibration: first step 5-89
Figure 5-95: D-10 Touch screen calibration: final step 5-89
Figure 5-96: D-10 Macro functions (1/2) 5-90
Figure 5-97: D-10 Macro functions (2/2) 5-91
Figure 5-98: D-10 Service software versions (1/1) 5-91
Figure 5-99: D-10 Last Errors (1/1) 5-92
Section 7
Figure 7-1: Detector Board: Adjustment Trimmers and Test Point Locations 7-2
Figure 7-2: WC-FC auto determination kit tubing 7-7
Figure 7-3: WC-FC auto determination kit tubing 7-15
Figure 7-4: HPLC Module Board, Electrical Connections 7-40
Section 9
Figure 9-3: D-10 Sample arm module 9-4
Figure 9-6: Flex Cables on Z Board 9-8
Figure 9-7: Flex Cables on X Board 9-8
Figure 9-8: Liquid Pump 9-9
Figure 9-9: Liquid Pump Components 9-10
Figure 9-10 Correct Pump Head Orientation 9-10
Figure 9-11 Pinch Valve Tubing Connections 9-11
xx Service Manual L20015501

1 INTRODU CTION
1.1 G eneral Description

The Bio-Rad D-10™ Hemoglobin Testing System is a fully automated mid-volume
analyzer that can accommodate 1-10 samples per run. It consists of a single module
that provides an integrated method for sample preparation along with separation and
determination of relative percent of specific hemoglobins in whole blood.
The D-10 Hemoglobin Testing System uses the principles of high-performance liquid
chromatography (HPLC). Whole blood samples undergo an automatic two-step dilution
process and are then introduced to the analytical (high-pressure) flow path. Pre-diluted
samples are automatically detected, based upon use of a sample vial adapter in the
sample rack, and the dilution step is omitted. Between sample injections, the sample
probe is rinsed with wash solution to minimize sample carryover.
A single, dual-piston, low-pulsation, HPLC pump with a proportioning valve delivers the
buffer solution to the analytical cartridge and detector. A programmed buffer gradient
of increasing ionic strength delivers the sample to the analytical cartridge, where the
hemoglobins are separated, based upon their ionic interactions with the cartridge
material.
The separated hemoglobins then pass through the filter photometer flow cell where
changes in the absorption are measured at 415nm.
1.2 High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC)

1.2.1 Definition
Chemical separation can be accomplished using HPLC. This method uses the fact
that certain compounds have different migration rates, based on the stationary and
mobile phase in use. The extent or degree of separation is mainly determined by the
choice of stationary phase and mobile phase.
The stationary phase refers to the solid support contained within the cartridge over
which the mobile phase continuously flows.
The mobile phase refers to the buffer that is continuously applied to the cartridge,
acting as a carrier for the sample solution.
1.2.2 General Principle
As the sample solution flows, with the mobile phase, through the cartridge, the
components of the solution will migrate according to the non-covalent interactions of
L20015501 Service Manual 1-1

the compounds with the stationary phase. The chemical interactions of the stationary
phase, and the sample, with the mobile phase, determine the degree of migration
and separation of the components contained in the sample. For example, samples,
which have stronger interactions with the stationary phase than with the mobile
phase, will elute from the cartridge less quickly, and have a longer retention time.
Samples having weaker interactions with the stationary phase will have a shorter
retention time.
1.3 HPLC Applied to the D-10

In the D-10, the separation of specific hemoglobins in whole blood is based on the
principles of ion-exchange HPLC.
1.3.1 G eneral Principle
Ion-exchange HPLC operates on the basis of selective exchange of ions in the

sample with counter-ions in the stationary phase. It is performed with cartridges
containing charge-bearing functional groups attached to a polymer matrix. The
functional ions are permanently bonded to the cartridge and each has a counter-ion
attached. The sample is retained in the cartridge by the replacement of the counter-
ions of the stationary phase with the ions from the sample. The sample is eluted from
the cartridge by changing the properties of the mobile phase (gradient), so that the
mobile phase displaces the sample ions from the stationary phase (see Figure 1-1).
ION-EXCHANGE CHROMATOGRAPHY
Stationary Phase: Resin

With Negative Charges
Mobile Phase
Hemoglobin
Figure 1-1: Sample Elution in Cartridge
In a gradient elution, different compounds are eluted by the increasing strength of the
salt solution. The sample is injected while a weaker mobile phase is being applied to
1-2 Service Manual L20015501

the system. The strength of the mobile phase is later increased, in increments, by
raising the salt content, which results in the elution of retained components.
1.3.2 Stationary Phase: the Cartridge
The separation cartridge is a straight, calibrated tube made of stainless steel. It has a
length of 40.7mm and an external diameter of 6.35mm. The stationary phase is
maintained between two porous discs located at each end, in a portion of the
cartridge that has a length of 30mm and an internal diameter of 4mm. The dead
volumes are minimal.
The cartridge is inserted into a cartridge module, which has two Peltier elements
attached to it. This allows thermal regulation of both the cartridge and the mobile
phase.
The molecules of the stationary phase are methacrylate polymers which completely
fill the cartridge. They are non-porous spherical particles with diameters ranging
between 4 and 6µm (see Figure 1-2).
Figure 1-2: Cartridge Material
1.3.3 Mobile Phase: the Buffers
The two buffers used in the D-10 consist of a combination of phosphoric acid
(H3PO4) and three other chemical compounds ('BIS-TRIS', NaH2PO4 and Na2HPO4).
1.3.4 Separation
The gradient between the two buffers is optimized to modify the pH of the mobile
phase. This modification of the pH, and the differences between the ionization
potential of the different hemoglobins, results in the desired separation.

1.3.5 Bio-Rad D-10 Hemoglobin A1c
The HbA1c test is used to separate and quantitate the A0 and A1c hemoglobins.
Analysis time is 3 minutes. Figure 1-3 shows the elution gradient for HbA1c.
Elution gradient: HbA1c
100
90
80
70
% buffer 2
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
time (s)
Figure 1-3: HbA1c Gradient
1.3.6 Bio-Rad D-10 Dual Program
In addition to the A0 and A1c hemoglobins, this kit allows the separation and
quantification of hemoglobins A2, F, S, D and C. Analysis time is 6.5 minutes. Figure
1-4 shows the elution gradient for the Dual Program.
Elution gradient: Dual Program
100
90
80
70
% buffer 2
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
time (s)
Figure 1-4: Dual Program Gradient

1.4 Operating Principles

1.4.1 Theory of Operation
1.4.1.1 Overview
From a functional viewpoint, the D-10 system is made up of two sub-systems. One
is responsible for sample preparation, while the other performs high-pressure liquid
chromatography. The two systems – sample preparation and chromatography –
have the sample loop in common.
There are two types of samples that can be processed on the D-10:
• whole blood tubes
• prediluted samples in sample vials
Whole blood tubes are placed directly into the sample rack. Prediluted samples are
first placed into a specific rack adapter before being placed into the sample rack.
The rack has 10 sample positions. Once introduced into the system, the samples
are automatically processed.
Sample preparation, and associated operations, use a sampling probe mounted on

a sample arm. The sample arm moves horizontally and vertically to position the
probe over the sample. Auxiliary functions of the sample arm include controlling the
rack insertion door, insertion and ejection of the rack containing the sample tubes,
and tube identification.
The system is controlled by an integrated personal computer, which is the interface

with the user (data entry and result output). It performs the calculations associated
with the measurements made by the chromatography section, and is the interface
with the other processors dedicated to the control of internal automation.
The entire system is organized into integrated modules that are built into a frame
with an external skin. The back of the system contains external ports for connection
to the reagent bottles. The front of the device includes a door that is normally
locked. This door, along with a door on the right side, provides access for
maintenance operations. The bottom door, at the front of the system, allows access
to the high-pressure chromatography components.
1.4.1.2 Sample Preparation
1.4.1.2.1 Functions
Sample preparation includes the following functions:

• sample aspiration
• sample dilution
• sample insertion into the sample loop

• washing of the sample pathway and evacuation of this waste to the

internal, and then external, waste
All the components that are used to perform these functions are represented in
the "D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position)" diagram
located in Appendix B.
Note: the diagram does not represent the movements made by the probe.
1.4.1.2.2 Description of the Sample Fluid Pathway
Refer to the "D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position)"
diagram located in Appendix B.
The main sampling circuit consists of a motorized syringe, a 3-way valve, a

sample loop and a sampling probe. The outlet of the 3-way valve is connected to
the syringe. The NC inlet is connected via the degassing circuit to the
wash/diluent bottle. The NO inlet is connected to the sampling probe through the
sample loop of the 7-port, 3-position, high-pressure valve when it is in the Load
position (normal position of the valve). The entire circuit is filled with wash
solution.
The dilution/wash station is where whole blood samples are diluted and the
sample probe is washed. The station consists of a well used for the two-step
dilution of samples and a well for washing the probe between samples.
The last subassembly of the sample preparation system consists of components

required for evacuation of waste from the system to the external waste bottle. The
components are:
• two pinch valves, one associated with the dilution well, the other
associated with the probe wash well. In the idle position both valves are
open.
• an internal waste bottle for temporary storage of liquid from the
dilution/wash station.
• a liquid pump, associated with a check valve for evacuation of the internal
waste bottle.
• a waste manifold #1 for connecting the two pinch valves to the internal
waste bottle.
• a waste manifold #2 placed just before the outlet and responsible for
collecting all waste from the system and directing it to the external waste
bottle.
• a vacuum sensor connected to the internal waste bottle.

1.4.1.2.3 Operation of the Sampling Components
Refer to the "D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position)"
diagram located in Appendix B.
The syringe assembly consists of a calibrated syringe with the plunger connected
to the flange nut for the stepper motor lead screw. A slotted optical sensor is used
to signal that the syringe is in the position where the filling volume is 0 (home
position). When the probe is placed into a sample tube, the sample is aspirated
by the syringe through the sample loop of the 7-port, 3-position valve. The sample
is then diluted in the dilution well. The outlet of the well is closed by means of the
pinch valve associated with the well.
The two-step dilution is done in several stages. Refer to Section 2.2.6 for sample
and diluent volumes. After the first dilution, a portion of the dilution is aspirated
out of the well by the probe. The dilution well is drained by suctioning the liquid,
using the liquid pump, while the pinch valve associated with the dilution well is
open. The other pinch valve is closed during this time. The pinch valve closes and
the sample is diluted once again in the well. The diluted sample is aspirated,
using the syringe, into the probe and then through the sample loop.
The sample is now ready to be transferred to the high-pressure circuit. This is

achieved by turning the high-pressure valve to the Inject position. Refer to the "D-
10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in inject position)" diagram located in
Appendix B. As soon as the sample (pushed by the flow of liquid in the high-
pressure circuit) leaves the sample loop, the valve goes back to the normal Load
position.
The last step in sample processing consists of washing the sample probe, in
order to avoid carryover, before moving on to the next sample. The washing
sequence is as follows:
1. The dilution well is emptied, by suctioning from the liquid pump, through
the pinch valve associated with the dilution well.
2. The dilution well is flushed by dispensing wash solution into the well and
then draining it off.
3. The inside and outside of the probe are washed in the probe wash well by
dispensing the wash solution and then suctioning it off (using the liquid
pump) through the pinch valve associated with the probe wash well.
Note: during evacuation of liquid, one pinch valve is open at a time; the other
remains closed.
The sample preparation system is ready to process the next sample.

Note for Prediluted Samples: sample vials are used for prediluted samples. In this
case, the sample is aspirated directly from the sample vial to fill the sample loop.
Only the probe is washed. Sample vials are identified based on height and the
presence of a magnet on the adapter.
1.4.1.3 Sample Analysis
1.4.1.3.1 Functions
Sample Analysis includes the following functions:

• circulation of reagents in the high-pressure circuit
• degassing of reagents
• formation of predetermined gradients of reagents specific to the separation
technique
• injection of the sample in the high-pressure circuit
• setting up the chromatography cartridge on the high-pressure circuit,
including warming up the cartridge and the reagents
• measurement by absorption at 415nm of the hemoglobins present in the
sample
• removal of the liquid to the external waste bottle
All the components used for these functions are represented on the "D-10: High
Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load position)” diagram located in Appendix B.
1.4.1.3.2 Description of the Sample Analysis Components
Refer to the "D-10: High Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load position)” diagram
The main flow circuit of the high-pressure section consists of a degasser, a

proportioning valve, a high-pressure pump, a pressure sensor, the 7-port, 3-
position motorized high-pressure valve, an analytical cartridge, a detector and
backpressure tubing.
The degasser is a sealed chamber through which three flow circuits pass:
• circuit associated with reagent 1
• circuit associated with reagent 2
• circuit associated with the wash solution
At the end of each circuit is an optical sensor, designed to detect bubbles at the
output of the circuit.
A vacuum is created in the chamber by means of a vacuum pump and is

monitored by a vacuum sensor.

The proportioning valve is a 3-way valve with the inlets connected to reagents 1
and 2 and the outlet connected to the inlet of the high-pressure pump. The
normally open inlet is connected to reagent 1.
The high-pressure pump has pistons that are driven by a camshaft/reducer set in
motion by a DC motor. This pump is also used in the Bio-Rad DuoFlow system.
An optical encoder is fitted on the motor shaft and is used to regulate the speed.
An optical sensor and a slotted disk interrupter provide a rotation reference at the
shaft output (cam sensor). The flow section of the pump includes the following:
• an inlet connector divided in two, one to each piston. A check valve is fitted
on each piston inlet.
• an outlet connector that joins the outlets of each piston. A check valve is
fitted on each piston outlet as well.
• an inlet and outlet connector for filling the piston backwash circuit.
A high-pressure sensor is fitted, in series, at the pump outlet.
The high-pressure circuit goes through the motorized 7-port, 3-position high-
pressure valve. The Inject position is used to place the sample loop into the high-
pressure circuit. The valve is motorized by a stepper motor, associated with
optical sensors, which ensure that the valve is positioned correctly.
The next component of the high-pressure circuit is the analytical cartridge, which
is at the core of hemoglobin separation. A coil of stainless steel tubing provides
the connection to the cartridge. The cartridge and tubing coil are fitted in a
cartridge module heated to 35°C by Peltier effect modules. The temperature is
measured by a Pt100 ohm temperature sensor. A thermal fuse keeps the system
protected against overheating.
The cartridge outlet circuit goes through the detector. The circuit includes:
• a high-pressure flow cell
• a light source consisting of a high-luminosity LED emitting in the blue range
• a focusing lens
• photoelectric sensors for measuring the incident light, along with the light
absorbed through an interference filter centered on 415nm
• a printed circuit board for processing the signals from the detector
At the detector outlet, the liquid flows to the external waste bottle through a
backpressure coil.
1.4.1.3.3 Operation of the Sample Analysis Components
Refer to the "D-10: High Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load position)" diagram

Reagent Flow and Mixing
The high-pressure pump is not self-priming, so it is necessary to ensure that liquid

flows by gravity to the pump and that there is sufficient hydraulic pressure. This is
achieved by placing bottles at a height above the pump.
The vacuum created in the degasser extracts a portion of the dissolved gas in the
reagents as they pass through.
The proportioning valve selects the flow of reagent 1 (normally open position) or
reagent 2 when the valve is active. The valve is synchronized with the high-
pressure pump. As the pump piston pulls back to allow reagent to fill the pump
head, the valve proportions reagents 1 and 2 for optimal hemoglobin separation.
The synchronization is achieved using signals supplied by the cam sensor and
the motor encoder. These signals are associated with two pump parameters:
• delay between the cam signal and the start of the suction phase, called
"Waiting Count" (WC, parameter ECAMFILLSHIFT1)
• duration of the suction phase, called "Filling Count" (FC, parameter
EFILLDURATION)
The high-pressure pump ensures that liquid flows through the cartridge-detector
chromatography circuit. Data, supplied by the motor encoder, the cam signal and
the signal sent by the high-pressure sensor, drives the pump to achieve a
constant flow. The front of the high-pressure pump has an inlet purge valve in
parallel with the pump inlet. The port connection has two functions:
• manually primes the inlet circuits, either for reagent 1 (proportioning valve
not active) or for reagent 2 (proportioning valve active)
• manually primes the pump by injecting liquid through the pump pistons to
remove any air bubbles that may be present in the pump
The pressure sensor is a strain gauge sensor, which is used to monitor the
pressure in the circuit. Pump flow is raised slightly based on the pressure signal
from the sensor.
Operation of the High-Pressure Valve
The main function of the 7-port, 3-position motorized high-pressure valve is to

transfer the prepared sample, that has been fed into the sample loop to the high-
pressure circuit. This is achieved by switching the high-pressure valve from the
Load position (normal position) to the Inject position. In the Load position, diluted
sample is pulled through the 23µL sample loop by the 1ml syringe while buffer
flows through the other ports. In the Inject position, the flow path changes so
reagents flow through the sample loop, pushing the sample into the high-pressure
circuit. The valve then returns to the Load position and waits for the next sample
to be loaded.
1 - 10 Service Manual L20015501

The valve also has two secondary functions:

• automatically fills the high-pressure pump piston flush circuit in two stages:
fills the motorized syringe with wash solution
in the Inject position, the syringe volume is delivered through the piston
flush circuit
• automatically fills the circuits of reagents 1 and 2 before the high-pressure

valve (degasser, proportioning valve, pump) in two stages:
in the priming position, the syringe aspirates reagent 1 if the
proportioning valve is idle or reagent 2 if the proportioning valve is
active
in the Inject position, the volume aspirated by the syringe is delivered
to the external waste bottle through the piston flush circuit
Operation of the Cartridge Module
The cartridge module is an aluminum unit that is heated to 35°C with two Peltier
effect modules fitted in series. A thermal fuse, also in series with the Peltier effect
modules, is used to open the Peltier effect module power circuit if there is any
overheating. A Pt100 ohm temperature sensor, sunk into the aluminum unit
between the stainless steel tubing coil and the cartridge, measures the
temperature. The length of the coil is sufficient to raise the temperature of the
reagents close to the cartridge temperature.
The cartridge module has a front door to access the high-pressure circuit and
easily remove or install the cartridge. An arrow on the cartridge holder indicates
how the cartridge is to be installed. Arrows on both the holder and the cartridge
face the direction of flow. The cartridge holder fits securely in the cartridge
module when the door is closed and maintains the fluid pathway. The outlet of the
cartridge module is connected directly to the inlet of the detector flow cell.
L20015501 Service Manual 1 - 11

Operation of the Detector
Refer to D-10 Detector Diagram, Figure 1-5.
Flow inlet Flow outlet
Blue High Brightness Silicon photodiode

LED source
415nm interference filter
Silicon photodiode
Plano-convex lens
Figure 1-5: D-10 Detector Diagram
The optical bench, containing the detector and the flow cell, has a light-tight cover
to avoid interference from external light. The flow cell has two integrated PEEK
tubes directly connected to the fluid pathway for the liquid inlet (blue tube) and
outlet (orange tube). The inlet tube is connected to the cartridge module and
enters the smaller side of the conical shaped flow cell. The outlet tube, from the
larger side of the conical flow cell, is connected to the external waste via a
backpressure coil. This coil maintains the backpressure in the flow cell to
suppress bubble formation.
The light source is a high-luminosity LED emitting in the blue range. The incident
light falls on the flow cell from the smaller side. This optical inlet side of the cell
has a plano-convex lens as the only geometric optical component. It is positioned
in the axis of the flow cell.
On the side of the flow cell optical outlet, there is a 415nm interference filter and a
silicon photodiode for measuring the sample absorbance. The reference
measurement is taken by a silicon photodiode placed close to the optical axis
between the source and the flow cell.
The sensors and the light source are connected to a printed circuit board placed
outside the optical bench. A removable metal cover protects the detector PCB.

Operation of the Detector Board
For further details on the detector board, refer to diagram D-10 Detector Board
Diagram, Figure 1-6.
V out:
V in supply DC/DC converter Analog digital
supply potentiometer
LED source
analog power supply
LED source control
gain
Load adjustment
Resistance
Silicon
photodetector Data out
Sigma/delta 20 bits A/D
converter
Sample
sensor
offset
adjustment
to interface
3rd stage:A/D voltage reference
1st stage: I to V converter 2nd stage:amplifier board
conversion source
gain
Load adjustment
Resistance
Silicon
photodetector Sigma/delta 20 bits A/D Data out
converter
Reference
sensor digital
potentiometer
offset
adjustment
Figure 1-6: D-10 Detector Board Diagram
The signal sent by each photoelectric sensor is processed in a similar fashion –

current/voltage conversion, amplification and analog/digital conversion. The digital
signal obtained on each sensor is transmitted to the processor of the integrated
PC that calculates the absorbance using the following formula:
absorbance = log10 (reference measurement/sample measurement)
The reference amplification circuit includes a digital potentiometer that enables

the software to adjust the value of the chromatogram baseline by measuring the
absorbance before the start of the test (baseline adjustment).
The light source is also controlled by a digital potentiometer, which makes it

possible to adjust the level of incident light if there is any drift of the source.
The supply voltage and the reference voltage required for the converters are
produced on the detector board.

1.4.1.4 General Fluidic Diagram
Refer to the “General Fluidic Diagram” located in Appendix B.
1.4.1.5 Sample Arm
1.4.1.5.1 Functions
The sample arm is a functional module represented in the "D-10, Sample Arm
Module, Drawing 1 (front view)" (Figure 1-7) and in the "D-10, Sample Arm
Module, Drawing 2 (rear view)" (Figure 1-8). The arm supports the sampling
probe, tube holder, barcode reader and magnetic sensor. The functions of the
sample arm are:
• lateral left/right movement (X-axis movement)
present
positions the probe above the dilution well
positions the probe above the probe wash well
• vertical up/down movement (Z-axis movement)
the sample type detected
positions the probe in the high (home) position to allow X-axis
movements
• vertical up/down movement of the tube holder system (TH-axis movement)
holds the tube when the probe is removed from the tube
positions the tube holder system to enable X-axis movements
The barcode reader reads any barcode present on the samples once the rack is
introduced to the system.
The magnetic sensor detects the magnets present on any sample vial adapters in
the rack and indicates to the system that the sample is prediluted.

TH home sensor Z home

sensor
(not visible)
Tube height sensor
Mobile subassembly Sampling

probe
Fixed component
Rails
Z and TH
movement
TH lead screw
Tube
holder
X movement
Z lead screw
Hall effect (magnetic) sensor Barcode reader
Figure 1-7: D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 1 (front view)

Z pulley TH pulley and belt X stepper motor

and belt
TH stepper
motor Slotted
Z stepper disk
motor
X axis sensor
Z axis Slotted
sensor disks
TH axis
sensor
device for
driving the X home sensor
X pulley sampling arm
(1 of 2) X belt
Figure 1-8: D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 2 (rear view)
1.4.1.5.2 Components
Refer to figures "D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 1 (front view)" (Figure 1-7)
and "D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 2 (rear view)" (Figure 1-8). The sample
arm assembly contains a fixed component that is mounted on the frame. The
fixed component holds all of the parts needed for X-axis movements and a mobile
subassembly, which travels along the X-axis and includes all the components for
movement along axes Z and TH.
The mobile subassembly is moved along the X-axis by a stepper motor with a
pulley and toothed belt. A device for driving the sampling arm is fitted on the belt.
Two aluminum rails, containing metal glides with a plastic surface finish, are used
to guide the mobile subassembly along the X-axis. A slotted optical sensor (X-
axis sensor) associated with a slotted disk fitted on the motor shaft (motor

encoder) monitors motor rotation. Another slotted optical sensor with a sliding flag
is used to locate the initialization position of the X-axis movement (X-axis
initialization or home sensor). The mobile subassembly contains components for
both probe and tube holder movement along the Z-axis.
The components responsible for probe movement are:

• a stepper motor with a pulley and toothed belt system for Z-axis movement
of the probe.
• a slotted optical sensor (Z-axis sensor) associated with a slotted disk fitted
on the motor shaft to monitor motor rotation (motor encoder).
• another slotted optical sensor, with a sliding flag attached to the sampling
arm, used to locate the initialization position of the Z-axis movement (Z
initialization or home sensor).
• a lead screw fixed to the drive pulley.
• a flange nut that moves up and down the lead screw as it turns.
• a sampling arm that is attached to a mounting block. The mounting block is
attached to the flange nut. The sample tubing is attached to the sampling
arm.
The components responsible for tube holder movement are:

• a stepper motor with a pulley and toothed belt system.
• a slotted optical sensor (TH-axis sensor) associated with a slotted disk
mounted on the motor shaft to monitor motor rotation (motor encoder).
• another slotted optical sensor, with a sliding flag attached to the tube
holder arm, used to locate the initialization position for the TH-axis
movement (TH-axis initialization sensor).
• a third slotted optical sensor used to measure the height of the sample
tube (TH tube height sensor). The system for tube height measurement is
tapered in design.
• a lead screw fixed to the drive pulley.
• a flange nut that moves up and down the lead screw as it turns.
• a tube holder that is attached to a mounting block. The mounting block is
attached to the flange nut.
Two additional components are also located on the mobile subassembly:

• a Hall effect sensor designed to detect the presence of the magnet on a
sample vial adapter.
• a barcode reader for sample identification.
1.4.1.5.3 Operation of the Sample Arm Components
Refer to figures "D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 1 (front view)" (Figure 1-7)
and "D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 2 (rear view)" (Figure 1-8).
Each X-axis probe position (dilution well, probe wash well, tube sample position)
corresponds to a motor position where the slot in the slotted disk is placed in front

of the sensor. The initialization position for the X-axis is the probe position above
the dilution well.
Counting the optical signals from the X-axis sensor (associated with the slotted
disk) controls the arm movements. Frequent returns to the home position are
placed in between the arm movements for safety. If the arm is already initialized
during the initialization movement, a short movement is made to change the
status of the X-axis movement sensors and check if they are operating correctly.
For Z-axis movements, both the motor steps and the signals from the Z-axis
sensor (associated with the slotted disk) are counted. For a given tube height, the
sample position on the Z-axis is determined and the movement takes place by
counting steps and slots. The Z-axis initialization position is reached when the
slots of the slotted disk are positioned in front of the Z-axis sensor and when the
Z-axis initialization sensor is covered. If the arm is already initialized during the
initialization movement, a short movement is made to change the status of the Z-
axis movement sensors and check if they are operating correctly.
For TH-axis movements, both the motor steps and the signals from the TH-axis
sensor (associated with the slotted disk) are counted. When a tube stops the TH
during downward movement, a flag is engaged in the slot of the TH tube height
sensor making it possible to stop the motor. The number of steps completed by
the motor is used to determine the height of the tube. Using this method for
measuring tube height determines if the sample is a primary or prediluted tube.
The probe depth is adjusted based on the type of tube detected.
If a sample vial is detected using the tube height measurement, its presence is
confirmed using the Hall effect sensor. If the Hall effect sensor detects the
presence of a magnet, and confirms that the sample is a sample vial, then the
sample is processed. If confirmation does not occur, the tube is ignored.
The TH-axis initialization position is reached when the slots of the slotted disk are
positioned in front of the TH-axis sensor and when the TH-axis initialization
sensor is covered. If the arm is already initialized during TH-axis initialization, a
short movement is made to change the status of the TH-axis movement sensors
and check if they are operating correctly. The movements along the Z and TH
axes are simultaneous when possible.
The barcode reader is used to identify each sample. The identification process
occurs in two stages:
• the sample arm moves over the entire length of the rack once it is
introduced and the tube barcodes are scanned. The sample identifications
are then placed into the software to build the worklist.
• prior to sampling from the tube, the barcode for the sample is re-read, with
the exception of any sample identification manually entered by the user
into the worklist. If the information from the second read does not match
the first read, the tube is ignored.

1.4.1.6 Rack Handling Functions
1.4.1.6.1 Functions
The rack is handled semi-automatically for ease of introduction into the system.
This rack handling includes:
• rack door opening and closing
• rack insertion and ejection
1.4.1.6.2 Description of the Rack Handling Components
Rack Door System
Refer to diagram "D-10, Rack Door System (internal view)" (Figure 1-9). The rack
door system includes:
• a post attached to the sample arm subassembly for closing the rack
insertion door
• a locking solenoid
• an open door sensor
• a closed door sensor
Locking
Solenoid
Closed door
sensor
Open door sensor Rack door
Figure 1-9: D-10, Rack Door System (internal view)

Rack Insertion and Ejection System
Refer to diagram "D-10, Rack Insertion and Ejection System" (Figure 1-10).
The rack insertion and ejection system includes a bi-directional geared motor with
a rubber drive roller, the rack insertion sensor ("rack input sensor") and the rack
removal sensor ("rack output sensor").
Rack insertion sensor

("rack input sensor")
Rack removal sensor Rack bi-directional

("rack output sensor") (not visible) geared motor
Figure 1-10: D-10, Rack Insertion and Ejection System
1.4.1.6.3 Operation of the Rack Handling System
The rack door is open only when the system is in Standby state. The door opens
as a result of the action of two return springs. The door closes when the post on
the sample arm subassembly contacts the plate on the door latch mechanism.
The springs of the mechanism are compressed by this contact. The door swings
closed by means of a connecting rod. The locking solenoid is energized in order
to enable the door to swing freely. At the end of the movement, the solenoid is
released, locking the door in the closed position. The door closed opto-sensor is
then uncovered, indicating that the door is in the closed position.
The control of the locking solenoid and the action of the return springs opens the
door. The post on the sample arm subassembly is in contact with the plate on the
door latch mechanism during this time, to ensure smooth movement of the door.
The solenoid is released at the end of the process. The door open opto-sensor is
then uncovered, indicating that the door is open. Once open, a rack can be
inserted into the system. The user starts to introduce the rack manually. When the
rack goes past the reflective sensor that detects rack insertion, the rack driving

motor is started up in the rack insertion direction. A small additional insertion

movement by the user makes the motor carry the rack forward. After a set time,
the motor stops and the rack is in its final position. During the insertion
movement, the rack goes past the second sensor (the rack removal sensor). This
reflective sensor is activated during the rack insertion phase. Once the motor
stops, the rack is past the rack removal sensor. This is used to ensure that the
rack is in the right position.
Rack removal is only done when requested by the user. The motor starts up in
the rack removal direction. The rack moves past the removal sensor. Once the
rack passes the sensor, the motor stops. The rack insertion sensor detects when
the user completely removes the rack from the system.
1.4.1.7 User Interface
The user interface is a monochrome ¼ VGA LCD graphic display of the

transflective type. The back lighting uses cold cathode fluorescent lamps.
The touch screen panel allows the user to make selections and enter information.
The results are printed using a thermal printer on 112mm wide paper. Printouts
include the chromatogram, the list of hemoglobin peaks, retention times, result
calculations and identification.
1.4.1.8 Device Control/Processor Architecture
Four processors manage the above components:

• PC type integrated processor
• 16-bit Master Controller (MC) Processor
• 16-bit High Pressure Pump Controller (HPPC) Processor
• 12-bit Thermal Controller (TC) Processor
The integrated PC consists of a PC motherboard, a hard drive, a floppy disk drive,

a ¼ VGA touch screen and a thermal printer. The installed operating system is
Windows NTe.
The motherboard is interfaced with the ¼ VGA touch screen through a piggyback
board on the PC board and a LCD and touch panel interface board located close to
the LCD display. The screen is connected to the LCD port of the board. An
RS232C serial port interfaces the touch panel. The motherboard is also interfaced
with the thermal printer through an RS232C serial port. All common terminals can
be connected to the PC board due to the presence of the following ports:
• Keyboard port
• Mouse port
• Ethernet port
• Serial RS232 port
• VGA port

Lastly, the PC board communicates with the MC processor via a serial RS422 link.
MC, HPPC and TC processors are installed on the interface board. The MC
processor is the master controller and is the processor responsible for automatic
device operations based on the commands from the PC board. These include:
• X, Z and TH axis motors and sensors
• motorized syringe
• high-pressure valve
• rack door
• rack introduction and ejection
• barcode reading
• detector reading and driving
• waste circuit (pinch valves, pump, vacuum sensor)
• degasser driving (vacuum pump, vacuum sensor, bubble detectors)
• front cover (solenoid and sensor)
• interface with HPPC and TC processors
The HPPC is the processor that controls the DC motor of the high-pressure pump
on the basis of the signals from the optical encoder, the cam signal and the signal
from the pressure sensor. It also drives the proportioning valve in synchronization
with the high-pressure pump. It works as a slave of the MC processor, which
communicates with it through a serial (SPI) link.
The TC is the processor that measures the temperature using the Pt100 ohm
sensor in the cartridge module. On the basis of the measured temperature and a
regulation algorithm, it controls heating to the programmed target temperature by
controlling the two Peltier elements connected in series in the PWM mode. A
thermal fuse in series with the Peltier modules prevents accidental overheating.
The processor works as a slave of the MC, which communicates with it through an
SPI link.
1.4.1.9 Power Supplies
Two standard power supplies furnish power to all of the electrical components.
Power supply 1 supplies the following voltages:

• +5.15VDC for all the logic circuits.
• +12VDC for the high-pressure pump motor, the proportioning valve and the
Peltier effect modules.
• +26VDC for the various actuators – liquid pump, vacuum pump, solenoid
valves – with the exception of the stepper motors. The voltage is also used
to produce the voltage that powers the analog circuits of the interface
board (+5VDC). In addition, it is used to produce a very short surge voltage
when the proportioning valve is powered.
• -12VDC: not used.

Power supply 2 delivers +24VDC for the stepper motors and the thermal printer.
The stepper motor supply is switched off when the front door is open. The device is
connected to the mains by means of an input module fitted with two protective
fuses and an anti-parasitic filter to ensure that it is EMC compatible. A 2-pole switch
is used to switch the device on and off.
Important: when the device is switched on, it is crucial to follow the

instructions supplied by the Operating System before turning the switch to
the ON or OFF position.
1.4.2 Physical Organization of the Device: Mechanical, Electrical and Flow

Architecture
1.4.2.1 Modular Architecture
These components are grouped in the following manner:

• The basic principle has been to create integrated modules designed for
easy assembly and integration in the device, and optimize the connections
between modules in terms of their electrical, mechanical and flow aspects.
• For flow connections, the aim has been to minimize the number of
connections outside each module (flow in/outlets) – and therefore the risk
of leaks – and to reduce the length of connections. That also greatly
facilitates servicing.
• For electrical connections, the aim has been identical, i.e., to reduce the
number of connections. To that end, each module has a connection board
on which all the electrical elements of the module are connected. The
module is then connected to the electronic module by means of ribbon
cables.
• The mechanical architecture is designed to take account of the fluid and
electrical aspects and also functionality, assembly, fitting and adjustments.
1.4.2.2 List of Modules
The result is an assembly comprising the 11 modules listed below:

• syringe module
• high pressure module
• sample arm module
• electronic module
• thermal printer module
• degasser module
• user interface module
• rack drive module
• rack door module
• frame
• external shell

Module details are provided in Section 2 Specifications.
1.4.2.3 Electrical Architecture
The electrical architecture is described in diagrams "D-10: Electrical Block Diagram,

Sheet 1" and "D-10: Electrical Block Diagram, Sheet 2". These diagrams can be
found in Appendix B. These documents include all the identified elements of the
device that are related to the electrical system.
The first document (Sheet 1) shows the electronic module, which includes the
following:
• power supplies 1 and 2
• PC motherboard
• all the peripheral connectors
• interface board
• connection cables internal to the module
It also shows the connection of standard peripherals and power supply.
The second document (Sheet 2) shows the interface board and all connections to
the connection boards present on the other modules. For each module, it details
the connection of all the electrical elements of the module.
1.5 Safety Symbols

The following alarm and information symbols can be found in several places on the
instrument.
These symbols are intended to draw your attention to particularly important information
and alert you to the presence of hazards as indicated.
Note: only a qualified person aware of the safety procedures is allowed to repair or
perform service procedures on this instrument.

Direct current (DC)
Alternating current (AC)
Direct and alternating current
Earth terminal
Protective earth terminal
Power On
Power Off
Caution : see accompanying documents
Caution : electrical shock hazard
Caution: biohazard risk


2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Physical specifications

2.1.1 Dimensions
Width: 402mm (15.83in.)

Depth: 534mm (21.0in.)
Height: 476mm (18.75in.)
2.1.2 Weight
Instrument alone: 35kg (77lbs.)
2.2 Technical specifications

2.2.1 General Specifications
Power Input Requirements: 100 - 240VAC; 50 - 60Hz

Power Consumption: 180VA maximum
Fuses: 2.5A/250V
Power Cord: CEI standard; US standard
Operating Environment
Temperature: 15 - 30°C
Humidity: 20 - 80%% non-condensing
Storage Conditions
Temperature: 0 - 50°C
Humidity: 10 - 95%
2.2.2 Throughput
Hb A1c test: 3min between injections

Hb A2/F/A1c test: 6.5min between injections
2.2.3 Buffer Bottle Volumes
Buffer 1: 2000mL
Buffer 2: 2000mL
Wash/Diluent: 2000mL
2.2.4 Waste Bottle Volume
Internal: 100mL, Polyethylene

External: 10L, Polyethylene

2.2.5 Sample Rack
Sample Rack: 10 positions

Number of Rack(s): 2
Rack Model: Sysmex #3
Rack Equipment: Anti-Rotation Rubbers on the bottom
Sample Tubes
Primary Tubes: 12mm x 75mm
13mm x 100mm
14mm x 100mm
16mm x 100mm
Maximum height: 106mm
Minimum height: 69mm
Micro Tubes: Conical 1.5mL sample vials
Sample Rack Adapters
Primary Tubes: 14mm inserts (Sysmex #56)
13mm inserts (Sysmex #58)
12mm inserts (Sysmex #59)
Micro Tubes: Specific adapters for sample vials
2.2.6 Sample Preparation
Syringe: Motorized syringe

Volume: 1mL
Home position: Opto-sensor, blocked in the empty syringe
position
Step number (nominal): 2400 half steps
Speed: 2.5 to 13mL/min
Accuracy Better than 1% at full stroke
Liquid selection: 3-way valve, normally open to the probe
side
Sample Volume
Primary tubes: 20µL typical
Sample vials: 250µL typical
Dilution Ratio for Primary Tubes
First Step: 20/500µL typical
Second Step: 20/700µL typical
Dilution/Wash Station
2 Wells: One for the dilution, one for the probe wash
Valves: 2 pinch valves, one for each well; normally
open
Diluent/Wash Solution Consumption
Dilution Well: 1mL
Probe Wash Well: 1mL

Probe: VII German 2

Dimensions: 122mm
Lifetime: >10,000 piercings
Material: Stainless steel 304L
Sampling Position: Lateral
2.2.7 Probe Movements
Horizontal Movement: Left to right

Motor: Stepper motor, 400steps/rotation
Drive: Gear and belt
Guide: Linear; plastic surface on aluminum
Resolution: 0.1mm/step
Rotation Control: Opto-sensor associated with a rotary flag (8-
slot disk)
Move between two slots
("strip" move): 5mm
Home Position Control: Initialization with a slotted optical sensor
Vertical Movement: Top to bottom
Guide: Lead screw and flange nut
slot disk)
("strip" move): 0.5mm
Home Position Control: Initialization with a slotted optical sensor
Tube holder movement: Top to bottom
Guide: Lead screw and flange nut
slot disk)
("strip" move): 0.5mm
Home Position Control: Initialization with an opto-sensor
Tube Height Sensor: Opto-sensor and a flag
2.2.8 High Pressure Pump/Proportioning Valve
Type: Duo-Flow HP Pump (dual piston)

Flow Rate Range
Minimum: 0.20mL/min
Maximum: 2.00mL/min
Steps: 0.1mL/min

Maximum pressure: 2000psi (138bar)

Flow Accuracy: ±5%
Flow Precision: ±5%
Test Conditions: 1.0 - 2.0mL/min; 0-1500psi
Pulsation: <10% for 1.5mL/min; 500psi
Piston Displacement: 38µL
Internal Dead Volume: 23µL
Reagent Mixing: The dead volume of the piston acts as a
mixing chamber
Seal Lifetime: 12 months for a 4 hours/day use
Gradient Accuracy: ±0.7% at 50% mixing
Gradient Precision: ±0.7% at 50% mixing
Piston Flush: Automatically done through the syringe and
the high-pressure pump
Proportioning Valve: 3-way valve; it apportions two reagents
before the liquid flows to the high-pressure
pump; the valve is synchronized with the
piston stroke
2.2.9 Pressure Sensor
Type: Strain gauge sensor

Maximum Measured Pressure: 2000psi minimum
Absolute Maximum Pressure: 4500psi
Accuracy: ±5% or 50psi, whichever is greater
Precision: ±5% or 50psi, whichever is greater
2.2.10 Injection Valve
Type: Rheodyne multiport valve, 7-port, 3-

positions
Actuator Type: Stepper motor monitored by 3 opto-sensors
Sample Loop Volume: 23µL
Method: Complete filling of the loop (injection volume
equal to the volume of the loop)
2.2.11 Degasser Module
Degasser Chamber: Vacuum chamber with 3 Teflon lines: buffer

1, buffer 2, and wash/diluent
Tubes
Material: Teflon
External Diameter: 2.1mm
Internal Diameter: 1.5mm
Length
Buffer 1 and 2: 15m
Wash/Diluent: 3m

Internal Volume
Buffer 1 and 2: 26.5mL
Wash/Diluent: 5.3mL
Typical Vacuum Level: 0.5bar ±0.05bar; can be modified
Maximum Vacuum Level: 0.7bar
Vacuum Sensor: Piezoelectric sensor
Accuracy: ±0.05bar @ 0.5bar
Full Scale: 1bar
Vacuum Control: An external connection is provided to allow
connection of another instrument
Vacuum regulation: 0.05bar hysteresis; vacuum controlled by
micro-controller
2.2.12 Cartridge Module
Cartridge installation/removal: Open door, cartridge holder with cartridge

inside
Cartridge dimensions: 40.7mm, OD: 6.35mm; without pre-filter
Cartridge calibration: 2 point
Heating module: Aluminum block
Heating device: 2 Peltier effect modules, in series
Temperature
Temperature sensor: Pt100 sensor
Test target temperature: 35°C
Temperature accuracy: ±0.5°C
Temperature stability: ±0.3°C
Overheating protection: Thermal fuse, 72°C
Fluid pre-heating: With stainless steel coil, before the cartridge
Tubing length: 650mm
2.2.13 Detector
Wavelength
Sample: 415nm
Zero Abs. Reference: 415nm, measured at the beginning of the
cycle
Filter: Interference filter, centered on 415nm,
bandwidth 10nm
Flow Cell: Hellma high-pressure cell; conical optical

shape; inlet and outlet tubings integrated
Flow Cell Maximum Pressure: 30bar
Flow Cell Chamber Volume: 20µL
Optical Path: 10mm
Input Optical Diameter: 1mm
Output Optical Diameter: 2mm

Optical System: Plano-Convex Lens; 4mm diameter; 8mm

focal length
Light Source
Type: LED, 430nm peak wavelength
Direct Current: 15mA typical
Current Control: Numeric potentiometer, 255 points,
0.1mA/point
Lifetime: 50,000h
Sensors: Silicon Photodiodes

Reference Signal: Made before the optical path, near the
optical axis
Analog to Digital Conversion: Delta Sigma, 24 bit
Baseline adjustment: By software, at 20mAU typically, before the
beginning of the analysis
Linearity: ±1% of the theoretical absorbance @ 1.0AU
Baseline Noise: <200µAU peak to peak
Baseline Drift: <1mAU during the analysis
2.2.14 Tubing and Material in Contact with Liquid
Sample preparation: PEEK, SS316, PTFE, BOM, silicon

Waste circuit PTFE, silicon, BOM
High pressure: PEEK, SS316
High pressure piston flush: PTFE, silicon
2.2.15 Rack Door
Door Movement: Made by the sampling arm (X movement)

Door Locking: In the closed position, by solenoid (normally
off)
Control: Opto-sensor to detect the closed door
position
Opto-sensor to detect the open door
position
2.2.16 Front Cover
Front Door Movement: Manually, with help of a gas spring

Front Door Locking: In the closed position, by solenoid (normally
off)
Control: Optical sensor to detect the closed door
position
Power control: An electrical switch is open when the front
door is open and the power to the stepper
motors is switched off

2.2.17 Onboard PC
Motherboard: EBX form factor

Microprocessor: AMD K6-2E, 350Mhz
Memory: 64MB of PC100 SDRAM
Hard Disk: 40GB; 1 partition of 4GB with the system
and applications
Operating System: Windows NT4.0 Embedded (NTe)
Floppy Disk: 3.5 inches, 1.44MB
Adapter/Ports: Ethernet on RJ45 port
RS232 on DB9 port
Keyboard connection
Mouse Connection
External VGA screen connection
Rack feeder connection (for future use)
2.2.18 User Interface
Display: Graphic LCD, ¼ VGA, monochrome, CCFL

backlight
CCFL Backlight Lifetime: 50% contrast after 15,000h typically
Data entry: Resistive Touch Screen, 4 wires
2.2.19 Printer
Type: Thermal
Paper: 112mm-width roll
2.2.20 Barcode Reader
Type: CCD sensor, LED source, vertical reading

Barcodes: UPC, EAN8, EAN13, Code39, Codabar,
Industrial 2 of 5, Interleaved 2 of 5, S Code,
IATA, Code 93, Code 128, MSI/Plessey,
Telepen, UK/Plessey, Laetus
Barcode label height: 60mm maximum
Number of digits: 20 digits maximum
Barcode label position: higher than 18mm from the bottom of the
rack and lower than 80mm from the bottom
of the rack
Resolution: 0.2mm/min for a bar width
2.2.21 Micro-controller Automation
MC and HPPC: 16 bit MC68HC812 Motorola

Program memory: 4MB 8 bit, flash EPROM
Data memory: 32KB 8 bit, SRAM

Programmable logic: Altera 7128S or equivalent; 1 chip for MC

and 1 chip for HPPC
TC: PIC 16F876 Microchip

3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Only a qualified person aware of the safety procedures is allowed to repair or perform
Service procedures on this instrument.
3.1 System Overview
Figure 3-1: Exploded View of the Frame and All Modules

3.2 Frame
Figure 3-2: Frame, Drawing 1 Figure 3-3: Frame, Drawing 2
3.3 Modules
3.3.1 Syringe Module
Figure 3-4: Syringe Module, Front Figure 3-5: Syringe Module, Rear

The module includes:
1 Waste Manifold 2 6 1mL Motorized Syringe

2 Probe Wash Valve 7 3-Way Valve
3 Dilution Valve 8 Syringe Module Board
4 Internal Waste Bottle 9 Vacuum Sensor
5 Waste Manifold 1 10 Liquid Pump
Figure 3-6: Syringe Module, Location and Fastening

Figure 3-7: Syringe Module, Fluidic Connections
Figure 3-8: Syringe Module Board, Electrical Connections

3.3.2 High Pressure Module
Figure 3-9: High Pressure Module
1 HP Pump
2 7-port, 3-position HP valve
3 Proportioning Valve
4 Pressure Sensor
5 HPLC Module Board
6 Cartridge Module
7 Detector Module

Figure 3-10: High Pressure Module, Location and Fastening
Figure 3-11: High Pressure Module, Fluidic Connections

Figure 3-12: High Pressure Module Board, Electrical Connections
* these devices are not identified by a wire number and are interchangeable
** these front cover devices are connected to the HPLC Module Board via an
interlock switch (see 3.3.13)

3.3.3 High Pressure Pump
Figure 3-13: High Pressure Pump, Fluidic Connections
Figure 3-14: High Pressure Pump, Electrical Parts
The HP Pump includes:
1 Incremental Encoder 3 Cam Flag Sensor

2 DC Motor 4 HP Pump Head

3.3.4 Cartridge Module
Figure 3-15: Cartridge Module, Internal View
1 Column Heater Coil

2 Cartridge Holder (see Figure 3-16)
3 Analytical Cartridge
Figure 3-16: Cartridge Holder

Figure 3-17: Cartridge Module, Fluidic Connections
Figure 3-18: Cartridge Module, Electrical Parts
1 Thermal Fuse
2 Pt100 Thermal Sensor
3 Peltier Modules

3.3.5 Detector Module
3.3.5.1 Description
Figure 3-19: Detector Module, Figure 3-20: Detector Module,

Internal View 1 Internal View 2
1 Detector Module Board

2 Reference Photodiode
3 Sample Photodiode (with 415nm Filter)
4 LED Source
5 Flow Cell

Figure 3-21: Detector Module, Fluidic Connections
Figure 3-22: Detector Board Connections, Adjustments and Test Points

3.3.5.2 Detector Module Evolution
3.3.5.2.1 Identification
Two versions of the detector module exist. The identification is done by the
revision number on the detector module label:
Figure 3-23: Detector Module

Label
Version 1, also called 'old' version, is identified by the indication DAB07/3 or

DAB07/2.
Version 2, also called 'new' version, is identified by the indication DAB07/4 or
DAB07/5 or any higher revision number.
The two types of detector modules are fully compatible.
3.3.5.2.2 Reference Photodiode
The basic difference between the two versions is the size of the reference
photodiode.
Version 1 photodiode has a

'small' sensor:
• 7.6 x 6.0mm² external
surface
• 2.4 x 2.4mm² active area
Figure 3-24: Small Reference

Photodiode

Version 2 photodiode has a

'large' sensor:
• 10.1 x 8.9mm² external
surface
• 5.8 x 5.8mm² active area
Figure 3-25: Large Reference

Photodiode
Increasing the active area induces a higher signal to noise (S/N) ratio.
3.3.5.2.3 Detector Board Evolution
The consequence of the reference photodiode evolution is a detector board

evolution, because the gain of the reference channel has to be adapted to the
new sensor.
On version 1, the detector board is as indicated on the picture below

(identification by the label DAE011+4 or lower version DAE011+2):
Detector Board DAE011+4:

nothing in this area
Figure 3-26: Detector Board,

version 1
For version 2, two kinds of detector board exist:

• DAE011+5: it corresponds to the previous version (DAE011+4) with
modifications done manually
• DAE011+6: with modifications on the printed circuit board.
The new versions are equipped with a 3-pin connector associated with a resistor
and a jumper.


3 pins + jumper

manually installed Pins,
Resistor and Jumper

3 pins + jumper

Modified Printed Circuit Board
3.3.5.2.4 Jumper Configuration
The jumper is used to configure the detector board for each version of the
reference photodiode.
DAB07/3 (or lower) detector version: jumper in the upper position.
The two top pins are shorted,

the bottom pin is left open.

Jumper setting 1

DAB07/4 (or higher) detector version: jumper in the lower position.
The two bottom pins are

shorted, the top pin is left open.

Jumper setting 2
3.3.5.2.5 Part Replacement
Only the new version of detector boards DAE011+6 is delivered as spare part
(P/N: 2200265).
3.3.6 Sample Arm Module
Figure 3-31: Sample Arm Module, Front Figure 3-32: Sample Arm Module, Rear

1 TH Home Sensor 10 X Home Sensor

2 Tube Height Sensor 11 X Position Sensor
3 Tube Holder 12 TH Motor
4 Hall Effect Adapter Sensor 13 TH Movement Pulley And Belt
5 Barcode Reader 14 Z Movement Pulley And Belt
6 Z Position Sensor 15 Z Motor
7 TH Position Sensor 16 X Movement Pulley And Belt
8 X Board 17 Z Home Sensor
9 X Motor 18 Z Board
Figure 3-33: Sample Arm Module, Location and Fastening

Figure 3-34: Sample Arm Module, Fluidic Connections
Figure 3-35: Sample Arm Module, X Board

Figure 3-36: Sample Arm Module, Z Board
3.3.7 Electronic Module
Figure 3-37: Electronic Module, Front with and without Grid

Figure 3-38: Electronic Module, Rear and Inside
1 Protective Grid
2 Power Supply 2 (+24VDC)
3 Power Supply 1 (+5VDC, +12VDC, +26VDC, -12VDC)
4 Interface Board
5 PC Motherboard
Figure 3-39: Electronic Module, Rear Panel

The rear connections include:
1 Keyboard Port
2 RS232 Port*
3 Rack Feeder Port
4 LAN Port*
5 VGA Port
6 Mouse Port
* these two ports are inverted on the oldest modules
Figure 3-40: Electronic Module, Location and Fastening

Figure 3-41: Power Boards, Electrical Connections
Power Supplies Fuses
Power Supply 1:
• Location: FS1
• Type: F5A/250V
• Dimensions: 5mm x 20mm
Power Supply 2:
• Location: F1
• Type: F4A/250V
• Dimensions: 5mm x 20mm

Figure 3-42: Interface Board, Electrical Connections
Figure 3-43: PC Motherboard, Electrical Connections
Figure 3-44: PC Mezzanine Board, Electrical Connections
Figure 3-45: Interface Board, Electrical Test Points

3.3.8 Thermal Printer Module
Figure 3-46: Thermal Printer Module
1 Molded Plastic Case 3 Floppy Drive

2 Hard Disk 4 Thermal Printer
Figure 3-47: Thermal Printer Module, Location and Fastening

Figure 3-48: Thermal Printer Module, Electrical Connections

3.3.9 Degasser Module
Figure 3-49: Degasser Module, Front Figure 3-50: Degasser Module, Rear
1 Degasser Module Board

2 Vacuum Sensor
3 Bubble Detectors (Slotted Optical Sensors)
4 Degasser Lid
5 Check Valve (on the Vacuum Pump Inlet)*
6 Vacuum Pump
7 Degasser Body
* only on the latest degasser module version

Figure 3-51: Degasser Module, Location and Fastening
Figure 3-52: Degasser Module, Fluidic Connections

Figure 3-53: Degasser Module Board, Electrical Connections
3.3.10 User Interface Module
Figure 3-54: User Interface Module

1 LCD Interface Board

2 LCD with Touch Screen
3 CCFL Backlight
4 Contrast Adjustment Knob
Figure 3-55: User Interface Module, Location and Fastening

Figure 3-56: User Interface Module Board, Electrical Connections
3.3.11 Rack Drive Module
Figure 3-57: Rack Drive Module, Front Figure 3-58: Rack Drive Module, Rear

1 Dilution/Wash Station
2 +24VDC Security Connector
3 Sample Rack (with Tubes)
4 Guide Rail
5 Rack Input Sensor
6 Rack Output Sensor
7 Rack Positioning Motor Assembly
Figure 3-59: Rack Drive Module, Location and Fastening

Figure 3-60: Rack Drive Module, Fluidic Connections
Figure 3-61: X Board, Rack Drive Module Electrical Connections

3.3.12 Rack Door Module
Figure 3-62: Rack Door Module, Inside Figure 3-63: Rack Door Module, Outside
1 Closed Door Sensor

2 Open Door Sensor
3 Door Locking Solenoid
4 Rack Door

Figure 3-64: Rack Door Module, Location and Fastening
Figure 3-65: X Board, Rack Door Module Electrical Connections

3.3.13 External Shell
Figure 3-66: External Shell, Exploded View Figure 3-67: Front Cover Assembly
Figure 3-68: External Shell with Frame

Figure 3-69: External Shell with Frame, Front Doors Open
Figure 3-70: Front Cover Assembly, Electrical Connections

The electrical parts of the front cover assembly are connected to 2 interlock switches:
• one for the ON/OFF switch (+24VDC power supply of the stepper motors)
• one for the solenoid and the sensor
Depending on the chassis version, these interlock connectors can be located on two
places:
1. for the first chassis version: on the HLPC module (solenoid and sensor) and
under the rack drive module (ON/OFF switch) (see Figure 3-72)
2. for the last chassis version: on the chassis itself, near the main ON/OFF switch
(see Figure 3-71)
Figure 3-71: Interlock Connector Locations, Figure 3-72: Interlock Connector Locations,
Last Chassis Version First Chassis Version
The ON/OFF interlock switch is connected to the power cable coming from Power
Supply 1 (see 3.3.7).
The solenoid and sensor interlock switch is connected to the High Pressure Module
Board (see 3.3.2).

'instrument.ini' File Backup
On the latest D-10 version, two backups of the 'instrument.ini' file are
available:
• a paper copy
• an electronic copy stored on a floppy disk
These are located inside the left door:
Figure 3-73: 'instrument.ini' File Backup
3.4 Tubing List

The tube identification refers to the "D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in
inject position)" diagram and the "D-10: High-Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load
position)" diagram. Refer to Appendix B for the diagrams.

No. Type Dimensions P/N

DT1 Teflon 2.1mm x 1.5mm x 3000mm 2200296
DT2
Teflon 2.1mm x 1.5mm x 15000mm 2200295
DT3
T1 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 700mm (green) 2200314 *
T2 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 700mm (white) 2200314 *
T3 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 570mm (green) 2200315 *
T4 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 650mm (white) 2200315 *
T5 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 700mm (blue) 2200314 *
T6 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 530mm 2200315 *
T7 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 115mm 2200315 *
T9 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 1250mm 2200315 *
T10 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 210mm 2200315 *
T11 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 530mm 2200315 *
T12 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 150mm 2200315 *
T13 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 110mm 2200315 *
2200315 *
T14 Teflon 1/16" x 0.25mm x 1200mm (blue)
2200330
T15 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 205mm 2200314 *
P1 PEEK 1/16" x 0.5mm x 170mm 2200316 *
P2 PEEK 1/16" x 0.5mm x 120mm 2200316 *
P3 PEEK 1/16" x 0.25mm x 190mm (blue) 2200266 **
P4 PEEK 1/16" x 0.5mm x 190mm (orange) 2200266 **
S1 mixed polyamide 4mm x 2mm x 250mm, silicon 6mm x 3mm x 20mm 2200329 *
S2 mixed polyamide 4mm x 2mm x 250mm, silicon 6mm x 3mm x 20mm 2200329 *
S3 silicon 6mm x 3mm x 220mm 2200329 *
S4 silicon 6mm x 3mm x 550mm (green) 2200317 *
S5 silicon 6mm x 3mm x 550mm (yellow) 2200317 *
S6 silicon 3.2mm x 2mm x 27mm, 6mm x 3mm x 23mm (on each side) 2200317 *
S7 silicon 3.2mm x 2mm x 27mm, 6mm x 3mm x 23mm (on each side) 2200317 *
2200314 *
S13 silicon 6mm x 3mm x 2500mm (red)
2200321
stainless
SS1 23µL calibrated loop 2200273
steel
stainless
SS2 1/16" x 0.5mm x 650mm 2200332
steel
* all tubing with this part number included in package (with fittings)
** tubing included and attached to flow cell

3.5 Accessories
Sample Rack
Type: Sysmex #3
Equipment: Anti-Rotation Rubbers on the bottom
Number: 2
Sample Tubes Adapters

Type: 13mm inserts (Sysmex #58) mounted on the Sample Rack
Number: 10
Sample Vials Adapters

Type: Specific Adapter equipped with a Magnet
Number: 15
Power Cords (2)

Fuses (2)
Bottles Closures with Tubes (3)
Buffer 1 line Tubing (1)
Buffer 2 line Tubing (1)
Wash Tubing (1)
Waste Tank Tubing (1)
50mL Syringe (1)
Barcode Labels Sheets (CAL1, CAL2, CTRH, CTRL, PRIM) (2)
PEEK Dummy Cartridge (1)
10L Waste Tank (1)

4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Only an authorized Bio-Rad representative can perform installation of the D-10.

Installation by any other person will invalidate the system warranty.
4.1 Installation Requirements
• Choose a location for the system that is away from direct sunlight and relatively
dust-free.
• Room temperature should be between 15 and 30°C.
• The bench or table should have a flat, level surface that is free from vibrations and
is capable of supporting a weight of more than 35kg (77lbs.).
• The system requires the minimum benchtop space of 100cm (W) x 48cm (H) x
65cm (D) [ 39in. (W) x 19in. (H) x 26in. (D) ] to allow for the system plus proper
clearances.
• Maintain a minimum clearance of 20cm (8in.) on the left side and 40cm (16in.) on
the right side. Maintain clearance of 10cm (4in.) from the back side to ensure that
the power cord input is readily available to the operator.
• A grounded electrical receptacle should be within 1.8 meters (6 feet) of the system.
Input power requirements for the system are between 100VAC and 240VAC. The
maximum power consumption is 250W.
• The use of a circuit breaker before the main electrical receptacle is required. The
electrical installation must comply with locally applicable standards and
requirements.
4.2 Installation
4.2.1 Unpacking and Inspection
See D-10 Operation Manual, Section 3.
4.2.2 Set Up
4.2.3 Barcode Labels
4.2.4 Performing Test Runs

4.3 De-installation
To de-install a D-10, the following steps must be performed in the order listed below
before shipment.
Warning: use caution when de-installing the unit and follow local regulations
regarding the treatment of spills and the disposal of biohazardous materials.
4.3.1 Decontamination
4.3.1.1 Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path
4.3.1.2 Clean the Dilution Well
4.3.1.3 Clean the Sample Probe
Wipe the outside of the sample probe with a cloth dampened with 5% hypochlorite.
4.3.1.4 Clean the Internal Waste Bottle
4.3.1.5 Repeat Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path
4.3.2 Storage Fluid in the Instrument
1. Remove the analytical cartridge and replace it with the PEEK dummy cartridge.
Place the green end caps onto the cartridge and store it for re-use.
2. Allow the HP Pump to run for 5 minutes setting the flow rate at 2mL/min and the
percentage of buffer 2 to 0% (use the MAINTAIN screen).
3. Stop the HP Pump.
4. Remove the Buffer 1, Buffer 2 and Wash fluidic connections on the rear panel of
the D-10 and replace the 3 port plugs.
5. Empty and dry the external tubing from buffers and wash solution before placing
them in the accessories bag.
6. Remove the external Waste tube. Empty and wipe dry. Store it in a separate
plastic bag.

4.3.3 Sample Arm Locking and System Shutdown
1. Move the sample arm to the right side of the instrument. Two solutions exist,
depending on the system status:
if the 'Dia.exe' application is running, go to the MAINTAIN screen, select
Service, then Access Wash st.
if the D-10 Service software is running, go to the D-10 Service Software
(2/2) screen, select SAMPLE ARM, then DILUT. /WASH STAT. REPLA.
The sample arm moves to the right side and the tube holder hides the probe tip.
As soon as the front cover solenoid is activated, open the front door.
2. Shutdown the instrument by using the standard procedure:

if the 'Dia.exe' application is running, go to the RUN screen and select
Shut Down
if the D-10 Service software is running, go to the D-10 Service Software
(1/2) screen and select SHUT DOWN
3. Open the right door and push up the locking thumbscrew.
4. Manually push the sample arm to the right side until the arm standoff comes in
contact with the thumbscrew. Moderately tighten the screw.
5. Close the right door and the front door.
The instrument is ready for packing.
4.3.4 Packing
Caution: before packing, make sure that the system is well cleaned,
decontaminated and has storage fluid in the fluid pathway.
4.3.4.1 Removal of the External Components
1. Remove the paper roll from the thermal printer unit and place it in the
accessories box.
2. Remove all the electrical connections on the rear panel.
3. Remove all the bottles from the reagent tray and remove the reagent tray itself.
4.3.4.2 Packing Accessories
1. Collect all the accessories listed below and pack in the accessories box:
sample racks
sample vial adapters
power cord(s)
spares fuses
bottle closures with tubes
buffer 1 tubing

buffer 2 tubing
wash tubing
waste tank tubing
50mL syringe
barcode labels (CAL1, CAL2, CTRH, CTRL, PRIM)
2. Close the accessories box.
4.3.4.3 Packing the Waste Tank
1. Empty the waste bottle according to local regulations for the disposal of
biohazardous waste.
2. Rinse the bottle with bleach solution.
3. Rinse the bottle with water.
4. Use the small box to pack the 10L waste tank.
5. Close the box.
4.3.4.4 Packing the D-10
1. Place the bottom section of the box, with packing foam, on the floor. Determine
the position of the instrument in the foam.
2. Two people should lift the D-10. Grasp the unit from the benchtop and place it
carefully in the bottom box, in the appropriate position.
3. Turn the reagent tray upside down and replace it in its original position.
4. Place the accessories box over the reagent tray.
5. Enclose the D-10 with the plastic bag.
6. Place the top packing foam on the top of the instrument.
7. Place the top section of the box.
8. Use the 4 plastic latches to secure the upper and lower parts of the box.
9. Place the waste tank box on top of the main box.
10. Secure the two boxes together with bands.

5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW
5.1 D-10 Application

The D-10 Hemoglobin Testing System uses Windows NTe as the operating system. A
folder named \Dia, found on the hard drive, contains all the files used and linked to the
D-10. Primary files in this folder are:
• Dia.exe, the User software
• Dia_nsr.exe, used to run the same samples in a rack continuously
• DiaSer.exe, used by service personnel
• *.dll files, used by the executable files
• *.ini files, used by the executable files
• *.hpl files, used for gradient production
The primary subfolders in the \Dia folder are:

• \HbA1c: contains the parameters for the HbA1c assay
• \BThal: contains the parameters for the HbA2/F/A1c assay
• \Decont: contains the parameters for the Decontamination procedure
• \Log: contains error messages generated during a run
• \Service: contains files used by the Service software application 'DiaSer.exe',
and a subfolder \Log contains the files generated by the Service software
The \HbA1c, \BThal and \Decont folders have the same structure and contain
subfolders, that include:
• \Calib, containing the calibration files
• \Param, containing the parameter files
• \Results, containing the results files
• \Extra, currently not used
5.2 User Software

The 'Dia.exe' application corresponds to the User software. This executable file is
launched when the instrument is switched on. Refer to the Operation Manual for
information on using this application.
5.3 *.ini Files

Warning: all the *.ini files are text files. They should not be modified unless
directed to by written procedures.
Note: some *.ini files may be updated during the lifetime of the instrument.

Some *.ini files are used to initialize functional parameters of the instrument.
Information about some files is given below. All the parameters are not described, but
the main or the most important parameters are given below.
5.3.1 'Dia.ini' File
An example of a 'Dia.ini' file is given in Appendix A.
This file contains the following information and parameters:

• The current state of the instrument: injection number, current day, piston flush
day, waste volume count
• Languages parameters
• Miscellaneous settings
• LIS parameters
• Print, Data, Assay, Maintenance parameters
• High-Pressure Pump parameters
• Barcode label parameters
5.3.2 'instrument.ini' File
An example of an 'instrument.ini' file is given in Appendix A.
This file contains the following information and parameters:

• The serial number of the instrument
• High-Pressure Pump parameters
• Sample Arm parameters
• Bubble detector parameters (not used)
• Temperature Control parameters
On the latest D-10 version, two backups of the 'instrument.ini' file are available:
• a paper copy
These backups are located inside the left door (see 3.3.13).
5.3.2.1 High-Pressure Pump Parameters
5.3.2.1.1 Flow Rate Calibration Parameters
The "Rule1","Rule2" and "Rule3" parameters are used for the calculation of the
pump speed in order to have a target flow rate. The values are obtained by a flow
rate calibration of the pump.
Examples:
• "Rule1=0,1,2400,0": for a flow rate between 0 and 1mL/min, the slope and the
intercept for the calculation of the motor speed are 2400 and 0.

• "Rule2=1,1.5,2401,-12": for a flow rate between 1 and 1.5mL/min, the slope

and the intercept for the calculation of the motor speed are 2401 and -12.
5.3.2.1.2 High-Pressure Sensor Calibration Parameters
The "HPSensor_Offset" and the "HPSensor_Gain" parameters are the intercept

and the slope of the High-Pressure Sensor. The values are obtained by the
sensor calibration and are associated with the sensor.
5.3.2.1.3 High-Pressure Pump Parameters
The "ECAMFILLSHIFT1" and the "EFILLDURATION" parameters are associated

with the High-Pressure Pump. They correspond, respectively, to the phase shift
between the Cam Flag signal and the beginning of the aspiration phase (called
"waiting count" or "WC"), and to the duration of the filling phase of the pump
(called "filling count" or "FC").
5.3.2.2 Sample Arm Parameters
The "THOffset" and the "ZOffset" parameters are parameters associated

respectively with the TH and the Z movements. The "THOffset" is used to
compensate for the difference between the theoretical and the practical position of
the tube holder in order to precisely measure the height of the tube during the run.
The "ZOffset" corresponds to a Z position compensation, but is not used.
5.3.2.3 Temperature Control Parameters
The "TCCal_Gain" and the "TCCal_Offset" parameters correspond to the slope and
the intercept of the temperature measurement circuit on the Interface Board. They
are associated with the Interface Board.
The "TCCal_SensorOffset" is associated with the sensor and corresponds to the
sensor offset correction.
The "TCCal_GradientOffset" is associated with the cartridge module and
corresponds to the gradient correction between the position of the sensor (at the
back of the module) and the position of the cartridge (at the front of the module).
5.3.3 'Profile.ini' File
An example of a 'Profile.ini' file is given in Appendix A.
This file contains the majority of the information and parameters for running the D-10.
These parameters are assay-dependent (A1c, A2/F/A1c, Decont). The following
parameters are grouped according to their use:
• status and general information
• initialization movements
• syringe circuit priming

• high-pressure circuit priming

• piston flush priming
• system information
• pump parameters
5.3.4 'Profile2.ini' File
An example of a 'Profile2.ini' file is given in Appendix A.
This file contains information and parameters that are assay-dependent. For A1c, a
'Profile2.ini' file is found in the \Param folder of the \HbA1c folder. For A2/F/A1c, a
'Profile2.ini' file is found in the \Param folder of the \BThal folder. The following
parameters are grouped according to their use:
• status section
• kit section, containing information associated with the kit
• inject section, containing information associated with sample preparation
• chroma section, containing information associated with the chromatogram
• priming and pump parameters sections
5.3.5 'DiaLIS.ini' File
An example of a 'DiaLIS.ini' file is given in Appendix A.
This file contains information (mapping) and parameters (communication port

configuration) for the LIS connection.
Information or errors about the LIS connection are logged into the 'Logevent.txt' file
located in the \Dia folder.
5.4 \Log Folder

The \Log folder contains several text files:
• dialog.txt: contains the list of errors, warnings or information during the run
• chromalog.txt: contains information about the detector, the pressure and the
temperature for each test
• *.log files: one file for each test. Each file contains all the information linked to
the analysis of the results for a sample.
5.5 \Result Folder

For each assay (A1c, A2/F/A1c, Decont), there is a \Result folder. This folder contains:
• results files: *.csv, *.raw and *.dam

• *.csv files contain the sample and the LED reference measurements for the
test
• *.raw files contain the absorbance measurement of the test. The data analysis
module (DAM) processes this file.
• *.dam files contain the results of the data processing. This file is used to
generate result printouts. These files are listed in a 'datalist.txt' file.
• datalist.txt file
5.6 \Param Folder

For each assay (A1c, A2/F/A1c, Decont), there is a \Param folder. This folder contains:
• *.hpl files: each file corresponds to a gradient used during the test process
• *.ini files: these files contain the parameters of the test for the instrument
• *.mdb file: this file contains the information for the data processing
• *.tsv files: these files contain data from and for the data analysis module
• *.dam files: listed in a 'datalist.txt' file.
The update kit disk, contained in the reorder pack, will update the information in the
corresponding \Param folder.
5.7 Other Folders
• \bin: contains Data Analysis Module files and MATLAB files

• \Common: contains Data Analysis Module data
• \English: contains reports in English language
• \French: contains reports in French language and language files
• \Japanese: contains report in Japanese language and language files
• \tmpExport: contains temporary files for *.pdf files export
5.8 Initialization Sequence
All motors, valves and pumps are in standby at power up and only receive power at a
specified time in the initialization sequence. If power is supplied to these components
before the initialization sequence starts, it indicates a problem with the component or
any component associated with it. The power up sequence is as follows:
• The PC boots:
A short beep indicates the PC has booted after the internal self test
CPU identification
Memory test
IDE detection
Hardware check

• At the same time, the low-level processors MC, HPPC and TC boot. The
associated red LEDs are blinking, indicating that the boot is OK (frequency
between 1 and 2 Hz) (for the location of these LEDs, see Figure 3-42). The
degasser pump is switched on until the default degasser vacuum level is
reached. If the level is not reached after a time out, the pump is stopped.
• Windows NTe operating system is launched.
• The BIO-RAD logo and the D-10 icon are displayed.
Warning: do not click on the D-10 icon!!!
• The 'Dia.exe' application is launched and the *.ini files are loaded:
Dia.ini for the preparation of the user interface
Profile2.ini for loading test names and kit parameters
instrument.ini for loading instrument parameters
DiaDAM.ini for loading data analysis parameters
• Data files are loaded (500 last samples of the selected test).
• The instrument parameters are transmitted to the low level processors (on the
Interface Board).
• The internal devices under control of the low level processors are initialized
(see hardware initialization below).
The RUN screen is displayed when the power up sequence is complete. If any
hardware component does not initialize, an error message is displayed.
Hardware Initialization
The sequence is as follows:

• Z motor to home position (upper position of the probe).
• Tube Holder motor to home position (upper position of the tube holder).
• X motor to home position (sample arm on the left position, corresponding to
the dilution well position for the probe).
• Z motor moves to a lower position: the probe goes into the dilution well.
• The High-Pressure Valve is moved to Load position.
• The Syringe motor is moved to its home position.
• At the same time, the liquid pump and the pinch valves are started to remove
any liquid (delivered by the syringe) from the dilution well.
• After a delay, the Z motor returns to the home position and the liquid pump
and pinch valves are switched off.
• If an error appears during the sequence, an error message is displayed. In
this case, the error must be resolved in order to continue.
5.9 Shutdown Sequence

• If a test is running, wait until the complete rack is processed or select the
Stop button to discontinue processing after the current sample is finished.
• Eject the rack from the system after the sample is complete.
• Select Sleep in order to return to the Sleep state. Wait until the end gradient
is finished.
• Once the system is in Sleep state, select the Shut Down button.
• A message appears "Please wait while the system writes unsaved data to the
disk". If there is no external monitor, this message is not seen in its entirety.
• After several seconds a new message is displayed: "It is now safe to turn off
your computer". The main ON/OFF switch can now be switched to OFF.
5.10 Service Software
This description refers to the DiaSer Service software version 2.00, which is installed
with Dia software version 3.0B. This description remains valid for future versions if no
additional documentation is provided.
5.10.1 Objective
The objective of the Service software:

• To give service personnel a tool to test each device on the instrument:
sensors, motors, valves, pumps, etc. This is useful to troubleshoot hardware
components that may have failed, or to perform maintenance procedures.
• To supply the Manufacturing, Quality Control and Service departments with
some tools to check global functionalities.
• To supply all departments (Manufacturing, QC, Service) the tools to replace a
part and update some information linked to the replaced part.
5.10.2 Access
The Service software is an executable program 'DiaSer.exe'. It can be launched from

the D-10 touchscreen by selecting the MAINTAIN screen, then the Service screen.
Select the Exit to Service software button. It can also be launched from the
desktop, when a VGA screen and a keyboard and/or a mouse are available, by a
double click on the DiaSer icon. Access to the Service software is password
protected. Two levels of password exist:
• The low level password (level 1) allows the user to access all the functions
with the exception of the modification of instrument parameters.
• The high level password (level 2) accesses all functions of level 1 and also
allows the service engineer to change some parameters of the instrument, for
test issues only or for spare parts replacement issues.
Warning: except for parameter modifications for spare part replacement or

specific request, the parameters do not have to be modified. If a

modification is done for test issues, the initial value of the parameter must
be restored.
• A third password (level 3) is defined for installation process (SETUP) from the
floppy. If this password is entered, the system goes directly to the SETUP
process defined on the floppy disk.
Passwords:
Level 1: D-10QC
Level 2: DIA904
Level 3: D-10SETUP
5.10.3 Exit
By selecting the EXIT button in one of the DiaSer main screens, you can quit the
Service software and return to the 'Dia.exe' program.
Warning: when the EXIT button is pushed, 'DiaSer.exe' is closed and 'Dia.exe'
is started automatically. During the boot sequence, the Dia icon is displayed on
the screen. DO NOT select this icon!!! If selected, 'Dia.exe' is started again, and
an error message is displayed.
Note: the executable software program started by selecting the EXIT button is given
in the 'DiaSer.ini' file: it is the name associated with the "User Software" parameter,
in the "Maintain" section. The default value is "Dia.exe".
5.10.4 Parameters of the 'DiaSer.exe' Tool
The 'DiaSer.exe' software uses the 'DiaSer.ini' file containing some initialization
values. A view of the file is given in the Appendix A.
5.10.5 General Features in the Use of the Screens
Note: depending on the software version and level selected, some options indicated
on the screens cannot be accessed. These options will be grayed out.
On the screens, the user can find the following:

• Option buttons. Selecting a button will start the function indicated.
• A field with a white background displays data that can be modified. When
selecting any of these fields, the user has access to a numeric keyboard, an
alphanumeric keyboard, or other window for making a selection. Some fields

allow the user to modify the data directly. When a new value is edited, it can
be marked by an "N" (for "New") indication, which is removed when this new
value is saved.
• A field with a grey background displays data that can not be modified. Areas
with low contrast correspond to options that are not accessible in the context
or that are not implemented.
• When an action is ongoing, the user should wait until it is finished before
starting the next action. If an action is started before the end of the current
action, a message is displayed with the option of waiting for the current action
to finish or to stop the current action.
On the top of each screen, the following buttons are available:

• NEXT: go to the next screen of the current level
• PREVIOUS: go to the previous screen of the current level
• CLOSE: go to the higher maintenance level
• EXIT: leave the Service software
On the bottom of each screen, the current level in the Service software is given
(module identification), with the current screen number and the total number of
screens for the same level. Date and time are also displayed. The question mark can
be used to obtain additional help regarding use of the Service software. Information
on all screens may not always be available. A GRAPHIC button may be available. If
the corresponding option is implemented, it can be used to display the variation of
the selected electrical signal with time.
Numeric and Alphanumeric Keyboards
One of the two following screens opens when the user has to enter new data. If the
data is a numerical value, the numeric keyboard opens. When the data is a password
or a file name, the alphanumeric keyboard opens.
Figure 5-1A: Numeric Keyboard Figure 5-1B: Alphanumeric Keyboard

EXPORT and IMPORT Screens
One of the two following screens opens during a file export to a floppy, or during a file
import from a floppy.
Figure 5-2A: File Export Figure 5-2B: File Import
File Selection Screen
One of the following screens is displayed when selecting a file.
Figure 5-3A: File Selection, Save Figure 5-3B: File Selection, Open
On those screens, the directory, the files, and the file type can be selected.
• DONE: perform the desired action on the selected file.
• CANCEL: cancel the operation.
• DELETE: delete the selected *.csv file. Only a *.csv file can be deleted. A
confirmation screen is open to confirm the deletion.
• EDIT: allows for editing of the file name. The alphanumeric keyboard screen
is displayed.

Sensed Values
Figure 5-4:
Example of Sensed Information
On several screens which include control buttons for motors, pumps, valves… it is
possible to see if a device is on or off. The information is obtained by measuring the
amplified voltage across a small resistor installed on each device's electronic
controller. This information is given in the "xxx" sense field, with "xxx" identifying the
device. Refer to Section 5.10.26 for typical sense values.
The unit can be volts or points. It can be changed by clicking in the corresponding
field.
• volts indicates that the value is given in Volts.
• points indicates that the value is given in number of points of the Analog to
Digital Converter (scale: 0 to 255).
Graphic Screen
Figure 5-5:
Graphic Screen
By selecting the GRAPHIC button, the evolution with the time of electrical signals is
displayed. The sampling rate is approximately 1 sample per second. The list of the
signals available is given on the screen, by a pull-down menu. Typically, following
signals are available:
• Pressure: signal delivered by the high-pressure sensor.
• Absorbance: signal delivered by the sample photodiode.
• Reference: signal delivered by the reference photodiode.

• Log: it is equal to log10 (reference photodiode signal/sample photodiode

signal).
• Waste vacuum: signal delivered by the vacuum sensor of the syringe module
(internal waste bottle).
• Degasser vacuum: signal delivered by the vacuum sensor of the degasser
module.
• Calculated temperature: calculated temperature value, based on the signal
delivered by the Pt100 temperature sensor.
Additional signals can be selected by checking the Enable/Disable senses box.

When this check box is activated, the sampling rate is reduced to 1 sample every 2
to 3 seconds.
The available signals in the pull-down menu are depending on the screen used for
the activation of the GRAPHIC button: only the signals having a link with the current
screen are proposed.
The current value of the selected signal is indicated in the Value field.
The signal range can be selected by modifying the Max. interval and Min. interval
values. The Time interval can also be modified.
If the Dots check box is selected, the graph is displayed in dots, instead of a
continuous line.
By clicking on the ADJUST button, the vertical range is automatically set to the
maximum and the minimum of the previous signal samplings.
The STOP button is used to stop the sampling and freeze the graphic. By selecting
the START button, the sampling re-starts.
Note: in the following section, some parts of the software contain multiple screens for
the component selected. The screen number is indicated along with the total number
of screens for that component. For example, Main Screen (1/2) indicates that this is
screen 1 of 2.
5.10.6 Main Screens
When the 'DiaSer.exe' application is started, the Service software access screen is
displayed. A level 1, level 2 or level 3 password can be entered by clicking in the
white field.
Figure 5-6:
Password Screen

The alphanumeric keyboard will appear. Once the password of level 1 or level 2 is
entered, the first of the two main screens is displayed. If a level 3 password is
entered, the system goes directly to the SETUP procedure.
Figures 5-7 and 5-8 show the two main screens:
Figure 5-7: Main Screen 1 Figure 5-8: Main Screen 2
These two main screens allow access to all modules of the D-10:
• SYRINGE: access to the Syringe Module
• DEGASSER: access to the Degasser Module
• DETECTOR: access to the Detector Module
• RACK DOOR: access to the Rack Door Module
• RACK INTRO.: access to the Rack Introduction Module
• FRONT COVER: access to the Front Cover Module
• HP: PUMP + VALVE: access to the HP Module: High-Pressure Pump and
Valve
• HP: SENSOR CALIB.: access to the HP Module: High-Pressure Sensor
Calibration
• HP: FLOW RATE CALIB.: access to the HP Module: Flow Rate Calibration
• THERMAL CONTROL: access to the Thermal Control Module
• SAMPLE ARM: access to the Sample Arm Module
In addition, the following buttons are available:

• ALL STATUS: status of all components of the instrument
• LAUNCH INIT: initialization of all stepper motors
• SHUT DOWN: proper shutdown of the instrument
• VERSIONS: display of the current software versions
• ERRORS: display of the error list
• MISC.: access to miscellaneous functions
• MACRO: access to macro functions (sample preparation, sample loading…)

5.10.7 SYRINGE Button
Selecting the SYRINGE button in the Main Screen (1/2), opens a set of six screens
for testing the Syringe Module.
Syringe Module (1/6): Manual Control of the Syringe Module Valves
Figure 5-9:
D-10 Syringe module (1/6)
• START LIQUID PUMP: start/stop the liquid pump.

• START DILUTION VALVE: start/stop the dilution well pinch valve.
• START WASH VALVE: start/stop the probe wash well pinch valve.
• START 3 WAY VALVE: start/stop the 3-way valve associated with the
syringe.
• Valve status: indicates the status for the dilution pinch valve, for the wash
pinch valve (open or closed) and for the 3-way syringe valve (probe or wash).
For the pinch valves, the standby status is open. For the 3-way valve, the
probe status corresponds to the "normally open" side (connection to the
probe).
• Liquid Pump sense, Dilution valve sense, Wash valve sense, 3 way
valve sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through the
different devices. The unit can be points or volts.
• points: indicates the unit of the corresponding value. By clicking in this field,
the unit can be changed. For the waste vacuum value, the unit can be volts,
points, kPa or psi.
• GRAPHIC: see 5.10.5.

Syringe Module (2/6): Syringe Manual Control
Figure 5-10:
• 3 way valve position: selection of the 3-way valve position

needle: the syringe is connected to the probe (standby position).
wash: the syringe is connected to the wash solution bottle.
• Direction: selection of the direction of the fluid
Aspiration: filling movement of the syringe.
Delivery: dispense movement of the syringe.
• Amplitude: selection of the amplitude of the movement, in motor steps or µl.
• steps: selection of the unit of the amplitude, in steps or µl. 2400 motor steps
correspond to 1mL.
• Speed Index: speed of syringe movement.
• Sensor status: status of the sensor for the syringe control
obstructed: indicates the home position (syringe empty). The home
flag is in the slot of the optical sensor.
free: indicates that the optical slotted sensor is "on" (light is going
from the emitter to the receiver).
• START THE SELECTED MOVEMENT: move the syringe using the
parameters shown on the screen.
• GO TO HOME POSITION: move the syringe to home position. The liquid is
delivered to the selected 3-way valve position.
• 1 ML ASPIRATION: start the aspiration movement (2400 steps on the motor).
The liquid is aspirated from the selected 3-way valve position.
Warning: the syringe movement cannot be stopped once it is launched.

Syringe Module (3/6)
Figure 5-11:
• Sample preparation sequence: step by step control of whole blood tube

preparation (incl. sample aspiration, two-step dilution in the dilution well and
filling of the sample loop) or microvial preparation. The Tube # can be edited.
The assay is also selected, as all the parameters for sample preparation are
taken from the corresponding test parameters.
• START: start the sample preparation sequence. The current action is
described in the window near the button. When the sequence is started, the
START button is changed to a STOP button for aborting the current
sequence.
• NEXT STEP: available when the sample preparation sequence is started. It
launches the next step of the preparation.
• SYRINGE PRIMING: start the syringe priming sequence. It primes only the
syringe and assumes that the wash line in the degasser is already primed.
• DIL. WELL WASH: start the sequence of washing the dilution well.
• PROBE WASH: start the sequence of washing the probe.
• INT. WASTE BOTTLE CHECK: start the sequence for the test of the internal
waste bottle. A new screen opens (see Figure 5-12).
Syringe Module (3A/6): Waste Bottle Check
Figure 5-12:
D-10 Syringe module (3A/6)

This screen shows the result of the current waste bottle check and indicates the
waste bottle check parameters:
• High level time: indicates the time required for the vacuum to reach the High
vacuum level given in the parameters area. Unit: s.
• Dilution valve low level time: indicates the time required for the vacuum to
return to the atmospheric pressure when the Dilution Valve is switched off.
Unit: s.
• Wash valve low level time: indicates the time required for the vacuum to
return to the atmospheric pressure when the Wash Valve is switched off. Unit:
s.
• Zero vacuum level: indicates the offset of the vacuum electrical signal at the
atmospheric pressure. Unit: selected by clicking in the points area.
• points: unit of the vacuum. Options are: kPa, psi, volts (voltage delivered by
the sensor) and points (8-bit Analog to Digital Converter result).
• Result: indicates the waste check has passed (OK) or failed (FAILED).
• High vacuum level: level defined as the limit for a good internal vacuum
circuit. Unit: kPa, psi, volts or points.
• Offset for the low vacuum level: offset added to the measured Zero
vacuum level, to define the low vacuum level for the measurement of the
time required by the decreasing of the vacuum. Unit: points, kPa, psi, volts.
• High level time out: maximum time allowed to obtain the High vacuum level
during the test. Unit: s.
• Dilution valve low level time out: maximum time allowed for the vacuum to
return to the low vacuum level defined by Zero vacuum level + Offset for
the low vacuum level, on the Dilution valve circuit. Unit: s.
• Wash valve low level time out: maximum time allowed for the vacuum to
return to the low vacuum level defined by Zero vacuum level + Offset for
the low vacuum level, on the Wash valve circuit. Unit: s.
• RESTART: start a waste bottle check again.
• CLOSE: close the waste bottle check window.
Syringe Module (4/6) and (5/6): Sample Preparation Parameters
Figure 5-13: D-10 Syringe module (4/6) Figure 5-14: D-10 Syringe module (5/6)

These two screens show, for the selected assay, the values of the most important
parameters of sample preparation. These values are found in the corresponding *.ini
files. These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding files only if the
user has entered the level 2 password.
• Test: assay selection (A1c or A2/F/A1c or Decont). The displayed parameters

correspond to the selected assay.
• 1st dilution Sample volume (µl): sample volume aspirated from the primary
tube for the first dilution. Unit: µl.
• 1st dilution Diluant volume (µl): diluent volume for the first dilution. Unit: µl.
• 2nd dilution Sample volume (µl): sample volume aspirated from dilution well
for the second dilution. Unit: µl.
• 2nd dilution Diluant volume (µl): diluent volume for the second dilution.
Unit: µl.
• Z sample pos. for tube (strips): Z sampling position of the probe for primary
tubes. Unit: number of motor strips (see 2.2.7).
• Z sample pos. for microvial (strips): Z sampling position of the probe for
microvial tubes. Unit: number of motor strips (see 2.2.7).
• From Dil. Well to Valve Vol. (µl): volume aspirated by the syringe from the
dilution well into the sample loop. Unit: µl.
• Microvial Sample Vol. (µl): volume of sample aspirated by the syringe from
the microvial. Unit: µl.
• Microvial add. Vol. to Valve (µl): additional air volume aspirated by the
syringe, after aspiration of the sample from the microvial. Unit: µl.
• Injection delay (0.1s): amount of time the sample remains in the sample loop
before it is injected. Unit: 0.1s.
• Injection Valve speed index: speed of the rotation of the high-pressure
valve. Index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
• DONE: save the modified parameters. A verification message is displayed to
confirm the modification. The DONE button is usable only if a modification is
made and if the level 2 password was entered.
• CANCEL: cancel the modifications. A verification screen is displayed to
confirm the cancellation. The CANCEL button is usable only if a modification
is made and if the level 2 password was entered.

Syringe Module (6/6): Internal Waste Bottle Check Parameters
Figure 5-15:
This screen shows the values of the internal waste parameters. These values are in
the 'Profile.ini' file. These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding
files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• High vacuum level (points): level defined as the limit for a good internal
vacuum circuit. Unit: points.
• Offset for the low vacuum level (points): offset added to the measured
Zero vacuum level (see Syringe module (3A/6), to define the low vacuum
level for the measurement of the time required by the decreasing of the
vacuum. Unit: points.
• High level time out (0.1s): maximum time allowed to obtain the High
vacuum level during the test (see Syringe module (3A/6). Unit: 0.1s.
• Dilution valve low level time out (0.1s): maximum time allowed for the
vacuum to return to the low vacuum level defined by Zero vacuum level +
Offset for the low vacuum level, on the Dilution valve circuit. Unit: 0.1s.
• Wash valve low level time out (0.1s): maximum time allowed for the
vacuum to return to the low vacuum level defined by Zero vacuum level +
Offset for the low vacuum level, on the Wash valve circuit. Unit: 0.1s.
5.10.8 DEGASSER Button
Selecting the DEGASSER button in the Main Screen (1/2), opens a set of four
screens for testing the Degasser Module.

Degasser Module (1/4)
Figure 5-16:
D-10 Degasser module (1/4)
• START PUMP: start the degasser vacuum pump. The real time clock of the
MC processor continuously checks the vacuum. If the target value of the
vacuum (High vacuum, see Degasser module (3/4) is reached, the pump is
automatically switched off.
• STOP PUMP: stop the degasser vacuum pump. The real time clock of the
MC processor continuously checks the vacuum. If the target value of the
vacuum (Low vacuum, see Degasser module (3/4) is reached, the pump is
automatically switched on.
• Vacuum: current vacuum level of the degasser measured by the vacuum
sensor on the degasser module board. The unit of measure appears in the
box next to the value.
• points: unit of vacuum. Options are: kPa, psi, volts (voltage delivered by the
sensor) and points (8-bit Analog to Digital Converter result).
• Sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through the vacuum
pump. Unit: points or volts.
• VACUUM CONTROL ENABLE (FOR TEST): if selected, the automatic
switch off/on is disabled. In this case, the threshold levels indicated on the
screen are used for this test.
• Thresholds for test use, Low and High: thresholds for the vacuum pump
control if the VACUUM CONTROL ENABLE (FOR TEST) is activated.

Degasser Module (2/4): System Flush
Figure 5-17:
• BUFFER 1: start the automatic priming of the buffer 1 line through the
degasser. Approximate duration: 10 minutes.
• BUFFER 2: start the automatic priming of the buffer 2 line through the
degasser. Approximate duration: 10 minutes.
• WASH: start the automatic priming of the wash line through the degasser.
Approximate duration: 3 minutes.
• ALL: start the automatic priming of all the lines through the degasser.
Approximate duration: 23 minutes.
• Bubble detector signal for Buffer 1 line, Buffer 2 line, Wash line: indicates
the level of the bubble detector signal. Unit: points or volts. The bubble
detectors are currently not in use.
Degasser Module (3/4): Threshold Values of the System
Figure 5-18:
This screen shows the values of the parameters of the degasser control and the
bubble detection. These values are found in the *.ini files. These values can be
modified and saved in the corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2
password.

• Low vacuum: when the degasser vacuum is less than this value the
degasser pump is switched on. The unit of measure appears in the box next
to the value. The parameter is saved in points.
• points: unit of the Low vacuum value. Options are: kPa, psi, volts (voltage
delivered by the sensor) and points (8-bit Analog to Digital Converter result).
• High vacuum: when the degasser vacuum is greater than this value, the
degasser pump is switched off. The unit of measure appears in the box next
to the value. The parameter is saved in points.
• Time out: maximum time allowed to obtain the vacuum level when the pump
is started. Unit: s.
• Wash bubble det., Buf. 1 bubble det., Buf. 2 bubble det.: threshold levels
for the bubble detection. This functionality is currently not used.
Degasser Module (4/4): Flush Parameters of the System
Figure 5-19:
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the flush of the system.
These values are found in the *.ini files. These values can be modified and saved in
the corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• Buf 1/2, Wash Syr. Asp. Speed: index to define the speed of the aspiration
of buffer by the syringe. No unit.
• Buf 1/2, Wash Syr. Deli. Speed: index to define the speed of the delivery of
buffer by the syringe. No unit.
• Number of strokes, Buffer 1/2: number of syringe movements for the
priming of the buffer 1 and buffer 2 lines.
• Number of strokes, Wash: number of syringe movements for the priming of
the wash line.


5.10.9 DETECTOR Button
Selecting the DETECTOR button in the Main Screen (1/2), opens a set of four
screens for testing the Detector Module.
Detector Module (1/4): Detector Control and Adjustment
Figure 5-20:
D-10 Detector module (1/4)
• Load gradient file: selection of the file (*.hpl) for a gradient, if the user wants
to run a gradient.
• Selected log file: selection of the file (*.csv) for the logging of the results of
the detector when the logging is started.
• Set Light: light intensity parameter, from 0 to 255. The default value is 150
and corresponds to a direct current in the LED of 15mA. When this value is
set to 0, the LED is switched off.
• Set Gain: numerical gain in the reference channel of the detector, from 0 to
255. The default value is 64. This gain is automatically adjusted, before each
sample, in order to adjust the baseline of the chromatogram to a given level
which is typically 0.020AU.
• Flow rate: manual: flow rate (ml/min) or speed of the pump (rpm), used for
the manual control of the pump.
• ml/min: unit of the Flow rate. The options are: ml/min or rpm.
• Flow rate: gradient: flow rate (ml/min) or speed of the pump (rpm), in the
selected gradient file.
• START GRAD. + LOG: start/stop the gradient selected into the Load
gradient file field (*.hpl) and start/stop the recording of the detector values
into the log file selected in the Selected log file field. The flow rate used in
the gradient file (*.hpl) is displayed in the Flow rate: gradient field.

• START LOG: start/stop the recording of the detector values into the log file
selected in the Selected log file field. The file is a *.csv file and can be
exported for analysis (see Detector module (2/4).
• START PUMP or STOP PUMP: start/stop the high-pressure pump for a flow
rate chosen in the Flow rate: manual field.
• START PROP. VALVE: start/stop the proportioning valve.
• Abs. Meas.: light measurement in the sample channel of the detector. The
result is given in 24-bit converter points (from 0 to 16,777,215).
• Ref. Meas.: light measurement in the reference channel of the detector. The
• Log.: it is equal to log10 (reference measurement/sample measurement). The
result is given in Absorbance Unit (AU).
• Pressure: current pressure in the high-pressure circuit. The unit of measure
appears in the box next to the value.
• psi: pressure unit. The options are psi or kg/cm2.
Detector Module (2/4): Export Gradient Result File
Figure 5-21:
• RESULT FILE EXPORT: export a result file to a floppy disk. The explorer
screen is shown for the selection of the file to export.
• psi: pressure unit. Options are psi or kg/cm2.
• Baseline adjustment sequence: the baseline adjustment process consists
of a software adjustment of the gain on the reference measurement channel
(numeric potentiometer) in order to obtain an absorbance defined by the
calculated value log10 (1 + BaseLinePercent). This adjustment is

automatically done before each sample chromatogram. The values obtained

for the light and the gain adjustment during a run are stored in the
'chromalog.txt' file.
• Reference Gain: numerical gain in the reference channel of the detector,
from 0 to 255. The default value is 64.
• Light level: the light intensity parameter, from 0 to 255. The default value is
150 and corresponds to a direct current in the LED of 15mA. When this value
is set to 0, the LED is switched off.
• current: indicates the current values of the Gain and Light parameters.
• result: indicates the result of the baseline adjustment.
Warning: in the DiaSer Service software version 2.00, the values displayed
in the result field are wrong. In later DiaSer versions, the displayed values
are correct.
• START BASELINE ADJUSTMENT: launch the baseline adjustment process.

It can take 1 to 2 minutes in the worst case. The result of the adjustment can
be seen in the Log. field.
Warning: the result of the adjustment is lost when coming back to the
Detector module (1/4) screen, because the Light and Gain values were
already sent to the detector components.
Detector Module (3/4): Detector Parameters in the System (1/2)
Figure 5-22:
This screen shows the values of some parameters used for the detector, based on
the selected assay. These values are found in the *.ini files. These values can be
password.
• Test: select the assay (A1c or A2/F/A1c or Decont).

• Sample rate index: index to define the measurement rate.

• Reference adjustment: flag for the selection of the automatic baseline

adjustment during the run. If the value is 1, the adjustment will be done during
the run.
• Light source intensity: default value of the light source intensity.
• Reference gain value: default value of the gain adjustment in the reference
channel.
• Chromalog.txt values: reference gain and light level parameter values,
reference and sample last values, obtained during the last run and stored in
the 'chromalog.txt' file.
Detector Module (4/4): Detector Parameters in the System (2/2)
Figure 5-23:
This screen shows the values of some other parameters used for the detector based
on the selected assay. These values are found in the *.ini files. These values can be
password.

• Maximum absorption: maximum authorized for the sample absorption
measurement. When this value is reached during the baseline adjustment,
the intensity of the LED source is reduced.
• Minimum absorption: minimum level for the sample absorption
measurement. When this value is reached, the intensity of the LED source is
increased until the value is higher than the Typical Absorption value.
• Typical absorption: value described above.
• Maximum light source intensity: maximum value for the LED electrical
current. When this value is reached, an alarm is given for the replacement of
the LED source.

• Baseline percentage: baseline adjustment value. Unit: 10-4.The baseline

value is given by log10 (1 + BaseLinePercent). For a value of 470, the
baseline is 0.02AU.
5.10.10 RACK DOOR Button
Selecting the RACK DOOR button in the Main Screen (1/2), opens a set of two
screens for testing the Rack Door Module.
Rack Door Module (1/2)
Figure 5-24:
D-10 Rack Door module (1/2)
• START RACK DOOR SOLENOID: switch the rack door solenoid on/off to
lock/unlock the rack door. The rack door is locked when the solenoid is in
standby mode. When the solenoid is powered, it will be switched off
automatically after 10 seconds, to avoid overheating.
• Solenoid sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through the
rack door solenoid. Unit: points or volts.
• Closed door sensor: status of the closed door detection sensor
obstructed: the door is in an intermediate position: the home flag is
in the slot of the optical sensor.
free, the optical slotted sensor is on (light is going from the emitter to
the receiver). The door is completely closed.
• Open door sensor: status of the open door detection sensor
obstructed: the door is in an intermediate position: the home flag is
in the slot of the optical sensor.
free: it indicates that the optical slotted sensor is on (light is going
from the emitter to the receiver). The door is completely open.

• Door status: current status of the rack door (open, closed or undefined).
• OPEN THE DOOR: launch the sequence to open the rack door.
• CLOSE THE DOOR: launch the sequence to close the rack door.
Rack Door Module (2/2): Parameters
Figure 5-25:
D-10 Rack Door module (2/2)
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the rack door control.
These values are found in the 'Profile.ini' file. These values can be modified and
saved in the corresponding file only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• Run with rack door: for R&D or Manufacturing use only. It indicates if the
system considers that a rack door is mounted and runs well in the instrument
(yes) or not (no). The no option allows a run without rack door (the door is
always in the open position).
• Rack door monitor: indicates if the system continuously checks the rack
door during the run (yes) or not (no). If the rack door is monitored (yes), the
run is stopped when the rack door is accidentally opened.
5.10.11 RACK INTRO. Button
Selecting the RACK INTRO. button in the Main Screen (1/2), opens a screen for
testing the Rack Introduction Module.

Figure 5-26:
D-10 Rack Introduction module (1/1)
• Rack input sensor status: status of the rack input detection sensor
(reflective sensor)
reflection, a rack is in front of the sensor and reflects the infra-red
light.
no reflection, no rack in front of the sensor.
• Rack output sensor status: status of the rack output detection sensor
(reflective sensor)
reflection, a rack is in front of the sensor and reflects the infra-red
light.
no reflection, no rack in front of the sensor.
• Rack motor sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through
the rack motor. Unit: points or volts.
• RACK MOTOR: IN START: switch the rack motor on/off in the "rack
introduction" direction.
• RACK MOTOR: OUT START: switch the rack motor on/off in the "rack
ejection" direction.
• LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION: start a rack introduction sequence.
• LAUNCH RACK EJECTION: start a rack ejection sequence.
5.10.12 FRONT COVER Button
Selecting the FRONT COVER button in the Main Screen (1/2), opens a set of two
screens for testing the Front Cover Module.

Front Cover Module (1/2): Front Cover Solenoid
Figure 5-27:
D-10 Front Cover module (1/2)
• START FRONT COVER SOLENOID: switch the front cover solenoid on/off to
lock/unlock the front cover. The front cover is locked when the solenoid is in
standby mode. When the solenoid is powered, it will be switched off
automatically after 10 seconds, to avoid overheating.
• Solenoid sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through the
front cover solenoid. Unit: points or volts. This function is currently not
available.
• GRAPHIC: not available on this screen.
• Front cover sensor status: current status of the front cover sensor
(reflective sensor)
reflection, the metal flag is in front of the sensor and reflects the
infra-red light. The front cover is closed.
no reflection, the front cover is open.
• Front cover status: current status of the front cover (open or closed).
Front Cover Module (2/2): Front Door Parameters
Figure 5-28:
D-10 Front Cover module (2/2)
This screen shows the value of the parameter used for the front cover control. This
value is found in the 'Profile.ini' file. It can be modified and saved in the file only if the
user has entered the level 2 password.

• Front door monitor: indicates if the system continuously checks the front
door during the run (yes) or not (no). If the front door is monitored, the run is
stopped when the front door is opened.
Note: when the front door is open, the sample arm motors power supply is
switched off. If a run is in progress, it will be stopped by a motor error.

5.10.13 ALL STATUS Button
Selecting the ALL STATUS button in the Main Screen (1/2), opens a set of two
screens that show the following:
• operational status of subassemblies
• sensors status
• devices status (valves, solenoids…)
The displayed values are refreshed approximately twice per second.
All Status (1/2)
Figure 5-29:
D-10 All Status (1/2)
• X axis busy, Z axis busy, TH axis busy, Syr. axis busy: status of the X, Z,
TH and Syringe movements
busy, motor running.
free, motor in standby.
• X axis sensor, Z axis sensor, TH axis sen.: status of the X, Z, and TH axis
(position) sensors
obstructed: the optical sensor is "off". Infra-red light from the emitter
cannot reach the receiver because of the position of the slotted disk.

free: the optical sensor is "on". Infra-red light from the emitter reaches
the receiver because of the slot on the disk.
• X home sen., Z home sen., TH home sen.: status of the X, Z, and TH home
sensors
cannot reach the receiver because the home flag is in the optical
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Hall effect: detection of a magnet in front of the sensor
magnet
no magnet
• Tube height: status of the tube height sensor
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Syr. home: status of the syringe sensor
obstructed: the syringe is empty; the home flag is in the slot of the
syringe optical sensor (home position).
free: the optical slotted sensor is "on". Infra-red light from the emitter
reaches the receiver.
• HP valve: status of the high-pressure valve
load: valve in the Load position (home position).
inject: valve in the Inject position.
prime: valve in the Prime position.
not defined: valve in an intermediate, uncontrolled position.
• Open door: status of the open door detection sensor
obstructed: the door is in an intermediate position; the metal flag is in
the optical sensor slot.
free: the optical slotted sensor is "on". Infra-red light from the emitter
reaches the receiver. The door is completely open.
• Closed door: status of the closed door detection sensor
obstructed: the door is in an intermediate position; the metal flag is in
the slot of the optical sensor.
the receiver. The door is completely closed.

All Status (2/2)
Figure 5-30:
D-10 All Status (2/2)
• Rack input: status of the rack input detection sensor

reflection: a rack is in front of the sensor and reflects the infra-red
light.
no reflection: no rack in front of the sensor.
• Rack output: status of the rack output detection sensor
reflection: a rack is in front of the sensor and reflects the infra-red
light.
no reflection: no rack in front of the sensor.
• Rack motor: status of the rack introduction motor
started: motor running.
stopped: motor in standby.
• Front cover: status of the front cover sensor
reflection, the metal flag is in front of the sensor and reflects the
infra-red light. The front cover is closed.
no reflection, the front cover is open.
• Front solenoid: status of the front cover solenoid
started: solenoid is powered.
stopped: solenoid in standby.
• Liquid pump: status of the liquid pump
started: pump is running.
stopped: pump in standby.
• Dilution valve: status of the dilution well pinch valve
started: valve is powered.
stopped: valve in standby.
• Wash valve: status of the probe wash well pinch valve
• Syr. 3 way val: status of the 3-way valve associated with the syringe

5.10.14 LAUNCH INIT Button
Selecting this button, from the Main Screen (1/2), initializes all stepper motors:
• HP valve stepper motor (home position = Load position)
• Z motor (probe in home position)
• Tube Holder (home position)
• X motor (Sample Arm in the home position)
• Syringe motor (home position)
For the initialization of the syringe motor, the liquid pump is switched on, in order to
remove liquid from the dilution well.
5.10.15 SHUT DOWN Button
Selecting this button, from the Main Screen (1/2), initializes the shutdown process:
• A message box opens for confirmation
if the user selects no, the shutdown process is aborted.
if the user selects yes, the shutdown process is started.
• A message appears "Please wait while the system writes unsaved data to the
disk". If there is no external monitor, this message is not seen in its entirety.
• After several seconds a new message is displayed: "It is now safe to turn off
your computer". The main ON/OFF switch can now be switched to OFF.
5.10.16 HP: PUMP + VALVE Button
Selecting the HP: PUMP + VALVE button in the Main Screen (2/2), opens a set of
seventeen screens for testing the High-Pressure Pump and Valves.
HP Module: Pump, Valve (1/17): Pump and Valve Control
Figure 5-31:
D-10 HP module: pump, valve (1/17)
• Flow rate/Pump speed: flow rate (ml/min) or its translation in pump speed
(rpm). The value can be modified only if the pump is switched off.
• ml/min: unit of Flow rate/Pump speed. The options are ml/min or rpm.
• START PUMP or STOP PUMP: start/stop the high-pressure pump.


• HP Pump sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through the
high-pressure pump. Unit: points or volts.
• Prop. Valve sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through
the proportioning valve. Unit: points or volts.
• % Buffer 2: percentage of buffer 2 being pumped through the system. The
user defines the percentage before selecting START PUMP AND MIXING.
• START PUMP AND MIXING: start the high-pressure pump for the selected
flow rate and for a mixing of the selected buffer 2 percentage.
HP Module: Pump, Valve (2/17): Gradient
Figure 5-32:
• Load gradient file: selection of the file (*.hpl) for a gradient.

• Selected log file: selection of the file (*.csv) for logging the results of the
detector.
• START GRADIENT: start/stop of the selected gradient and logging the
results into the selected file.
• GRADIENT FILE IMPORT: import a *.hpl file from the floppy disk to the hard
disk.
• RESULT FILE EXPORT: export a *.csv file to the floppy disk.


HP Module: Pump, Valve (3/17): HPPC Status
Figure 5-33:
This screen shows the HPPC status and gives low level information. It is mainly for
R&D use.
• HP pump sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through the
high-pressure pump. Unit: points.
• Prop. Valve sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through
the proportioning valve. Unit: points.
• Encoder signal: logical level signal from the pump motor encoder: A and B.
• Cam signal: logical level signal from the Cam flag sensor.
HP Module: Pump, Valve (4/17): 7-port, 3-position HP Valve Control
Figure 5-34:

• HOME MVT (RESET): rotate the valve from any position to the home (Load)
position.
• TO LOAD POSITION: rotate the valve to the Load position, when it is in one
of the two other working positions (Inject or Prime).
• TO INJECT POSITION: rotate the valve to the Inject position, when it is in the
Load position.
• TO PRIME POSITION: rotate the valve to the Prime position, when it is in the
Load position.
Note: in order to go from Prime to Inject, the valve MUST return to Load position
first.
• Sensors status: status of the 3 sensors of the High-Pressure Valve. There

are 3 types of indications shown:
decoded information, load, inject, prime or not defined.
decimal code 5, 6, 4 or other value.
binary code, for each sensor: 0 or 1.
• 7 port, 3 pos. Valve Speed Index: speed of the rotation of the High-
Pressure Valve. Index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
HP Module: Pump, Valve (5/17): 7-port, 3-position HP Parameters in the System
Figure 5-35:
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the High-Pressure Valve
control based on the selected assay. These values are found in the 'Profile2.ini' file.
These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding files only if the user
has entered the level 2 password.

• 7 port, 3 pos. Valve Speed Index: rotation speed of the High-Pressure
valve. Index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).

HP Module: Pump, Valve (6/17): Piston Flush
Figure 5-36:
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the piston flush. These
values are found in the 'Profile.ini' file. These values can be modified and saved in
the corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• START PISTON FLUSH: start the piston flush sequence.

• Syringe Aspiration Speed: speed of the syringe aspiration movement. Index
from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
• Syringe Delivery Speed: speed of the syringe delivery movement. Index
from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
• Number of strokes: number of syringe aspiration/delivery movements for the
piston flush.
HP Module: Pump, Valve (7/17): Proportioning Valve Aging
Figure 5-37:
This screen is for Manufacturing use only.

• % of Buffer 2: percentage of Buffer 2 during the valve aging process.

• Duration of the test: time in minutes.
• Flow rate: working flow rate for the test.
• Test remaining time: remaining time before test completion.
• START PROPORTIONING VALVE AGING: start/stop the proportioning valve
aging process (start the HP pump for the displayed flow rate and launch the
gradient for the selected buffer 2 percentage).
HP Module: Pump, Valve (8/17): High-Pressure Pump and Valve Parameters
Figure 5-38:
This screen shows the values of the parameters of the High-Pressure Pump. These
values are found in the 'instrument.ini' file. These values can be modified and saved
in the corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• WC (Waiting Count): phase shift between the cam flag signal and the filling
phase start. Unit: ° (angle).
• FC (Filling Count): filling phase angle. Unit: ° (angle).
• Test selection: select the assay (A1c or A2/F/A1c or Decont).
• Safety High Pressure limit: limit for the HPPC pump controller. If the
instantaneous pressure is higher than this limit, the pump is stopped.
• Run High Pressure limit: high limit of the pressure during the run. If the
mean value of the pressure is higher than this limit, the run is stopped.
• Meas. Number for High limit average: indicates the number of pressure
values used for the calculation of the mean value, which is compared to the
Run High Pressure limit. The sample rate is approximately 2Hz.
• Run Low Pressure limit: low limit of the pressure during the run. If the mean
value of the pressure is lower than this limit, the run is stopped.
• Meas. Number for Low limit average: indicates the number of pressure
values used for the calculation of the mean value, which is compared to the
Run Low Pressure limit. The sample rate is approximately 2Hz.

HP Module: Pump, Valve (9/17): High-Pressure Pump Parameters Determination
Figure 5-39:
• Load gradient file: selection of the file (*.hpl) for a gradient. The selected file
is loaded into the HPPC controller.
• START TEST or STOP TEST: start/stop the test by running the selected
gradient.
• START PUMP or STOP PUMP: start/stop the High-Pressure Pump, for the
displayed flow rate.
• AUTOMATIC TESTS: launch the automatic WC/FC determination (see
5.10.16.1).
• WC (Waiting Count): value used for the determination. Unit: ° (angle).
• FC (Filling Count): value used for the determination. Unit: ° (angle).
Note: when these WC/FC values are modified, the Load gradient file field is
erased and a gradient file must be selected again.
• Flow rate: flow rate (ml/min) or its translation in pump speed (rpm). The
value is found in the gradient file.
• ml/min: flow rate unit. The options are ml/min or rpm.

HP Module: Pump, Valve (10/17): High-Pressure Pump Parameters Verification,

Absorption in Static Conditions
Figure 5-40:
This screen is used to measure the absorbance of the buffer 2 dye solution in static
conditions (proportioning valve continuously on).
the detector.
gradient.
• START CALCULATION: start the calculation of the buffer 1 and buffer 2 dye
absorbance, and of the relative absorbance of buffer 2. The calculation is
done on the selected *.csv file.
• buffer 1: mean value for buffer 1 absorbance.
• buffer 2: mean value for buffer 2 dye absorbance.
• Rel.: relative absorbance of buffer 2 vs. buffer 1.


Dilamex Test
Figure 5-41:
This screen is used to measure the absorbance for 50% and 100 % steps of buffer 2
dye solution (Dilamex gradient) or for 20%, 50% and 100% of buffer 2 dye solution
(Dilamex+ gradient) in dynamic conditions (proportioning valve synchronized with the
HP pump).
the detector.
gradient.
• WC (Waiting Count): value used for the test. Unit: ° (angle).
• FC (Filling Count): value used for the test. Unit: ° (angle).



Dilamex Test Results
Figure 5-42:
• Selected log file: selection of the file (*.csv) for the results calculation.
• START CALCULATION: start the calculation of the buffer 1, 20% buffer 2
dye, 50% buffer 2 dye and 100% buffer 2 dye absorbance. The calculation is
• Dilamex+: if the box is checked, the Dilamex+ test (0%, 20%, 50% and 100%
steps) is used for the calculations. In the other case, the Dilamex test (0%,
50%, 100% steps) is used.
• Mean Val. (AU): mean value for each step, in Absorbance Unit (AU).
• Rela. Val. (AU): mean value for each step, in relative Absorbance Unit (AU).
• Rela. Val. (%): mean value for each step, in % of the relative Absorbance
Unit.
• 0%: values for buffer 1 (0% buffer 2 dye) absorbance.
• 20%: mean values for the 20% buffer 2 dye absorbance (if the Dilamex+ test
is selected).
• 50%: mean values for the 50% buffer 2 dye absorbance.
• 100%: mean values for the 100% buffer 2 dye absorbance.
• The relative value (in AU) of the 100% buffer 2 dye absorbance is compared
to the 100% buffer 2 relative value obtained under static conditions (see
Figure 5-40). The result of the comparison is given next to the 100% buffer 2
relative value field:
√ indicates that the difference is within tolerance
X indicates that the difference is out of range
? indicates that the static value is not available
• If the Dilamex+ test is selected, the relative value (in %) of the 20% of buffer 2
dye absorbance is compared to the theoretical 20% value. The result of the
comparison is given next to the 20% buffer 2 relative value field:
√ indicates that the difference is within the tolerance


• The relative value (in %) of the 50% of buffer 2 dye absorbance is compared
to the theoretical 50% value. The result of the comparison is given next to the
50% buffer 2 relative value field:

Step Gradient Test
Figure 5-43:
This screen is used to measure the absorbance for 10% to 100% of buffer 2 dye
solution, by steps of 10% (Step gradient) in dynamic conditions (proportioning valve
synchronized with the HP pump).
the detector.
gradient.



Step Gradient Test Results
Figure 5-44:
• START CALCULATION: start the calculation of the Step gradient results.
The calculation is done on the selected *.csv file.
• buffer 1: mean value for buffer 1 relative absorbance.
• 50% buffer 2: mean value for the 50% buffer 2 dye relative absorbance.
• 100% buffer 2: mean value for the 100% buffer 2 dye relative absorbance.
The relative value (in AU) of the 100% buffer 2 dye absorbance is compared
to the 100% buffer 2 relative value obtained under static conditions (see
Figure 5-40). The result of the comparison is given next to the 100% buffer 2
relative value field:
? indicates that the static value is not available
• Calc. %: calculated relative % for each step. The relative value (in %) of each
step is compared to the tolerance window. The result of the comparison is
given next to each % value:


Continuous Gradient Test
Figure 5-45:
This screen is used to measure the absorbance of the buffer 2 dye solution for a
continuous gradient from 0% to 100% of buffer 2 dye in dynamic conditions
(proportioning valve synchronized with the HP pump).
the detector.
gradient.



Continuous Gradient Test Results
Figure 5-46:
• START CALCULATION: display the Step gradient results. The calculation is
• Visualization of the Continuous Gradient test: Continuous gradient result.
HP Module: Pump, Valve (17/17): Graphic Visualization
Figure 5-47:
This screen is used to visualize graphically data recorded in *.log files during
previous tests.
• File: selection of the *.csv file containing the data to visualize.

• Param.: selection of the parameter to visualize
Absorbance: sample photodiode signal. Unit: 24-bit converter points.
Reference: reference photodiode signal. Unit: 24-bit converter points.

Log: it is equal to log10 (reference photodiode signal/sample

photodiode signal). Unit: Absorbance Unit (AU).
Temperature: temperature value, based on the signal delivered by
the Pt100 temperature sensor. Unit: 12-bit converter points.
Degasser pressure: signal from the vacuum sensor of the degasser
module.
HP pump pressure: signal from the high-pressure sensor. Unit: psi.
• Dots: if the check box is selected, the graph is displayed in dots, instead of a
continuous line.
• Param. Max, Param. Min: range of the vertical axis for the selected
parameter. By modifying these values, any detail can be examined.
• Time Max, Time Min: range of the horizontal axis for the selected parameter.
By modifying these values, any detail can be examined. Unit: s.
5.10.16.1 AUTOMATIC TESTS Button
Selecting the AUTOMATIC TESTS button in the HP Module: Pump, Valve (9/17)
screen opens a set of two screens used for an automatic WC/FC determination.
Automatic tests (1/2): High-Pressure Pump Parameters Verification
Figure 5-48:
D-10 Automatic Tests (1/2)
This screen is used to link automatically the Static, Dilamex(+), Step and
Continuous gradient tests.
• Static: selection of the Static test in the workflow (first test). The number of
repeats can be entered in the white field on the right side (on the same
horizontal line). If 0 is entered, the test is ignored.
• Dilamex: selection of the Dilamex test. By clicking in the next field, the *.hpl
file can be selected (Dilamex or Dilamex+ test). The number of repeats can
also be entered.
• Step gradient: selection of the Step gradient test. By clicking in the next field,
the *.hpl file can be selected. The number of repeats can also be entered.

• Continuous gradient: selection of the Continuous gradient test. By clicking

in the next field, the *.hpl file can be selected. The number of repeats can also
be entered.
• WC (Waiting Count): value used for the tests. Unit: ° (angle).
• FC (Filling Count): value used for the tests. Unit: ° (angle).
• START TEST: start/stop the tests. After a stop, the workflow is reset and
cannot be resumed.
• Test remaining time: remaining time before current test completion.
• Total remaining time: remaining time before the end of the complete
workflow.
Automatic tests (2/2): WC/FC Automatic Determination
The WC/FC automatic determination process links different tests:

• A Static test for measuring the static absorbance: it is the relative absorbance
of the dye solution used instead of buffer 2, when the proportioning valve is
continuously on.
• Several Dilamex+ tests:
The Dilamex+ test consists in measuring the theoretical 20%, 50% and 100%
dye solution dynamic mixing, for a given value of WC/FC. The tests are
automatically performed with different values of WC/FC until the
specifications are met.
The range of WC and FC values are introduced as input parameters. The first
test is done with the highest FC value and the lowest WC value.
If the measured parameters are higher than the specifications, the WC is
increased until the highest value in the defined range is reached or until the
measured parameters are lower than the specifications.
Then, the FC is decreased by 1, and the WC is set to the lowest value of its
range.
These tests are automatically performed until all the specifications for the
theoretical 20%, 50% and 100% steps are simultaneously met.
Typical tolerances are:
20%: from 13 to 14%
50%: from 49.5 to 50.5%
100%: difference between the dynamic absorbance for 100% and the
static absorbance less than 8mAU
Each Dilamex+ test is followed by a flush using buffer 1, at 3mL/min.
When the specifications are met (assume "WC_OK" and "FC_OK" are the
WC and FC values at that moment), additional Dilamex+ tests can be done
for the following WC/FC couples:
WC_OK + 1 / FC_OK
WC_OK + 1 / FC_OK - 1
WC_OK / FC_OK - 1
The selection of these additional Dilamex+ tests is done with check boxes.
When multiple acceptable WC/FC couples are found, the BEST choice is
selected by the software, based on the best 50% result.

• A Step gradient and a Continuous gradient are done for the selected WC/FC
couple.
• The test ends with a 15-minute flush sequence using buffer 1.
The result *.csv files produced during each step of the determination are identified
in the following way:
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_xxxx_WC-FC.csv
Where:
• "YYYYMMDD" is the file creation date (year, month, day format).
• "hhmmss" is the file creation time (hour, minute, second format).
• "xxxx" is the test name ("stat", "dila+", "step" or "cont").
• "WC-FC" are the WC and FC values used for the test.
The summary of the results is saved in the 'YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_allresults.csv'

file.
All of these files are stored in the \Dia\Service\Log folder.
Figure 5-49:
D-10 Automatic Tests (2/2)
• WC Min, WC Max, WC Current: Waiting Count. Unit: ° (angle). Min and Max
define the range of WC used for the automatic determination. Current
indicates the WC value currently being tested.
• FC Min, FC Max, FC Current: Filling Count. Unit: ° (angle). Min and Max
define the range of FC used for the automatic determination. Current
indicates the FC value currently being tested.
• SETTING: open the screen for the test settings (see 5.10.16.2).
• START TEST: launch the automatic WC/FC determination process.
• RESULTS: open the screen with the test results for each step of the process
(see 5.10.16.3).
• 100% buf.2 (AU) Static: indicates the relative value (in AU) of the 100%
buffer 2 dye absorbance measured during the Static test.
• 100% buf.2 (AU) Dilamex: indicates the relative value (in AU) of the 100%
buffer 2 dye absorbance measured during the Dilamex+ test.

• Dilamex values (%) 20%: indicates the relative value (in %) of the 20%
theoretical buffer 2 dye step, measured during the Dilamex+ test.
• Dilamex values (%) 50%: indicates the relative value (in %) of the 50%
theoretical buffer 2 dye step, measured during the Dilamex+ test.
• Grad. name: indicates the running gradient file.
• Grad. remaining time: remaining time before the end of the running gradient.
5.10.16.2 SETTING Button
Figure 5-50:
D-10 WC/FC Determination test setting
This screen is used to set selections for the automatic WC/FC determination.
• WC + 1 / FC: if the box is selected, an additional Dilamex+ test will be done

for the WC + 1 and FC values once a valid WC/FC couple is found.
• WC / FC - 1: if the box is selected, an additional Dilamex+ test will be done for
the WC and FC - 1 values once a valid WC/FC couple is found.
• WC + 1 / FC - 1: if the box is selected, an additional Dilamex+ test will be
done for the WC + 1 and FC - 1 values once a valid WC/FC couple is found.
• LED automatic switch off: if the box is selected, the LED source will be
switched off at the end of the process.

5.10.16.3 RESULTS Button
Figure 5-51A: Figure 5-51B:

D-10 WC/FC Determination test results D-10 WC/FC Determination test results
Figure 5-51C: Figure 5-51D:

D-10 WC/FC Determination test results D-10 WC/FC Determination test results
This screen displays the test results for each step of the WC/FC determination
process, taken from the 'YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_allresults.csv' file.
This screen displays the Static test results, the Dilamex+ results for each WC/FC
couple, with the Status, and the Step gradient results with the Status. It can be
used for the visualisation of any 'YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_allresults.csv' file.
• All results file: select a 'YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_allresults.csv' file for the

result visualization.
• STATIC: shortcut to the HP Module: Pump, Valve (10/17) screen.
• DILAMEX: shortcut to the HP Module: Pump, Valve (12/17) screen.
• STEP: shortcut to the HP Module: Pump, Valve (14/17) screen.
• CONT.: shortcut to the HP Module: Pump, Valve (16/17) screen.
• CURVE: shortcut to the HP Module: Pump, Valve (17/17) screen.
• PRINT: print the displayed results on the thermal printer.

5.10.17 HP: SENSOR CALIB. Button
Selecting the HP: SENSOR CALIB. button in the Main Screen (2/2), opens a set of
two screens for calibrating the High-Pressure Sensor.
HP Module: Sensor Calibration (1/2): Calibration Parameters
Figure 5-52:
D-10 HP module: sensor calibration (1/2)
This screen shows the values of the High-Pressure Sensor parameters. These
values are found in the 'instrument.ini' file. These values can be modified and saved
in the corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• High Pressure Sensor Offset: current value of the HP sensor offset.

• High Pressure Sensor Gain: current value of the HP sensor gain.

HP Module: Sensor Calibration (2/2): New Calibration
Figure 5-53:
D-10 HP module: sensor calibration (2/2)

• Pressure: low value: low value point used for the calibration.
• Pressure: high value: high value point used for the calibration.
• Internal meas.: values of the system for the low value point and high value
point after memorization.
• External ref.: pressures measured by an externally calibrated reference
instrument, corresponding to the low value point and high value point for the
calibration.
• MEMORIZE: store the internal current measurement and associate it with the
external reference pressure.
• CALCULATION OF THE OFFSET AND THE GAIN: launch the calculation of
the new offset and gain, based on the internal measurements (memorized low
and high values) and on the external reference measurements.
• HP Sensor Offset: current offset value (from 'instrument.ini' file) and new
calculated offset value.
• HP Sensor Gain: current gain value (from 'instrument.ini' file) and new
calculated gain value.
• SAVE RESULTS: store the calibration results in the system ('instrument.ini'
file) and replace the previous values. This button is available only if a new
calibration is done and if the level 2 password was entered.
5.10.18 HP: FLOW CALIB. Button
Selecting the HP: FLOW CALIB. button in the Main Screen (2/2), opens a set of four
screens for calibrating the flow rate.

HP Module: Flow Rate Calibration (1/4): Flow Rate Parameters
Figure 5-54:
D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (1/4)
This screen shows the flow rate calibration values. These values are found in the
'instrument.ini' file. These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding
files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• rule 1, rule 2, rule 3: correspond to 3 linear segments used for the flow rate
calibration.
• Limit 1: low limit of each linear segment. Unit: ml/min.
• Limit 2: high limit of each linear segment. Unit: ml/min.
• Slope: slope of each linear segment. Unit: rpm.
• Intercept: intercept for each linear segment. Unit: rpm.
HP Module: Flow Rate Calibration (2/4): New Calibration, Control and Measurement
Figure 5-55A:

• Method selection: select the method used for the calibration

volume to measure the volume of liquid delivered by the pump
weight to measure the weight of liquid delivered by the pump
The information displayed on the screen depends on the method chosen.
Volume Method (see Figure 5-55A)
• Flow rate: select the theoretical flow rate (1 ml/min, 1.5 ml/min or 2 ml/min).
The corresponding theoretical speed of the high-pressure pump motor is
indicated in rpm.
• Duration: select the test duration. When the test is launched, the high-
pressure pump is started and is stopped automatically after the selected
duration. Unit: min.
• START TEST or STOP TEST: start/stop the test. When the test is started, the
high-pressure pump is switched on, runs at the theoretical selected Flow
rate, and the timer starts. When the test is stopped, the high-pressure pump
is switched off and the timer is frozen.
• Remaining time: remaining time before the end of the test. This counter is
initialized with the Duration value. Unit: min.
• TIMER RESET: set the timer to the Duration value.
• Data entry for calc.: these fields are used to enter the data for the flow rate
calculation
Time: this field indicates the delivery time since the test start. This
value can be edited. If it is edited, the time should be indicated in
seconds.
Volume: the measured volume of the liquid delivered should be
entered here. Unit: ml.
• LAUNCH CALC.: launch the flow rate calculation, based on the Time and
Volume values.
• Data calculation results: ml/min: these 3 fields indicate the calculated flow
rates compared to the theoretical flow rate. Unit: ml/min.
• 1.0: calculated flow rate for the theoretical 1.0ml/min.

Weight Method
Figure 5-55B:
• Density: indicates the density of the liquid used for the test. This value can be
edited.
• Flow rate: select the theoretical flow rate (1 ml/min, 1.5 ml/min or 2 ml/min).
The corresponding theoretical speed of the high-pressure pump motor is
indicated in rpm.
calculation
seconds.
Weight: the measured weight of the liquid delivered should be
entered here. Unit: g.
• LAUNCH CALC.: launch the flow rate calculation, based on the Time and
Weight values.
• Data calculation results: ml/min: these 3 fields indicate the calculated flow
rates compared to the theoretical flow rate. Unit: ml/min.


HP Module: Flow Rate Calibration (3/4): New Calibration, Results
Figure 5-56:
This screen summarizes the measurements done with the previous screen and
calculates the slope and intercept. All the flow rate values can be edited. After
changing of a value, the calculation is automatically done and the new results are
displayed.
• rule 1, rule 2, rule 3: correspond to 3 linear segments used for the flow rate
calibration.
• Theo. flow rate: theoretical flow rate. Can be modified by entering a new
value.
• Meas. flow rate: measured flow rate. Can be modified by entering a new
value.
• Limit 1: low limit of each linear segment. Unit: ml/min.
• Limit 2: high limit of each linear segment. Unit: ml/min.
• Slope: slope of each linear segment. Unit: rpm/ml/min.
• Intercept: intercept for each linear segment. Unit: rpm.
file), and replaces the previous values. This button is available only if a
calculation is done and if the level 2 password was entered.

HP Module: Flow Rate Calibration (4/4): Verification
Figure 5-57A:
• Method selection: select the method used for the verification

volume to measure the volume of liquid delivered by the pump
weight to measure the weight of liquid delivered by the pump
The information displayed on the screen depends on the method chosen.
Volume Method (see Figure 5-57A)
• Flow rate: select the target flow rate. The corresponding theoretical speed of
the high-pressure pump motor is indicated in rpm.
calculation
seconds.
Volume: the measured volume of the liquid delivered should be
entered here. Unit: ml.

• LAUNCH CALCULATION: launch the flow rate calculation, based on the

Time and Volume values.
• Data calculation results: ml/min, Calculated: this field indicates the
calculated flow rate. Unit: ml/min. Next to the field, there is an indication of
the status of the measured flow rate compared to the theoretical flow rate:
✔ indicates that the measured flow rate is within tolerance.
✘ indicates that the measured flow rate is out of range.
Weight Method
Figure 5-57B:
• Density: indicates the density of the liquid used for the test. This value can be
edited.
• Flow rate: select the target flow rate. The corresponding theoretical speed of
the high-pressure pump motor is indicated in rpm.
calculation
seconds.

Weight: the measured weight of the liquid delivered should be

entered here. Unit: g.
• LAUNCH CALCULATION: launch the flow rate calculation, based on the
Time and Weight values.
• Data calculation results: ml/min, Calculated: this field indicates the
calculated flow rate. Unit: ml/min. Next to the field, there is an indication of
the status of the measured flow rate compared to the theoretical flow rate:
√ indicates that the measured flow rate is within tolerance.
X indicates that the measured flow rate is out of range.
5.10.19 THERMAL CONTROL Button
Selecting the THERMAL CONTROL button in the Main Screen (2/2), opens a set of
seven screens for testing the thermal module.
Thermal Module Control (1/7): Current Values
Figure 5-58:
D-10 Thermal control module (1/7)
• Thermal regulation status: indicates if the thermal regulation is on or off.

• Calculated temperature: result of the temperature calculation, based on the
Pt100 sensor signal, the Analog to Digital Converter result and the thermal
correction parameters.
• Measured temp. (A/D 12 bits): result of the 12-bit Analog to Digital
conversion of the Pt100 signal (scale: 0 to 4095). Unit: points.
• PWM total value: Pulse Width Modulation value, applied to the Peltier effect
modules. Unit: %. This function is currently not available.
• PWM dyn. part value: Pulse Width Modulation dynamic part value. Unit: %.
This function is currently not available.
• Peltier module sense: indicates the electrical current intensity that is sensed
through the Peltier effect modules. Unit: points. This function is currently not
available.

Thermal Module Control (2/7): Automatic Control
Figure 5-59:
• STOP THERMAL REGULATION: start/stop the thermal regulation. The

current Pulse Width Modulation value is frozen when the regulation is
stopped.
• Calculated temperature: current temperature value. Unit: °C.
• Target temperature (test use only): selection of the target temperature.
Unit: °C.
Warning: this function is for test use only.
available.
Thermal Module Control (3/7): Manual Control
Figure 5-60:
• STOP THERMAL REGULATION: start/stop the thermal regulation. The

current Pulse Width Modulation value is frozen when the regulation is
stopped.
• Calculated temperature: current temperature value. Unit: °C.

• PWM value: selection of the Pulse Width Modulation value to apply to the
Peltier modules.
• SET PELTIER 100% PWM: apply a 100% Pulse Width Modulation to the
Peltier modules.
• RESET PELTIER 0% PWM: apply a 0% Pulse Width Modulation to the Peltier
modules (modules switched off).
available.
Thermal Module Control (4/7): Thermal Parameters
Figure 5-61:
This screen shows the values of the parameters of the thermal module. These values
are found in the 'instrument.ini' file. These values can be modified and saved in the
corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• System gain: gain of the interface board hardware. No unit.

• System offset: offset of the interface board hardware. Unit: °C.
• Sensor offset: sensor correction. Unit: °C.
• Gradient offset: cartridge module gradient correction. Unit: °C.

Thermal Module Control (5/7): Temperature Calibration, System Parameters
Figure 5-62:
• Current calc. temp.: current calculated temperature, based on the current

set of parameters. When the calibration is launched, the current temperature
is calculated with the default thermal correction parameters:
System gain = 1.0
System offset = 0.0
Sensor offset = 0.0
Gradient offset = 0.0
• START CALIBRATION: start/stop the calibration process. When the
calibration is launched, the displayed temperature is calculated with the
default thermal correction parameters.
• Temp.: low value: low point used for the calibration.
• Temp.: high value: high point used for the calibration.
• Internal meas.: values of the system for the low point and high point after
memorization.
• External ref.: temperatures measured by an externally calibrated reference
instrument, corresponding to the low point and high point for the calibration.
• MEMORISE: store the internal current measurement and associate it with the
external reference temperature.
• CALCULATION OF THE OFFSET AND THE GAIN: launch the calculation of
the new offset and gain, based on the internal measurements (memorized low
and high values) and on the external reference measurements.
• System Offset: current offset value (from 'instrument.ini' file) and new
calculated offset value. Unit: °C.
• System Gain: current gain value (from 'instrument.ini' file) and new
calculated gain value. No unit.
file) and replace the previous values. This button is available only if a new

Thermal Module Control (6/7): Temperature Calibration, Sensor Offset Correction
Figure 5-63:

is calculated with the current System gain and System offset, and with:
Sensor offset = 0.0
calibration is launched, the displayed temperature is calculated with:
Sensor offset = 0.0
• Temperature: point used for the calibration.
• Internal meas.: value of the system for the calibration point after
memorization.
• External ref.: temperature measured by an external calibrated reference
instrument.
• MEMORISE: store the internal current measurement and associate it to the
• CALCULATION OF THE SENSOR OFFSET: launch the calculation of the
new sensor offset, based on the memorized internal measurement and on the
external reference measurement.
• Sensor Offset: current offset value (from 'instrument.ini' file) and new
• SAVE RESULTS: store the calibration result in the system ('instrument.ini'
file) and replace the previous value. This button is available only if a new

Thermal Module Control (7/7): Temperature Calibration, Gradient Offset Correction
Figure 5-64:

is calculated with the current System gain, System offset and Sensor offset,
and with:
calibration is launched, the displayed temperature is calculated with:
• Temperature: point used for the calibration.
• Internal meas.: value of the system for the calibration point after
memorization.
• External ref.: temperature measured by an external calibrated reference
instrument.
• MEMORISE: store the internal current measurement and associate it to the
• CALCULATION OF THE GRADIENT OFFSET: launch the calculation of the
new gradient offset, based on the memorized internal measurement and on
the external reference measurement.
• Gradient Offset: current offset value (from 'instrument.ini' file) and new
• SAVE RESULTS: store the calibration result in the system ('instrument.ini'
file) and replace the previous value. This button is available only if a new
5.10.20 SAMPLE ARM Button
Selecting the SAMPLE ARM button in the Main Screen (2/2), opens a screen for
testing the sample arm module.

Figure 5-65:
D-10 Sample arm module
This screen gives access to different functions of the sample arm module:
• TH MOVE: test the TH movement
• Z MOVE: test the Z movement
• X MOVE: test the X movement
• BARCODE: test the barcode reader
• ALL STATUS: visualize the status of all components
• ARM STATUS: visualize the status of all sample arm components
• PROBE REPLACEMENT: replace the sample probe
• DILUT./WASH STAT. REPLA.: replace the dilution/wash station
• SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION: move the sample arm to its home position
• HALL SENSOR TEST: test the Hall effect adapter sensor
• TUBE IDENTIFICATION: test the tube height sensing
5.10.20.1 TH MOVE Button
Selecting the TH MOVE button in the Sample Arm Module screen opens a set of
four screens for testing the TH movement.
TH Move (1/4): TH Macro Movement
Figure 5-66:
D-10 Sample arm module: TH (1/4)
• Home movement: if checked, the tube holder will move to its home position.

• Tube height measurement: if checked, a tube height measurement will be

done for the selected tube number.
• START: start the selected movement.
• Tube height measured value: result of the tube height measurement. Unit:
motor steps.
• TH step counter: TH step counter. Reset when a home movement is done.
• Home sensor: status of the TH home sensor
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Axis sensor: status of the TH axis (position) sensor
• Tube height sensor: status of the tube height sensor
sensor slot.
the receiver.
TH Move (2/4): TH Elementary Movement
Figure 5-67:
• Direction: select the movement direction (from up to down or from down to

up).
• Movement select: select the kind of movement
steps: move for the selected number of steps.
strips: move for the selected number of strips (see 2.2.7).
sensors: move until the sensor configuration defined on the screen is
met.

• selection: when the sensors movement is selected, it defines the sensor(s)

to be used as final position.
• target: when the sensors movement is selected, it defines the final status for
each selected sensor:
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• current: indicates the current status of each sensor:
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Home sensor, Axis sensor, Tube height sensor: sensors used for the TH
movement.
• Power on motor: select the motor supply
run (full power)
hold (low power)
free (no supply)
• APPLY: apply the selected power to the motor (only if the motor is standby
state).
TH Move (3/4): TH Movement Parameters
Figure 5-68:
This screen shows the value of the TH movement parameter. This value is found in
the 'instrument.ini' file. It can be modified and saved in the 'instrument.ini' file only if
the user has entered the level 2 password.
• All movements speed index: TH movement speed selection for service use.
Index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
• TH adjustment offset: mechanical offset for the TH movement. Unit: steps.


TH Move (4/4): Speed Parameters
Figure 5-69:
This screen shows the value of the TH movement speed parameter for several
sequences in the 'Dia.exe' software. These values are found in different *.ini files.
They can be modified and saved in the corresponding *.ini file only if the user has
entered the level 2 password. The speed is defined by an index from 0 (low speed)
to 9 (high speed).
• Init. Movement: used in the home movement.

• Test selection: select the assay (A1c or A2/F/A1c or Decont) for two
additional parameters which are assay-dependent.
• Run: used during the run (sample preparation).
• Tube Holding: used during the tube holding sequence.
5.10.20.2 Z MOVE Button
Selecting the Z MOVE button in the Sample Arm Module screen opens a set of four
screens for testing the Z movement.

Z Move (1/4): Z Macro Movement
Figure 5-70:
D-10 Sample arm module: Z (1/4)
• Home movement: if checked, the probe will move to its home position.
• To sample aspiration position (tube): if checked, the probe will move to the
primary tube sampling position for the selected assay and the selected tube
number.
• To sample aspiration position (microvial): if checked, the probe will move
to the microvial sampling position for the selected assay and the selected
tube number.
• Test selection: select the assay (A1c or A2/F/A1c or Decont). This selection
defines the parameters for the probe movement.
• Tube position: define the position of the selected movement (from 1 to 10).
• Z step counter: Z step counter. Reset when a home movement is done.
• Home sensor: status of the Z home sensor
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Axis sensor: status of the Z axis (position) sensor

Z Move (2/4): Z Elementary Movement
Figure 5-71:
• Direction: select the movement direction (from up to down or from down to

up).
met.
sensor slot.
the receiver.
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Home sensor, Axis sensor: sensors used for the Z movement.
run (full power)
hold (low power)
free (no supply)
state).

Z Move (3/4): Z Movement Parameters
Figure 5-72:
This screen shows the value of the Z movement parameter. This value is found in
the 'instrument.ini' file. It can be modified and saved in the 'instrument.ini' file only if
• All movements speed index: Z movement speed selection for service use.
• Z adjustment offset: mechanical offset for the Z movement. Unit: steps.
Note: in the current design, the Z adjustment offset is always set to 0.

Z Move (4/4): Speed Parameters
Figure 5-73:
This screen shows the value of the Z movement speed parameter for several

to 9 (high speed).

• Tube piercing: used during the tube piercing sequence.
5.10.20.3 X MOVE Button
Selecting the X MOVE button in the Sample Arm Module screen opens a set of four
screens for testing the X movement.
X Move (1/4): X Macro Movement
Figure 5-74:
D-10 Sample arm module: X (1/4)
• Home movement: if checked, the sample arm will move to its home position.
• To probe wash position: if checked, the sample arm will move to the probe
wash position.
• To tube: if checked, the sample arm will move to the selected tube number.
• To rack door opening position: if checked, the sample arm will move to the
position used to open the rack door.
• X step counter: X step counter. Reset when a home movement is done.
• Home sensor: status of the X home sensor
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Axis sensor: status of the X axis (position) sensor

• Hall effect sensor: detection of a magnet in front of the sensor
magnet
no magnet
X Move (2/4): X Elementary Movement
Figure 5-75:
• Direction: select the movement direction (from left to right or from right to
left).
met.
sensor slot.
the receiver.
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Home sensor, Axis sensor: sensors used for the X movement.

• Hall effect sensor: current status of the magnet detection in front of the
sensor
magnet
no magnet
run (full power)
hold (low power)
free (no supply)
state).
X Move (3/4): X Movement Parameters
Figure 5-76:
• All movements speed index: X movement speed selection for service use.
X Move (4/4): Speed Parameters
Figure 5-77:
This screen shows the value of the X movement speed parameter for several
to 9 (high speed).


• Test selection: select the assay (A1c or A2/F/A1c or Decont) for one
additional parameter which is assay-dependent.
5.10.20.4 BARCODE Button
Selecting the BARCODE button in the Sample Arm Module screen opens a set of
two screens for testing the barcode reader.
Barcode (1/2): Manual Control
Figure 5-78:
D-10 Sample arm module: barcode (1/2)
This screen is used to test a single barcode reading.
• Tube position: select the tube number for the barcode reading (from 1 to 10).
• GO TO TUBE: move the sample arm to the selected Tube position.
• BARCODE LED ON or BARCODE LED OFF: switch on/off the red LED
source of the barcode reader.
• Last code read: indicates the last barcode read by the barcode reader.
• CLEAR LAST CODE: clear the Last code read field.
• RACK INTRODUCTION: shortcut to the Rack Introduction (1/1) screen.

Barcode (2/2): Automatic Control

D-10 Sample arm module: barcode (2/2) D-10 Sample arm module: barcode (2/2)
This screen is used to test the barcode reading on several sample tubes in a rack.
• Result of reading: indicates, for each tube, the barcode read during the test.
• X pos.: indicates the exact X position (in steps from the home position) at
which the barcode was read.
• Tube nb: the entire part of the number indicates the tube number identified by
the software. The decimal part of the number indicates the range for each
tube. The nominal range is from 0.2 to 0.8. Next to the field, there is an
indication of the result:
✔ indicates that the result is in the standard tube range
✘ indicates that the result is out of range
• START or STOP: start/stop the reading of the rack previously introduced in
the instrument.
• CLEAR: clear the Result of reading table.
5.10.20.5 ALL STATUS Button
Refer to Section 5.10.13.
5.10.20.6 SAMPLE ARM STATUS Button
Selecting the SAMPLE ARM STATUS button in the Sample Arm Module screen
opens a set of two screens that show the sample arm components status. In
addition to the sensors status, the screens indicate the logical level at the input of
the MC.

Sample Arm Status (1/2)
Figure 5-80:
D-10 Sample arm module: status (1/2)
• X Axis Sensor, Z Axis Sensor, TH Axis Sensor: status of the X, Z, and TH

axis (position) sensors
• X Home Sensor, Z Home Sensor, TH Home Sensor: status of the X, Z, and
TH home sensors
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Tube Height Sensor: status of the tube height sensor
sensor slot.
the receiver.
• Hall Effect Sensor: detection of a magnet in front of the sensor
magnet
no magnet

Sample Arm Status (2/2)
Figure 5-81:
D-10 Sample arm module: status (2/2)
• TH step counter, Z step counter, X step counter: last values of the step
counters. Reset when a home movement is done.
• TH adjustment offset: mechanical offset for the TH movement. Unit: steps.
• Z adjustment offset: mechanical offset for the Z movement. Unit: steps.
Note: in the current design, the Z adjustment offset is always set to 0.
5.10.20.7 PROBE REPLACEMENT Button
Selecting the PROBE REPLACEMENT button in the Sample Arm Module screen
starts the probe replacement sequence. See D-10 Operation Manual, Section 6.3.
5.10.20.8 DILUT./WASH STAT. REPLA. Button
Selecting the DILUT./WASH STAT. REPLA. button in the Sample Arm Module
screen starts the dilution/wash station replacement sequence. See D-10 Operation
Manual, Section 5.2.
5.10.20.9 SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION Button
Selecting the SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION button, in the Sample Arm Module
screen starts the Z, TH and X home movements.
5.10.20.10 HALL SENSOR TEST Button
Selecting the HALL SENSOR TEST button in the Sample Arm Module screen
opens a screen for testing the Hall effect adapter sensor.

Figure 5-82:
D-10 Sample arm module: Hall effect (1/1)
• First tube: select the position of the first tube to be tested (from 1 to 9).
• Last tube: select the position of the last tube to be tested (from 1 to 9).
• START: start the Hall sensor test. The sample arm moves close to the slot
which is just before the slot of the First tube (-90 position in the first column),
checks the Hall effect sensor and displays the test result. It then moves 10
steps towards the right (-80 position in the first column), checks again and
displays the result. This sequence is repeated until the slot corresponding to
the First tube (0 position in the second column). The arm then moves to the
slot of the Last tube (0 position in the third column), checks the Hall effect
sensor and displays the test result. It then moves 10 steps towards the right
(+10 position in the third column), checks again and displays the result. This
sequence is repeated until 90 steps after the slot corresponding to the Last
tube (+90 position in the fourth column). The arm then goes back to its home
position.
• magnet: indicates the test results
no: no magnet is detected.
yes: a magnet is detected.
5.10.20.11 TUBE IDENTIFICATION Button
Selecting the TUBE IDENTIFICATION button in the Sample Arm Module screen
opens a set of three screens for testing the tube identification.

Tube Identification (1/3): Parameters
Figure 5-83:
D-10 Sample arm mod.: Tube Ident. (1/3)
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the tube identification.
Some parameters are based on the selected assay. These values are found in the
*.ini files. These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding files only if
• TH adjustment Offset: mechanical offset for the TH movement. Unit: steps.

• Limits for primary tubes (steps): TH measurement range for primary tubes.
Unit: steps.
• Limits for microvials (steps): TH measurement range for microvials. Unit:
steps.
Tube Identification (2/3): TH Offset Measurement
Figure 5-84:
D-10 Sample arm mod.: Tube Ident. (2/3)

• START: start the TH offset measurement process. The arm moves from its
home position to tube position 1 and senses the tube height for an empty
rack. The result is displayed when the arm comes back to its home position.
The same sequence is then repeated for tube positions 5 and 10.
• TH result position 1, TH result position 5, TH result position 10: indicates
the result of the tube height sensing. Unit: steps.
• Calculated mean value: mean value of the three tube height measurements.
Unit: steps.
• Theoretical TH result: theoretical value of the tube height sensing for an
empty rack (7775 steps).
• TH Offset: current TH offset value and new calculated value. Unit: steps.
• SAVE RESULTS: store the result of the measurement in the system
('instrument.ini' file), and replaces the previous value. This button is available
only if a new determination is made and if the level 2 password was entered.
Tube Identification (3/3): Tube Identification Test

D-10 Sample arm mod.: Tube Ident. (3/3) D-10 Sample arm mod.: Tube Ident. (3/3)
• tube1, tube2, tube3… tube10: each tube number can be selected for the
test by checking the corresponding box.
• all: automatically select all tube numbers (from 1 to 10).
• START: start the tube identification test. The arm moves from its home
position to each selected tube position and senses the tube height. The
measured value is corrected with the TH offset. The results for each tube are
displayed when the arm comes back to its home position.
• A1c or A2/F/A1c or Decont: select the assay. The tube height sensing speed
is defined for each assay.
• Template: select a *.tpl (template) file containing the awaited test result.
Three *.tpl files are available in the \Dia\Service\Template\VnV folder. The
'Rack1_VnV.tpl' file corresponds to the TH movement adjustment tool (P/N:
2200432). Two other files 'bad_VnV.tpl' and 'Rack2_VnV.tpl' are available as
examples.

• TH result: indicates the result of the tube height sensing. Unit: steps.
• corr. result: indicates the result of the tube height sensing corrected with the
TH offset.
• magnet: indicates if a magnet was detected (yes) or not (no).
• tube: indicates the tube identification result:
no tube
microvial
primary tube
Next to the field, there is an indication of the final tube identification result
(comparison with the awaited result in the selected *.tpl file – when a *.tpl file
is selected):
✔ indicates a correct result.
✘ indicates a difference.
5.10.21 MISC. Button
Selecting the MISC. button in the Main Screen (2/2), opens a set of 2 screens for
additional functions.
Miscellaneous (1/2)
Figure 5-86:
D-10 Miscellaneous (1/2)
• FILE IMPORT: open an IMPORT screen (see Figure 5-2B) in order to import
a file from a floppy disk. The file import is only possible if the user has entered
the level 2 password.
• FILE EXPORT: open an EXPORT screen (see Figure 5-2A) in order to export
a file to a floppy disk.
• SETUP: launch an application from a floppy disk (firmware upload, parameter
update…). It is only possible if the level 2 password was entered (see
5.10.21.1).
• LANGUAGE: set up the language parameters (see 5.10.21.2).
• LIS: set up the LIS parameters (see 5.10.21.3).
• RS232 TEST: test the RS232 port.
• COUNTERS: visualize the injection counter (see 5.10.21.4).
• REPORT: set up the patient report (see 5.10.21.5).

• NON-STOP RUN LAUNCH: launch the 'Dia_nsr.exe' application. Once a rack

is introduced in the instrument, the samples are analyzed 18 times (standard
value) without pause. No tube identification is required: an automatic
identification is done for each sample tube.
• TOUCH SCREEN CALIB.: launch the touch screen calibration process (see
5.10.21.6).
• Fan sense: indicates the electrical current intensity sensed through the main
chassis fan. Unit: points or volts.
Miscellaneous (2/2)
Figure 5-87:
• PRINTER TEST: print a test page (showing a D-10 instrument).

• Selected file: select a file to be printed.
• PRINT FILE: print the Selected file.
• Format: select the format of the screen shot file (Bmp or Jpg).
• Jpg Quality: indicates the ratio between the picture quality and the file size
(80% is a good compromise – Jpg selection only). Unit: %.
• START: launch the screen shot function (applicable only on the ¼ of VGA
screen). The final *.bmp or *.jpg files are identified in the following way:
YYYYMMDDhhmmss.bmp or YYYYMMDDhhmmss.jpg
Where:
"YYYYMMDD" is the file creation date (year, month, day format)
"hhmmss" is the file creation time (hour, minute, second format)
All of these files are stored in the \Dia\Service\ScreenShot folder.
5.10.21.1 SETUP Button
Selecting the SETUP button in the Miscellaneous (1/2) screen opens a screen for
launching an application from a floppy disk.

Figure 5-88:
D-10 Setup
• LANGUAGE: set up the language parameters (see 5.10.21.2).

• LIS: set up the LIS parameters (see 5.10.21.3).
• REPORT: set up the patient report (see 5.10.21.5).
• SETUP: launch an application from a floppy disk.
5.10.21.2 LANGUAGE Button
Selecting the LANGUAGE button in the Miscellaneous (1/2) screen opens a screen
for setting up the language parameters.
Figure 5-89:
D-10 Language
• User software (DIA) language: select the language used in the 'Dia.exe'
application. Currently available options include English, Japanese, and
Français.
• Setting of the languages: set up three additional parameters linked to each
language (Pressure unit, Date format and Time format).
• Language: select the language for which the parameters will be edited.
• Pressure unit: choose the pressure unit. Four options are available: Kg/cm2,
Psi, Mpa or Bar.
• Date format: choose the date format. Three options are available:
Month/Day/Year, Year/Month/Day or Day/Month/Year.
• Time format: choose the time format. Two options are available: 0-12h
AM/PM or 0-24h.


5.10.21.3 LIS Button
Selecting the LIS button in the Miscellaneous (1/2) screen opens a screen for
setting up the LIS parameters.
Figure 5-90:
D-10 LIS
• Port: select the communication port on the PC Motherboard. Port 4 is

selected by default and this parameter cannot be edited.
• Baud Rate: select the baud rate. Five options are available: 1200, 2400,
4800 or 9600.
• Data Bits: select the number of data bits. Two options are available: 7 or 8.
• Stop Bits: select the number of stop bits. Two options are available: 1 or 2.
• Parity: select the parity. Three options are available: None, Odd or Even.
• Results waiting to be transmitted: indicates the number of results waiting to
be transmitted from the D-10 to the host computer.
• FLUSH: erase the list of results waiting to be transmitted.
5.10.21.4 COUNTERS Button
Selecting the COUNTERS button in the Miscellaneous (1/2) screen opens a screen
for visualizing the injection counter.

Figure 5-91:
D-10 Counters (1/1)
• Injection counter: indicates the injection number since the beginning of the
instrument "life". This value cannot be edited.
5.10.21.5 REPORT Button
Selecting the REPORT button in the Miscellaneous (1/2) screen opens a screen for
setting up the patient report.
Figure 5-92:
D-10 Report
• Add Reference values to the printout of the patient report (only for the
A1c test): print/don't print the reference values and the associated
information (found in the 'Profile2.ini' file) on the patient test report.
• DONE: save the modified parameter. A verification message is displayed to
• CANCEL: cancel the modification. A verification screen is displayed to
5.10.21.6 TOUCH SCREEN CALIB. Button
Selecting the TOUCH SCREEN CALIB. button in the Miscellaneous (1/2) screen
opens a screen for calibrating the touch screen.

A confirmation screen is displayed to confirm or abort the calibration process:
Figure 5-93:
D-10 Touch screen calibration: warning
message
When the calibration process is launched, the following screen is displayed:
Figure 5-94:
D-10 Touch screen calibration: first step
• DONE: record the positions of the 9 crosses at the end of the process. If this
button is used before clicking on the last cross, the process is aborted and
returns to the Miscellaneous (1/2) screen.
• CANCEL: abort the touch screen calibration process and return to the
Miscellaneous (1/2) screen.
After clicking on the last cross, the following screen is displayed:
Figure 5-95:
D-10 Touch screen calibration: final step

• DONE: record the new values of the touch screen calibration and return to the
• CANCEL: abort the touch screen calibration process and return to the
5.10.22 MACRO Button
Selecting the MACRO button in the Main Screen (2/2), opens a set of 2 screens for
testing several high level functions.
Macro (1/2)
Figure 5-96:
D-10 Macro functions (1/2)

• Tube: select the tube number.
• START PICK UP, DILU. AND LOAD OF A SAMPLE (TUBE): start the
sample preparation and loading sequence for a primary tube (pick up, dilution
and loading into the 23µL sample loop).
• START PICK UP AND DILU. OF A SAMPLE (TUBE): start the sample
preparation sequence for a primary tube.
• START LOAD OF A SAMPLE (DILUTION CHAMBER): start the sample
loading sequence for a primary tube (sample prepared in the dilution chamber
and loaded in the 23µL sample loop).
• START LOAD OF A SAMPLE (MICROVIAL): start the sample loading
sequence for a prediluted sample (from the microvial directly to the 23µL
sample loop).
• START DILU. CHAMBER AND PROBE WASHING: start the dilution
chamber flush and wash sequence and the sample probe cleaning sequence.
• START PROBE WASHING: start the sample probe cleaning sequence.
Note: the field near the bottom of the screen is used to display information about
the current step of the running sequence.

Macro (2/2)
Figure 5-97:
D-10 Macro functions (2/2)

• Tube: select the tube number.
• Primer Tube: if checked, a "special" run (specific for a primer tube) is done.
• START WARM UP: start the warm up run (warm up gradient).
• START BEGIN RUN: start the begin run (begin run gradient).
• START END RUN: start the end run (end run gradient).
• START RUN: start the complete run sequence (sample preparation, sample
loading, analysis and chromatogram printout).
• START CHROMA: start the chromatogram sequence (it supposes that the
sample is loaded in the 23µL sample loop).
• Remaining time: remaining time before the end of the current sequence. The
associated field gives the same information with a bargraph display.
• CALCULATION: start the calculation for a selected *.raw file and create the
*.dam file. The *.raw file is selected by clicking in the associated white field.
5.10.23 VERSIONS Button
Selecting the VERSIONS button in the Main Screen (2/2), opens a screen showing
the installed versions of software and firmware.
Figure 5-98:
D-10 Service software version (1/1)

5.10.24 ERRORS Button
Selecting the ERRORS button in the Main Screen (2/2), opens a screen showing the
last errors on the instrument. The information is found in the 'Dialog.txt' file.
Figure 5-99:
D-10 Last Errors (1/1)
5.10.25 Default Values Table
The following table gives the default values of the most important process
parameters, which were previously described. These values refer to Dia software
version 3.0B.
Service Software Default

Parameter Assay
Screen Value
A1c 20
1st dilution Sample volume (µl) A2/F/A1c 20
Decont 20
A1c 480
1st dilution Diluant volume (µl) A2/F/A1c 480
Decont 480
A1c 20
2nd dilution Sample volume (µl) A2/F/A1c 20
D-10 Syringe module Decont 20
(4/6) A1c 680
2nd dilution Diluant volume (µl) A2/F/A1c 680
Decont 680
A1c 230
Z sample pos. for tube (strips) A2/F/A1c 230
Decont 230
A1c 180
Z sample pos. for microvial (strips) A2/F/A1c 180
Decont 180
A1c 745
From Dil. Well to Valve Vol. (µl) A2/F/A1c 745
D-10 Syringe module Decont 745
(5/6) A1c 250
Microvial Sample Vol. (µl) A2/F/A1c 250
Decont 250


Parameter Assay
Screen Value
A1c 460
Microvial add. Vol. to Valve (µl) A2/F/A1c 460
Decont 460
A1c 20
D-10 Syringe module
Injection delay (0.1s) A2/F/A1c 20
(5/6) (continued)
Decont 20
A1c 4
Injection Valve speed index A2/F/A1c 4
Decont 4
High vacuum level (points) - 76
D-10 Syringe module Offset for the low vacuum level
- 5
(6/6) (points)
or High level time out (0.1s) - 60
D-10 Syringe module Dilution valve low level time out
(3A/6) - 5
(0.1s)
Wash valve low level time out (0.1s) - 5
Low vacuum - 118 points
High vacuum - 125 points
D-10 Degasser module Time out - 120s
(3/4) Wash bubble det. - 0
Buf. 1 bubble det. - 0
Buf. 2 bubble det. - 0
Buf. 1/2, Wash Syr. Asp. Speed - 5
D-10 Degasser module Buf. 1/2, Wash Syr. Deli. Speed - 4
(4/4) Number of strokes, Buffer 1/2 - 38
Number of strokes, Wash - 8
A1c 36
Sample rate index A2/F/A1c 36
Decont 36
A1c 1
Reference adjustment A2/F/A1c 1
D-10 Detector module Decont 0
(3/4) A1c 150
Light source intensity A2/F/A1c 150
Decont 150
A1c 64
Reference gain value A2/F/A1c 64
Decont 64
A1c 16106127
Maximum absorption A2/F/A1c 16106127
Decont 16106127
A1c 8388608
D-10 Detector module
Minimum absorption A2/F/A1c 8388608
(4/4)
Decont 8388608
A1c 8808038
Typical absorption A2/F/A1c 8808038
Decont 8808038


Parameter Assay
Screen Value
A1c 240
Maximum light source intensity A2/F/A1c 240
D-10 Detector module Decont 240
(4/4) (continued) A1c 470
Baseline percentage A2/F/A1c 470
Decont 470
D-10 Rack door module Run with rack door - yes
(2/2) Rack door monitor - yes
D-10 Front cover module
Front door monitor - yes
(2/2)
D-10 HP module:
7 port, 3 pos. Valve Speed Index - 4
pump, valve (4/17)
A1c 4
D-10 HP module:
7 port, 3 pos. Valve Speed Index A2/F/A1c 4
pump, valve (5/17)
Decont 4
Syringe Aspiration Speed - 8
D-10 HP module:
Syringe Delivery Speed - 4
pump, valve (6/17)
Number of strokes - 3
D-10 HP module: % of Buffer 2 - 50
pump, valve (7/17) Duration of the test - 15
A1c 2000psi
Safety High Pressure limit A2/F/A1c 2000psi
Decont 2000psi
A1c 1067psi
Run High Pressure limit A2/F/A1c 1067psi
Decont 1067psi
A1c 12
D-10 HP module:
Meas. Number for High limit average A2/F/A1c 12
pump, valve (8/17)
Decont 12
A1c 130psi
Run Low Pressure limit A2/F/A1c 130psi
Decont 1psi
A1c 60
Meas. Number for Low limit average A2/F/A1c 60
Decont 90
D-10 Sample arm module:
All movements speed index - 5
TH (3/4)
Init. Movement - 2
A1c 6
Run A2/F/A1c 6
Decont 6
TH (4/4)
A1c 2
Tube Holding A2/F/A1c 2
Decont 2
Z (3/4)
Init. Movement - 2
Z (4/4)


Parameter Assay
Screen Value
A1c 6
Run A2/F/A1c 6
D-10 Sample arm module: Decont 6
Z (4/4) (continued) A1c 1
Tube piercing A2/F/A1c 1
Decont 1
X (3/4)
Init. Movement - 9
D-10 Sample arm module: A1c 2
X (4/4) Run A2/F/A1c 2
Decont 2
A1c 6675 / 0
Limits for primary tubes (steps) A2/F/A1c 6675 / 0
D-10 Sample arm mod.: Decont 6675 / 0
Tube Ident. (1/3) A1c 7675 / 6675
Limits for microvials (steps) A2/F/A1c 7675 / 6675
Decont 7675 / 6675
D-10 Miscellaneous Format - Jpg
(2/2) Jpg Quality - 80
Language (Dia) - English
Language (Setting) - English
D-10 Language Pressure unit - Kg/cm²
Date format - Month/Day/Year
Time format - 0-12h AM/PM
Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
D-10 LIS
Stop Bits - 1
Parity - None
5.10.26 Typical Sensed Values Table
The following table gives the typical values of the sensed information (see 5.10.5)
available for motors, solenoids…
Sense Identification OFF Value ON Value

Device
Service Software Screen (points) (points)
Liquid pump sense
Liquid Pump 0 >100
Dilution valve sense
Dilution Valve 0 >100
Wash valve sense
Wash Valve 0 >100
3 way valve sense
3-Way Valve 0 >100
Sense
Degasser Vacuum Pump 0 >100

Sense Identification OFF Value ON Value

Device
Service Software Screen (points) (points)
Solenoid sense
Rack Door Solenoid 0 >100
D-10 Rack door module (1/2)
Rack motor sense
Rack Positioning Motor 0 >100
D-10 Rack introduction module (1/1)
Solenoid sense not not
Front Cover Solenoid
D-10 Front cover module (1/2) available available
HP pump sense
High Pressure Pump 0 ≥0
HP pump sense
High Pressure Pump 0 ≥0
Prop. Valve sense
Proportioning Valve 0 >100
Prop. Valve sense
Proportioning Valve 0 >100
Fan sense
Main Fan 0 >50

6 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
Unless otherwise specified, the level 2 password should always be used to enter the
Service software in the following procedures.
Passwords:
Level 1: D-10QC
Level 2: DIA904
Level 3: D-10SETUP
Warning: when using the 50mL syringe to prime the high-pressure circuit, do not
pull excessively on the plunger as it may damage the proportioning valve.
For a detailed view of the Service software screens used in the following procedures,
please refer to Section 5.
6.1 List of Procedures

Section Part Description P/N Page
6.2 Front Cover Assembly 2200298 6-5
6.3 Thermal Printer 2200225 6-6
6.4 Buffer Bottle Support N/A 6-8
6.5 Syringe Module 2200248 6-10
6.6 Electronic Module 2200274 6-13
6.7 Cartridge Module 2200267 6-17
6.8 Sample Probe 2200247 6-21
6.9 Dilution/Wash Station 2200288 6-21
6.10 Syringe 3-Way Valve 2200253 6-22
6.11 1mL Motorized Syringe 2200250 6-26
6.12 Thermal Fuse 2200270 6-28
6.13 Degasser Module 2200289 6-29
6.14 Vacuum Pump 2200294 6-33
6.15 Interface Board 2200281 6-35
6.16 Rack Door Module 2200307 6-37
6.17 Proportioning Valve 2200258 6-39
6.18 High Pressure Pump 2200272 6-42
6.19 7-Port, 3-Position HP Valve + 23µL Sample Loop 2200257 6-45
6.20 Pressure Sensor 2200259 6-49
6.21 Column Heater Coil 2200332 6-53
6.22 Z Position Sensor 2200310 6-56
6.23 CCFL Backlight 2200376 6-60


2200275
6.24 Power Supplies 1 & 2 6-62
2200276
6.25 Motherboard (PCM-5896) 2200278 6-65
6.26 LCD Interface Board 2200312 6-71
6.27 LCD Display 2200221 6-73
6.28 Waste Manifold 1 2200325 6-74
6.29 Waste Manifold 2 2200326 6-76
6.30 Hard Disk 2200223 6-78
6.31 Barcode Reader 2200246 6-82
6.32 Detector Module 2200261 6-88
6.33 Rack Input Sensor 2200286 6-90
6.34 Rack Output Sensor 2200287 6-95
6.35 User Interface Module N/A 6-99
6.36 Arm 2200231 6-101
6.37 Rack Drive Module 2200283 6-112
6.38 HP Pump Head N/A 6-116
6.39 HP Pump Piston 2200422 6-119
6.40 HP Pump Piston Seals 2200377 6-121
6.41 Tube Height Sensor 2200238 6-122
6.42 HP Valve Rotor and Stator 2702170 6-132
6.43 Degasser Buffer Tubing 2200295 6-135
6.44 Degasser Wash Tubing 2200296 6-138
6.45 Memory DIMM (64MB) 2200280 6-141
6.46 LCD Internal Board 2200282 6-142
6.47 HPLC Module 2200256 6-145
6.48 HPLC Module Board 2200260 6-152
6.49 Z Board 2200242 6-152
6.50 X Board 2200243 6-156
6.51 Syringe Module Board 2200252 6-158
6.52 Degasser Module Board 2200290 6-161
6.53 Rack Positioning Motor Assembly 2200285 6-163
6.54 Rubber Disk 2200284 6-166
6.55 Temperature Sensor 2200268 6-167
6.56 Peltier Module 2200269 6-169
6.57 Upper Front Door 2200226 6-172
6.58 Lower Front Door 2200227 6-175
6.59 Gas Spring 2200228 6-176
6.60 Micro-Switch 2200423 6-177
6.61 Front Cover Solenoid/Sensor 2200229 6-179
6.62 Front Cover 2200298 6-182
6.63 Rack Door Solenoid 2200311 6-184
6.64 Open Door Sensor 2200308 6-186
6.65 Closed Door Sensor 2200309 6-189
6.66 HP Pump Check Valves 2200379 6-192


6.67 X Home Sensor 2200241 6-194
6.68 X Position Sensor 2200240 6-200
6.69 TH Home Sensor 2200239 6-205
6.70 TH Position Sensor 2200237 6-209
6.71 Z Home Sensor 2200236 6-212
6.72 Belt Pulley (30-Tooth) 2200374 6-218
6.74 Z Gear Belt 2200233 6-224
6.75 TH Gear Belt 2200234 6-226
6.76 Liquid Pump Supply Cable 2200335 6-227
6.77 Liquid Pump 2200251 6-229
6.78 Internal Waste Bottle 2200254 6-230
6.79 LUER Fittings for Internal Waste Bottle 2200327 6-232
2200336
6.80 Pinch Valve Supply Cables 6-233
2200337
6.81 Pinch Valve Tubing 2200255 6-235
6.82 Pinch Valve 2200249 6-237
6.83 Detector Board 2200265 6-239
6.84 Reference Board 2200263 6-241
6.85 Sample Board 2200264 6-244
6.86 LED Board 2200262 6-246
6.87 Flow Cell 2200266 6-250
6.88 Floppy Drive 2200224 6-254
6.89 Floppy Drive Supply Cable 2200350 6-256
6.90 Hard Disk Supply Cable 2200349 6-259
6.91 Thermal Printer Supply Cable 2200358 6-260
6.92 Main Fan 2200306 6-262
6.93 Link Cable: Motherboard > LAN Connector 2200353 6-264
6.94 Link Cable: Motherboard > VGA Connector 2200354 6-265
6.95 Link Cable: Motherboard > RS Connectors 2200357 6-267
6.96 Link Cable: Motherboard > MS & KB Connectors 2200355 6-269
6.97 Link Cable: Interface Board > Rack Feeder Port 2200356 6-271
6.98 Processor Fan (K6) 2200277 6-273
6.99 Processor (K6-2E 350MHz) 2200279 6-275
6.100 Flat Cable: Motherboard > Hard Disk 2200396 6-276
6.101 Flat Cable: Motherboard > Floppy Drive 2200352 6-279
6.102 Flat Cable: LCD Internal Board > LCD Interface Board 2200351 6-282
6.103 Link Cable: Z Board > Hall Effect Adapter Sensor 2200366 6-285
6.104 Hall Effect Adapter Sensor 2200235 6-289
6.105 Power Entry Module 2200421 6-290
6.106 Cable: Power Block > Switch 2200345 6-292
6.107 Cable: Switch > Power Boards 2200346 6-295
6.108 Supply Cable: Interface Board > Motherboard 2200348 6-299
6.109 Supply Cable: Power Boards > Interface Board 2200347 6-301


6.110 LCD Contrast Potentiometer 2200324 6-304
Flat Cable: Interface Board > HPLC Module Board (24-pin) 2200342
6.111 6-306
Flat Cable: Interface Board > HPLC Module Board (34-pin) 2200343
6.112 Flat Cable: Interface Board > X Board 2200341 6-307
Flat Cable: Interface Board > Detector Board 2200340
6.113 6-308
Flat Cable: Interface Board > Degasser Module Board 2200359
6.114 Flat Cable: Interface Board > Syringe Module Board 2200344 6-309
6.115 Vacuum Pump Supply Cable 2200339 6-310
6.116 23µL Sample Loop 2200273 6-312
2200291
6.117 Bubble Detectors 2200292 6-318
2200293
6.118 Sample Arm Flex Cable (12-pin) 2200244 6-319
6.119 Sample Arm Flex Cable (8-pin) 2200245 6-322
6.121 X Gear Belt 2200232 6-332
6.122 Link Cable: HPLC Module Board > Front Cover Solenoid 2200363 6-335
6.123 +24VDC Security Cable 2200364 6-338
6.124 Reference N/A 6-343

6.2 Front Cover Assembly
1) Shut down the D-10, turn off the power and unplug the external power cord.
2) Unscrew the 2 ¼ turn fasteners which lock the left door and open
it.
3) Open the right door.
4) Remove the 4 screws and 4 nylon

washers that fasten the front cover
assembly.
5) Slightly pull the front cover assembly forward.
6) Disconnect the 2 security cables and completely remove the old front cover assembly.
7) Connect the 2 security cables coming from the new front cover assembly.
8) Install the new front cover assembly and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 nylon washers.
9) Close the side doors and tighten the 2 ¼ turn fasteners that lock the left door.

6.3 Thermal Printer
2) Pull out the thermal printer and disconnect the

mini-jack plug and 6-pin DIN plug. Remove the
old thermal printer.
3) Remove the plastic cover from the new

printer in order to access the DIP switch,
which is located underneath the paper roll.
4) Make sure that the DIP switch setting is:
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8

ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Toggle the small switches if necessary.
5) Replace the paper roll and the plastic cover.

6) Connect the 2 plugs to the new thermal printer and install it in the plastic holder.
7) Replace the external power cord.
8) Switch on the D-10 and launch the Service software:

• go to the MAINTAIN screen
• click on the Service button
• click on Exit to Service software
9) Go to the MISC. (2/2) screen and click on the PRINTER

TEST button.
10) Click on YES to start the printing. If the test page is

printed correctly and the text is legible, continue with step
11). If it isn't, go back to step 3) with a new thermal
printer (P/N: 2200225).
11) On the MISC. (2/2) screen:

• click in the white field
• select the instrument.ini file available in the
\Dia folder
• click on PRINT FILE

12) Click on YES to start the printing. If the test page isn't
printed correctly or the text isn't legible, go back to step
3) with a new thermal printer (P/N: 2200225).
6.4 Buffer Bottle Support
1) Remove the 3 reagent bottles. It is not necessary to disconnect the lines.
2) Remove the plastic reagent tray.
3) Unlock the 2 ¼ turn fasteners located at the top,

rear of the D-10.

4) Slide the metal top cover back.
5) Unlock the ¼ turn fastener located near the

thermal printer.
6) Remove the metal bottle support.
7) Replace the metal bottle support and lock the ¼ turn fastener.
8) Slide the metal top cover back on and lock the 2 ¼ turn fasteners.

9) Replace the plastic reagent tray.
10) Replace the 3 reagent bottles. The correct positioning order for the bottles is indicated on the
metal top cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2
• W = wash/diluent
6.5 Syringe Module
1) Place the wash/diluent bottle at bench level or lower to minimize siphoning.
4) Disconnect the silicon tubing from the frame-

mounted LUER fitting (bottom right corner of
the syringe module).
5) On the 3-way valve, disconnect the tube

coming from the degasser (blue knurled fitting
– top right corner of the syringe module).

6) Unscrew the green and yellow LUER fittings (tubes

coming from the dilution/wash station – top left corner of
the syringe module).
7) Disconnect the following on the waste manifold 2:

• the tube coming from the HP valve (blue
knurled fitting)
• the back pressure tubing (black knurled
fitting)
• the tube coming from the piston flush
circuit (LUER fitting)
8) Remove the 4 screws, 4 flat washers and 4

spring lock washers that fasten the syringe
module to the frame. Remove the door brace if
necessary.

9) Pull out the syringe module slightly. On the

rear side, disconnect the flat cable.
10) Connect the flat cable to the new syringe module board.
11) Install the new syringe module and secure it using the 4 screws, 4 flat washers and 4 spring
lock washers. Replace the door brace if it was previously removed.
12) Re-connect all of the tubing to the waste manifold 2.
13) Re-connect the green and yellow LUER fittings.
14) Re-connect the blue knurled fitting to the 3-way valve (tube coming from the degasser).
15) Re-connect the silicon tubing to the frame-mounted LUER fitting.
16) Close the right door.
17) Replace the wash/diluent bottle on the reagent tray.
18) Switch on the D-10 and go to the MAINTAIN screen.
19) Set the Flowrate to 1.5ml/min and the % Buf 2 to 0.

Click on Start Pump.
20) Check for leaks on the new syringe module while the pump is running. Make sure that liquid
is flowing through the waste circuit. After approximately 5 minutes, click on Stop Pump.

21) Perform a waste bottle check:

• click on Check Waste Bottle
22) Perform a syringe priming by clicking on the Syringe

Priming button.
23) Perform a piston flush by clicking on the Piston Flush

button. Make sure that liquid is flowing through the
waste circuit.
6.6 Electronic Module
2) Remove the buffer bottle support. (Section 6.4)
3) Unscrew the 2 ¼ turn fasteners which lock the left door and open it.

4) Disconnect the following cables and flat cables from

the interface board:
• 3 flat cables on the right
• 4 flat cables on the bottom
• 6 cables on the left
5) If present, disconnect the external keyboard, mouse and VGA display.
6) If present, disconnect the LAN, RS232 and rack feeder cables.
7) Remove the syringe module. (Section 6.5)
8) Remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock

washers and 2 flat washers that secure the
protective grid. Remove the grid.

9) Disconnect the following on

power supply 2:
• the plug coming
from the main
switch (located in
the top left corner)
• the 2 6-pin plugs
located on the right
side
10) On power supply 1, disconnect the 2 plugs located on

the right side.
11) Disconnect all cables from the thermal printer. Remove the printer.
12) Disconnect the flat cable from the hard disk.

13) Disconnect the flat cable from the floppy drive.
14) Hold the electronic module with one hand and remove
the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers that secure the
module to the frame.
15) Remove the old electronic module from the left side of the instrument.
Each interface board has a sticker on it, giving the board's specific parameters. Note these
values; they must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the replacement is done.
16) Install the new electronic module and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
17) Replace the printer and re-connect the mini-jack and 6-pin DIN plugs.
18) Re-connect the 2 flat cables between the PC motherboard, the floppy drive and the hard disk.
19) Re-connect all plugs to the power supplies.
20) Re-connect all cables and flat cables to the interface board. Note that there is only one
possible connection for each cable and flat cable.
21) Close the left door and tighten the 2 ¼ turn fasteners.

22) Replace the grid and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat washers.
23) Replace the syringe module.
24) Replace the buffer bottle support.

26) Go to the THERMAL CONTROL (4/7) screen. Enter the

following parameters from the new interface board:
• System gain value
• System offset value
• click on DONE
27) Backup the 'instrument.ini' file. (Section 7.19)
6.7 Cartridge Module
1) Remove the front cover assembly. (Section 6.2)
2) Unlock the 2 captive screws and

completely pull out the HPLC drawer.

3) Disconnect the beige PEEK fitting at the top of the

pump head and replace it with a plug. If there is a
leak, wipe off the drops.
4) Unscrew the stainless steel fitting connected to

port 3 on the HP valve. If there is a leak, wipe
off the drops.
5) Open the cartridge module by pulling the black metal cover all the way to the left.
6) Remove the cartridge holder and

close the cartridge module. If there is
a leak, wipe off the drops.

7) On the right side of the cartridge module,

disconnect the tube coming from the detector
module (beige PEEK fitting).
8) Disconnect the following cables on the HPLC

module board (rear of the drawer):
• 2 Peltier modules (unlabeled)
• thermal fuse (unlabeled)
• thermal sensor (CN4)
9) Remove the 4 screws and 4 spring lock

washers at the rear of the module.
Remove the cartridge module.
Each spare cartridge module has a sticker on it, giving the module's specific parameter.
Note this value; it must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the replacement is done.
10) Install the new cartridge module and secure it using the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
Make sure that the ground connection is in place.
11) Connect the thermal sensor (labeled '4') to the HPLC module board (CN4).

12) Connect the 2 Peltier modules and the thermal fuse to the HPLC module board. Note that
these 3 plugs are fully interchangeable.
13) Re-connect the tube coming from the detector (beige PEEK fitting).
14) Replace the cartridge holder and close the door.
15) On the HP valve, connect the stainless steel fitting to port 3.
16) On the HP pump head, remove the plug and re-connect the beige PEEK fitting.
17) Push the HPLC drawer back in and tighten the 2 captive screws.
18) Replace the front cover assembly.


following parameters from the new module:
• Sensor offset value
• Gradient offset value
• click on DONE
21) Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (1/17) screen:

• set the Flow rate to 1.5ml/min
• click on START PUMP

22) Check for leaks while the pump is running. After approximately 5 minutes, click on STOP
PUMP.
6.8 Sample Probe
1) Replace the probe according to the procedure in Section 5 of the Operation Manual. Make
sure the old probe is decontaminated prior to removal.
2) Perform a syringe priming:

• click on Syringe Priming
6.9 Dilution/Wash Station
1) Verify that the system is in Sleep state. If the system is in StandBy, place it in Sleep state
using the RUN screen.
2) With the system in Sleep state:

• click on Access Wash st.
3) Open the upper front door. If the door is not opened within 10 seconds, it will automatically
lock again.

4) Push on the lever located on the left side of the

5) With the lever still depressed, lift the dilution/wash station a few mm and unscrew the 2 LUER
fittings.
6) Remove the old dilution/wash station.
7) Connect the 2 silicon tubings to the new dilution/wash station, matching the colors.
8) Pull the new dilution/wash station down until you hear a 'click' coming from the lever. Try to
lift the dilution/wash station again, in order to make sure that it is secured properly.
9) Close the upper front door. The sample arm will automatically return to its home position.
6.10 Syringe 3-Way Valve
2) Disconnect the following on the syringe module

board:
• the 3-way valve power supply cable
(CN5)
• the 2 cables coming from the
motorized syringe (CN2 and CN3)

To release the cables coming from the motorized syringe, it may be necessary to remove
the syringe module board. (Section 6.51)
3) Open the metal cable holder, also located on

the rear side of the syringe module.
4) Disconnect the 2 remaining fittings from the 3-

way valve.
5) Cut and remove the plastic cable tie, which

fastens the motorized syringe to the module.


washers securing the syringe support.
CAREFULLY remove the syringe support,
being mindful of the cables.

washers that secure the 3-way valve. Remove
the valve.
8) Install the new 3-way valve and secure it with the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers.
9) Pass the 3 cables through the holes in the support and

through the grommet.

10) Replace the syringe support and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
11) Secure the motorized syringe to the support with a

new cable tie. On the rear side of the module, the
tie-wrap should pass underneath the grommet. DO
NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
12) Re-connect the tube coming from the waste

manifold 2 to the left port of the 3-way valve.
Make sure that the tubing is flush with the ferrule
prior to securing the nut.
13) Re-connect the tube coming from the motorized syringe to the bottom port of the 3-way
valve.
14) Connect the new 3-way valve supply cable (labeled '5') to the syringe module board (CN5).
15) Re-connect the 2 cables coming from the motorized syringe (unlabeled) to the syringe
module board (CN2 and CN3).
16) Put the 3 cables in the metal cable holder and close it.

• turn on the D-10

6.11 1mL Motorized Syringe
2) On the syringe module board, disconnect the 2

cables coming from the motorized syringe (CN2
and CN3)
To release the cables coming from the motorized syringe, it may be necessary to remove
the syringe module board. (Section 6.51)
3) Unscrew the black knurled fitting located at the

top of the motorized syringe.

fastens the motorized syringe to the module.


washers that secure the motorized syringe.
CAREFULLY remove the syringe, being
mindful of the cables.
6) Pass the 2 cables of the new motorized syringe through the hole in the support and through
the grommet.
7) Install the new motorized syringe and secure it with the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers.
8) Secure the new motorized syringe to the support

with a new cable tie. On the rear side of the
module, the tie-wrap should pass underneath the
grommet. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
9) Re-connect the tube coming from the 3-way valve to the top of the motorized syringe (black
knurled fitting).
10) On the rear side of the syringe module, connect the 2 cables coming from the motorized
syringe (unlabeled) to the syringe module board (CN2 and CN3).
11) Put the 3 cables in the metal cable holder and close it.


• turn on the D-10
6.12 Thermal Fuse
1) Remove the cartridge module. (Section 6.7)
2) On the bottom of the cartridge module, open

the metal cable holder, which restrains the
thermal fuse cable.
3) Pull out the old thermal fuse.
4) Apply thermal grease on the inner surface of the housing and push the new thermal fuse into
the housing.

5) Put the cable in the metal cable holder and close it.
6) Replace the cartridge module.
6.13 Degasser Module
4) On the rear side of the D-10, unscrew the 3 lines

(white, green and blue knurled fittings).
5) On the right side of the D-10, disconnect the

silicon tubing from the air output.

6) On the degasser, remove the 2 white plastic

knurled nuts and the small metal plate.
7) Unscrew the white, green and blue knurled fittings

at the degasser.
8) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and

4 flat washers, which fasten the degasser to the
frame.

9) On the degasser, unlock the captive screw which

is located near the degasser module board.
10) Operating from the right side of the instrument,

slightly pull out the degasser and disconnect
the flat cable from the degasser module board.
11) Connect the flat cable to the new degasser module board.
12) Install the new degasser and secure the captive screw.
13) Replace the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers at the rear.
14) Re-connect the 3 color-coded fittings at the degasser. The correct order is (from top to
bottom):
• green
• white
• blue
15) Replace the metal plate and the 2 white plastic knurled nuts.
16) Connect the new silicon tubing (coming from the vacuum pump) to the air output.

19) Re-connect the white, green and blue fittings at the rear (bottom left corner). Be careful to
MATCH THE COLORS.

21) Go to the DEGASSER (2/4) screen and perform a system

flush by clicking on ALL.

• monitor the pressure for approximately 5
minutes; if it fluctuates by more than ±5%,
manually prime the pump using the 50mL
syringe and re-check the pressure
23) Leaving the Flow rate unchanged, click on START

PROP. VALVE and then on START PUMP. Monitor the
pressure for approximately 5 minutes; if it fluctuates by
more than ±5%, manually prime the pump using the
50mL syringe and re-check the pressure. At the end,
click on STOP PROP. VALVE.

24) Go to the DEGASSER (1/4) screen and test the vacuum

pump:
• verify that the pump is able to create a vacuum
at least equal to 125 points
6.14 Vacuum Pump
2) On the right side of the D-10, disconnect the

silicon tubing from the air output.
3) On the vacuum pump head, disconnect the

silicon tubing coming from the degasser.

4) Slide the plastic cable tie along the vacuum

pump (towards the rear of the D-10).
5) Disconnect the power supply cable. Observe

polarity for time of reconnection.
6) Remove the 2 screws, which secure the

vacuum pump to the bracket. Remove the
pump.
7) On the old pump, remove the remaining silicon tubing and connect it to the corresponding
nozzle of the new vacuum pump.
8) Install the new pump on the bracket and secure it with the 2 screws.
9) Re-connect the power supply cable. Be very careful to RESPECT POLARITY.

10) Slide the plastic cable tie along the vacuum pump back to its original position.
11) Replace the silicon tubing coming from the degasser.
12) Re-connect the silicon tubing to the air output.

15) Go to the DEGASSER (1/4) screen to check that the new

vacuum pump is working properly:
6.15 Interface board
To protect electronic cards against damage from static electricity, several precautions must
be taken:
• use a grounded wrist strap before handling the components. If one is not
available, first touch both of your hands to a safely grounded or metal object
• hold components by the edges and try not to touch the IC chips, leads,
connectors, or other components
• place components on a grounded antistatic pad or on the bag that came with the
components whenever they are separated from the system

3) Disconnect all cables from the interface board:

• 1 flat cable on the top
4) Remove the old interface board (6 plastic standoffs).
5) Remove the 2 MC and HPPC EPROMs from

the old interface board with the PLCC EPROM
extractor (P/N: 2200420).
6) Install these EPROMs on the new interface board. Be careful NOT TO SWAP THE 2
EPROMs.
7) Check if the new interface board comes already

equipped with a TC microchip (soldered on the
board). If not, you may need to remove this chip
from the old interface board and install it on the
new one. The notch must be ORIENTED
TOWARDS THE FRONT SIDE of the D-10.

Each spare interface board has a sticker on it, giving the board's specific parameters. Note
these values; they must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the replacement is done.
8) Install the new interface board on the 6 standoffs.
9) Re-connect all cables and flat cables. Note that there is only one possible connection for
each cable and flat cable.


following parameters from the new interface board:
• System gain value
• System offset value
• click on DONE
6.16 Rack Door Module
4) Locate the X board on the left side of the D-10.

5) On this board, disconnect the 3 cables coming from the rack

door module (labeled '2', '7' and '12'). Remove the flat cable
at the top for easier access.
7) Remove the 4 screws and 3 spring lock washers, which

secure the rack door module to the frame.
8) Remove the rack door module. Be mindful of the cables, as there are several metal cable
holders on their way to the X board.
9) Install the new rack door module and secure it to the frame using the 4 screws and 3 spring
lock washers.
10) Lead the 3 cables to the X board and connect them at CN2, CN7 and CN12. Re-connect the
flat cable to the board if it was previously removed.

13) Close the side doors and tighten the 2 ¼ turn fasteners that lock the left door.

15) Go to the RACK DOOR (1/2) screen to check that the new
rack door is working properly:
• test the solenoid
• open and close the rack door
• monitor the door and the sensors' status
6.17 Proportioning Valve
1) Place both buffer bottles at bench level or lower to minimize siphoning.


4) Disconnect the white and green knurled fittings

at the proportioning valve. Place caps on the
fittings or plugs with unions. If there is a leak,
wipe off the drops.
5) Disconnect the black knurled fitting from the

proportioning valve.
6) On the HPLC module board (rear of the module),

disconnect the cable (labeled '15') coming from
the proportioning valve.

washers securing the proportioning valve.
Remove the valve from the bracket, paying
attention to the cable.

8) Pass the new proportioning valve cable through the grommet.
9) Install the new valve and secure it with the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers.
10) Connect the new proportioning valve cable to the HPLC module board (CN15).
11) Re-connect the black, white and green fittings. Be careful to MATCH THE COLORS.
14) Place the buffer bottles on the reagent tray.

16) Go to the DEGASSER (2/4) screen:

• click on BUFFER 1 to prime the first line
• click on BUFFER 2 to prime the second line



19) Perform the procedure in Section 7.4 WC/FC Verification.
6.18 High Pressure Pump

4) Disconnect the tube at the bottom of the pump

head and put a cap on the fitting or a plug with
a union. If there is a leak, wipe off the drops.

5) Disconnect the remaining tubing:

• 1 silicon tubing coming from the
waste manifold
• 1 beige PEEK fitting (tube coming
from the pressure sensor)
• 1 black plastic knurled fitting (tube
coming the HP valve – port 6)

disconnect the 3 cables (labeled '8', '9' and '16')
coming from the HP pump.
7) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring

lock washers and 4 flat washers
that secure the pump to the
bracket. Remove the pump. Pay
attention to the cables, especially
the one which passes through
the grommet.
8) Put the new HP pump cables in position; one of them should pass through the grommet.
Each spare HP pump has a sticker on it, giving the pump's specific parameters (Waiting
Count and Filling Count). Note these values; they must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file
once the replacement is done.

9) Install the new pump and secure it with the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat
washers.
10) Connect the 3 pump cables to the HPLC module board (CN8, CN9, CN16).
11) Re-connect all of the tubing to the pump head. Be careful to connect the tube coming from
the proportioning valve ONLY AT THE END.





19) Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (8/17) screen. Enter the

following parameters from the new pump:
• Waiting Count value
• Filling Count value
• click on DONE
20) Perform the procedure in Section 7.8 Flow Rate Calibration.
21) Perform the procedure in Section 7.4 WC/FC Verification.
6.19 7-Port, 3-Position HP Valve + 23µL Sample Loop



4) Disconnect the following from the HP valve:

• 1 yellow plastic knurled fitting (tube coming
from the HP pump output – port 6)
• 1 red plastic knurled fitting (tube coming
from the sample probe – port 5)
• 1 stainless steel fitting (tube coming from
the cartridge module – port 3)
• 1 green plastic knurled fitting (tube coming
from the pressure sensor – port 2)
• 1 blue plastic knurled fitting (tube coming
from the syringe module – port 7)


disconnect the 2 cables coming from the valve
(unlabeled).
6) Remove the 4 screws and 4 spring

lock washers that secure the valve
and CAREFULLY remove it from the
bracket. Pay attention to the cables.
7) Pass the new HP valve cables through the hole in the bracket.
8) Install the new HP valve and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
9) Re-connect all of the tubing to the stator (making sure that the fittings are in their proper
position numbers) and the HP pump head.
10) Connect the 2 cables to the HPLC module board.



• click on HOME MVT (RESET)
• click on TO INJECT POSITION and monitor
the Sensors status
• click on TO LOAD POSITION and monitor
the Sensors status
• click on TO PRIME POSITION and monitor
the Sensors status
the Sensors status
15) Go to the SYRINGE (3/6) screen and perform a syringe

priming.

PUMP.
18) Go back to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (4/17) screen and move
the valve to inject position.

19) Go back to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (1/17) screen:

PUMP.
21) Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (4/17) screen and move the
valve to load position.
6.20 Pressure Sensor
1) Place both buffer bottles at bench level to minimize siphoning.


4) Disconnect the white and green knurled

fittings at the proportioning valve. Place caps
on the fittings or plugs with unions. If there is
a leak, wipe off the drops.
5) Disconnect the black knurled fitting from the

The proportioning valve and the pressure sensor are mounted on a small bracket, which is
secured to the HPLC drawer by 4 Nylock nuts.
6) Unlock the 4 Nylock nuts.


disconnect the cable coming from the pressure
sensor (labeled '6').
8) Pull the bracket forward and lift it to release. Pay

attention to the 2 cables coming from the
proportioning valve and the pressure sensor.
9) Remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2

flat washers which secure the old pressure sensor
to the bracket. CAREFULLY remove the sensor.
Passing the plug through the hole in the bracket

can be very tricky. Therefore, it is recommended to
slightly twist the wires.

10) Disconnect the 2 beige PEEK fittings from the

old pressure sensor.
11) Connect the 2 beige PEEK fittings to the new pressure sensor:
• the tube coming from the HP valve should be connected at the top (beveled face)
• the tube coming from the HP pump head should be connected at the bottom
Each spare pressure sensor has a sticker on it, giving the sensor's specific parameters.
Note values; they must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the replacement is done.
12) Install the new sensor and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat
washers. Be careful NOT TO MOUNT THE SENSOR UPSIDE DOWN. The beveled face
must be oriented upwards.
13) Pass the new sensor cable through the grommet and connect it to the module board (CN6).
14) Replace the bracket and lock the 4 Nylock nuts.
15) Re-connect the black, white and green fittings. Be careful to MATCH THE COLORS.


20) Go to the HP: SENSOR CALIB. (1/2) screen. Enter the

following parameters from the new pressure sensor:
• High Pressure Sensor Offset
• High Pressure Sensor Gain
• click on DONE
21) Refer to Section 6.18). Complete steps 17) and 18).
22) On the HP: PUMP + VALVE (1/17) screen:

• let the pump run for approximately 5 minutes to
remove all air bubbles and check for leaks
• at the end, click on STOP PUMP
6.21 Column Heater Coil
1) Refer to Section 6.7. Complete steps 1) through 6).
2) Remove the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers

securing the black metal cover. Remove the cover.


washers which secure the column heater coil
support and the cartridge support.
4) Screw the M3 standoffs (P/N: 2200436) into the

2 holes of the column heater coil support.
5) Grasp the 2 standoffs and pull out the column heater coil
support, along with the fixed cartridge support. Slightly
moving the column heater coil from left to right and from
top to bottom, while pulling it out, will facilitate removal.
Use caution, as the 2 parts are still connected together.
6) Separate the fixed cartridge support from the column

heater coil support:
• insert an open-end wrench in the slot
between the 2 parts, to reach the metal nut
• while holding the nut with the wrench, rotate
the fixed cartridge support counter-clockwise,
in order to unscrew it

7) Assemble the new column heater coil (already mounted

on the bobbin) with the fixed cartridge support:
• hold the nut with an open-end wrench
• rotate the fixed cartridge support clockwise, in
order to screw it on the fitting
8) Replace the fixed cartridge support and the column heater coil support and secure them
using the 3 screws and 3 spring lock washers. There's no need to add thermal grease in the
housing.
9) Replace the black metal cover back and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock
washers.
10) Replace the cartridge holder.
11) On the HP valve, connect the stainless steel tubing coming from the cartridge module to port
3 (stainless steel fitting).
12) On the HP pump head, re-connect the beige PEEK fitting (tube coming from the pressure
sensor).

Then, click on Start Pump.
17) Check for possible leaks while the pump is running. After approximately 5 minutes, click on
Stop Pump.

6.22 Z Position Sensor (Motor Encoder)
4) Unlock – but do not remove – the

2 screws that secure the Z motor.
5) Push (or pull) the Z motor towards the front of the

D-10 (there are oblong holes allowing this
movement) and take the belt off the pulley.
6) Unlock – but do not remove – the screw that secures

the pulley to the Z motor shaft.

7) Hold the Z motor with one hand and remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat
washers.
8) Push (or pull) the Z motor towards the rear of

the D-10 and remove it from its support; tilting
the motor will facilitate the job. Regarding the
pulley, just leave it in place.
The Z position sensor is fastened with 2 nuts and 2 serrated lock

washers to a small metal plate. The plate itself is fastened to the
Z motor, on the same end as the slotted disk.
9) On the Z motor:
• unlock – but do not remove – the 2 screws, 2 spring
lock washers and 2 flat washers that secure the
metal plate
• swivel the plate to have access to the sensor
• remove the old Z position sensor

10) On the Z board, disconnect the cable coming from the Z

position sensor (labeled '13').
11) Install the new Z position sensor on the metal plate and secure it with the 2 nuts and 2
serrated lock washers.
12) Swivel the metal plate back in its original position and tighten the 2 screws.
13) Connect the new Z position sensor cable to the Z board (CN13).
14) Tilt the Z motor and replace it on its support. During the positioning of the motor, don't forget
to slide the shaft into the pulley.
15) Keep the Z motor in position with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat washers –
but do not tighten the screws.
16) Slide the belt on the pulley.
17) Tighten the pulley screw. For the exact position of the pulley on the shaft, follow the example
of the TH motor.
18) Adjust the tension of the belt by sliding the Z motor in the oblong holes and tighten the 2 Z
motor screws. Follow the example of the TH motor.
21) Go to the Z MOVE (2/4) screen:

• set Direction to from up to down
• set the Movement select to 140 strips
• click on START

22) Use the Z movement control tool (P/N: 2200431) to verify the
setting of the Z movement. If it is OK, go to step 25). If it isn't,
continue with step 23).
Place the Z movement control tool in contact with the TH movement adjustment tool. Verify
that the probe support is between the 1st stage (included) and the 3rd stage (excluded). The
ideal situation is when the probe support touches the 2nd stage.

23) Move the Z position sensor.
24) Verify the setting of the Z movement again, as described in steps 21) and 22).
25) Go to the SAMPLE ARM MODULE screen and click on the

SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION button.
26) Remove the Z movement control tool.
27) Go to the RACK INTRO. (1/1) screen and click on LAUNCH

RACK EJECTION.
28) Go to the main (1/2) screen and click on SHUT DOWN.
29) Unplug the external power cord.
6.23 CCFL Backlight

2) Disconnect the 2 flat cables from the LCD

interface board and the backlight supply
cable.

washers securing the LCD display. Remove
the display.
4) Remove the 2 plastic rivets and the small

aluminum cover from the LCD display.
5) Pull out the old CCFL backlight and replace it

with the new one. Be careful NOT TO TOUCH its
surface.

6) Replace the aluminum cover and secure it

with the 2 plastic rivets.
7) Connect the backlight supply cable and the 2 flat cables.
8) Replace the LCD display and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
With a new CCFL backlight, a re-adjustment to the

contrast may be required. Turn the potentiometer
located on the right side of the instrument.
6.24 Power Supplies 1 & 2
1) Remove the entire electronic module. (Section 6.6)
2) Remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers

and 2 flat washers that secure the power
supply 2 (top).

3) Remove the old power supply 2 from the electronic module (2 plastic standoffs in the bottom
left and top right corners).
4) Install the new power supply 2 on the 2 standoffs and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring
lock washers and 2 flat washers.

and 2 flat washers that secure the power
supply 1 (bottom).
6) Remove the old power supply 1 from the electronic module (2 plastic standoffs in the bottom
left and top right corners).
7) Install the new power supply 1 on the 2 standoffs and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring
8) Replace the electronic module and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
9) Replace the plastic holder (with the printer in it).
10) Pull out the thermal printer and re-connect the mini-jack and 6-pin DIN plugs.
11) Replace the printer in its plastic holder.
12) Re-connect the 2 flat cables going from the PC motherboard to the floppy drive and the hard
disk.
13) Re-connect all plugs to the power supplies.

Before being able to use the new power supply 1 (bottom), it is necessary to set its output
voltage to 5.15 V. The test points are located on the interface board:
5.15 VDC
GND
16) On the power supply 1, turn the potentiometer

until the output voltage reaches 5.15 ± 0.05 V.
17) Replace the protective grid and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat
washers.

6.25 Motherboard (PCM-5896)
be taken:
2) On the interface board, disconnect the last flat cable,

located on the top end of the card.
3) Unlock the 2 captive

screws.
4) Rotate the interface board support and remove it.

5) Disconnect and remove the link cable between

the motherboard and the LAN connector.
6) Disconnect the 2 flat cables and the supply cable

from the LCD internal board.
7) Remove the screw, flat washer and spacer that

secure the LCD internal board to the motherboard.
CAREFULLY remove the board.
8) Disconnect the motherboard supply cable.

9) Disconnect:
• the VGA connector link cable
• the RS422 & RS232 connectors link
cable
10) Disconnect:
• the hard disk flat cable
• the floppy drive ribbon cable
• the mouse & keyboard connectors
link cable
11) Remove the 11 screws and 11 flat washers that secure the motherboard to the module.
CAREFULLY remove the old motherboard.
12) CAREFULLY remove the Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) from the old motherboard and
insert it on the new one. Because the number of pins is different on either side of the break,
the module will only fit in one orientation.
13) Disconnect the processor fan supply cable from the

old motherboard.

14) CAREFULLY remove the heatsink (with fan)

from the old motherboard.
15) Remove the processor from the old motherboard and install it on the new board.
Locate the socket and open it by pulling the lever upwards. The socket lever must be fully
open (90° to 100°) when removing and installing the processor. Insert the processor with
the correct orientation, knowing that there is a notched corner. DO NOT EXERT TOO MUCH
FORCE, but press the processor down gently into the slot.
Once completely inserted, close the socket lever while holding down the processor.
16) Install the heatsink on the new motherboard. It is not absolutely necessary to apply thermal
grease on the processor.

Make sure that the heatsink is seated correctly on the socket.
17) Re-connect the processor fan supply cable.
18) Note down the serial number of the new

motherboard (CXXXXXXXX). It is indicated on the
rear side of the board.
19) Update the serial number of the motherboard

written on the electronic module (use a pencil).

20) Install the new motherboard on the electronic module and secure it with the 11 screws and 11
flat washers. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
Among the 11 washers, there

are 4 nylon washers, which
should be positioned as
described on the picture.
21) CAREFULLY replace the LCD internal board and secure it with the screw, flat washer and
spacer. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
22) Re-connect all cables and flat cables to the motherboard. Note that there is only one possible
connection for each cable and flat cable.
When re-connecting the mouse &

keyboard link cable to the
motherboard, turn the plug so that the
2 empty slots are next to the board's
edge.
23) Re-connect the 2 flat cables and the supply cable to the LCD internal board.
24) Re-connect the link cable between the motherboard and the LAN connector.

25) Replace the interface board support and secure the 2 captive screws.
26) Re-connect the flat cable located on the top end of the interface board.
27) Replace the electronic module.
6.26 LCD Interface Board
be taken:
2) Disconnect all cables and flat cables

from the LCD interface board:
• 1 cable on the right
• 1 cable on the bottom
• 1 flat cable on the left
3) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers that secure the LCD
interface board to the user interface module. Remove the board.
4) Connect all cables and flat cables to the new LCD interface board.
5) Install the new board on the module and secure it with the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers
and 4 flat washers.


8) Go to the MISC. (1/2) screen and click on the TOUCH

SCREEN CALIB. button.
9) Click on YES to launch the calibration.
10) Click precisely on the center of the cross using a pointed

(but not sharp) tool.

11) Repeat this operation 8 more times and finally click on

the DONE button. You will return to the MISC. (1/2)
screen.
6.27 LCD Display
2) Disconnect the 2 flat cables from the LCD

interface board and the backlight supply
cable.

washers securing the LCD display. Remove
the display.
4) Connect the backlight supply cable of the new LCD display and the 2 flat cables.
5) Install the new LCD display and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.

With a new CCFL backlight, a re-adjustment to the

contrast may be required. Turn the potentiometer
located on the right side of the instrument.
6.28 Waste Manifold 1
2) Open the right door and locate the waste manifold 1.
3) Disconnect all tubing from the old waste manifold:

• 2 pinch valve tubings on the left side
• 1 tubing coming from the internal waste bottle on the
bottom

4) Remove the 2 thumbscrews and 2 nylon washers that fasten the

manifold.
5) Remove the old waste manifold.
6) Connect the 3 tubings to the new waste manifold.
7) Secure the new manifold using the 2 thumbscrews and 2 nylon washers. The screws should
be finger-tight ONLY. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
10) Click on the Service button.
11) Perform a waste bottle check by clicking on the Check

Waste bottle button.

6.29 Waste Manifold 2
2) Open the right door and locate the waste manifold 2.
3) Disconnect all tubing from the old waste manifold:

• 2 Teflon tubings on the left side (blue and black
knurled fittings)
• 1 silicon tubing on the left side (LUER fitting)
• 2 silicon tubings on the front (barbed and
LUER fittings)
• 1 Teflon tubing on the right side (blue knurled
fitting)
4) Remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat

washers, which fasten the old manifold.

5) Remove the old waste manifold.
6) Install the new waste manifold and secure it using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2
flat washers.
7) Re-connect all tubing to the waste manifold.

Click on Start Pump.
11) Check for leaks on the new waste manifold while the pump is running. Make sure that liquid
is flowing through the waste circuit. After approximately 5 minutes, click on Stop Pump.
12) Perform a waste bottle check:

• click on Check Waste Bottle

Priming button. Check for leaks.

14) Perform a piston flush by clicking on the Piston Flush

button. Make sure that liquid is flowing through the
waste circuit and check for leaks.
6.30 Hard Disk
3) Remove the thermal printer. (Section 6.3)

6) Disconnect the power supply cables from the

floppy drive and hard disk.
7) Open the first plastic cable holder, located on

the right side of the printer module.
it.

9) Open the second plastic cable holder.
10) On the right side of the printer module, pull the flat
cable out of the plastic cable holder.
11) Holding the module with one hand, remove the 4

screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers that
secure it to the frame. Remove the printer module.

12) Remove the 4 screws and 4 serrated lock washers

securing the old hard disk. Remove the hard disk.
13) Install the new hard disk and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 serrated lock washers.
Confirm that the new hard disk IDE jumper is set to 'Master'.
14) Replace the printer module and secure it using the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat
washers.
15) On the right side of the printer module, replace the flat cable in the plastic cable holder.
16) Re-connect the hard disk and floppy drive supply cables.
17) Replace the cables in the 2 plastic cable holders and close them.
18) Re-connect the 2 flat cables going from the PC board to the floppy drive and the hard disk.
19) Perform the procedure in Section 7.20 Software Imaging.
20) Replace the thermal printer.

6.31 Barcode Reader


3) Go to the X MOVE (1/4) screen:

• select To tube
• set the tube number to 3
• click on START
4) Go to the TH MOVE (2/4) screen:

• click on START


• click on START
7) Turn off the power and unplug the external power cord.
10) Unlock the 2 ¼ turn fasteners located on the rear

side of the D-10.

13) Leaving the sample arm in the same position,

disconnect the red knurled fitting at the top of
the sample probe. CAREFULLY remove the
probe. Use extreme caution, as the probe is a
biohazard.
14) Cut and remove the tie-wraps, which fasten the

barcode reader cable to the sample arm.
15) On the Z board, disconnect the cable (unlabeled)

coming from the barcode reader.

16) Remove the 2 screws and 2 flat washers, which

secure the barcode reader to its bracket.
Remove the barcode reader.
17) Install the new barcode reader on the bracket and replace the 2 screws and 2 flat washers –
but do not tighten the screws.
18) Fasten the barcode reader cable (and the Hall

effect sensor cable) to the sample arm using
new tie-wraps. Be careful to have a few mm of
clearance between the cable and the rack drive
module.
19) Connect the cable coming from the new barcode reader (unlabeled) to the Z board.
20) Use the barcode reader positioning jig (P/N:

2200430) to adjust the position of the new
barcode reader.

Place the barcode reader positioning jig in contact with the sample arm, as indicated by the
unbroken line below. Push the barcode reader against the jig, as indicated by the dotted
line below. Securely tighten the 2 screws.
21) Replace the sample probe and re-connect the red fitting.
24 Replace the reagent tray.
metal top cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2


27) Prepare a sample rack with 10 barcoded tubes or microvial adapters.
28) Go to the RACK INTRO. (1/1) screen:

• click on LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION
• introduce the sample rack
29) Go to the BARCODE (2/2) screen:

• click on START
• verify that the indications are correct

RACK EJECTION.

6.32 Detector Module

3) On the right side of the cartridge module,

disconnect the tube coming from the detector
module (beige PEEK fitting).
4) Operating from the right side of the D-10, locate

the white union and unscrew the grey knurled
fitting.

5) At the top of the module, remove the

thumbscrew and the black cover.
6) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the detector

module board.
7) Unlock the captive screw located on the right

side of the detector module.
8) Pull out the old detector module.
9) Install the new detector module and lock the captive screw.
10) Remove the thumbscrew and black cover from the new module.
11) Re-connect the ribbon cable to the detector module board.

12) Replace the cover and tighten the thumbscrew.
13) Connect:
• the blue PEEK tubing to the cartridge module (beige PEEK fitting)
• the orange PEEK tubing to the white union (grey knurled fitting)
16) Perform the procedure from Section 7.2 Detector Adjustment.
6.33 Rack Input Sensor
it.
4) On the X board, disconnect the cable coming from the rack

input sensor (labeled '8'). Remove the ribbon cable at the top
for easier access.


The rack input sensor is fastened with 1 screw

and 1 serrated lock washer to a small, threaded
metal plate. The plate itself is fastened to the
bottom of the rack drive module.

and 2 flat washers that secure the metal plate
to the rack drive module.
8) Remove the plate/sensor assembly from the rack drive module. Pay attention to the sensor
cable as there are several cable holder on its way to the X board.
9) Remove the old rack input sensor from the metal plate.

10) Fasten the new rack input sensor to the metal

plate. Make sure the sensor is aligned properly with
the plate.
//
11) Secure the plate/sensor assembly to the rack drive module using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock
washers and 2 flat washers. The plate should be pushed to the far right (towards the rack
door) prior to securing the screws.
12) Lead the cable to the X board and connect it at CN9. Re-connect the flat cable to the board if
it was previously removed.
14) On the front side of the D-10, connect the front cover
sensor simulator (P/N: 2200415) and the front cover
switch simulator (P/N: 2200416).
WARNING: Use extreme caution when using these tools, as all moving parts can be
engaged.
15) Re-connect the external power cord, switch on the D-10

and launch the Service software:


• select To tube
• click on START
17) Remove the dilution/wash station. (Section 6.9)
18) On the X MOVE (1/4) screen:

• select Home movement
• click on START

• introduce a rack
20) Unlock the 2 screws which secure the

plate/sensor assembly to the rack drive module.
Use the rack sensor adjustment gauge (P/N:
2200429) to adjust the position of the new rack
input sensor.

Move the rack manually and insert the rack Change the position of the gauge and
sensor adjustment gauge between the rack monitor again the Rack input sensor status.
and the rack drive module. Move the This time, the status should be no reflection.
plate/sensor assembly and monitor the Rack If the result is not correct, move the
input sensor status on the RACK INTRO. (1/1) plate/sensor assembly again. Repeat both
screen. With the gauge fully inserted, the tests until the results are OK. Tighten the
status should be reflection. screws when done.
21) Click on LAUNCH RACK EJECTION.


• select To tube
• click on START
23) Replace the dilution/wash station.

• click on START

When prompted, turn the power off and disconnect the
external power cord.
26) Unplug the front cover sensor simulator and the front cover switch simulator.
6.34 Rack Output Sensor

it.

output sensor (labeled '9'). Remove the ribbon cable at the
top for easier access.


The rack output sensor is fastened with 1 screw

and 1 serrated lock washer to a small, threaded
metal plate. The plate itself is fastened to the

and 2 flat washers that secure the metal plate
to the rack drive module.
8) Remove the plate/sensor assembly from the rack drive module. Pay attention to the sensor
cable as there are several cable holder on its way to the X board.
9) Remove the old rack output sensor from the metal plate.
10) Fasten the new rack output sensor to the metal

plate. Make sure the sensor is aligned properly
with the plate.
//

11) Secure the plate/sensor assembly to the rack

drive module using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock
washers and 2 flat washers. The plate should be
pushed to the far left prior to securing the
screws.
12) Lead the cable to the X board and connect at CN9. Re-connect the flat cable to the board if it
was previously removed.

17) Go to the RACK INTRO. (1/1) screen to check that the new
sensor is working well:
• the default status should be no reflection
• click on LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION and
introduce a rack
• the sensor's status should change to reflection
• click on LAUNCH RACK EJECTION
• the status should come back to no reflection

6.35 User Interface Module
2) Refer to Section 6.4. Complete steps 1) to 4).
4) Disconnect the ribbon cable located on the left

end of the LCD interface board.
5) On the front end of the user interface

module, open the metal cable holder and
slide out the 2 grommets.
6) Manually move the sample arm to the middle of the rack drive module.
7) Open the last metal cable holder, located on the

inner side of the user interface module, to release
the probe tubing.

8) Pull the flat cable out of the plastic cable holder.
9) Remove the 4 screws and 4

spring lock washers that
secure the user interface
module to the frame. Be
careful to HOLD THE
MODULE with one hand.
10) Remove the user interface module. Pay attention to the contrast adjustment potentiometer
located on the right side.
11) Install the new user interface module and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock
washers. Pay attention to the contrast adjustment knob located on the right side.
12) Replace the flat cable in the plastic cable holder and re-connect it to the LCD interface board.
13) Replace the probe tubing:

• slide in the 2 grommets
• close the 2 metal cable holders
• verify that the tubing length allows full arm X motion without excessive slack
metal top cover.

6.36 Arm
4) Remove the user interface module. (Section 6.35)
5) Disconnect the red knurled fitting at the top of the sample probe. CAREFULLY remove the
probe. Use extreme caution, as the probe is a biohazard.
6) Remove the thumbscrew and small aluminum bracket

to release the probe tubing.
7) Disconnect the large ribbon cable from the X board.
8) On the rear side of the arm, open the

metal cable holders and slide out the
grommet.

9) On the X board, disconnect all cables coming from the rack

door module (labeled '2', '7' and '12') and the rack drive
module (labeled '3', '8' and '9').
10) Manually move the sample arm to the middle of the rack
drive module.
12) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers, which secure the old arm to
the frame. Be careful to HOLD THE ARM with one hand.
13) CAREFULLY take out the old arm, tilting it to

facilitate the job. It is not necessary to remove
the 8-pin and 12-pin flex cables.
14) CAREFULLY install the new arm in the frame – but do not tighten the screws.

15) Install the sample arm alignment jigs (P/N:

2200433) on each side of the frame and use them
to adjust the position of the new arm.
Make sure that the sample arm rests on the 2 pins indicated by the unbroken arrows. Then,
push (or pull) the arm so that it comes in contact with the 4 other pins (indicated by the
dotted arrows). Securely tighten the 4 screws.
16) Remove the sample arm alignment jigs.
17) Re-connect all cables to the X board:

• 3 cables coming from the rack door module at CN2, CN7 and CN12
• 3 cables coming from the rack drive module at CN3, CN8 and CN9
• 1 ribbon cable
18) On the rear side of the sample arm, slide in the grommet and close the metal cable holders.

19) Install the X movement adjustment tool (P/N: 2200428).
20) Replace the thumbscrew and small aluminum bracket, in order to fasten the probe tubing.
21) Install the dummy probe (P/N: 2200424) and secure it with the red knurled fitting.
22) Replace the user interface module.
engaged.
24) Re-connect the external power cord, switch on the D-10

and launch the Service software:



• click on START
27) Check that the dummy probe is correctly

centered in the cone of the X movement
adjustment tool and continue with step 28).

• click on START
If the dummy probe was centered in the cone of the X
movement adjustment tool, go to step 39). If it wasn't,

• set Power on motor to free
• click on APPLY

30)
Manually move the arm towards the right, in order to reveal
the second set screw of the X pulley. Loosen this screw.

• click on START

• click on START
33) Loosen the first screw on the X pulley.
34) Manually move the X pulley around the X motor shaft, in order to center the dummy probe in
the cone of the X movement adjustment tool.
35) Re-tighten the first set screw.


• click on START

• click on APPLY
38) Manually move the arm towards the right, in order to reveal the second set screw of the X
pulley. Tighten this screw.

• set Direction to from left to right
• set Movement select to 10 strips
• click on START

• set Direction to from right to left
• set Movement select to sensors
• for the Home sensor, set the selection to yes
and the target to obstructed
• for the Axis sensor, verify that the selection
is set to no
• click on START

41) On the X motor, verify that the position sensor is between

2 slots. If it is, go to step 43). If it isn't, continue with step
42).
42) Move the X home sensor and repeat steps 39) to 41) until the X position sensor is between 2
slots. At the end, check the probe position as described in steps 26) to 28).

• introduce the TH movement adjustment tool
(P/N: 2200432)
44) Go to the TUBE IDENTIFICATION (2/3) screen:

• click on START
• click on the SAVE RESULTS button, when
finished, to save the new TH offset value
• repeat the test until the TH offset calculated
value remains the same

• select all
• click in the Template field
• select the rack1_VnV.tpl file available in the
\Dia\Service\Template\VnV folder
• click on START
• verify that the result of the test is OK for each
tube


• select To tube
• click on START

• click on START
48) Use the Z movement control tool (P/N: 2200431) to

verify the setting of the Z movement. If it is OK, go to
step 53). If it isn't, continue with step 49).

49) Move the Z home flag or Z home sensor.

• set the Movement select to sensors
is set to no
• click on START
51) Make sure that the Z position sensor is still between 2 slots; if needed, move the slotted disk.


55) Perform the procedure from Section 7.13 Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment.

RACK EJECTION.

• select To sample aspiration position (tube)
• set Tube position to 7
• click on START

60) Remove the X movement adjustment tool and replace the dilution/wash station.
61) Remove the dummy probe and replace the sample probe.
6.37 Rack Drive Module

5) On the X board, disconnect all cables coming from the rack

drive module (labeled '3', '8' and '9'). Remove the ribbon
cable for easier access.

6) On the syringe module, unscrew the green and yellow

LUER fittings (tubes coming from the dilution/wash
station).
9) Remove the security cable at the bottom of the rack

drive module.
10) Remove the 8 (or 4) screws, along with the spring lock washers and flat washers, that secure
the old rack drive module to the frame. Be careful to HOLD THE MODULE with one hand.
11) CAREFULLY take out the old rack drive module.
12) CAREFULLY install the new rack drive module in the frame – but do not tighten the screws.
13) Install the sample arm alignment jigs (P/N:

2200433) on each side of the frame and use them
to adjust the position of the new rack drive
module.

Make sure that the rack drive module is in contact with all 6 pins, then tighten the 8 (or 4)
screws.
14) Remove the rack support alignment jigs.
15) Re-connect the security cable.
16) On the syringe module, connect the green and yellow LUER fittings.
17) Connect the 3 cables coming from the new rack drive module to the X board at CN2, CN7
and CN12.
engaged.




• click on START
23) Remove the probe and replace it with the dummy probe (P/N: 2200424). WARNING: the
probe is a biohazard. Use EXTREME CAUTION when removing.



• click on START
6.38 HP Pump Head

2) Remove the 2 center pump head mounting

screws.
3) Alternate the remaining 2 screws, loosening them a few turns at a time until the head is free.
4) Pull the pump head straight out from the

follower assembly.
5) Move the piston flush circuit barbed fitting to the

new pump head.
6) Install the new pump head on the follower assembly and secure the 2 center mounting
screws. Alternate between the 2 screws, giving a few turns at a time until the pump head is
fastened.

7) Secure the remaining 2 screws.





6.39 HP Pump Piston
1) Remove the HP pump head. (Section 6.38)
2) Remove the piston assembly from the follower

assembly.
Each piston assembly consists of a piston

guide, a spring and a piston. Avoid getting
finger-prints or oil onto the piston assembly.
3) Remove the old piston straight out from the piston guide.
4) Insert a new piston.
5) Replace the piston assembly in the follower assembly. The flat faces on the piston guide
should be in the vertical position.
6) Replace the HP pump head.






6.40 HP Pump Piston Seals
2) Remove the old piston seals from the inner side

of the pump head with the piston seal removal
tool. Dispose of the seals as they cannot be re-
used.
3) Place the new seals in a large syringe.
4) Fill the syringe about half full of de-ionized water (preferably degassed).
5) Point the tip up and push the plunger in until most of the air is removed from the syringe.
6) Place a finger over the end of the syringe and pull the plunger back rapidly, in order to create
some vacuum in the barrel, and shake vigorously. Repeat this operation at least 5 times.
7) Install the new seals in the pump head with the piston seal removal tool. This may be done
under water to avoid air introduction.





6.41 Tube Height Sensor


engaged.


• click on START
5) Disconnect the red knurled fitting at the top of the sample probe. CAREFULLY remove the
probe. Use extreme caution, as the probe is a biohazard.

6) On the Z MOVE (1/4) screen:

• click on START
11) Unlock the 2 ¼ turn fasteners located at the top,

rear of the D-10.


and 2 flat washers that secure the TH tube
height flag (small metal plate) to the sample
arm. Remove the TH tube height flag.
14) On the Z board, unplug the cable coming from the

TH tube height sensor.
The TH tube height sensor is fastened to the TH

home flag (small metal plate) with 2 nuts and 2
serrated lock washers. The flex cable is also
fastened to the plate, by means of 2 tie-wraps.


and 2 flat washers that secure the TH home
flag to the arm.
16) Remove the old cable and completely remove the

plate/sensor assembly from the arm.
17) Clean off the adhesive residue on the arm.
18) Replace the old TH tube height sensor with the new one.
19) Fasten the flex cable to the metal plate using

new tie-wraps. It is very important to position
them as described on the picture, so that they
don't interfere with the movement of the arm.
20) Fold the end of the new flex cable, following the example of the old one.
21) Fasten the plate/sensor assembly to the arm using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2
flat washers – but do not tighten the screws.

22) Use the TH home flag positioning jig (P/N:

2200426) to adjust the position of the
plate/sensor assembly.
Position the TH home flag positioning jig on the sample arm. Make sure the surfaces are in
contact. Match the surfaces indicated with the dotted and unbroken arrows.
Move the TH home flag so that it comes in contact (on both surfaces) with the jig. Tighten
the screws when done.

23) Route the flex cable to the Z board and plug it in.
Each spare TH tube height sensor comes

already equipped with a piece of adhesive
tape on the flex cable.
24) Remove the protective sheet and glue the flex

cable to the sample arm. Make sure that the
cable doesn't touch the arm.
25) Fasten the TH tube height flag to the arm using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat
washers – but do not tighten the screws.
26) Use the TH tube height flag positioning jig

(P/N: 2200425) to adjust the position of the
metal plate.

Place the TH tube height flag positioning jig on the new TH tube height sensor. The
surfaces indicated with the unbroken arrows must come in contact.
Move the TH tube height flag so that it comes in contact with the 2nd stage of the jig.
Tighten the screws.
Verify that the TH tube height flag doesn't touch the 1st stage, but is placed between the 2nd
stage (included) and the 3rd stage (excluded). If this is not accomplished, repeat the
adjustment.



(P/N: 2200432)

• click on START

• select all
• click on START
tube


RACK EJECTION.

• click on START
35) Replace the sample probe and secure the red knurled fitting.
metal top cover.

6.42 HP Valve Rotor and Stator

The figure below shows the components of a typical 7-Port, 3-Position HP valve.

2) Refer to Section 6.19. Complete step 4).
3) Remove the 3 stator screws.
4) Remove the stator and stator face assembly from the stator ring.
5) Remove the stator ring.
6) CAREFULLY pull the rotor seal off the shaft assembly.
7) Install the new rotor seal onto the shaft

assembly with the grooves facing the stator.
The 3 holes on the rotor seal will only fit on the
assembly one way.
8) Replace the stator ring so that the 2 short pins on the ring are placed into the corresponding
holes in the body.
9) Install the new stator face assembly on the stator,

as described on the picture. The notch on the
stator face assembly should be oriented towards
the hole on the stator.
10) Replace the stator and stator face assembly on the valve so that the pin on the stator ring is
in the hole on the stator.
11) Replace the 3 stator screws. Be careful to TIGHTEN THEM A FEW TURNS AT A TIME.
12) Re-connect all of the tubing to the stator, making sure that the fittings are in their proper
position numbers.



• click on TO INJECT POSITION and monitor
the Sensors status
the Sensors status
• click on TO PRIME POSITION and monitor
the Sensors status
the Sensors status

priming.


PUMP.
19) Go back to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (4/17) screen and move
the valve to inject position.
20) Go back to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (1/17) screen:

PUMP.
22) Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (4/17) screen and move the
valve to load position.
6.43 Degasser Buffer Tubing
1) Remove the degasser module. (Section 6.13)

2) To release the vacuum, remove the red plastic

stopper:
• depress the collar on the connector
• at the same time, pull out the stopper

washers that secure the degasser lid to
the body.
4) CAREFULLY pull out the lid and the 3 internal Teflon tubings.
5) Using an 8mm open-end wrench, remove the

4 black plastic fittings that secure the 2 buffer
tubings (the 2 longest ones) to the lid.
6) Install the new buffer tubings on the lid. MANUALLY tighten the black plastic fittings. Stop
when the parts are in contact.

7) Tighten the fittings ¼ turn, using an 8mm open-end wrench.
8) Make sure that the seal is correctly seated

in the groove on the body.
9) Replace the lid on the body. Be very careful NOT TO PINCH any tubing between 2 parts.
10) Secure the lid with the 6 screws and 6 spring lock washers, tightening them a few turns at a
time.
11) Replace the degasser module.





16) Go to the DEGASSER (1/4) screen and test the degasser

airtightness:
6.44 Degasser Wash Tubing
2) Refer to Section 6.43. Complete step 2) and 3).

3) CAREFULLY pull out the lid and the 3 internal Teflon tubings.
4) Using an 8mm open-end wrench, remove the

2 black plastic fittings that secure the wash
tubing (the shortest one) to the lid.
5) Install the new wash tubing on the lid. MANUALLY tighten the black plastic fittings. Stop
when the parts are in contact.
6) Tighten the fittings ¼ turn, using an 8mm open-end wrench.
7) Make sure that the seal is correctly seated

in the groove on the body.
8) Replace the lid on the body. Be very careful NOT TO PINCH any tubing between 2 parts.
9) Secure the lid with the 6 screws and 6 spring lock washers, tightening them a few turns at a
time.






15) Go to the DEGASSER (1/4) screen and test the degasser

airtightness:
6.45 Memory DIMM (64MB)
be taken:



screws.
6) CAREFULLY remove the old Dual Inline

Memory Module (DIMM) from the
motherboard and replace it with the new
one. Because the number of pins is
different on either side of the break, the
module will only fit in one orientation.
7) Replace the interface board support and tighten the 2 captive screws.
6.46 LCD Internal Board
be taken:



screws.
4) Rotate the interface support and remove it.


6) Disconnect the 2 flat cables and the supply

cable from the LCD internal board.
7) Remove the screw, flat washer and spacer

that secure the LCD internal board to the
motherboard. CAREFULLY remove the board.
8) Note down the serial number of the new LCD

internal board (FXXXX-XXX).

Early electronic boards have a different serial

number (N°XX).
9) Update the serial number of the LCD internal

board written on the electronic module (use a
pencil).
10) CAREFULLY install the new LCD internal board and secure it with the screw, flat washer and
spacer. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
11) Re-connect the 2 flat cables and the supply cable to the LCD internal board.
12) Re-connect the link cable between the motherboard and the LAN connector.
6.47 HPLC Module


4) Disconnect the white and green knurled

fittings at the proportioning valve. Place caps
on the fittings or plugs with unions. If there is a

from the probe – port 5)
6) Operating from the right side of the D-10, locate the white union and unscrew the grey
knurled fitting (orange PEEK tubing coming from the detector).

7) Locate the waste manifold 2 (bottom left corner of the

syringe module) and disconnect the silicon tubing coming
from the piston flush circuit.
8) At the top of the module, remove the

thumbscrew and the black cover.
9) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the detector

module board.
10) Slightly pull out the HPLC drawer.

11) Disconnect the 2 ribbon cables from the HPLC

module board.
Depending on the type of frame used, it may be

necessary to also disconnect the 2 plugs of the
front cover solenoid link cable (labeled '1' and
'2').
12) Disconnect the ground cable from the bottom

of the HPLC drawer.
13) Completely pull out the HPLC drawer.
14) Re-connect the ground cable to the bottom of the new drawer.
Each spare HPLC module is delivered with a Specifications sheet, giving the module's
specific parameters. All these values must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the
replacement is done.

15) Re-connect the 2 ribbon cables to the HPLC module board. Re-connect the 2 plugs of the
front cover solenoid link cable if they were previously removed.
16) Re-connect the ribbon cable to the detector module board.
17) Replace the cover and tighten the thumbscrew.
18) Re-connect the silicon tubing coming from the piston flush circuit to the waste manifold 2.
19) Re-connect the orange PEEK tubing coming from the detector to the white union.
20) On the HP valve, re-connect the red knurled fitting (tube coming from the probe – port 5) and
the blue knurled fitting (tube coming from the syringe module – port 7).
21) Re-connect the white and green fittings to the proportioning valve. Be careful to MATCH THE
COLORS.
22) Install the HPLC drawer

in the plastic guide rail.
Only the RIGHT edge
must be inserted in the
guide.
25) Replace the buffer bottles on the reagent tray.


27) Go to the DEGASSER (2/4) screen:

• click on BUFFER 1 to prime the first line
• click on BUFFER 2 to prime the second line


30) Check for leaks on the drawer while the pump is running.

priming.

32) Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (8/17) screen. Enter the

following parameters from the Specifications sheet:
• Waiting Count value
• Filling Count value
• click on DONE
33) Go to the HP: FLOW CALIB. (1/4) screen. Enter the

• rule 1
• rule 2
• rule 3
• click on DONE
34) Go to the HP: SENSOR CALIB. (1/2) screen. Enter the

• High Pressure Sensor Offset
• High Pressure Sensor Gain
• click on DONE

• Gradient offset value
• click on DONE

6.48 HPLC Module Board
1) Remove the HPLC module. (Section 6.47)
2) Disconnect all cables from the HPLC

module board.
3) Replace the old HPLC module board with the new one (4 plastic standoffs).
4) Re-connect all
cables to the HPLC
module board.
5) Replace the HPLC module.
6) Install the power cord and turn on the power.
7) To test the new HPLC module board, perform a run.
6.49 Z Board


side of the D-10 and slide the metal top cover back.
7) Disconnect the following from the Z board:

• 4 cables on the left (labeled '5', '7', '11'
and '13')
• 1 cable on the bottom (labeled '12')
• 1 flat cable on the bottom (unlabeled)
• 3 cables on the top (only 2 of them are
labeled '1' and '2')

8) CAREFULLY cut and remove the plastic cable

tie. Disconnect the 12-pin flex cable.
9) Disconnect the 8-pin flex cable.

and 3 flat washers that secure the Z board.
Remove the board.
11) Install the new Z board and secure it with the 3 screws, 3 spring lock washers and 3 flat
washers.
12) Re-connect the 8-pin and 12-pin flex cables. Secure them with a new cable tie. DO NOT
OVERTIGHTEN.

13) Re-connect all remaining cables to the Z board.

Make sure the TH tube height sensor flex cable is
properly plugged in.
metal top cover

19) Place a barcoded microvial adapter into position #7 of a sample rack. Place an empty sample
vial into the adapter in the rack. Make sure the cap is snapped completely in place.



• select tube7 only
• click on START
• verify that the indications of the magnet and
tube columns are correct

• click on GO TO TUBE
• click on BARCODE LED ON
• verify that the indication in the Last code read
field is correct
• click on BARCODE LED OFF
• click on the RACK INTRODUCTION shortcut
6.50 X Board
4) Locate the X board on the rear of the sample arm module.

5) Disconnect the large ribbon cable from the board.
6) Disconnect all the other

cables and flat cables
from the X board.
7) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers that secure the X board to
the sample arm. Remove the board.
8) Install the new X board and secure it with the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat
washers.
9) Re-connect all cables to the X board. Make sure the

8-pin and 12-pin flex cables are properly connected.



• introduce an empty sample rack
6.51 Syringe Module Board

2) Disconnect the silicon tubing and all cables from

the syringe module board.
3) Replace the old syringe module board with the new one (4 plastic standoffs).
4) Re-connect all cables to the module

board.
5) Re-connect the silicon tubing to the vacuum sensor.


10) Click on the Access Wash st. button.
lock again.
12) Replace the dilution/wash station with the clear dilution/wash station (P/N: 2200427).
13) Install the upper front door simulator (P/N:

2200429).
WARNING: Use extreme caution when using this tool, as all moving parts can be engaged.


Priming button. At the same time, make sure liquid is
being pushed through the circuit by looking at the clear
15) Remove the upper front door simulator and close the upper front door.
16) Use the Access Wash st. button to remove the clear
6.52 Degasser Module Board
2) Disconnect the silicon tubing and all cables from the

degasser module board.
3) Replace the old degasser module board with the new one (4 plastic standoffs).
4) Re-connect all cables to the module board. Be careful, as the cables coming from the bubble
detectors (labeled '1', '3' and '6') are NOT INTERCHANGEABLE.

5) Re-connect the silicon tubing to the vacuum sensor.





11) Go to the DEGASSER (1/4) screen and test the vacuum

pump:
6.53 Rack Positioning Motor Assembly
The rack positioning motor assembly consists of 2

metal brackets fitted together, the motor itself coupled
to a speed reducer, a rubber disk, a tension spring
and a ground cable.



positioning motor assembly (labeled '3').

and 3 flat washers, which secure the assembly
to the frame. Be careful to HOLD THE
ASSEMBLY with one hand.
7) CAREFULLY remove the old rack positioning motor assembly. Be mindful of the cable, as
there are several metal cable holders on its way to the X board.
8) CAREFULLY install the new rack positioning

motor assembly and secure it with the 3
screws, 3 spring lock washers and 3 flat
washers. The assembly should be pushed
(or pulled) towards the front of the D-10 prior
to securing the screws.
9) Lead the cable to the X board and connect it at CN3.

10) Use the screw mounted on the bracket (below

the speed reducer) to adjust the position of the
motor and rubber disk.
First, loosen the locking counter-nut. Then, tighten the screw until there is a small
clearance between the mounting screw of the rubber disk and the rack drive module.
Tighten the locking counter-nut when done.


15) Go to the RACK INTRO. (1/1) screen to check that the new
rack positioning motor assembly is working well:
• test the motor in both directions
• click on LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION and
introduce a rack
• click on LAUNCH RACK EJECTION
6.54 Rubber Disk
1) Remove the rack positioning motor assembly. (Section 6.53)
If the rubber disk can't be removed as described

in step 2), disconnect the ground cable, remove
the tension spring and swivel the brackets, in
order to access the disk.

2) Unlock the screw and slide out the old rubber disk.
The output shaft of the speed reducer includes a

flattening. Make sure the rubber disk is pushed all
the way down the shaft prior to securing the
mounting screw.
3) Install the new rubber disk on the shaft and tighten the screw.
6.55 Temperature Sensor
2) Open the metal cable holder, which restrains the

temperature sensor cable.

3) Pull out the old temperature sensor.
4) Apply thermal grease on the inner surface of the housing and push the new temperature
sensor into the housing.
Each spare temperature sensor has a sticker on it, giving the sensor's specific parameter.
Note this value; it must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the replacement is done.
5) Replace the cable in the metal cable holder and close it.


following parameter from the new temperature sensor:
• click on DONE

6.56 Peltier Module
2) On the bottom of the cartridge module, open all

metal cable holders and remove the 3 cables.
3) Open the remaining metal cable holder, which

restrains the temperature sensor cable.
4) Remove the 4 screws and 4 nylon

insulators, which secure the aluminum
bracket to the cartridge module. Remove the
ground cable.

5) Remove the aluminum bracket and the

4 remaining nylon insulators.
6) Remove the old Peltier module.
Peltier modules have 2 faces, but only one of them

has an inscription. This face should be put in contact
with the rear of the cartridge module.
7) Apply a thin layer of thermal grease on both faces

of the new Peltier module and install it in the
housing. Make sure it is properly seated.

8) Put a drop of thread-locker in the 4 mounting

holes.
9) Replace the 4 nylon insulators and the aluminum bracket.
10) Secure the bracket with the 4 screws and 4

nylon insulators – don't forget the ground cable.
Make sure that the edges of the bracket are
flush with the cartridge module prior to securing
the screws. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN, as there
is a risk of bending the aluminum bracket.
11) Replace the 4 cables in the metal cable holders and close them.


14) Go to the THERMAL CONTROL (1/7) screen. Check that the

Calculated temperature is equal to 35 ±0.5°C.
6.57 Upper Front Door
If the upper front door can't be opened as

described in steps 1) through 7), remove the front
cover assembly (Section 6.2) and move the
solenoid manually, in order to unlock the door.

3) Click on Open front Door.
lock again.
5) Go to the RUN screen and click on Shut Down.
The gas spring is fastened to the upper front

door with 2 screws, 2 flat washers, 2 white
nylon washers and a black plastic spacer.
Remove only 1 of the 2 screws and the other
parts will come off easily.

8) Separate the gas spring from the upper front

door.
9) Remove the 4 screws and 4 flat washers that

fasten the upper front door to the front cover.
Remove the upper front door.
10) Install the new upper front door and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 flat washers.
11) Fasten the gas spring to the new upper front door.
12) Close the upper front door.


15) Go to the FRONT COVER (1/2) screen:

• click on START FRONT COVER SOLENOID
• open the upper front door and make sure that it
operates normally
• monitor the sensors' status
6.58 Lower Front Door
2) Remove the plastic thumbscrew and the small

metal cable from the lower front door.
3) Remove the 4 screws that fasten the lower front

door to the front cover. Remove the lower front
door.
4) Install the new lower front door and secure it with the 4 screws.
5) Replace the metal cable and the plastic thumbscrew.

6.59 Gas Spring
2) Drive out the pin located at the top, rear side of

the front cover assembly to remove the gas
spring.
3) Install the new gas spring and fasten it with

the pin. Don't push the pin all the way against
the front cover: be sure to leave a few mm of
clearance between the two parts.
There's no need to put any spacer between the

gas spring and the front cover.
4) Fasten the gas spring to the upper front door.

5) Close the upper front door.
6.60 Micro-Switch

micro-switch cable to the front cover.
3) Remove the nut and flat washer that secure the

micro-switch assembly. Remove the assembly.
Each micro-switch assembly consists of a

micro-switch, a threaded metal bracket and a
cable.

4) Disconnect the cable from the micro-switch.
5) Remove the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers

that secure the micro-switch to the bracket.
Remove the micro-switch.
6) Install the new micro-switch on the bracket and secure it with the 2 screws and 2 spring lock
washers.
7) Re-connect the cable to the micro-switch.
8) Replace the micro-switch assembly and secure it with the nut and flat washer.
9) Fasten the micro-switch cable to the front cover

using new tie-wraps. Be careful to respect the
80mm length, as described on the picture.
80mm

6.61 Front Cover Solenoid/Sensor

solenoid/sensor cable to the front cover.
3) Remove the nut and flat washer that secure the

micro-switch assembly. Remove the assembly.

and 3 flat washers that fasten the
solenoid/sensor bracket to the front cover.

5) Remove the screw and serrated lock washer

that fasten the sensor to the bracket.
6) Remove the nut that fastens the solenoid to the

bracket and slide out the solenoid.
7) Open the metal cable holder and remove the old front cover solenoid/sensor.
8) Install the new solenoid on the bracket and

secure it with the nut. It is very important to
position the solenoid as described on the
picture, so that the cable doesn't interfere with
the movement of the pin.
9) Secure the nut with a drop of tamperproofing coating (P/N: 2200451).

10) Install the new sensor on the bracket and

secure it with the screw and serrated lock
washer. Make sure the sensor is aligned
properly with the bracket. //
11) Secure the sensor with a drop of tamperproofing coating (P/N: 2200451).
12) Route the cables through the metal cable

holder and close it.
13) Replace the solenoid/sensor bracket and secure

it with the 3 screws, 3 spring lock washers and 3
flat washers. Make sure the solenoid is centered
in the hole of the lock.
14) Replace the micro-switch assembly and secure it with the nut and flat washer.

110mm
15) Fasten the solenoid/sensor cable to the front

cover using new tie-wraps. Be careful to respect
the 110mm length, as described on the picture.


operates normally
6.62 Front Cover
2) Remove the upper front door. (Section 6.57)
3) Remove the lower front door. (Section 6.58)

4) Remove the gas spring. (Section 6.59)
5) Remove the micro-switch. (Section 6.60)
6) Remove the front cover solenoid/sensor. (Section 6.61)
7) Remove the screw and flat washer that fasten

the small metal cable to the front cover.
Remove the cable.
8) Install the cable on the new front cover, using the screw and flat washer.
9) Replace the front cover solenoid/sensor.
10) Replace the micro-switch.
11) Replace the gas spring.
12) Replace the lower front door.
13) Replace the upper front door.



operates normally
6.63 Rack Door Solenoid
1) Remove the rack door module. (Section 6.16)
2) Cut and remove the tie-wraps, which fasten

the solenoid cable to the rack door assembly.
3) Manually open the rack door.
4) Remove the nut, which fastens the solenoid to its

bracket. Remove the old solenoid.

5) Install the new solenoid on the bracket and

secure it with the nut. It is very important to
position the solenoid as described on the
picture, so that the cable doesn't interfere with
the movement of the pin.
6) Secure the nut with a drop of tamperproofing coating (P/N: 2200451).
7) Manually open and close the rack door to make sure that the new solenoid is correctly
positioned.
8) Fasten the solenoid cable (along with the open door and closed door sensors cables) to the
rack door assembly with new tie-wraps.
9) Replace the rack door module.

rack door solenoid is working properly:
• click on START RACK DOOR SOLENOID

6.64 Open Door Sensor
2) Cut and remove the tie-wrap that fastens the

open door sensor cable to the rack door
assembly.
3) Remove the 2 Nylock nuts, which secure the

connecting rod. Remove the rod and the 3 flat
washers.
4) Remove the traveler assembly.

5) Remove the 2 screws and 2 serrated lock

washers, which secure the open door sensor to
its bracket. Remove the old open door sensor.
6) Install the new open door sensor on the bracket and replace the 2 screws and 2 serrated lock
7) Use the rack door sensor positioning jig (P/N:

2200429) to adjust the position of the new open
door sensor.

Place the rack door sensor positioning jig in contact with the rack door assembly, as
indicated by the unbroken line below. Push the open door sensor against the jig, as
indicated by the dotted line below. Securely tighten the 2 screws.
8) Replace the traveler assembly, the connecting

rod and the 3 flat washers.

9) Replace the 2 Nylock nuts that secure the

connecting rod. Tighten the nuts until the parts
are in contact. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
Manually open and close the door to make sure
that it is operating freely.
10) Fasten the sensor cable (along with the solenoid and closed door sensor cables) to the rack
door assembly with a new tie-wrap.

open door sensor is working properly:
• monitor the sensor status and the door status
6.65 Closed Door Sensor

2) Cut and remove the tie-wrap that fastens the

closed door sensor cable to the rack door
assembly.
3) Remove the first screw and serrated lock washer

that fasten the closed door sensor to its bracket.
4) Manually open the rack door.
5) Remove the second screw and serrated lock

washer that fasten the closed door sensor to its
bracket. Remove the old sensor.
6) Install the new closed door sensor on the bracket and replace the 2 screws and 2 serrated
lock washers – but do not tighten the screws.

7) With the rack door open, use the rack door

sensor positioning jig (P/N: 2200429) to adjust
the position of the new closed door sensor.
Place the rack door sensor positioning jig in contact with the rack door assembly, as
indicated by the unbroken line below. Push the closed door sensor against the jig, as
indicated by the dotted line below. Securely tighten the 2 screws.

8) Fasten the sensor cable (along with the solenoid and open door sensor cables) to the rack
door assembly with a new tie-wrap.

closed door sensor is working properly:
• monitor the sensor status and the door status
6.66 HP Pump Check Valves
2) Remove the 2 short screws at the top of the

pump head assembly and the 2 long screws at
the bottom.

3) Separate the 3 blocks of the pump head,

revealing 4 check valves and 2 O-rings.
4) Replace the old check valves with the new

ones. The orientation of the valves is critical, as
they are designed to fit into the pump head in
one direction only.
5) Re-assemble the 3 blocks of the pump head and secure them with the 4 screws. DO NOT
OVERTIGHTEN.





11) Perform the procedure from Section 7.7 Flow Rate Verification.
6.67 X Home Sensor
2) Manually move the sample arm to the right side of the D-10.

5) On this board, disconnect the cable coming from the X home

sensor (labeled '11').
6) Remove the 2 screws and 2 serrated lock

washers that secure the X home sensor to the
bottom of the sample arm module. Remove the
old sensor.
7) Install the new X home sensor on the sample arm module and replace the 2 screws and 2
serrated lock washers – but do not tighten the screws.
8) Use the X home sensor positioning jig (P/N:

2200425) to adjust the position of the sensor.

Place the X home sensor positioning jig in contact with the frame, as indicated by the
unbroken line below. Push the X home sensor against the jig, as indicated by the dotted
line below. Securely tighten the 2 screws.
9) Connect the sensor cable to the X board (CN11).
11) Replace the sample probe with the dummy probe (P/N: 2200424).

engaged.



• click on START



• click on START
18) Manually move the X home sensor towards the center of the instrument.

• click on START

is set to no
• click on START

22) Check the probe position as described in steps 15) to 17).


• click on START

is set to no
• click on START
25) On the X motor, verify that the position sensor is

between 2 slots. If it is, go to step 27). If it isn't,
26) Move the X home sensor and repeat steps 23) to 25) until the X position sensor is between 2
slots. At the end, check the probe position as described in steps 15) to 17).

• click on START

6.68 X Position Sensor (Motor Encoder)
it.

4) On this board, disconnect the cable coming from the X

position sensor (labeled '10').
The X position sensor is fastened with 2 nuts

and 2 serrated lock washers to a small metal
plate. The plate itself is fastened to the X motor,
on the same end as the slotted disk.
5) On the X motor:
• loosen – but do not remove – the 2 screws, 2
spring lock washers and 2 flat washers that
secure the metal plate
• swivel the plate to have access to the sensor
• remove the old X position sensor
6) Install the new X position sensor on the metal plate and secure it with the 2 nuts and 2

8) Connect the cable coming from the new X position sensor to the X board (CN10).
12) Use the Access Wash st. button to replace the

dilution/wash station with the X movement adjustment
tool (P/N: 2200428).
13) Click on the Replace Probe button.
lock again.
15) Replace the sample probe with the dummy probe (P/N: 2200424).

16) Install the upper front door simulator (P/N:

2200429).
WARNING: Use extreme caution when using this tool, as all moving parts can be engaged.
17) Click on the Exit to Service software button.


• click on START


The assumption is that the probe home
position was correct prior to sensor failure. If
this wasn't the case, proceed to step 17) of
Section 6.67.

• click on START
22) Manually move the X position sensor.

• click on START


25) Check the probe position as described in steps 19) to 21).

• click on START
31) Remove the upper front door simulator and close the upper front door.
6.69 TH Home Sensor
5) Manually turn the TH and Z motors, in order to lower the tube holder assembly and the probe
support.

6) On the Z board, disconnect the TH home sensor

cable (labeled '12').
7) On the front side of the D-10, remove the screw and

serrated lock washer that secure the TH home
sensor to the sample arm module. Remove the old
sensor.
8) Remove the silicon rubber insulator from the old sensor connector and install it on the new
one.
9) Install the new TH home sensor on the sample

arm module and replace the screw and
serrated lock washer – but do not tighten the
screw.

Make sure that the upper face of the TH home sensor is flush with the upper sample arm
plate. Push the sensor against the small metal bracket or use a flat tool (such as the upper
front door simulator).
Tighten the screw when done.
10) Route the TH home sensor cable to the Z board and connect it at CN12.




• click on START
15) On the TH MOVE (2/4) screen:

• set Direction to from down to up
• for the Axis sensor and the Tube height
sensor, verify that the selection is set to no
• click on START
16) Make sure the TH position sensor is still between 2 slots; if needed, move the slotted disk.

(P/N: 2200432)

• click on START


• select all
• click on START
tube

RACK EJECTION.
6.70 TH Position Sensor (Motor Encoder)

4) Remove the Z board. (Section 6.49)
5) Loosen – but do not remove – the 2 screws that

secure the TH motor.
6) Push (or pull) the TH motor towards the front

of the D-10 (there are oblong holes allowing
this movement) and remove the belt.
7) Loosen – but do not remove – the screw that secures

the pulley to the TH motor shaft. Remove the pulley.

8) Cut and remove the plastic cable tie, which secures

the TH position sensor cable.
9) Holding the TH motor with one hand, remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat
washers. Remove the TH motor.
The TH position sensor is fastened with 2 nuts and

2 serrated lock washers to a small metal plate. The
plate itself is fastened to the TH motor, on the same
end as the slotted disk.
10) On the TH motor:

• loosen – but do not remove – the 2
screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2
flat washers that secure the metal
plate
• swivel the plate to have access to the
sensor
• remove the old TH position sensor
11) Remove the silicon rubber insulator from the old sensor connector and install it on the new
one.

12) Install the new TH position sensor on the metal plate and secure it with the 2 nuts and 2
14) Install the TH motor on its support with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat
15) Replace the pulley on the shaft and tighten the screw. For the exact position of the pulley on
the shaft, follow the example of the Z motor.
16) Slide the belt on the pulleys.
17) Adjust the tension of the belt by sliding the TH motor in the oblong holes and tighten the 2 TH
motor screws. Follow the example of the Z motor.
18) Replace the Z board.
19) Fasten the TH position sensor cable (along with the TH motor cable) to the sample arm
module with a new tie-wrap.
6.71 Z Home Sensor
5) Manually turn the TH and Z motors, in order to lower the tube holder assembly and the probe
support.

6) On the Z board, disconnect the Z home sensor

cable (labeled '2').
7) On the front side of the D-10, remove the 2

screws and 2 serrated lock washers that secure
the Z home sensor to the sample arm module.
Remove the old sensor.
8) Install the new Z home sensor on the sample arm module and replace the 2 screws and 2
serrated lock washers – but do not tighten the screws.
9) Use the Z home sensor positioning jig (P/N: 2200426) to

adjust the position of the sensor.

Position the Z home sensor positioning jig on the sample arm. Make sure the surfaces are
in contact. Match the surfaces indicated with the dotted and unbroken arrows.
Move the Z home sensor so that it comes in contact with the jig. Tighten the screws when
done.
10) Route the Z home sensor cable to the Z board and connect it at CN2.




• click on START

• set Direction to from down to up
is set to no
• click on START
16) Make sure the Z position sensor is still between 2 slots; if needed, move the slotted disk.


(P/N: 2200432)

• select To tube
• click on START

• click on START
20) Use the Z movement control tool (P/N: 2200431) to verify the
setting of the Z movement. If it is OK, go to step 25). If it isn't,

21) Move the Z home sensor.

is set to no
• click on START
23) Make sure the Z position sensor is still between 2 slots; if needed, move the slotted disk.



RACK EJECTION.
6.72 Belt Pulley (30-Tooth)
This procedure also applies to the 30-tooth pulley mounted on the Z motor.

2) Unlock – but do not remove – the 2 screws that


4) Loosen – but do not remove – the screw that secures

the 30-tooth pulley to the TH motor shaft. Remove the
old pulley.
5) Install the new 30-tooth pulley on the shaft and tighten the mounting screw. For the exact
position of the pulley on the shaft, follow the example of the Z motor.

For the 30-tooth pulley mounted on the TH motor, continue with step 9a) and stop. Steps
9b) to 13) apply ONLY to the pulley mounted on the Z motor.
9a) Refer to Section 6.69. Complete steps 12) through 20).
9b) Refer to Section 6.71. Complete steps 12) through 19).
10) Use the Z movement control tool (P/N: 2200431) to test the Z movement.



RACK EJECTION.
This procedure also applies to the 15-tooth pulley mounted on the Z lead screw.



4) Hold the TH lead screw with one hand and

unlock – but do not remove – the screw that
secures the 15-tooth pulley. Remove the old
pulley.
5) Install the new 15-tooth pulley on the TH lead screw and tighten the mounting screw. Make
sure the lead screw is pushed all the way up prior to securing the screw. Don't forget to put
the flat washer between the lead screw bearing and the 15-tooth pulley.
For the 15-tooth pulley mounted on the TH lead screw, continue with step 9a) and stop.
Steps 9b) to 13) apply ONLY to the pulley mounted on the Z lead screw.
9a) Refer to Section 6.69. Complete steps 12) through 20).
9b) Refer to Section 6.71. Complete steps 12) through 19).




RACK EJECTION.
6.74 Z Gear Belt

secure the Z motor.
3) Push (or pull) the Z motor towards the front of the

D-10 (there are oblong holes allowing this
movement) and take the old gear belt off the
pulleys.
4) Slide the new Z gear belt on the pulleys.
5) Adjust the tension of the belt by sliding the Z motor in the oblong holes and tighten the 2 Z
motor screws. Follow the example of the TH motor.




RACK EJECTION.
6.75 TH Gear Belt


this movement) and take the old gear belt off
the pulleys.

4) Slide the new TH gear belt on the pulleys.
6.76 Liquid Pump Supply Cable
2) Open the metal cable holder, located on the rear

side of the syringe module.
3) On the syringe module board, disconnect the

liquid pump supply cable (labeled '6').
4) Disconnect the power supply cable from the liquid pump. Observe polarity. Remove the old
supply cable.

5) Connect the new supply cable to the liquid

pump. Be very careful to RESPECT POLARITY.
6) Connect the other end of the cable to the syringe module board (CN6).
7) Put all cables in the metal cable holder and close it.


6.77 Liquid Pump
2) On the rear side of the module, disconnect the

supply cable from the liquid pump. Observe
polarity for time of reconnection.
3) Hold the liquid pump with one hand and remove

the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers, which
secure it to the module.
4) On the front side of the syringe module,

disconnect the 2 silicon tubings from the pump
head. Remove the old liquid pump.
5) Connect the tubings to the new liquid pump head. Be careful NOT TO SWAP THE 2
TUBINGS.

6) Secure the new pump to the syringe module with the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers.
7) Re-connect the supply cable to the pump. Be very careful to RESPECT POLARITY.

10) Go to the SYRINGE (1/6) screen:

• click on START LIQUID PUMP
• verify that the pump is running properly
• click on STOP LIQUID PUMP
11) Go to the SYRINGE (3/6) screen and click on INT. WASTE

BOTTLE CHECK.
6.78 Internal Waste Bottle
1) Verify that the system is in Sleep state. If the system is in Standby, place it in Sleep state

3) Remove the internal waste bottle from the C-clip by gently pulling.
4) Disconnect the 3 silicon tubings from the old

internal waste bottle.
5) Connect the tubings to the new internal waste bottle. Be careful to MATCH THE COLORS.
Make sure that the cap is screwed on tightly and that the LUER fittings on the tubings are
connected tightly.
6) Replace the bottle in the C-clip housing.
8) Go to the MAINTAIN screen.


6.79 LUER Fittings for Internal Waste Bottle
This procedure applies ONLY to the old internal waste bottle cap design.
1) Clean the internal waste bottle according to the procedure in Section 5 of the Operation
Manual.
2) Remove the internal waste bottle. (Section 6.78)
3) Unscrew the cap.
4) Remove the piece of silicon tubing located on the inner

side of the cap.
5) Unscrew the plastic nuts and remove the 3 old LUER

fittings.
6) Install the 3 new LUER fittings on the cap and secure them with the plastic nuts. DO NOT
OVERTIGHTEN, as there is a risk of damaging the seals.
7) Replace the piece of silicon tubing on the LUER fitting which is marked in red.
8) Replace the cap. Make sure it is screwed on tightly.
9) Replace the internal waste bottle.


6.80 Pinch Valve Supply Cables
2) Open the metal cable holder, located on the rear

side of the syringe module.

3) On the syringe module board, disconnect the 2

supply cables (labeled '7' and '8') coming from
the 2 pinch valves.
4) Disconnect the power supply cables from the 2

pinch valves. Remove the old supply cables.
5) Connect the new supply cables to the 2 pinch

valves:
• the black and green cable (labeled '7')
should be connected to the pinch valve
located next to the liquid pump
• the black and yellow cable (labeled '8')
should be connected to the other valve
On both pinch valves, make sure that the black
cable is plugged on the LEFT connector.
6) Connect the other end of the supply cables to the syringe module board (CN7 and CN8).
7) Put all cables in the metal cable holder and close it.



• click on START DILUTION VALVE
• verify that the corresponding valve is running
properly (i.e. that the black plastic part pinches
the tubing) and that the Valve status changes
accordingly
• click on STOP DILUTION VALVE
• repeat the test with the wash valve
6.81 Pinch Valve Tubing
1) Verify that the system is in Sleep state. If the system is in Standby, place it in Sleep state
3) Disconnect the pinch valve tubing from the waste

manifold 1 (right end) and LUER fitting (left end).

4) CAREFULLY remove the old tubing from the

pinch valve head (pull down to release).
5) Connect the new pinch valve tubing to the waste

manifold 1 and LUER fitting. Make sure that the
tubing is NOT TWISTED and that it is centered
on the pinch valve.
6) CAREFULLY insert the tubing in the pinch valve head (push up).
8) Go to the MAINTAIN screen.


6.82 Pinch Valve
2) Remove the pinch valve tubing. (Section 6.81)
3) On the rear side of the module, disconnect the

pinch valve supply cable.
4) Remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2

flat washers, which secure the pinch valve to the
syringe module. Remove the old pinch valve.

5) Manually turn the head of the new pinch valve,

so that it is positioned as described on the
picture.
6) Install the new pinch valve on the syringe module and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring
7) Re-connect the power supply cable.
8) Replace the pinch valve tubing.


• verify that the corresponding valve is running
properly (i.e. that the black plastic part pinches
the tubing) and that the Valve status changes
accordingly
• click on STOP DILUTION VALVE
• repeat the test with the wash valve

12) Go to the SYRINGE (3/6) screen and click on INT. WASTE

BOTTLE CHECK.
6.83 Detector Board
1) Remove the detector module. (Section 6.32)
2) Disconnect the 3 remaining cables from the

detector board.

and 2 flat washers, which secure the detector
board to the module. Remove the old detector
board.
4) Install the new detector board on the module and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock
washers and 2 flat washers.
5) Re-connect the 3 cables to the new detector board. Note that there is only one possible
connection for each cable.

6) Open the detector:

• remove the 2 screws and 2 spring
lock washers that secure the black
metal cover
• slide the cover back
7) Determine the type of

reference
photodetector used
inside the detector
(small or large) and
SMALL LARGE
8) Move the jumper located on the bottom end of the detector board, according to the type of
reference photodetector previously identified.
With a SMALL photodetector, the jumper With a LARGE photodetector, the jumper
should be in the UPPER position. should be in the LOWER position.

9) Close the detector:

• slide the black metal cover back on
• secure it with the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers
10) Replace the detector module.
6.84 Reference Board
When replacing the reference board, it may prove to be necessary to replace the detector
board also – see step 10).

metal cover
3) On the detector board, disconnect the cable

coming from the reference board.

4) Remove the screw and spring lock washer that

secure the reference board to the black metal
bracket.
5) CAREFULLY pop out the grommet.
6) Pass the plug through the hole in the detector base

and completely remove the old reference board.
Slightly twisting the wires will facilitate the job.
Prior to installing the new reference board, make sure that the photodiode is clean. If the
window needs to be cleaned, use ethyl alcohol and wipe off the window gently. Avoid using
any other organic solvents, as they may cause deterioration of the device's resin coating.
When using tweezers or other hard tools, be careful NOT TO SCRATCH the window surface.
7) Pass the cable coming from the new reference board through the hole in the detector base.
8) CAREFULLY put the grommet in place.

9) Install the new reference board and secure it with

the screw and spring lock washer. Make sure the
board is pushed all the way down prior to securing
the screw.
10) Check the revision number of the detector board. If

the number is <5, replace the board (Section 6.83).
Make sure that the revision number of the new
board is ≥5.
11) Connect the new reference board cable to the detector board.

13) Check the version number indicated on the

detector label. If the number is <DAB07/4, change
it into DAB07/4 (use a pencil).

6.85 Sample Board

metal cover
3) Disconnect the 3 cables from the detector board.

washers, which secure the black metal bracket
to the detector base.

5) Remove the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washer

that secure the sample board to the 2 black nylon
standoffs.
7) Pass the plug through the hole in the detector

base and completely remove the old sample
board. Slightly twisting the wires will facilitate the
job.
Prior to installing the new sample board, make sure that the filter is clean. If the filter needs
to be cleaned, use ethyl alcohol and wipe off the filter gently. Avoid using any other organic
solvents, as they may cause deterioration of the device's resin coating. When using
tweezers or other hard tools, be careful NOT TO SCRATCH the filter surface.
8) Pass the cable coming from the new sample board through the hole in the detector base.

10) Install the new sample board on the black nylon standoffs and secure it with the 2 screws and
2 spring lock washers.
11) Replace the black metal bracket on the detector base and secure it with the 2 screws and 2
spring lock washers.
12) Re-connect the 3 cables to the detector board. Note that there is only one possible

6.86 LED Board

• remove the 2 screws and 2 spring lock
washers that secure the black metal
cover


washers, which secure the black metal bracket
to the detector base.
5) Remove the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washer

that secure the LED board to the 2 black Delrin
standoffs.
7) Pass the plug through the hole in the detector

base and completely remove the old LED board.
Slightly twisting the wires will facilitate the job.

8) Pass the cable coming from the new LED board through the hole in the detector base.
10) Install the new LED board on the black Delrin standoffs and replace the 2 screws and 2
spring lock washers – but don't tighten the screws.
11) Connect the new LED board cable to the

detector board.
12) On the front side of the D-10, connect the front

cover sensor simulator (P/N: 2200415) and the
front cover switch simulator (P/N: 2200416).
13) CAREFULLY connect the ribbon cable to the

detector board.


15) On the main (1/2) screen, click on the DETECTOR

button – the LED will be powered on.
Move the LED board in order to center the blue halo on the flow cell lens. If necessary, do
not hesitate to add 1 (or more) flat washer(s) between the LED board and the black Delrin
standoffs.
Securely tighten the screws when done.

16) On the main (1/2) screen, click on SHUT DOWN.
17) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the detector module board.
19) Replace the black metal bracket on the detector base and secure it with the 2 screws and 2
spring lock washers.
20) Connect the 2 remaining cables to the detector board. Note that there is only one possible

6.87 Flow Cell

• remove the 2 screws and 2 spring lock
washers that secure the black metal
cover

4) Remove the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers,

which secure the black metal bracket to the
detector base.
5) Loosen – but do not remove – the 2 screws and

2 spring lock washer that secure the sample
board to the 2 black nylon standoffs.
The flow cell is held in position by a small, black

metal bracket. The bracket is itself secured to the
detector assembly with 2 screws.

6) Remove the 2 screws and the small metal bracket, which secure the flow cell to the detector
assembly.
7) CAREFULLY pull out the flow cell. A small lens is

bonded to the front of the flow cell; the flow cell
must be moved to the back before lifting.
8) Cut the 2 PEEK tubings and completely remove

the old flow cell.
9) Pass the new PEEK tubings through the 2

grommets, being mindful of the colors.
BLUE ORANGE

Each spare flow cell is delivered with 2 fittings (not

set) and comes already equipped with the 2 small
pieces of foam.
10) Install the new flow cell and secure it with the
small metal bracket and the 2 screws. Make
sure it is in contact with the support and the 2
plastic-coated pins prior to securing the 2
screws.
11) Tighten the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washer that secure the sample board.

Prior to connecting the orange PEEK tubing,

make sure that the ferrule and fitting are
positioned as described on the picture. Keep
pushing on the PEEK tubing when tightening the
fitting for the first time.
chamfered end

6.88 Floppy Drive
6) Disconnect the floppy drive supply cable.

7) Remove 2 screws and 2 serrated lock washers that

secure the floppy drive to the printer module.
9) Remove the screw and serrated lock washer,

which are located on the left side of the printer
module.
10) On the right side of the printer module, pull the flat
cable out of the plastic cable holder.

11) Remove the last screw and serrated lock washer

securing the floppy drive. Remove the old floppy
drive.
12) Install the new floppy drive and secure it with

the 4 screws and 4 serrated lock washers.
Make sure the front side of the drive is flush
with the metal bracket prior to securing the
screws.
13) Replace the flat cable in the plastic cable holder.
14) Re-connect the floppy drive supply cable.
15) Connect the 2 flat cables going from the PC board to the floppy drive and the hard disk.
6.89 Floppy Drive Supply Cable

3) Disconnect the power supply cable from the floppy

drive.
4) Open the first plastic cable holder, located on the

right side of the printer module.
it.

7) Open the third plastic cable holder.
8) Disconnect the floppy drive supply cable from the

interface board. Remove the old supply cable.
9) Connect the new floppy drive supply cable to the interface board.
10) Connect the other end of the cable to the floppy drive.
11) Replace the supply cable (along with all the other cables) in the 3 plastic cable holders and
close them.

6.90 Hard Disk Supply Cable
3) Disconnect the power supply cable from the hard

disk.
4) Open the first plastic cable holder, located on the

right side of the printer module.

7) Open the third plastic cable holder.
8) Disconnect the hard disk supply cable from the

interface board. Remove the old supply cable.
9) Connect the new hard disk supply cable to the interface board.
10) Connect the other end of the cable to the hard disk.
11) Replace the supply cable (along with all the other cables) in the 3 plastic cable holders and
close them.
6.91 Thermal Printer Supply Cable


6) Remove the plastic holder.
8) Open the plastic cable holder.
9) Disconnect the thermal printer supply cable.

Remove the old supply cable.
10) Connect the new supply cable.
11) Replace the plastic holder.

14) Replace the reagent tray.
metal top cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2
16) Replace the supply cable (along with all the other cables) in the plastic cable holder and
close it.
6.92 Main Fan
4) Disconnect the fan supply cable from the

interface board (top left corner).

6) Remove the 4 screws that secure the

protective grid and the fan to the frame.
Remove the old fan.
7) Install the new fan on the frame and secure it with

the 4 screws. Make sure that the supply cable is
positioned as described on the picture.
8) Connect the supply cable to the interface board.
9) Replace the cable (along with all the other cables) in the plastic cable holder and close it.

12) Replace the power cord and turn on the D-10. Make sure that air is EXTRACTED from the
unit.
6.93 Link Cable: Motherboard > LAN Connector
be taken:


screws.
4) Rotate the interface support and remove it.


6) Install the new link cable. To make sure that it won't interfere with the rotation of the
processor fan, it is recommended to CAREFULLY twist the cable.
6.94 Link Cable: Motherboard > VGA Connector
be taken:
2) Remove the link cable between the motherboard and the LAN connector. (Section 6.93)

3) Disconnect the VGA connector link cable from the

motherboard.
4) Remove the 2 standoffs, 2 flat washers and 2

Nylock nuts that secure the VGA connector to
the module. Remove the connector.
5) Fold the new ribbon cable, following the example of the old one.
6) Install the new VGA connector on the module and

secure it with the 2 standoffs, 2 flat washers and 2
Nylock nuts. Make sure that the connector is oriented
correctly.
7) Connect the new link cable to the motherboard.
8) Replace the link cable between the motherboard and the LAN connector.

6.95 Link Cable: Motherboard > RS Connectors
be taken:
3) Disconnect the small ribbon cable from the LCD

internal board.
4) Disconnect the RS422 & RS232 connectors link

cable from the motherboard.

5) CAREFULLY remove the LAN port.

Nylock nuts that secure the RS232 connector to
the module. Remove the connector.
7) Fold the new flat cable, following the example of the old one.
8) Install the new RS232 connector on the module and

secure it with the 2 standoffs, 2 flat washers and 2
Nylock nuts. Make sure that the connector is oriented
correctly.
9) Connect the new link cable to the motherboard.
10) Connect the small ribbon cable to LCD internal board.

11) Replace the LAN port. Make sure that it is

positioned correctly.
6.96 Link Cable: Motherboard > Mouse & Keyboard Connectors
be taken:
2) Remove the motherboard. (Section 6.25)
3) Remove the 4 screws, which secure the

mouse and keyboard connectors to the
module. Remove the connectors.

4) Install the new mouse and keyboard connectors on

the module and secure them with the 4 screws.
Make sure that the connectors are positioned and
oriented correctly.
MS
KB
The new mouse & keyboard link cable

should be positioned as described on
the picture.
5) Replace the motherboard.

When connecting the mouse &

keyboard link cable to the
motherboard, turn the plug so that the
2 empty slots are next to the board's
edge.
6.97 Link Cable: Interface Board > Rack Feeder Port
be taken:
1) Remove the motherboard. (Section 6.25)
2) Pull the rack feeder port link cable out of the

plastic cable holder.

3) CAREFULLY remove the LAN port.

Nylock nuts that secure the rack feeder port to
the module. Remove the connector and the
small plastic warning sign.
6) Replace the plastic

warning sign and
install the new rack
feeder port on the
module. Secure it
with the 2 standoffs,
2 flat washers and 2
Nylock nuts. Make
sure that the
connector and the
plastic part are
oriented correctly.

7) Replace the LAN port. Make sure that it is

positioned correctly.
8) Push the new rack feeder port link cable in the plastic cable holder.
9) Replace the motherboard.
6.98 Processor Fan (K6)
be taken:
2) Disconnect the processor fan supply cable from

the motherboard.

3) CAREFULLY remove the old heatsink (with

fan) from the motherboard.
4) Install the new heatsink on the motherboard. It is not absolutely necessary to apply thermal
grease on the processor.
5) Connect the new processor fan supply cable.

6.99 Processor (K6-2E 350MHz)
be taken:
1) Remove the processor fan. (Section 6.98)
2) Remove the old processor and replace it with the new one.
Locate the socket and open it by pulling the lever upwards. The socket lever must be fully
open (90° to 100°) when removing and installing the processor. Insert the processor with
the correct orientation, knowing that there is a notched corner. DO NOT EXERT TOO MUCH
FORCE, but press the processor down gently into the slot.
Once completely inserted, close the socket lever while holding down the processor.

3) Replace the heatsink. It is not absolutely necessary to apply thermal grease on the new
processor.
4) Re-connect the processor fan supply cable.
6.100 Flat Cable: Motherboard > Hard Disk
be taken:




screws.
10) Disconnect the hard disk flat cable from the

motherboard. Remove the cable.
11) Clean off the residue of silicon glue on the board.
13) Connect the new hard disk

flat cable to the
motherboard and secure it
with 2 drops of silicon glue.

14) Re-connect the floppy drive flat cable.
15) Connect the new flat cable to the hard disk.
6.101 Flat Cable: Motherboard > Floppy Drive
be taken:

it.



screws.
10) Disconnect the floppy drive flat cable from the

motherboard. Remove the cable.
12) Connect the new floppy drive flat cable to the motherboard.
13) Connect the other end of the cable to the floppy drive.
14) Re-connect the hard disk flat cable.

6.102 Flat Cable: LCD Internal Board > LCD Interface Board
be taken:

6) Disconnect the flat cable located on the left end

of the LCD interface board.

7) Pull the flat cable out of all the plastic cable

holders.


screws.

11) Disconnect the large flat cable from the

LCD internal board. Remove the cable.
13) Connect the new flat cable to the LCD internal board.
16) Install the new flat cable in all the plastic cable holders.
17) Connect the new flat cable to the LCD interface board.
metal top cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2

6.103 Link Cable: Z Board > Hall Effect Adapter Sensor



• select To tube
• click on START

• click on START


• click on START



disconnect the red knurled fitting at the top of the
sample probe. CAREFULLY remove the probe.
Use extreme caution, as the probe is a biohazard.
13) Cut and remove the tie-wraps, which fasten the link
cable to the sample arm.
14) Disconnect the link cable (labeled '1') from the Z

board.

15) Disconnect the link cable from the Hall effect

adapter sensor (located near the barcode
reader). Remove the old link cable.
16) Connect the new link cable to the Hall effect adapter sensor.
17) Fasten the link cable (and the barcode reader

cable) to the sample arm using new tie-wraps.
Make sure that the link cable doesn't come in
contact with the rack drive module.
18) Connect the new link cable (labeled '1') to the Z board.
22) Replace the reagent tray.
metal top cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2

6.104 Hall Effect Adapter Sensor

disconnect the red knurled fitting at the top of the
sample probe. CAREFULLY remove the probe.
Use extreme caution, as the probe is a biohazard.
5) Disconnect the link cable from the Hall effect

adapter sensor (located near the barcode
reader).
6) Remove the screw, spring lock washer and flat

washer that secure the sensor to the bottom of
the sample arm. Remove the sensor.

7) Install the new Hall effect adapter sensor on the sample arm and secure it with the screw,
spring lock washer and flat washer.
8) Re-connect the link cable.
11) Perform the procedure from Section 7.13 Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment.
6.105 Power Entry Module
3) Open the 2 plastic cable holders, located on

the bottom of the frame.
4) Remove the plastic protection from the power

entry module.

5) Disconnect the cable coming from the main

switch (2 plugs) and the ground cable (1 plug).
6) Remove the power entry module.
7) Clean off the residue of adhesive on the inner side of the frame.
8) Install the 2 fuses in the new power entry module.
9) Install the new power entry module on the frame.
10) Re-connect the ground cable.
BLUE
11) Re-connect the cable coming from the main

switch.
BROWN

12) Glue the new plastic protection on the power entry module.
13) Replace all 3 cables in the 2 plastic cable holders and close them.
6.106 Cable: Power Block > Switch
2) Open the lower front door.

metal cable, which hold the lower front door.
4) Unlock the 2 captive screws and pull out the HPLC

drawer.

6) Open the 2 plastic cable holders, located on

7) Disconnect the cable from the power entry

module.
8) Cut and remove the piece of heat-shrink

tubing, which isolates the switch.

9) Disconnect the 2 cables from the main switch (all

4 plugs). Remove the old cable between the
power block and the switch.
The cable between the power block and the

switch is not symmetrical. There are 2 sizes of
plugs:
• the small plugs should be connected
to the power entry module
• the large plugs should be connected
to the switch
BLUE
10) Connect the new cable (along with the
cable coming from the power boards) to
the main switch. Prior to connecting the 4
plugs, slip the new piece of heat-
shrinkable tubing on both cables.
BROWN
11) Shrink the new piece of tubing.

BLUE
12) Connect the other end of the new cable to the

power entry module.
BROWN
16) Close the lower front door.
6.107 Cable: Switch > Power Boards

4) On the front side of the D-10, open the lower front door.


metal cable, which hold the lower front door.
6) Unlock the 2 captive screws and pull out the HPLC

drawer.
8) Open the 2 plastic cable holders, located on the

bottom of the frame.

9) Cut and remove the piece of heat-shrink

tubing, which isolates the switch.
10) Disconnect the 2 cables from the main switch.
11) On power supply 1, disconnect the 5-pin plug

located in the bottom right corner.

12) Open the 2 plastic cable holders.
13) On power supply 2, disconnect the 5-pin plug

located in the top left corner. Remove the
cable between the switch and the power
boards.
14) Connect the new cable to the power boards.
15) Install the new cable in the 2 plastic cable holders and close them.
16) Connect the new cable (along with the BLUE

cable coming from the power block) to the
main switch. The cable should pass
between the electronic module and the
degasser. Prior to connecting the 4 plugs,
slip the new piece of heat-shrinkable
tubing on both cables.
BROWN

17) Shrink the new piece of tubing.
22) Close the lower front door.
washers.
6.108 Supply Cable: Interface Board > Motherboard
be taken:
it.



screws.
6) Disconnect the supply cable from the LCD

internal board.

7) Disconnect and remove the supply cable from

the motherboard.
8) Connect the new supply cable to the motherboard.
9) Connect the new supply cable to the LCD internal board.
6.109 Supply Cable: Power Boards > Interface Board


it.
6) Disconnect the thermal printer supply cable.

7) Disconnect the +24VDC security cable.
8) Disconnect the supply cable from the interface

board.
9) On power supply 2, disconnect the 2 cables located

on the right end (6-pin plugs).

10) On power supply 1, disconnect the cable located in the top

right corner. Remove the supply cable between the power
boards and the interface board.
11) Connect the new cable to the power boards.
12) Connect the other end of the cable to the interface board.
13) Re-connect the +24VDC security cable.
14) Re-connect the thermal printer supply cable.
15) Replace the thermal printer supply cable (along with all the other cables) in the plastic cable
holder and close it.
washers.
6.110 LCD Contrast Potentiometer
2) Remove the LCD display. (Section 6.27)


potentiometer cable to the user interface
module.
4) Disconnect the potentiometer cable from the

LCD interface board.
5) Pop out the grommet.
6) CAREFULLY pass the plug through the hole in

the user interface module. Slightly twisting the
wires will facilitate the job.

7) Remove the nut and serrated lock washer,

which secure the LCD contrast potentiometer to
the user interface module. Remove the old
potentiometer.
8) Install the new LCD contrast potentiometer on the user interface module and secure it with
the nut and serrated lock washer.
9) CAREFULLY pass the new potentiometer cable through the hole in the user interface
module.
10) Put the grommet in place.
11) Connect the potentiometer cable to the LCD interface board.
12) Fasten the potentiometer cable to the user interface module using new tie-wraps.
13) Replace the LCD display.
15) Switch on the D-10 and adjust the contrast.
6.111 Flat Cable: Interface Board > HPLC Module Board (24-pin)
Flat Cable: Interface Board > HPLC Module Board (34-pin)

FLAT CABLE:
INTERFACE
BOARD > HPLC MODULE
BOARD (34-pin)
FLAT CABLE:
INTERFACE
BOARD > HPLC MODULE
BOARD (24-pin)
4) Remove the flat cable.
6) Install the new flat cable.
6.112 Flat Cable: Interface Board > X Board

FLAT CABLE:
INTERFACE
BOARD > X BOARD
6.113 Flat Cable: Interface Board > Detector Board

Flat Cable: Interface Board > Degasser Module Board

FLAT CABLE:
INTERFACE
BOARD > DEGASSER
MODULE BOARD
FLAT CABLE:
INTERFACE
BOARD > DETECTOR
BOARD
6.114 Flat Cable: Interface Board > Syringe Module Board

FLAT CABLE:
INTERFACE
BOARD > SYRINGE
MODULE BOARD
6.115 Vacuum Pump Supply Cable


fastens the supply cable to the vacuum pump.
3) Disconnect the power supply cable from the

vacuum pump. Observe polarity.
4) Disconnect the power supply cable (labeled '8')

from the degasser module board. Remove the
old supply cable.
5) Connect the new supply cable to the vacuum pump. Be very careful to RESPECT
POLARITY.
6) Connect the other end of the cable to the degasser module board (CN8). Make sure that the
cable passes underneath the board.

7) Fasten the supply cable (along with the silicon tubing) to the vacuum pump using a new tie-
wrap. Be careful NOT TO PINCH the tubing.

11) Go to the DEGASSER (1/4) screen to check that the

vacuum pump is working properly:
6.116 23µL Sample Loop





• 1 yellow plastic knurled fitting (tube coming
from the HP pump output – port 6)
from the sample probe – port 5)
• 1 green plastic knurled fitting (tube coming
from the pressure sensor – port 2)
5) Remove the 23µL sample loop.

chamfered end
6) Install the 1st ferrule and 1st nut on the new

sample loop, as described on the picture.
7) Fasten the 1st end of the new 23µL sample

loop to the HP valve (port 4). Keep pushing on
the loop while tightening the nut.
8) Remove the sample loop.
9) Install the 2nd ferrule and 2nd nut on the new

sample loop, as described on the picture.
chamfered end

10) Fasten the 2nd end of the new 23µL sample

loop to the HP valve (port 1). Keep pushing on
the loop while tightening the nut.
11) Remove the sample loop and make sure

that both ferrules are positioned correctly. If
it is OK, continue with step 12). If it isn't, go
back to step 6) with a new 23µL sample loop
(P/N: 2200273).
2.45 ± 0.05mm
12) Install the new 23µL sample loop on the HP valve. Make sure the loop is oriented the same
way it was in step 10):
• 1st end on port 4
• 2nd end on port 1
13) Re-connect all of the tubing to the HP valve.
14) Open the cartridge module, by pulling the black metal cover all the way to the left.
15) Remove the cartridge holder and replace it with the dummy PEEK cartridge holder (P/N:
2200435). Unscrew the LUER fittings from the dummy PEEK cartridge holder prior to
installing it.

16) Remove the rubber plug from the cartridge

module door and close the door.
17) Connect the tubing from the inlet of the

1500 psi back pressure regulator – identical
to the HP pump flow rate calibration/
verification tool (P/N: 2200439) – to the
outlet of the dummy PEEK cartridge holder.
18) Put the free end of the back pressure regulator into an empty vessel.



• click on TO INJECT POSITION

• set the Flow rate to 2ml/min
• adjust the back pressure regulator for a
pressure value of 1500 psi (±5%)
22) Check for leaks on the HP valve while the pump is running. After approximately 5 minutes,
click on STOP PUMP.
23) Go back to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (4/17) screen and click
on HOME MVT (RESET).
25) Disconnect and remove the back pressure regulator.
26) Remove the dummy PEEK cartridge holder and replace the analytical cartridge.
27) Replace the rubber plug in the cartridge module door and close the door.

6.117 Bubble Detectors
2) Disconnect the bubble detectors (labeled '1', '3'

and '6') from the degasser module board.
1
3) Remove the 2 Nylock nuts which secure 6
each bubble detector to the degasser
module. Remove the old bubble detectors.
4) Install the new bubble detectors on the degasser

module and secure each detector with the 2
Nylock nuts. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN, as there
is a risk of crushing the small nylon washers.

5) Connect the new bubble detectors to the degasser module board (CN1, CN3 and CN6).
6.118 Sample Arm Flex Cable (12-pin)

it.

7) Cut and remove the plastic cable tie. Disconnect

the 12-pin flex cable from the Z board.
8) Disconnect the 12-pin flex cable from the X

board.
9) Fold the new flex cable, following the example of the old one.
10) Connect the new 12-pin flex cable to the X board.
11) Connect the new flex cable to the Z board and secure it with a new tie-wrap. DO NOT
OVERTIGHTEN.
metal top cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2




• click on START

field is correct

6.119 Sample Arm Flex Cable (8-pin)
2) Disconnect the 8-pin flex cable from the Z

board.
3) Disconnect the 8-pin flex cable from the X

board.
4) Fold the new flex cable, following the example of the old one.

5) Connect the new 8-pin flex cable to the X board.
6) Connect the new flex cable to the Z board.
7) Replace the 12-pin flex cable and secure it with a new tie-wrap. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
metal top cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2




• click on START

field is correct

5) Disconnect the following from the X board:

• the X motor cable (labeled '4')
• the X position sensor cable (labeled '10')

secure the X motor.
9) Push (or pull) the X motor towards the right, in order to loosen the X gear belt.
10) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers that secure the X motor to
the sample arm. CAREFULLY remove the X motor.
11) On the X motor, loosen – but do not remove – the

2 screws that secure the 16-tooth pulley. Remove
the old pulley.

12) Install the new 16-tooth pulley on the motor

shaft, as described on the picture, and tighten
the 2 mounting screws.
≈ 1mm
13) Manually move the sample arm to the right

side of the instrument, so that it comes in
contact with the rack door module.
14) Leaving the sample arm in the

same position, replace the X
motor – but do not tighten the
4 screws. Prior to installing the
X motor, make sure that the
new 16-tooth pulley is oriented
as described on the pictures.
2nd locking screw
15) Tighten the X gear belt and tighten 2 diagonally-opposed X motor mounting screws.

16) Vibrate the X gear belt and measure the frequency with the gear belt tension adjustment tool
(P/N: 2200409). The frequency should be between 62 Hz and 80 Hz. If it is OK, continue with
step 17). If it isn't, go back to step 15).
18) Re-connect the 2 cables to the X board:

• the X motor cable at CN4
• the X position sensor cable at CN10
20) Replace the probe with the dummy probe (P/N: 2200424).
21) On the front side of the D-10, connect the front

cover sensor simulator (P/N: 2200415) and the
front cover switch simulator (P/N: 2200416).
engaged.




• click on START


• click on START


• click on APPLY
29)
Manually move the arm towards the right, in order to reveal
the second set screw of the X pulley. Loosen this screw.

• click on START


• click on START
32) Loosen the first screw on the X pulley.
33) Manually move the X pulley around the X motor shaft, in order to center the dummy probe in
the cone of the X movement adjustment tool.
34) Re-tighten the first set screw.

• click on START

• click on APPLY
37) Manually move the arm towards the right, in order to reveal the second set screw of the X
pulley. Tighten this screw.


• click on START

is set to no
• click on START
40) On the X motor, verify that the position sensor is between

2 slots. If it is, continue with step 41). If it isn't, go back to
step 24).



• click on START
6.121 X Gear Belt

5) Disconnect the following from the X board:

• the X motor cable (labeled '4')
• the X position sensor cable (labeled '10')
6) Manually move the sample arm to the right side of the instrument.

secure the X motor.
9) Push (or pull) the X motor towards the right, in order to loosen the X gear belt.
10) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers that secure the X motor to
the sample arm. CAREFULLY remove the X motor.
11) On the rear side of the sample arm module,

remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and
small metal plate, which secure the X gear belt
to the arm. Remove the old gear belt.

Each spare X gear belt is delivered with the 2

mounting holes already pierced.
12) Install the new X gear belt on the sample arm and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock
washers and small metal plate. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
13) Manually move the sample arm to the right

side of the instrument, so that it comes in
contact with the rack door module.
14) Leaving the sample arm in the

same position, replace the X
motor – but do not tighten the
4 screws. Prior to installing the
X motor, make sure that the
new X gear belt is NOT
TWISTED and that the 16-
tooth pulley is oriented as
described on the pictures.
2nd locking screw
15) Tighten the X gear belt and tighten 2 diagonally-opposed X motor mounting screws.

16) Vibrate the new X gear belt and measure the frequency with the gear belt tension adjustment
tool (P/N: 2200409). The frequency should be between 62 Hz and 80 Hz. If it is OK, continue
with step 17). If it isn't, go back to step 15).
18) Re-connect the 2 cables to the X board:

• the X motor cable at CN4
• the X position sensor cable at CN10
6.122 Link Cable: HPLC Module Board > Front Cover Solenoid
Check the serial number of the D-10. For instruments DA4C324721, DA4C324730 or with a
serial number ≥DA4D337101, go to step 11).
2) Remove the first end of the link cable (6-pin

plastic connector) from the HP pump bracket.
3) Disconnect the other end (2 plugs, labeled '1'

and '2') from the HPLC module board. Remove
the link cable between the HPLC module and
the front cover solenoid.

4) Connect the 2 plugs of the new link cable to the HPLC module board.
5) Install the other end of the cable on the HP pump bracket.
The procedure is exactly the same with

the new type of link cable, except that the
additional cable length must be stored at
the rear of module.


handles normally

Steps 11) to 21) apply ONLY to instruments DA4C324721, DA4C324730 or with a serial
number ≥DA4D337101.
12) Unlock the 2 captive screws and completely pull out the HPLC drawer.
13) On the left side of the D-10, remove the first

end of the link cable (6-pin plastic connector)
from the frame.
14) Disconnect the other end (2 plugs, labeled '1'

and '2') from the HPLC module board. Remove
the link cable between the HPLC module and
the front cover solenoid.
15) Connect the 2 plugs of the new link cable to the HPLC module board.
16) Install the other end of the cable on the frame.



handles normally
6.123 +24VDC Security Cable
Check the serial number of the D-10. For instruments DA4C324721, DA4C324730 or with a
serial number ≥DA4D337101, go to step 15).
2) On the left side of the D-10, open the 2

plastic cable holders which are located on

3) Disconnect the first end of the +24VDC

security cable.
4) On the front side of the D-10, unlock the

2 captive screws and completely pull out
the HPLC drawer.
5) Remove the second end of the cable from the

6) Remove the +24VDC security cable. Be careful, as there might be an additional cable holder
underneath the rack drive module.
7) Connect the first end of the new +24VDC security cable to the supply cable between the
power boards and the interface board.

8) Put the new security cable (along with the 2 other cables) in the 2 plastic cable holders and
close them.
9) Route the cable to the rack drive module and install it on the bracket.


• click on START
• check that the sample arm moves normally
14) Go to the main (1/2) screen and click on LAUNCH INIT.
Steps 15) to 27) apply ONLY to instruments DA4C324721, DA4C324730 or with a serial
number ≥DA4D337101.
15) Unlock the 2 ¼ turn fasteners which lock the left door and open it.

16) Disconnect the micro-switch cable.
17) Open the 2 plastic cable holders, located

on the bottom of the frame.
18) Remove the first end of the link cable (4-pin

plastic connector) from the frame.

19) Disconnect the other end from the supply

cable between the power boards and the
interface board. Remove the +24VDC security
cable.
20) Connect the first end of the new +24VDC security cable to the supply cable between the
power boards and the interface board.
21) Install the other end of the cable on the frame.
22) Put the new security cable (along with the 2 other cables) in the 2 plastic cable holders and
close them.
The procedure is exactly the same with the new type of security cable. The additional cable
length must be secured with the 2 plastic cable holders also.
23) Re-connect the micro-switch cable.



• click on START
• check that the sample arm moves normally
27) Go to the main (1/2) screen and click on LAUNCH INIT.
6.124 Reference
Section 6.42: RheBuild Kit Package Insert; Rheodyne, Rohnert Park, California.

7 ADJUSTMENTS
Warning: when using the 50mL syringe to prime the high-pressure circuit, do not
pull excessively on the plunger as it may damage the proportioning valve.
7.1 List of Procedures

Section Procedure Page
7.2 Detector Adjustment 7-2
7.3 Automatic WC/FC Determination 7-5
7.4 WC/FC Verification 7-14
7.5 Pressure Sensor Verification 7-22
7.6 Pressure Sensor Calibration (Field Procedure) 7-24
7.7 Flow Rate Verification 7-27
7.8 Flow Rate Calibration 7-31
7.9 Thermal Module Check 7-38
7.10 Thermal Module Calibration 7-39
7.11 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check 7-45
7.12 Hall Effect Sensor Check 7-47
7.13 Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment 7-49
7.14 TH Offset Determination 7-51
7.15 Tube Identification Check 7-52
7.16 Barcode Reader Check 7-53
7.17 Touch Screen Calibration 7-55
7.18 Front Cover Sensor: Interface Board Update 7-56
7.20 Software Imaging 7-60
7.21 LIS Setup 7-68

7.2 Detector Adjustment

Objective
Set the offset and gain on each channel (sample measurement and reference
measurement).
Tools/Materials
♦ D-10 Service software (DiaSer).

♦ mini-screwdriver (P/N: 2200412), or any flat head screwdriver with a maximum tip
width of 1.5mm.
♦ multimeter (voltmeter and ohmmeter).
7.2.1 Preparation
P 1. Perform the Flow Cell Cleaning procedure from Section 9.2.5.

P 2. Prime the high-pressure circuit.
7.2.2 Adjustment Trimmers and Test Point Locations
Figure 7-1: Detector Board: Adjustment Trimmers and Test Point Locations

7.2.3 Procedure
1. Remove the front cover assembly. (Section 6.2)

2. Unlock the 2 captive screws and
completely pull out the HPLC
drawer.
3. Connect the front cover sensor simulator (P/N: 2200415) and the front cover switch
simulator (P/N: 2200416).
4. Remove the detector board cover. Replace the
screw into the hole of the detector to avoid any
external light.
5. Switch on the D-10 and launch the Service

software:
6. On the main (1/2) screen, click on the

DETECTOR button.

7. On the DETECTOR (1/4) screen, enter the

following values:
• 150 for Set Light
• 64 for Set Gain
8. Check the LED source electrical intensity. Measure the voltage between J test point
(+) and N test point (-). The value should be 150mV (±10mV):
• if the measured value is out of tolerance, check the LED source (ohmmeter,
low impedance in one direction)
• if the LED is OK, replace the detector board (Section 6.83)
9. On the DETECTOR (1/4) screen, set the Flow
rate to 1.5ml/min and click on START PUMP.
10. Check for air bubbles in the flow cell:

• remove the P4 tube (coming out of the detector module) at the union
• using a finger, cover the outlet, being careful not to completely stop the
flow. Monitor the pressure. The additional pressure when the tube is closed
should not be higher than 150psi (10.5kg/cm2).
• check if the detector Abs. Meas. changes when the tube is closed or open.
If the value increases, there is a bubble in the flow cell. To remove the
bubble, open and close the outlet repeatedly for several seconds until the
measurement stabilizes.
11. Rotate the Sample Gain Trimmer counter-clockwise until the minimum value (Abs.
Meas.) is reached.
Note: because of the possible saturation of the first stage, the value may increase
for a short time during the rotation. Keep on turning until the minimum value is
reached.

12. Rotate the Reference Gain Trimmer counter-clockwise until the minimum value is
reached.
Note: because of the possible saturation of the first stage, the value may increase
for a short time during the rotation. Keep on turning until the minimum value is
reached.
13. Rotate the Sample Gain Trimmer clockwise until the displayed value is above
12,079,000 (-0, +300,000).
If the target value cannot be reached because the current value is lower than the
target, adjust to the maximum value. If the maximum value is lower than 10,000,000
the LED source must be replaced. (Section 6.86)
If the target value cannot be reached because the current value is higher than the
target, the LED source has a higher intensity than usual. Adjust to the minimum
value. Check if the value is lower than the saturation value (16,777,215).
14. Rotate the Reference Gain Trimmer clockwise until the displayed value of the
absorbance (Log.) is equal to 0.020AU (±0.002AU):
• if it is OK, go to step 16.
• if it isn't, continue with step 15.
15. If the Log. adjustment could not be made, rotate the Reference Gain Trimmer to the
maximum value.
If the maximum value is lower than 10,000,000 the LED source must be replaced.
(Section 6.86)
If the maximum value is higher than 10,000,000 rotate the Sample Gain Trimmer
until the displayed value of the absorbance (Log.) is equal to 0.020AU (±0.002AU).
16. Check the Offsets:
• enter 0 for Set Light (LED switched off)
• rotate the Sample Offset Trimmer until the displayed Abs. Meas. value is
between 1000 and 7000
• rotate the Reference Offset Trimmer until the displayed Ref. Meas. value is
between 1000 and 7000
17. Stop the high-pressure pump.
18. Exit the Service software.
19. Replace the detector board cover.
20. Unplug the front cover sensor simulator and the front cover switch simulator.
21. Push the HPLC drawer back in and tighten the 2 captive screws.
22. Replace the front cover assembly.
7.3 Automatic WC/FC Determination

Objective
Determine the Waiting Count (WC) and Filling Count (FC) of the high-pressure
pump, with the help of an automated process.

Process Description (see 5.10.16.1)
The WC/FC automatic determination process links different tests:

• A Static test for measuring the static absorbance: it is the relative absorbance
of the dye solution used instead of buffer 2, when the proportioning valve is
continuously on.
• Several Dilamex+ tests:
The Dilamex+ test consists in measuring the theoretical 20%, 50% and 100%
dye solution dynamic mixing, for a given value of WC/FC. The tests are
automatically performed with different values of WC/FC until the specifications
are met.
The range of WC and FC values are introduced as input parameters. The first
test is done with the highest FC value and the lowest WC value.
If the measured parameters are higher than the specifications, the WC is
increased until the highest value in the defined range is reached or until the
measured parameters are lower than the specifications.
Then, the FC is decreased by 1, and the WC is set to the lowest value of its
range.
These tests are automatically performed until all the specifications for the
theoretical 20%, 50% and 100% steps are simultaneously met.
Typical tolerances are:
20%: from 13 to 14%
50%: from 49.5 to 50.5%
100%: difference between the dynamic absorbance for 100% and the
static absorbance less than 8mAU
Each Dilamex+ test is followed by a flush using buffer 1, at 3mL/min.
When the specifications are met (assume "WC_OK" and "FC_OK" are the WC
and FC values at that moment), additional Dilamex+ tests can be done for the
following WC/FC couples:
WC_OK + 1 / FC_OK
WC_OK + 1 / FC_OK - 1
WC_OK / FC_OK - 1
The selection of these additional Dilamex+ tests is done with check boxes.
When multiple acceptable WC/FC couples are found, the BEST choice is
selected by the software, based on the best 50% result.
• A Step gradient and a Continuous gradient are done for the selected WC/FC
couple.
• The test ends with a 15-minute flush sequence using buffer 1.
The result *.csv files produced during each step of the determination are identified in
the following way:
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_xxxx_WC-FC.csv
Where:
• "YYYYMMDD" is the file creation date (year, month, day format).

• "hhmmss" is the file creation time (hour, minute, second format).

• "xxxx" is the test name ("stat", "dila+", "step" or "cont").
• "WC-FC" are the WC and FC values used for the test.
The summary of the results is saved in the 'YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_allresults.csv' file.

All of these files are stored in the \Dia\Service\Log folder.
Tools/Materials
♦ D-10 Service software (DiaSer) version 2.00 or above.

♦ dye kit (P/N: 2200446). For the dye solution preparation, refer to the D-10 Dye Kit
Insert. The final absorbance level should range between 0.5AU and 0.6AU.
♦ 5m PEEK backpressure coil mounted on the dummy PEEK cartridge holder (P/N:
2200435). Any tubing capable of giving a backpressure of ~500psi can be placed
between the HP valve and the detector. The WC-FC verification kit (P/N: 2200440)
may also be used here.
Warning: do not use an analytical cartridge here!
♦ WC-FC auto determination kit (P/N: 2200447). This kit consists of:
• a reagent bottle dip tube.
• a bottle cap and reagent tubing.
• a Teflon tubing coil (similar to the degasser buffer tubing).
• a reagent tubing to the proportioning valve NC inlet.
• a dye kit (P/N: 2200446) for the first use.
Except for the reagent bottle dip tube, these parts are pre-assembled in the kit and
sealed at each end. These parts are used to connect the dye solution bottle to the
proportioning valve through external tubing. The Teflon tubing coil is used to
provide similar hydrostatic pressure to that inside the degasser.
reagent bottle Teflon tubing

dip tube coil
reagent tubing to bottle cap and

the proportioning reagent tubing
valve NC inlet
¼" plug ¼" cap
Figure 7-2: WC-FC auto determination kit tubing

7.3.1 Preparation
P 1 Installation
P 1.0 The goal is to have an installation as
described on the picture.
P 1.1 Remove the buffer 2 bottle from the reagent tray and place it at bench level. It is not
necessary to disconnect the line.
P 1.2 Install the dye bottle on the reagent tray.
P 1.3 Remove the ¼" plug from the reagent tubing bottle cap and connect the reagent
bottle dip tube.
P 1.4 Plunge the dip tube in the dye bottle and tighten the cap.
P 1.5 Remove the ¼" cap from the other end of the
reagent line.
Disconnect the white fitting at the proportioning

valve (NC inlet) and place the ¼" cap on the
fitting.
Connect the reagent line to the proportioning

valve (NC inlet).
P 1.6 Open the cartridge module, by pulling the black metal cover all the way to the left.
P 1.7 Remove the cartridge holder and replace it with the dummy PEEK cartridge holder
(P/N: 2200435).
P 1.8 Remove the rubber plug from the cartridge module door and close the door.
P 1.9 Connect the backpressure coil between the
inlet and outlet of the dummy PEEK cartridge
holder.
Any tubing capable of giving a backpressure of

~500psi can be placed between the HP valve
and the detector.
Warning: do not use an analytical cartridge

here!

P 1.10 Switch on the D-10 and launch the Service

software:
P 1.11 Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (1/17) screen:

• monitor the pressure for approximately
5 minutes; if it fluctuates by more than
±5%, manually prime the pump using
the 50mL syringe and re-check the
pressure
P 1.12 Click on START PROP. VALVE and prime the buffer 2 line (dye solution) with the
50mL syringe. Stop the proportioning valve when the syringe is filled (40mL
minimum) and empty the syringe.
P 1.13 Leaving the Flow rate unchanged, click on START PROP. VALVE and then on
START PUMP. Monitor the pressure for approximately 5 minutes; if it fluctuates by
more than ±5%, manually prime the pump using the 50mL syringe and re-check the
pressure.
P 1.14 At the end, click on STOP PROP. VALVE.
P 1.15 Aspirate an additional 10mL of buffer 1, in order to remove the dye solution from the
Teflon tube between the proportioning valve outlet and the HP pump inlet.
P 2 Detector Check
P 2.1 Go to the DETECTOR (1/4) screen:
pressure

P 2.2 Even if already displayed, enter the following values to set the detector to its
standard conditions:
• 64 for Set Gain
P 2.3 If the Abs. Meas. is not stable (average reading fluctuating ±2000 or less is typical
with the pump running), remove the bubbles from the detector (see 7.2.3).
P 2.4 If necessary, modify the Set Gain value to obtain a Log. value between 0.010AU
and 0.035AU. Verify that the Log. value stops drifting before any test is started. The
drift should be less than 0.4mAU per minute (~10 to 15 minutes LED warmup
required).
P 2.5 Stop the high-pressure pump.
P 3 Leak Check
P 3.1 Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (1/17) screen and
make sure that the HP pump and proportioning
valve are switched off.
If necessary, stop the HP pump and stop the

P 3.2 Unscrew the cap from the dye solution bottle and remove the dip tube from the
bottle.
P 3.3 Observe the meniscus in the dip tube. Check that there is no movement of the
meniscus under the following conditions:
• PROP. VALVE off and PUMP off
• PROP. VALVE off and PUMP on
If the meniscus moves down the tube, it means that the proportioning valve or buffer
tubing is leaking. Replace the leaking part.
P 3.4 Place the dip tube into the bottle and tighten the cap. Then stop the HP pump.
P 3.5 Check for air bubbles in the line. Prime again if necessary.
P 3.6 Click on START PROP. VALVE.
P 3.7 Unscrew the cap from the buffer 1 bottle and remove the dip tube from the bottle.
P 3.8 Observe the meniscus in the dip tube. Check that there is no movement of the
meniscus under the following conditions:
• PROP. VALVE on and PUMP off
• PROP. VALVE on and PUMP on
If the meniscus moves down the tube, it means that the proportioning valve or buffer
1 tubing is leaking. Replace the leaking part.
P 3.9 Place the dip tube into the bottle and tighten the cap. Then stop the HP pump and
stop the proportioning valve.

P 3.10 Check for air bubbles in the line. Prime again if necessary.
7.3.2 Automatic Tests
1 Settings and Test Launch

1.1 Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (9/17) screen and
click on AUTOMATIC TESTS.
1.2 Go to the AUTOMATIC TESTS (2/2) screen and

enter the limits for the WC and FC values:
• WC: Min = 153; Max = 157
• FC: Min = 111; Max = 113
Then, click on SETTING.
1.3 De-select the WC + 1 / FC box.
Select the 2 other boxes WC / FC - 1 and

WC + 1 / FC - 1.
Don't select the LED automatic switch off

box; the LED will be on at the end of the test.
Click on CLOSE.
1.4 Launch the test by clicking on the START

TEST button.
The WC/FC DETERMINATION TEST SETTING

screen will automatically re-open. Confirm the
settings by clicking on START TEST and the
test will start.
All of the information for the current gradient is

shown in the AUTOMATIC TESTS (2/2) screen.

1.5 The WC/FC DETERMINATION TEST RESULTS

screen displays the current test results. It can
also be used to display previous tests results
after selecting the corresponding *.csv files.
The Static test result is displayed, as well as

the Dilamex+ test results.
The Status indicates the result of the Dilamex+

test:
• OK when the specifications are met
• NO when the specifications are not
met
BEST indicates the best WC/FC couple, based

on the current selection algorithm.
1.6 For the BEST WC/FC couple, the test automatically continues by executing a Step
gradient and a Continuous gradient tests. The Step gradient results are displayed on
the WC/FC DETERMINATION TEST RESULTS screen.
2 Result Memorization
2.1 The test ends:
• after the Continuous gradient test is done with the BEST WC/FC couple
• after testing all WC/FC couples in the selected range (if the specifications
are not met)
In the first case:

• check the Step gradient results (go to step 2.2)
• record the final WC/FC values
In the second case, try to find the reason for the abnormal results and make the
appropriate corrections before repeating the automatic test. For example, check the
pressure by selecting the CURVE button of the WC/FC DETERMINATION TEST RESULTS
screen.
If all is OK, modify the ranges for the WC and/or the FC and re-do the automatic test
(WC: Min = 149; FC: Max =114 for example).
2.2 Check the step gradient results on the WC/FC
DETERMINATION TEST RESULTS screen:
• if the results are not OK, select
another WC/FC couple which was OK
and re-do the Step gradient test
• if the results are not OK and no other
WC/FC couple is not available, go
back to step 2.1
• if the results are OK, record the final
WC/FC values

2.3 Close the WC/FC DETERMINATION TEST RESULTS screen.

2.4 Close the AUTOMATIC TESTS (2/2) screen.
2.5 Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (8/17) screen:
• enter the recorded WC value in the
WC (Waiting Count) field
• enter the recorded FC value in the
FC (Filling Count) field
• click on DONE and confirm the new
values, which are stored in the
'instrument.ini' file
2.6 Backup the new 'instrument.ini' file. (Section 7.19)
7.3.3 Returning the Instrument to Operating Condition
1 Cleaning the WC-FC Kit Tubing

1.1 Unscrew the cap from the dye solution bottle and remove the dip tube from the
bottle. Dry the outer surface of the dip tube.
1.2 Remove the dye solution bottle from the reagent tray and replace with a bottle
containing a small volume (~0.2L) of buffer (1 or 2) or wash solution.
1.3 Plunge the dip tube in the bottle and tighten the cap.
click on START PROP. VALVE.
Prime the buffer 2 line (dye solution) with the

50mL syringe. Stop the proportioning valve
when the syringe is filled (40mL minimum) and
empty the syringe.
1.5 Click on STOP PROP. VALVE and aspirate an additional 10mL of buffer 1, in order
to remove the dye solution from the Teflon tube between the proportioning valve
outlet and the HP pump inlet.
1.6 Remove the bottle from the reagent tray.
1.7 Unscrew the bottle cap and remove it.
1.8 Disconnect the dip tube from the bottle cap and replace the ¼" plug on the cap.
1.9 Empty and dry the dip tube.
1.10 Remove the ¼" cap from the buffer 2 reagent tubing.
1.11 Disconnect the fitting at the proportioning valve (NC inlet) and place the ¼" cap on
the fitting.

2 Restoring the Instrument Configuration

2.1 Re-connect the buffer 2 reagent tubing (coming from the degasser) to the
2.2 Re-place the buffer 2 bottle on the reagent tray.
pressure
2.4 Leaving the Flow rate unchanged, click on START PROP. VALVE and then on
START PUMP. Monitor the pressure for approximately 5 minutes; if it fluctuates by
more than ±5%, manually prime the pump using the 50mL syringe and re-check the
pressure.
2.5 At the end, click on STOP PROP. VALVE.
2.6 Disconnect and remove the backpressure coil.
2.7 Remove the dummy PEEK cartridge holder and replace the analytical cartridge.
2.8 Replace the rubber plug in the cartridge module door and close the door.
2.9 Go to the DETECTOR (1/4) screen:
• click on START PUMP to remove the
air bubbles introduced in the flow cell
• if the Abs. Meas. is not stable
(average reading fluctuating ±2000 or
less is typical with the pump running),
remove the bubbles from the detector
(see 7.2.3)
2.10 Stop the high-pressure pump.

2.11 Select Set Light and enter 0 to switch off the LED source.
7.4 WC/FC Verification

Objective
Verify the Waiting Count (WC) and Filling Count (FC) parameters found in the
'instrument.ini' file.

Process Description
The Static and Step gradient tests are mandatory. The Dilamex+ and the Continuous
gradient tests are optional.
Tools/Materials
♦ D-10 Service software (DiaSer) version 2.00 or above.

♦ dye kit (P/N: 2200446). For the dye solution preparation, refer to the D-10 Dye Kit
Insert. The final absorbance level should range between 0.5AU and 0.6AU.
♦ WC-FC verification kit (P/N: 2200440).
♦ WC-FC auto determination kit (P/N: 2200447). This kit consists of:
• a reagent bottle dip tube.
• a bottle cap and reagent tubing.
• a Teflon tubing coil (similar to the degasser buffer tubing).
• a reagent tubing to the proportioning valve NC inlet.
• a dye kit (P/N: 2200446) for the first use.
Except for the reagent bottle dip tube, these parts are pre-assembled in the kit and
sealed at each end. These parts are used to connect the dye solution bottle to the
proportioning valve through external tubing. The Teflon tubing coil is used to
provide similar hydrostatic pressure to that inside the degasser.
reagent bottle Teflon tubing

dip tube coil
reagent tubing to bottle cap and

the proportioning reagent tubing
valve NC inlet
¼" plug ¼" cap
Figure 7-3: WC-FC auto determination kit tubing
7.4.1 Preparation
Preparation is required for each of the following procedures:

• Static absorption measurement
• Dilamex+ gradient test
• Step gradient test
• Continuous gradient test

Refer to Section 7.3.1. Complete steps P 1.0 through P 3.10.
7.4.2 Procedures
The following paragraphs describe the procedures for each test:

• Static absorption measurement
• Dilamex+ gradient test
• Step gradient test
• Continuous gradient test
These tests can be linked in an automated sequence. Information on the use of the
automatic tool is given in Section 7.4.3.
7.4.2.1 Static Absorption Measurement (18 minutes)
Objective
Determine the relative absorbance of the dye solution used instead of buffer 2,
when the proportioning valve is continuously on.
1 Measurement
1.2 Click in the white field next to Selected log file and select a file or create a new file.
1.3 Click on START TEST.
1.4 At the end of the test (Test remaining time at 0), click on STOP PUMP.
2 Calculation
2.1 On the HP: PUMP + VALVE (10/17) screen, click
on START CALCULATION.

2.2 The following results are displayed on the screen:

• mean values for buffer 1 and dye solution (buffer 2)
• the relative 100% dye solution absorbance (Rel.)
7.4.2.2 Dilamex+ Gradient Test (~14 minutes)
Objectives
• Measure the theoretical 20%, 50% and 100% of dye solution dynamic mixing.
• Adapt the WC and FC values in order to have a 100% dynamic buffer 2 close
to the static value, and to have values for the 20% and 50% steps within the
defined tolerances. Typical tolerances are:
20%: from 13 to 14%
50%: from 49.5 to 50.5%
1 Measurement
• enter the WC and FC values to be
tested
1.2 Click in the white field next to Load gradient file and load the 'dilamex+_grad.hpl'
file.
1.3 Click on START PUMP.
2 Calculation
• click in the white field next to Selected
log file
• select the *.log file corresponding to
the Dilamex+ gradient test
2.2 Select the Dilamex+ box if necessary.

2.3 Click on START CALCULATION. The results are displayed on the screen.
3 Result Examination
The relative value (in AU) of the 100% buffer 2 absorbance is compared to the 100%
buffer 2 relative value obtained under static conditions (see 7.4.2.1). The difference
must be less than 8mAU. The result of the comparison is given next to the 100%
buffer 2 relative value field:
√ indicates that the difference is within the tolerances; go to step 3.2
X indicates that the difference is out of range; go to step 3.4
? indicates that the static value is not available; perform the Static
Absorption Measurement procedure from Section 7.4.2.1
3.2 The relative value (in %) of the 50% of buffer 2 absorbance is compared to the
theoretical 50% value. Tolerance: from 49.5 to 50.5%. The result of the comparison
is given next to the 50% buffer 2 relative value field:
theoretical 20% value. Tolerance: from 13 to 14%. The result of the comparison is
given next to the 20% buffer 2 relative value field:
3.4 If one result is out of range, the WC/FC values should be modified. Refer to Section
7.3 Automatic WC/FC Determination.
3.5 If the results are OK, note down the WC and FC values and introduce them in the
'instrument.ini' file. (Section 7.4.2.5)
7.4.2.3 Step Gradient Test (36 minutes)
Objectives
• Measure the response curve of the buffer mixing for the WC and FC values.
• Check the theoretical 20% and 50% points.
1 Measurement
tested
1.2 Click in the white field next to Load gradient file and load the 'step_grad.hpl' file.


2 Calculation
log file
the Step gradient test
2.2 Click on START CALCULATION. The results are displayed on the screen.
3.1 The relative value (in AU) of the 100% buffer 2 absorbance is compared to the 100%
buffer 2 relative value obtained under static conditions (see 7.4.2.1). The difference
must be less than 8mAU. The result of the comparison is given next to the 100%
buffer 2 relative value field:
? indicates that the static value is not available; perform the Static
Absorption Measurement procedure from Section 7.4.2.1
theoretical 50% value. Tolerance: from 49.5 to 50.5%. The result of the comparison
is given next to the 50% buffer 2 relative value field:
3.3 The relative value (in %) of each step (10 to 90%) is compared to a tolerance
window. Typical tolerance ranges are:
10%: 3 to 10% 60%: 60 to 68%
20%: 13 to 14% 70%: 70 to 79%
30%: 21 to 30% 80%: 80 to 89%
40%: 32 to 40% 90%: 90 to 97%
The result of the comparison is given next to each % value:

3.4 If one result is out of range, the WC/FC values should be modified. Refer to Section
7.3 Automatic WC/FC Determination.

7.4.2.4 Continuous Gradient Test (~12 minutes)
Objectives
• Measure the Continuous gradient curve for the WC and FC values.

• Check if the curve shape is correct.
1 Measurement
tested
1.2 Click in the white field next to Load gradient file and load the 'cont_grad.hpl' file.
2 Calculation
log file
the Continuous gradient test
2.2 Click on START CALCULATION. The curve is displayed on the screen.
3.1 Verify that the curve has the appropriate shape (see the example given in step 2.1):
• if it is OK, go to step 3.3
• if it isn't, go to step 3.2

3.2 If the curve has not the appropriate shape, the WC/FC values should be modified.
Refer to Section 7.3 Automatic WC/FC Determination.
7.4.2.5 Entering the WC and FC Values
1. Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (8/17) screen:

• enter the recorded WC value in the
WC (Waiting Count) field
• enter the recorded FC value in the
FC (Filling Count) field
• click on DONE and confirm the new
values, which are stored in the
'instrument.ini' file
2. Backup the new 'instrument.ini' file. (Section 7.19)
7.4.3 Automatic Sequence
The individual tests described in the previous paragraphs can be linked in an

automated sequence.
Process Description
The Static and Step gradient tests are mandatory. The Dilamex+ and the Continuous
gradient tests are optional.
1 Measurement
click on AUTOMATIC TESTS.

1.2 The AUTOMATIC TESTS (1/2) screen opens.
If necessary, modify the WC and FC values for

the test.
1.3 Select the tests to be performed:

• Static (mandatory)
• Dilamex (optional)
• Step gradient (mandatory)
• Continuous gradient (optional)
1.4 For each desired test, select the corresponding *.hpl file:
• the 'dilamex+_grad.hpl' file for the Dilamex test
• the 'step_grad.hpl' file for the Step gradient test
• the 'cont_grad.hpl' file for the Continuous gradient test
In the next field, enter the number of repetition(s) for each test: 1.
1.5 Launch the sequence by clicking on the START TEST button.
1.6 The sequence ends when the Total remaining time is at 0.
2 Calculation and Result Examination

2.1 Refer to the corresponding paragraphs for each individual test.
7.4.4 Returning the Instrument to Operating Condition
Refer to Section 7.3.3. Complete steps 1.1 through 2.11.
7.5 Pressure Sensor Verification

Objective
Check the pressure sensor calibration.
Tools/Materials

♦ pressure sensor verification tool (P/N: 2200414).
♦ 1500psi backpressure regulator with fittings – identical to the HP pump flow rate
calibration/ verification tool (P/N: 2200439).

♦ dummy PEEK cartridge holder (P/N: 2200435). Unscrew the LUER fittings prior to
using it.
7.5.1 Preparation
P 1 Installing the Tools

(P/N: 2200435).
P 1.4 Connect the pressure sensor verification tool (P/N: 2200414) to the inlet of the
dummy PEEK cartridge holder.
P 1.5 Connect the tubing from the inlet of the 1500psi backpressure regulator to the outlet
of the pressure sensor verification tool.
P 1.6 Connect the tubing from the outlet of the 1500psi backpressure regulator to the
P 2 Removing Air Bubbles

P 2.1 Prime the high-pressure circuit.
7.5.2 Procedure
1 Measurement
• select psi as unit for the Pressure
reading
1.2 Adjust the backpressure regulator until the pressure sensor verification tool reads
approximately 500psi.
1.3 After stabilization, check the value displayed on the D-10 screen and compare it to
the value on the pressure sensor verification tool. Tolerance: less than ±5%.
1.4 At the end, click on STOP PUMP.
2.1 If the result is not within tolerance, perform the Pressure Sensor Calibration
procedure from Section 7.6.
If the result is acceptable, go to step 2.2.
2.2 Disconnect the pressure sensor verification tool and 1500psi backpressure regulator
from the dummy PEEK cartridge holder.

3 Detector Check
3.2 Even if already displayed, enter the following values to set the detector to its
• 64 for Set Gain
3.3 If the Abs. Meas. is not stable (average reading fluctuating ±2000 or less is typical
7.6 Pressure Sensor Calibration (Field Procedure)

Objectives
• Calibrate the pressure sensor: determine the slope and intercept by

measuring two points (low pressure and high pressure).
• Verify the calibration.
Tools/Materials

♦ pressure sensor verification tool (P/N: 2200414).

using it.
♦ pulse dampener (P/N: 1957226).
7.6.1 Preparation

(P/N: 2200435).
P 1.4 Disconnect the fitting from the outlet of the pressure sensor.
P 1.5 Connect the pulse dampener (P/N: 1957226) to outlet of the pressure sensor.
P 1.6 Connect the inlet of the pressure sensor verification tool (P/N: 2200414) to the outlet
of the pulse dampener.
P 1.8 Connect the tubing from the outlet of the 1500psi backpressure regulator to the
P 2 Removing Air Bubbles

P 2.1 Prime the high-pressure circuit.
7.6.2 Procedure
1 Measurements

1.2 Go to the HP: SENSOR CALIB. (2/2) screen and

select psi as unit for the Pressure reading.
1.3 First Measurement (approximately 1470psi):

• enter 1470 in the External ref. field for Pressure: high value
• on the backpressure regulator, adjust the pressure slightly above 1470psi;
the displayed values decrease slowly (thermal stabilization)
• when the pressure reaches 1470psi, click on the MEMORIZE button at the
end of the Pressure: high value line
1.4 Second Measurement (0psi):
• enter 0 in the External ref. field for Pressure: low value
• open the pump outlet fitting (wipe off the drops) and a connection at the
dummy PEEK cartridge holder
• when the pressure stabilizes, click on the MEMORIZE button at the end of
the Pressure: low value line
2 Calculation and Result Examination

2.1 When both points have been entered, click on CALCULATION OF THE OFFSET
AND THE GAIN. The calculated HP Sensor Offset and HP Sensor Gain are
displayed. Typical tolerances are:
• gain: 10 to18
• offset: 0 to 50
2.2 If the values are correct, click on SAVE RESULTS. The new values are stored in the
'instrument.ini' file.
If the values are not correct, go back to step 1.1.
Note: you must leave and re-enter the Service software for the new parameters to
take effect.
2.3 Go back to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (1/17) screen
and click on STOP PUMP.

3 Verification
3.1 Disconnect and remove the pulse dampener from the circuit.
3.2 Re-connect the orange PEEK tubing from the HP valve to the outlet of the pressure
sensor.
3.3 Connect the pressure sensor verification tool to the inlet of the dummy PEEK
cartridge holder.
3.4 Perform the Pressure Sensor Verification procedure from Section 7.5.

7.7 Flow Rate Verification

Objective
Check the HP pump flow rate at 1.5mL/min and 500psi. The measurement uses either
the volumetric method (see 7.7.2) or the gravimetric method (see 7.7.3).
This procedure must be performed after replacement of any pump components where
faults (pressure leakage) did not accompany insufficient flow.
Tools/Materials

using it.
♦ volumetric container (read error <0.2%) such as a 5mL volumetric flask (for Section
7.7.2 Volumetric Method).
♦ balance (P/N: 2200411), or any balance with a precision of 0.01g, and a 25mL
minimum volume container (for Section 7.7.3 Gravimetric Method).
♦ distilled or deionized water or buffer (depending on method used).
7.7.1 Preparation

(P/N: 2200435).
P 1.6 Place the tubing from the outlet of the 1500psi backpressure regulator into the
vessel to be used.
P 2 Checking the Pressure

P 2.1 Using a 50mL syringe, prime the HP pump (40mL minimum) with buffer 1.


pressure
P 2.3 Check for leaks in the circuit.

P 2.4 Adjust the backpressure regulator for a pressure value of 500psi.
P 2.5 Click on STOP PUMP.
7.7.2 Volumetric Method
1 Measurement
1.1 Go to the HP: FLOW RATE CALIB. (4/4) screen
and select volume from the pull-down menu
next to Method selection.
1.2 Set the Flow rate to 1.5ml/min.

1.3 Click in the white field next to Duration and enter 4. If the value indicated in the
Remaining time field is different from 4 minutes, reset this value by clicking on the
TIMER RESET button.
1.4 Check the backpressure at this flow rate before beginning the test:
• if necessary, adjust the backpressure regulator to a pressure of 500psi
(mean value)
1.5 Check for leaks in the circuit.
1.6 Click on STOP PUMP.
1.7 Empty the vessel and dry it thoroughly.
1.8 Replace the tubing from the backpressure regulator into the vessel.

1.10 When the meniscus reaches the 5mL mark, select STOP TEST. The Remaining
time is indicated on the screen. It should be approximately 40 seconds.
Note: if the Remaining time is 0, the test is automatically stopped. If the value 0 is
obtained before the 5mL vessel is filled, there is a problem with the delivery by the
HP pump or the selected duration was not 4 minutes.
1.11 Click in the white field next to Volume and enter 5. The Time field is automatically
updated and is calculated from the time of START TEST was selected.
1.12 Click on the LAUNCH CALC. button. The result is displayed in the Calculated field.
The calculated value is compared to the theoretical value. Tolerance: 5%.The result
of the comparison is given next to the Calculated field:
√ indicates that the difference is within the tolerances
X indicates that the difference is out of range; perform the Flow Rate
Calibration procedure from Section 7.8
2 Removing the Tools

3 Detector Check
• 64 for Set Gain

7.7.3 Gravimetric Method
1 Measurement
and select weight from the pull-down menu
1.2 Enter the density of the liquid to be used in the Density field:
• buffer 1: typically 1.001g/ml
• distilled or deionized water: 1.000g/ml
TIMER RESET button.
(mean value)
1.9 Weigh the empty vessel and note down this value.
1.12 At the end of the test, weigh the vessel, being careful NOT TO SPILL the liquid.
1.13 With the help of the value measured at step 1.9, calculate the weight of the liquid
delivered by the HP pump (in g).
1.14 Click in the white field next to weight and enter the weight of the liquid delivered by
the HP pump (in g). The Time field is automatically updated.
1.15 Click on the LAUNCH CALC. button. The result is displayed in the Calculated field.
The calculated value is compared to the theoretical value. Tolerance: 5%.The result
of the comparison is given next to the Calculated field:
√ indicates that the difference is within the tolerances
X indicates that the difference is out of range; perform the Flow Rate
Calibration procedure from Section 7.8


3 Detector Check
• 64 for Set Gain
7.8 Flow Rate Calibration

Objectives
• Measure the flow rate of the HP pump with the theoretical parameters.
• Calculate the correction.
• Check the result of the correction.
Tools/Materials

using it.
♦ volumetric container (read error <0.2%) such as a 5mL volumetric flask (for Section
7.8.2 Volumetric Method).
♦ balance (P/N: 2200411), or any balance with a precision of 0.01g, and a 25mL
minimum volume container (for Section 7.8.3 Gravimetric Method).

♦ distilled or deionized water or buffer (depending on method used).
7.8.1 Preparation

(P/N: 2200435).
P 1.6 Place the tubing from the outlet of the 1500psi backpressure regulator into the
vessel to be used.
P 2 Checking the Pressure

P 2.1 Using a 50mL syringe, prime the HP pump (40mL minimum) with buffer 1.
pressure
P 2.3 Check for leaks in the circuit.

P 2.4 Adjust the backpressure regulator for a pressure value of 500psi.
P 2.5 Click on STOP PUMP.
7.8.2 Volumetric Method
Objective
Measure the time it takes to fill a volumetric vessel at a defined flow rate and
backpressure. A calculation is performed using the theoretical and measured flow
rates.

1 First Measurement: 1mL/min Theoretical Flow Rate

and select volume from the pull-down menu

TIMER RESET button.
(mean value)
time is indicated on the screen. It should be approximately 1 minute.
1.12 Click on the LAUNCH CALC. button. The result is displayed in the 1.0 field. Check
the calculated value. If the value differs from the set flow rate by more than 15%,
there is an error in the measurement and the test must be repeated (go back to step
1.1).
2 Second Measurement: 1.5mL/min Theoretical Flow Rate

TIMER RESET button.

(mean value)
1.1).
3 Third Measurement: 2mL/min Theoretical Flow Rate

3.1 Set the Flow rate to 2ml/min.
TIMER RESET button.
(mean value)

1.1).
4 Calculation and Verification

4.1 Go to the HP: FLOW RATE CALIB. (3/4) screen.
The theoretical and measured flow rate is

displayed for each flow rate tested. The Slope
and Intercept for each rule (rule 1, rule 2 and
rule 3) are also calculated and displayed.
4.2 Save the results by clicking on the SAVE RESULTS button.

A confirmation screen opens. If the confirmation is given, the new values are stored
in the 'instrument.ini' file.
4.4 Perform the Flow Rate Verification procedure from Section 7.7.
7.8.3 Gravimetric Method
Objective
Measure the weight of a liquid delivered by the pump at three different flow rates for
a defined time and backpressure. A calculation is performed using the theoretical and
measured flow rates.
1 First Measurement: 1mL/min Theoretical Flow Rate

and select weight from the pull-down menu
1.2 Enter the density of the liquid to be used in the Density field:
• buffer 1: typically 1.001g/ml
• distilled or deionized water: 1.000g/ml


TIMER RESET button.
(mean value)
1.1).
2 Second Measurement: 1.5mL/min Theoretical Flow Rate

TIMER RESET button.
(mean value)

1.1).
3 Third Measurement: 2mL/min Theoretical Flow Rate

3.1 Set the Flow rate to 2ml/min.
TIMER RESET button.
(mean value)
1.1).
4 Calculation and Verification

4.1 Go to the HP: FLOW RATE CALIB. (3/4) screen.
The theoretical and measured flow rate is

displayed for each flow rate tested. The Slope
and Intercept for each rule (rule 1, rule 2 and
rule 3) are also calculated and displayed.

4.2 Save the results by clicking on the SAVE RESULTS button.

A confirmation screen opens. If the confirmation is given, the new values are stored
in the 'instrument.ini' file.
4.4 Perform the Flow Rate Verification procedure from Section 7.7.
7.9 Thermal Module Check

Objective
Check the temperature of the thermal module.
Tools/Materials

♦ Fluke™ multimeter, with thermocouple connection.
♦ cartridge module temperature control tool (P/N: 2200438).
7.9.1 Preparation
P 1. Open the cartridge module, by pulling the black metal cover all the way to the left.
P 2. Remove the cartridge holder and replace it with the cartridge module temperature
control tool (P/N: 2200438).
P 3. Remove the rubber plug from the cartridge module door and close the door.
P 4. Connect the sensor wire to the Fluke™ multimeter.
P 5. Close the lower front door.
7.9.2 Procedure
1 Measurement
1.1 Go to the THERMAL CONTROL (1/7) screen.
Wait 20 minutes for a thermal stabilization

(check the Calculated temperature).
1.2 Compare the values displayed on the D-10 screen and the Fluke™ multimeter.
Tolerance: ±1.6°C.
If the values are out of range, perform the Thermal Module Calibration procedure
from Section 7.10.


2.1 Disconnect the sensor wire from the multimeter.
2.2 Remove the cartridge module temperature control tool and replace the analytical
cartridge.
2.4 Close the lower front door.
3 Detector Check
• 64 for Set Gain
7.10 Thermal Module Calibration

Objectives
• Calibrate the thermal module. It consists in the following determinations:

gain and offset of the electronic interface (slope and intercept),
depending on the interface board
sensor offset correction, depending on the sensor
gradient correction (gradient between the sensor location and the
cartridge holder)
• Verify the calibration.
Tools/Materials

♦ cartridge module temperature calibration kit (P/N: 2200441).

7.10.1 Preparation
P 1. Remove the front cover assembly. (Section 6.2)

P 2. Unlock the 2 captive screws and
completely pull out the HPLC
drawer.
P 3. Connect the front cover sensor simulator (P/N: 2200415) and the front cover switch
simulator (P/N: 2200416).
P 4. Switch on the thermometer and set the range to "-199.9 TO 199.9°C" (one decimal
digit).
7.10.2 Interface Board Gain and Offset Measurements
Objective
Determine the gain and offset of the electronic interface (slope and intercept).
1. Connect the low temperature control set (blue color) to the thermometer using the
adapter wire and note down the LT EXT value (in °C).
2. Connect the high temperature control set (red color) to the thermometer using the
adapter wire and note down the HT EXT value (in °C).
3. To avoid overheating during the calibration, open the Peltier module circuit by
removing the plug at CN10 on the HPLC module board (see Figure 7-4).
Figure 7-4: HPLC Module Board, Electrical Connections

4. Disconnect the temperature sensor (labeled '4') from the HPLC module board (see
Figure 7-4).
5. Connect the low temperature control set (blue color) to the HPLC module board, at
CN4.
6. Go to the THERMAL CONTROL (5/7) screen. The
system should display a Current calc. temp.
of approximately 20 - 22°C.
7. Click on the START CALIBRATION button.

8. Enter the LT EXT value in the External ref. field on the Temp.: low value line.
9. Click on the MEMORISE button next to this field.
10. Click on STOP CALIBRATION.
11. Remove the low temperature control set from the HPLC module board and connect
the high temperature control set at CN4.
12. The system should display a Current calc. temp. of approximately 40 - 43°C.
14. Enter the HT EXT value in the External ref. field on the Temp.: high value line.
16. Click on the CALCULATION OF THE OFFSET AND THE GAIN button. The
calculated System Offset and System Gain are displayed. Typical tolerances are:
• gain: 0.90 to 1.10
• offset: -4 to +4
17. If the values are correct, click on SAVE RESULTS. The new values are stored in the
'instrument.ini' file and the calibration automatically stops (the STOP CALIBRATION
button changes to START CALIBRATION).
If the values are not correct, there is a problem with the temperature measurement
interface. Click on STOP CALIBRATION and go back to step 1.
Note: the new parameters are immediately taken in account by the system.
18. Remove the high temperature control set from the HPLC module board and re-
connect the temperature sensor at CN4.
19. Re-connect the plug at CN10 on the HPLC module board.
20. Perform the Sensor Offset Correction Measurement procedure from Section
7.10.3.

7.10.3 Sensor Offset Correction Measurement
Objective
Determine the sensor offset correction.
1. Go to the THERMAL CONTROL (6/7) screen and

wait 10 to 15 minutes for a thermal stabilization
close to 35°C (check the Current calc. Temp.
field).
2. Click on the START CALIBRATION button and wait 5 seconds.

3. Disconnect the temperature sensor from the HPLC module board at CN4 and
quickly connect it to the external thermometer with the adapter wire. Note down the
displayed EXT TEMP value (in °C).
4. Re-connect the temperature sensor to the HPLC module board, at CN4.
5. Enter the EXT TEMP value in the External ref. field on the Temperature line.
7. Click on the CALCULATION OF THE SENSOR OFFSET button. The calculated
Sensor Offset is displayed. Tolerance: -2 to +2.
8. If the value is correct, click on SAVE RESULTS. The new value is stored in the
If the value is not correct, there is a problem with the temperature measurement
interface or the temperature sensor itself. Click on STOP CALIBRATION and go
back to step 1.
Note: the new parameter is immediately taken in account by the system.

9. Unplug the front cover sensor simulator and the front cover switch simulator.
10. Push the HPLC drawer back in and tighten the 2 captive screws.
11. Replace the front cover assembly.
12. Perform the Gradient Offset Correction Measurement procedure from Section
7.10.4.
7.10.4 Gradient Offset Correction Measurement
Objective
Determine the gradient offset correction.
1. Open the cartridge module, by pulling the black metal cover all the way to the left.

2. Remove the cartridge holder and replace it with the cartridge holder equipped with
the temperature sensor – available in the cartridge module temperature calibration
kit (P/N: 2200441).
3. Remove the rubber plug from the cartridge module door and close the door.
4. Connect the sensor wire to the Hanna™ thermometer.
5. Close the lower front door.
6. Go to the THERMAL CONTROL (7/7) screen.

(check the Current calc. Temp. field).

8. Enter the value from the Hanna™ thermometer in the External ref. field on the
Temperature line.
10. Click on the CALCULATION OF THE GRADIENT OFFSET button. The calculated
Gradient Offset is displayed. Tolerance: -2 to 0.
11. If the value is correct, click on SAVE RESULTS. The new value is stored in the
If the value is not correct, there is a problem with the temperature measurement
interface or the temperature sensor itself. Click on STOP CALIBRATION and go
back to step 1.
Note: the new parameter is immediately taken in account by the system.

12. Compare the values displayed on the D-10 screen and the Hanna™ thermometer;
they should be the same. Tolerance: ±0.2°C.
13. Backup the new 'instrument.ini' file. (Section 7.19)
14. Disconnect the sensor wire from the thermometer.
15. Remove the cartridge holder equipped with the temperature sensor and replace the
analytical cartridge.
16. Replace the rubber plug in the cartridge module door and close the door.
17. Perform the Verification procedure from Section 7.10.5.
7.10.5 Verification
Objective
Check the analytical cartridge temperature.

1 Installing the Tools

1.1 Open the cartridge module, by pulling the black metal cover all the way to the left.
1.2 Remove the cartridge holder and replace it with the cartridge holder equipped with
the temperature sensor – available in the cartridge module temperature calibration
kit (P/N: 2200441).
1.3 Remove the rubber plug from the cartridge module door and close the door.
1.4 Connect the sensor wire to the Hanna™ thermometer.
1.5 Close the lower front door.
2 Measurement
2.1 Go to the THERMAL CONTROL (1/7) screen.

(check the Calculated temperature).
2.2. Compare the values displayed on the D-10 screen and the Hanna™ thermometer;
they should be the same. Tolerance: ±0.2°C.
If it is not OK, repeat the Thermal Module Calibration procedure. (Section 7.10)

3.1 Disconnect the sensor wire from the thermometer.
3.2 Remove the cartridge holder equipped with the temperature sensor and replace the
analytical cartridge.
4 Detector Check
• 64 for Set Gain

7.11 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check

Objectives
• Check the performance of the internal waste bottle vacuum system and
compare to the standard performance.
• Check the tubing from the dilution/wash station to the internal waste bottle and
compare to the standard performance.
Tool/Material
7.11.1 Vacuum Level Check
Objective
Check the vacuum level, in order to have an indication on the liquid pump
performance and the airtightness of the internal waste circuit.
1. Go to the SYRINGE (1/6) screen:

• select kPa as unit for the Waste
Vacuum reading
• click on START WASH VALVE
This will close the two pinch valves on the

syringe module, thereby closing the internal
waste circuit.
2. Click on the START LIQUID PUMP button.

3. After ~15 seconds, note down the maximum value displayed in the Waste Vacuum
field.
4. Click on STOP LIQUID PUMP.
5. Click on STOP DILUTION VALVE and STOP WASH VALVE; the vacuum is
released.
6. Refer to Section 7.11.2 Result Examination.

7.11.2 Result Examination
Typically the performance of the liquid pump should be ≥50kPa.

If the level measured here is very low (i.e. less than 5kPa), there is an air leak in the
internal waste circuit.
If the level is more than 5kPa, but less than the maximal performance of
approximately 50 to 60kPa, there is probably a loss of performance of the pump. This
may be due an internal blockage of air and liquid flow. In this case, the pump should
be replaced. (Section 6.77)
A level around 50kPa or more indicates the waste circuit is functioning properly, with
a good safety margin.
Note: in the 'Dia.exe' software, the threshold of the waste bottle check is typically set
to 29kPa.
7.11.3 Vacuum Rise Time and Fall Time Check
Objectives
• Check the vacuum rise time to have an indication on the airtightness and
cleanliness of the internal waste circuit.
• Check the vacuum fall time of the dilution well circuit to detect tubing blockage
between the dilution well and the internal waste bottle.
• Check the vacuum fall time of the probe wash well circuit to detect tubing
blockage between the wash well and the internal waste bottle.
1. Go to the SYRINGE (3/6) screen: and click on

the INT. WASTE BOTTLE CHECK button.
This will launch the check.
2. The SYRINGE (3A/6) screen opens, giving the

results of the test:
• High level time indicates the vaccum
rise time
• Dilution valve low level time
indicates the fall time for the dilution
well circuit
• Wash valve low level time indicates
the fall time for the probe wash well
circuit

3. Refer to Section 7.11.4 Result Examination.
7.11.4 Result Examination
Typically the High level time should be lower than 6s (High level time out). If this
performance is not reached, there is a problem on the liquid pump. This issue should
have been detected in the previous check (see 7.11.1).
The fall time of each circuit should be less than 0.5s. If this performance is not
reached, the corresponding circuit is totally or partially pinched or blocked. Check or
replace the tubings on this circuit.
7.12 Hall Effect Sensor Check

Objective
Verify that the Hall effect adapter sensor is working properly.
Tools/Materials

♦ Sysmex #3 sample rack with 13mm adapters.
♦ 7 microvial adapters.
1 Detecting the Presence of Microvial Adapters

1.1 Insert the microvial adapters in positions 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 of the sample rack.
1.2 Go to the RACK INTRO. (1/1) screen.
If a rack is already present in the system, click

on the LAUNCH RACK EJECTION button and
remove it.
1.3 Click on the LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION button and introduce the sample
rack for the test.

1.4 Go to the HALL SENSOR TEST (1/1) screen:

• select First tube and Last tube
• enter 2 in the field for First tube
• enter 8 in the field for Last tube
• click on START
Note: the sample arm will move near the First

tube position and continue in 1mm increments
until it is approximately in the middle of the
microvial adapter. After an initialization, the
arm will move to the middle of the Last tube
position and continue in 1mm increments
towards the right.
1.5 The results of the test are displayed on the screen. Varying positions for the First
tube and Last tube that range from -90 to +90 are displayed. A yes at any of these
positions indicates that a magnet was detected, while no indicates that no magnet
was detected.
1.6 Expected results:
• results of the First tube should show yes beginning at least at the -20
position. Results are acceptable if yes appears in any position prior to -20.
• results of the Last tube should show yes at least until +20. Results are
acceptable if yes appears in any position after +20.
If the results are not acceptable, perform the Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment
2 Detecting the Absence of Microvial Adapters

2.1 Go to the RACK INTRO. (1/1) screen:
• click on the LAUNCH RACK
EJECTION button
• remove the sample rack from the
system
2.2 Remove the microvial adapter from position 7. Keep the other adapters in positions
2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 8.
2.3 Click on the LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION button and re-introduce the sample
rack for the test.

2.4 Go to the HALL SENSOR TEST (1/1) screen:

• enter 7 in the fields for First tube and
Last tube
• click on START
2.5 The results of the test are displayed on the screen. Varying positions for the First
was detected.
2.6 Expected results:
• results of the First tube should show no beginning at least at the -20
position. Results are acceptable if no appears in any position prior to -20.
• results of the Last tube should show no at least until +20. Results are
acceptable if no appears in any position after +20.
If the results are not acceptable, perform the Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment
3 Removing the Sample Rack

3.1 Go to the RACK INTRO. (1/1) screen:
EJECTION button
system
7.13 Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment

Objective
Adjust the position of the Hall effect adapter sensor.
Tools/Materials

♦ TH movement adjustment tool (P/N: 2200432).
1. Go to the RACK INTRO. (1/1) screen.

remove it.
2. Click on the LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION button and introduce the TH

movement adjustment tool (P/N: 2200432).
3. Go to the HALL SENSOR TEST (1/1) screen:
• enter 6 in the field for First tube
• enter 9 in the field for Last tube
• click on START
Note: the sample arm will move near the First

tube position and continue in 1mm increments
until it is approximately in the middle of the
microvial adapter. After an initialization, the
arm will move to the middle of the Last tube
position and continue in 1mm increments
towards the right.
4. The results of the test are displayed on the screen. Varying positions for the First
was detected.
5. Expected results:
• results of the First tube should show yes beginning at least at the -20
position. Results are acceptable if yes appears in any position prior to -20.
• results of the Last tube should show yes at least until +20. Results are
acceptable if yes appears in any position after +20.
If the results are not acceptable, continue with step 6.

6. If the First tube position is not acceptable, shift the Hall effect sensor towards the
right side of the instrument:
• CAREFULLY modify the sensor orientation with a pair of pliers
• modify the position of the whole board
If the Last tube position is not acceptable, shift the Hall effect sensor towards the
left side of the instrument, as described above.
Repeat steps 2. through 5. until the results are OK.

7. Go to the RACK INTRO. (1/1) screen:
EJECTION button
• remove the TH movement adjustment
tool from the system
7.14 TH Offset Determination

Objective
Determine the TH offset parameter.
Tools/Materials


remove it.


3. Go to the TUBE IDENT. (2/3) screen and click on

START.
Note: the sample arm will move from its home

position to tube position 1 and sense the tube
height for an empty rack. The result is
displayed when the arm comes back to its
home position. The same sequence is then
repeated for tube positions 5 and 10.
4. The result of the test is displayed in the Calculated field. Check the value.
Tolerance: ±200.
5. If the Calculated value is within range, click on the SAVE RESULTS button.
If the Calculated value is out of range, adjust the tube height sensor position as
described in Section 6.41.
6. Perform the Tube Identification Check from Section 7.15.
7.15 Tube Identification Check

Objective
Check the tube identification system.
Tools/Materials


remove it.


3. Go to the TUBE IDENT. (3/3) screen:

• select all
• select the rack1_VnV.tpl file available
in the \Dia\Service\Template\VnV
folder
• click on START
Note: the arm moves from its home position to

each selected tube position and senses the
tube height. The measured value is corrected
with the TH offset. The results for each tube
are displayed when the arm comes back to its
home position.
4. The results of the magnet detection are displayed in the magnet field.
The results of the tube detection are displayed in the tube field.
The results of the comparison with the selected template are given at the end of
each line:
✔ indicates a correct result
✘ indicates a difference
5. If all tubes give the expected result, continue with step 6.
If there is a problem, identify where the bad results come from:
• if the error comes from the magnet column, perform the Hall Effect Sensor
Adjustment procedure from Section 7.13
• if the tube was misidentified but the was magnet correctly detected, perform
the TH Offset Determination procedure from Section 7.14
EJECTION button
• remove the TH movement adjustment
tool from the system
7.16 Barcode Reader Check

Objective
Check the barcode reader function.

Tools/Materials

♦ Sysmex #3 sample rack with 13mm adapters.
♦ 10 barcoded primary tubes.
1. Insert the barcoded primary tubes in all positions of the sample rack.
If it is impossible to have 10 tubes at the same time, repeat the procedure until all
tube positions are checked.
Note the barcode label values for each position.

remove it.
3. Click on the LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION button and introduce the sample
rack for the test.
4. Go to the BARCODE (2/2) screen and click on
START.
5. The X pos. field indicates the exact X position (in steps from the home position) at
which the barcode was read.
The entire part of the Tube nb indicates the tube number identified by the software.
The decimal part of the Tube nb indicates the range for each tube. The nominal
range is from 0.2 to 0.8.
The results of the test are given at the end of each line:
✔ indicates that the result is in the standard tube range
✘ indicates that the result is out of range
6. Compare the barcode label values from step 1. with the Result of the reading field.
7. If all tubes give the expected result, go to step 8.
If at least one result is out of range, adjust the barcode reader position as described
in Section 6.31.


EJECTION button
system
7.17 Touch Screen Calibration

Objective
Calibrate the X and Y axes of the touch screen.
Tools/Materials

♦ pointed (but not sharp) tool for clicking with precision on the touch screen.
1. Go to the MISC. (1/2) screen and click on the

TOUCH SCREEN CALIB. button.
2. A confirmation screen opens. If the

confirmation is given, the calibration begins.

3. Click precisely on the center of the cross using

a pointed (but not sharp) tool.
4. Repeat this operation 8 more times and finally

click on the DONE button. You will return to the
MISC. (1/2) screen.
7.18 Front Cover Sensor: Interface Board Update

Warning: this procedure should be performed in the field only in case of extreme
need. It requires to have special equipment, such as a soldering iron.
Objective
Modify the interface board to increase the sensitivity of the front cover sensor signal
interface circuit.
This procedure must be performed if an error appears on the front cover sensor: "front
door open" message while the door is closed.
Tools/Materials

♦ soldering iron.
♦ a pair of pliers.
1. Shut down the D-10, turn off the power and unplug the external power cord.
2. Unscrew the 2 ¼ turn fasteners which lock the left door and open it.

3. Check the revision number of the interface

board.
4. If the number is "2" or "3", remove the SMD

resistor which is circled in white on the
pictures. The indication on the resistor is "222"
(2.22kΩ resistor).
5. Change the version number indicated on the label. Add an "A" with a pencil:
• from "DAE010+2" to "DAE010+2A"
• from "DAE010+3" to "DAE010+3A"
6. Close the left door and tighten the 2 ¼ turn fasteners.
7. Replace the external power cord.
8. Switch on the D-10 and launch the Service
software:

9. Go to the FRONT COVER (1/2) screen:

• open and close the front door several
times, by clicking on the START
FRONT COVER SOLENOID button
• monitor the Front cover sensor
status
7.19 'instrument.ini' File Backup

Objective
Backup the 'instrument.ini' file, which is specific for each D-10 unit.
This procedure must be performed after any modification of the 'instrument.ini' file, or
as a preventive maintenance.
Process Description
Instruments DA3G218316, DA3G222502, DA3G222503, DA3G222506, DA3G222511,

DA3G222615, DA3H242020, DA3J255004 or with a serial number ≥DA4A304301
already contain a backup of their 'instrument.ini' file.
Typically, two backups are done:
• a paper copy
These backups are located inside the left door (see 3.3.13). The floppy disk is
identified with a sticker:
D-10: backup of
INSTRUMENT.INI
S/N: DAxXxxxxxx
Tools/Materials

♦ floppy disk (if no backup is present in the instrument).

1 Creating an Electronic Copy

1.1 Remove the 'instrument.ini' backup floppy disk
from the inner side of the left door.
If no backup is present in the instrument, take

a new disk and identify it with a label indicating
"D-10: intrument.ini backup" plus the unit serial
number.
1.2 Insert the write-enabled disk in the floppy drive.

1.3 Go to the MISC. (1/2) screen and click on the
FILE EXPORT button.
1.4 The FILE EXPORT screen opens:

• in the D-10 field, select C:\Dia\
• in the Type field, select (*.ini)
• select the instrument.ini file
• click on the EXPORT button
1.5 A confirmation screen opens. If the confirmation is given, the copy begins.
1.6 If the copy was successful, the instrument.ini
file should appear in the Files in Floppy field.

2 Creating a Paper Copy

2.1 Go to the MISC. (2/2) screen and click in the
white Selected file field.
2.2 Select the instrument.ini file available in the

C:\Dia\ folder and click on DONE.
2.3 Click on PRINT FILE.
2.4 A confirmation screen opens. If the confirmation is given, the printing begins.
2.5 At the end of the printing, it is recommended to make a photocopy printout on
standard paper.
3 Storing the Backups

3.1 Place the paper copy and the floppy disk in a plastic bag.
3.2 Store the bag inside the left door (use a piece of tape if necessary).
7.20 Software Imaging

Objectives
• Re-image the hard disk.

• Restore the instrument specific parameters.

• Upgrade the software and firmware.
Tools/Materials

♦ image boot disk (P/N: 2702214).
♦ 2.22 image CD (P/N: 2200443).
♦ any compatible CD-ROM drive configured as 'slave' device.
♦ CD-ROM flat cable extension (P/N: 2200402).
♦ 3.0B upgrade kit (P/N: 2200445).
7.20.1 Preparation
P1 Perform the 'instrument.ini' File Backup procedure from Section 7.19 (if possible).
7.20.2 Procedure
1 Imaging the Hard Disk with Image Boot Disk Version 1.0
1.1 If necessary, replace the hard disk. (Section 6.30)
1.2 Unscrew the 2 ¼ turn fasteners which lock the left door and open it.
1.3 Connect the CD-ROM drive to the hard
disk flat cable and the spare power
supply cable. You may use the CD-ROM
flat cable extension (P/N: 2200402) for
easier connection. Make sure that the
drive is configured as 'slave' device prior
to connecting it.
1.4 Connect a keyboard and a VGA screen to the D-10 rear panel.
1.5 Insert the image boot disk (P/N: 2702214) in the floppy drive.
1.6 Switch on the D-10. It will automatically boot from the floppy.
1.7 Select 1 on the keyboard for Restore a
Partition or Drive.
Note: the computer will automatically select

this option after a time out period.

1.8 Select R on the keyboard for You want to

RESTORE a hard drive.
1.9 Select A on the keyboard for The floppy disk

is ABOVE the CD-ROM drive.
1.10 Select R on the keyboard for You have a

REGULAR Image CD.
1.11 Select W on the keyboard for You want to

restore the Whole drive.
1.12 Insert the 2.22 image CD (P/N: 2200443) into

the CD-ROM drive when prompted. Imaging
will take from 1 to 2 minutes.

1.13 When the imaging is complete, the prompt

A:\GHOST> should be seen on the monitor.
1.14 Remove the image boot disk and the 2.22 image CD from their respective drives.
1.15 Switch off the D-10.
1.16 Disconnect the keyboard and VGA screen.
1.17 Disconnect the CD-ROM drive and the CD-ROM flat cable extension (if used).
2 Imaging the Hard Disk with Image Boot Disk Version 1.2 or later
2.1 If necessary, replace the hard disk. (Section 6.30)
2.2 Unscrew the 2 ¼ turn fasteners which lock the left door and open it.
2.3 Connect the CD-ROM drive to the hard
disk flat cable and the spare power
supply cable. You may use the CD-ROM
flat cable extension (P/N: 2200402) for
easier connection. Make sure that the
drive is configured as 'slave' device prior
to connecting it.
2.4 Using your laptop, copy AUTOEXEC.V2, CONFIG.V2, AUTOEXEC.D10,

CONFIG.D10, D10.bat and V2.bat to the root (A:\) of your image boot disk (P/N:
2702214).
2.5 Configure your image boot disk to D-10 use, by executing A:\D10.bat with your
laptop (double-click it in Explorer).
Note: the image boot disk will convert back to a V2 style disk on its own after 1 use.
2.6 Insert the image boot disk in the floppy drive.
2.7 Switch on the D-10. It will automatically boot from the floppy.
2.8 Insert the 2.22 image CD (P/N: 2200443) into the CD-ROM drive. Imaging will take
from 1 to 2 minutes.
2.9 Remove the image boot disk and the 2.22 image CD from their respective drives.
2.10 Switch off the D-10.
2.11 Disconnect the CD-ROM drive and the CD-ROM flat cable extension (if used).

3 Restoring the Instrument Specific Parameters

3.1 Switch on the D-10 and launch the Service
software:
Note: the system will not ask for any password.
3.2 Remove the 'instrument.ini' backup floppy disk

from the inner side of the left door and insert it
in the floppy drive.
If no backup is present in the instrument, call

Tech Support for help in obtaining the file.
3.3 Go to the MISC. (1/2) screen and click on the

FILE IMPORT button.
3.4 The FILE IMPORT screen opens:

• in the Type field, select (*.ini)
• in the D-10 field, select C:\Dia\
• in the Files in Floppy field, select the
instrument.ini file
• click on the IMPORT button

3.5 A confirmation screen opens. Click on YES to

import the file.
3.6 At the end of the copy, remove the disk from the floppy drive and replace it in the left
door.
4 Upgrading the Software and Firmware

4.1 Go to the MISC. (1/2) screen:
• take the "D-10 PC Software (1/4)" disk
in the 3.0B upgrade kit (P/N: 2200445)
and insert it in the floppy drive
• click on SETUP
Warning: always begin with the software

upgrade. Proceed to the firmware upgrade
only if the software upgrade was
successful.
4.2 A first confirmation screen opens. Click on
YES.
4.3 A second confirmation screen opens. Click on

YES.

4.4 The first software installation screen appears:

• select Keep Existing Results (if
necessary)
• click on Install Package3.00B
• follow the instructions on the screen
4.5 When the last software installation screen

appears:
• remove the "D-10 PC Software (4/4)"
disk from the floppy drive
• click on ShutDown
4.6 Re-start the D-10 and launch the Service

software:
4.7 Enter D-10SETUP (level 3 password) and click

on DONE.
4.8 Take the "D-10 MC Firmware (1/1)" disk in the 3.0B upgrade kit (P/N: 2200445) and
insert it in the floppy drive.

4.9 On the SETUP screen, click on the SETUP

button.
Warning: always begin with the software

upgrade. Proceed to the firmware upgrade
only if the software upgrade was
successful.
4.10 A confirmation screen opens. Click on YES.
4.11 The firmware installation screen appears. Click

on the PROCEED MC 2.21 button.
4.12 At the end of the process:

• remove the "D-10 MC Firmware (1/1)"
disk from the floppy drive
• click on SHUTDOWN

4.13 Update the MC EPROM sticker.
4.14 Disconnect the keyboard and VGA screen from the D-10.
4.15 Close the left door and tighten the 2 ¼ turn fasteners.
7.21 LIS Setup

Objective
Set up the Laboratory Information (Management) System (LIS or LIMS).
Process Description
The Laboratory Information System (LIS) stores and manages information regarding
patients, tests ordered for patients, and the results of the tests which have already
been performed. When a patient sample is collected or when it arrives at the
laboratory, it is assigned a sample identification. The sample ID is associated with the
patient, with the tests to be performed, and with the results of the sample. The
connection between the D-10 and the LIS allows the results of the sample IDs to be
transferred from the D-10 to the LIS. This transfer of results can be initiated by the LIS
or by the D-10.
To establish a connection between the D-10 and the LIS, both systems must have
compatible hardware. A null modem cable must connect the systems through RS232
ports.
To reduce the risk of incompatibility between the systems, the NCCLS standards for
the protocol transfers were followed. The low level protocol is specified in NCCLS
standard LIS1-A, Specification for Low Level Protocol to Transfer Messages Between
Clinical Laboratory Instruments and Computer Systems. The high level protocol is
specified in NCCLS standard LIS2-A, Specification for Transferring Information
Between Clinical Instruments and Computer Systems.
Tools/Materials

♦ D-10 User software (Dia).

1 Setting up the LIS Communication Parameters

1.1 Switch on the D-10 and launch the Service
software:
1.2 Enter D-10SETUP (level 3 password) and click

on DONE.
1.3 On the SETUP screen, click on the LIS button.
Port: only COM 4 allowed.

Baud Rate: 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600. Default 9600.
Data Bits: 7 or 8. Default 8.
Stop Bits: 1 or 2. Default 1.
Parity: None, Odd or Even. Default None.
DONE: save changes.
CANCEL: cancel changes.
Results waiting to be transmitted: displays the
number of results in queue to be sent due to an
instrument shutdown during transmission or loss of LIS
connection. Results will be sent when connection is re-
established unless cleared with FLUSH button.
FLUSH: clears the results waiting to be transmitted.
Results may need to be re-transmitted.

2 Setting up the LIS Settings

2.1 Go back to the User software:
• go to the SETTINGS screen
• click the arrow to screen LIS (3 of 5)
• define settings as described below;
the LIS ID # must be defined before
Export Activated is set to YES
Export Activated: YES or NO. YES must be selected for the LIS communication.
Export to LIS: allows the setting of the automatic export to LIS after each run, after each
injection or manual export only.
LIS ID #: allows an LIS ID to be defined (0 to 99).
3 Workflow 1: Manually Export Results to LIS

3.1 Define LIS communication parameters as previously described.
3.2 Define LIS settings parameters:
• Export to LIS may be set to any
option
• an LIS ID # must be defined before
Export Activated is set to YES
3.3 On the DATA screen:

• select the sample(s) to export
• click on the Export button

3.4 A new screen opens:

• select Manual Upload to LIS
• select the Export selection; if
Specify date range is selected,
define the starting date and ending
date of samples to be exported by
selecting the date field and using the
scroll buttons on the right
• click on Export; sample results will
be transmitted to the LIS
4 Workflow 2: Automatically Export Results to LIS

4.1 Define LIS communication parameters as previously described.
4.2 Define LIS settings parameters:
• select the desired Export to LIS
option (except Manual only!)
• define an LIS ID # using the scroll
buttons on the lower right
• set Export Activated to YES; results
will be automatically transmitted to
the LIS as they become available
5 Workflow 3: Export Results to LIS from LIS Query

5.1 Results can be requested from the LIS through a query as defined in the D-10
Technical Bulletin: LIS Interface Requirements.

8 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1 Error Messages

The errors that can occur during a run are listed in the following table. The system
must be able to accept new error messages as required without compromising
compatibility.
Error Message Probable Cause(s)

(E001) Communication error with Physical link broken.
interface board, call service. Another instance of the program is already running.
(E002) Pump Error (start) MC or HPPC not responding.
(E003) Pump Error (stop) MC or HPPC not responding.
(E004) Load method failed MC or HPPC not responding.
(E005) Initialisation failed MC or HPPC not responding.
(E006) Warmup gradient failed MC or HPPC not responding.
(E007) GetSysTable Failed MC or HPPC not responding.
(E008) Conditioning gradient failed MC or HPPC not responding.
(E009) Gradient error (stop) MC or HPPC not responding.
(E010) End run gradient failed MC or HPPC not responding.
Mechanical error: the X position (axis) sensor did
(E011) X motor error not sense any movement or the X home sensor
cannot be reached.
Mechanical error: the Z position (axis) sensor did
(E012) Z motor error not sense any movement or the Z home sensor
cannot be reached.
Mechanical error: the TH position (axis) sensor did
(E013) T.H. motor error not sense any movement or the TH home sensor
cannot be reached.
(E014) Syringe motor error Mechanical error.
(E015) Inj. Valve motor error Mechanical error.
The reference adjustment on the flow cell was
(E020) Reference adjustment error
impossible.
The sample rate or the duration in the parameter file
(E021) Too many data points requested.
generates more than the 1800 data points that can
Please adjust duration or sampling rate.
be stored in MC. The parameter file is not correct.
(E022) Rack door error Error during rack door handling.
The front door is open while it should be closed.
Low sensitivity on the interface board.
(E023) Front door open
Incorrect distance between the sensor and the
reflective metal plate.
During the chromatogram, the reference signal
(E024) Reference drift error moved to far from the start value for which the
reference adjustment was done.
The final position of the rack sensor does not
(E025) Error on rack introduction
correspond to what was expected.
(E027) HLaunchInjection error Communication problem.

Error Message Probable Cause(s)

The *.raw file used to display the chromatogram
(E028) CmChromato::load_raw failed
was not found on the hard disk.
The final position of the rack sensor does not
(E029) Rack jam error
correspond to what was expected.
The Data Analysis Module encountered an error
(E030) Data Analysis Error
while processing the raw data.
Time out on the serial line, meaning that there is no
(E031) Stop sequencer failed
response from the interface board.
The transmission of a gradient element to HPPC
(E032) Error loading gradient to HPPC
failed.
(E034) ResetBarcodeList failed
(E035) BarcodeList failed
The cam flag signal did not occur within 10 seconds
(E036) Cam flag time out error
after the gradient was launched.
(E037) HP Pump stopped due to too
The safety pressure limit (2000psi) was reached.
high pressure
The average pressure was below 130psi for 30
(E038) Error:Pressure too low
seconds during the run.
The average pressure was over 800psi for more
(E039) Error:Pressure too high
than 6 seconds during the run.
The adjustment of the LED source was impossible:
the maximum current intensity on the LED
(E040) Replace Light source !!! command circuit was reached, without a correct
light intensity.
The flat cable going to the detector board is broken.

L20015501
8.2 Troubleshooting Guide from Operation Manual

Problem Probable Cause(s) Recommended Solution(s)
Air in syringe line or system not Verify end of wash line is at the bottom of the wash/diluent
1. 1.
primed correctly bottle. Perform a system flush.
Check sample for clots or low volume. Predilute and re-run
2. Clotted or short sample 2.
sample.
3. Prediluted sample not mixed 3. Re-make prediluted sample, mix and re-run.
4. Dilution/wash station leak 4. Call Technical Support.
Check the proportioning valve: switch the valve manually,
No peaks appear on the
using the command on the Service screen. A loud clicking
chromatogram; report Proportioning valve does not work
5. 5. noise should be heard when switching to buffer 2 and a
shows no data properly
quieter noise when switching to buffer 1. If no click is
heard, call Technical Service.
6. Probe is bent or blocked 6. Replace probe.
Service Manual
Follow the steps in "Prime the Reagent Lines" on page 3-5

7. System not primed correctly 7.
of the Operation Manual.
Insufficient sample in the tube/sample
8. 8. Manually prepare sample and re-run.
vial
Expired, contaminated or damaged
1. 1. Change the reagent(s).
reagent(s)
Shape of the peaks 2. Expired or damaged cartridge 2. Change the cartridge.

degrade Run decontamination procedure. Follow the steps in
3. Dirty flow cell 3. "Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path" on page 5-2
1. Data entry error 1. Verify correct entry for calibrator values.
Wrong calibrator used or vial
2. 2. Verify correct calibrator is used and is correctly barcoded.
barcoded incorrectly
Calibration failure; peak Calibrators are placed in the wrong
3. 3. Check calibrator position in rack.
out of range; peak not rack position
detected 4. Inadequate calibrator volume 4. Verify sample vials contain sufficient volume of calibrator.
5. Improper reconstitution of calibrators 5. Reconstitute new vials of calibrator.
Air bubble in detector and/or pump Flush system. Follow the steps in "Perform a System
6. 6.
system Flush" on page 4-7 of the Operation Manual.
8-3
8-4

Run decontamination procedure. Follow the steps in
Calibration failure; peak
out of range; peak not
detected (continued)
8. Damaged reagent or cartridge 8. Replace damaged component.
Elevated sample concentration; high Check dilution chamber and probe wash port for debris or
1. 1.
total areas waste backup.
2. Buffer contamination 2. Replace buffer(s); do not pool buffers.
3. Buffer evaporation 3. Replace buffer(s); keep buffer(s) capped.
Verify correct method is running; load correct Update Kit
4. Wrong test parameters 4.
disk using the LOT INFO/Update Kit screen.
Early retention times 5. Damaged, wrong or expired cartridge 5. Replace cartridge.
6. Cartridge temperature too high 6. Call Technical Service.
Proportioning valve does not work
Service Manual

properly
Low sample concentration; low total
1. 1. Check for clotted samples; check for blockage in probe.
areas
2. Leak in flow path 2. Check for leaks (including cartridge module).
3. Air in pump 3. Purge pump; flush system.
Verify correct method is running; load correct Update Kit
4. Wrong test parameters 4.
disk.
Check the line and clean as needed using the LOT
5. Clogged buffer line 5.
INFO/Update Kit screen.
6. Bad pump seal 6. Call Technical Service.
Late retention times
7. Damaged buffer(s) 7. Replace buffer(s).
8. Damaged, wrong, or expired cartridge 8. Replace cartridge.
9. Cartridge was not primed 9. Prime cartridge.
10. Cartridge temperature too low 10. Call Technical Service.
L20015501

Proportioning valve does not work
properly
L20015501

Air bubble in detector and/or pump Flush system. Follow the steps in "Perform a System
1. 1.
system Flush" on page 4-7 of the Operation Manual.
Flush system. Follow the steps in "Perform a System
2. Air bubble in detector 2.
Flush" on page 4-7 of the Operation Manual.
Noise spikes appear on
chromatogram / drifting
baseline
4. Detector board fault 4. Call Technical Service.
Clean dilution well as described on page 5-2 of the
5. Dirty dilution well 5.
Operation Manual.
1. Short sample 1. Ensure that there is enough sample in the tube.
Manually dilute sample at lower dilution ratio (1:100) and
2. Sample is too diluted 2.
re-run.
3. Clotted sample 3. Manually dilute sample and re-run.
Service Manual
4. Prediluted sample not mixed 4. Re-make the prediluted sample, mix and re-run.
Low Total Area
5. Leak at dilution chamber 5. Call Technical Service.
Check wash/diluent bottle volume and verify wash line is
6. Air in sample lines or diluent syringe 6.
properly placed in bottle. Perform system flush.
Uptake line clogged with undissolved
7. 7. Flush the sample uptake lines.
sample particulate
Manually dilute sample at higher dilution ratio (1:400) and

1. Sample is too concentrated 1.
re-run.
Inadequate wash of sample probe or Check dilution chamber and probe wash port for overflow.
2. 2.
inadequate drain of dilution chamber Call Technical Service.
3. Syringe pump not functioning properly 3. Call Technical Service.
High Total Area Ensure that the internal waste bottle cap is closed. Perform
the waste bottle test from the Service screen. Follow the
4. Leak in the internal waste bottle 4.
steps in "Clean Internal Waste Bottle" on page 5-2 of the
Operation Manual.
Flush system. Follow the steps in "Perform a System
5. Air in the sample line or syringe 5.
Flush" on page 4-7 of the Operation Manual.
Module does not turn 1. Power outage at the source 1. Check main, incoming, power circuit breaker.
on when main power Replace one or both fuses. If repeated failure, contact
2. Main power fuse(s) failure 2.
8-5
switch is pressed, or Technical Service.

loses power 3. Main power switch failure 3. Call Technical Service.
8-6

Eliminate air using steps described in "Assess the Check
Pressure Fluctuations - Air in the pump -
Valves" on page 3-8 of the Operation Manual.
Check the fluid lines for any leaks or open connections.
Perform a systematic search from the detector to the
1. Loose or open connections 1. buffers (see "D-10 Fluid System" on page 6-10 of the
Operation Manual). Tighten any loose or open
connections; do not overtighten.
Low system pressure Reposition fluid lines and perform a system flush. Follow
2. Reagent intake lines above fluid level 2. the steps in "Perform a System Flush" on page 4-7 of the
Operation Manual.
Eliminate air using steps described in "Assess the Check
3. Air in pump 3.
Valves" on page 3-8 of the Operation Manual.
4. Dummy cartridge installed 4. Replace dummy cartridge with analytical cartridge.
Check for blockages in the lines or cartridge. Perform a
Service Manual
systematic search from the detector back to the high-

1. Blockage exists in fluid lines 1.
High system pressure pressure pump (see "D-10 Fluid System" on page 6-10 of
the Operation Manual). Replace components as needed.
2. Fittings are overtightened 2. Check for overtightened fittings.
Adjust contrast using the display contrast knob (inside right
Touch screen is very 1. Contrast adjustment incorrect 1.
panel).
dark or very light
2. Backlight efficiency too low 2. Call Technical Service.
Print head is out of alignment or
Printout missing lines or 1. 1. Call Technical Service.
needs replacement
is very faint
2. Incorrect paper used 2. Use only Bio-Rad supplied paper.
Failure of the system to startup
Turn the power off, then on again. If the problem persists,
Software problem - correctly or error encountered during -
call Technical Service for assistance.
operation
Instrument fails to boot
- Floppy disk left in disk drive - Remove floppy disk from drive and cycle power switch.
on power on
L20015501
L20015501
8.3 Diagnostics and Checks

Click on the OK button. If a second instance of the program is
open, the problem will be repeated. Do the shutdown procedure.
1.
After cycling power, don't click on any icon on the touch screen! If
the error message appears again, go to step 2.
Check the serial link cable between the PC board and the
Physical link broken. 2. interface board. Verify if the ribbon cable is plugged correctly into
(E001) Communication error
the interface board receptacle and into the PC board receptacle.
with interface board, call
Another instance of the Check if the MC controller runs: check the MC Activity LED. If not
service.
program is already running. 3. OK, shutdown the system and re-boot. If the failure persists,
replace the interface board. (Section 6.15)
Check the +5VDC power supply (see Figure 3-45). The value
4.
should be +5.15VDC.
Service Manual
If the problem persists, replace the electronic module. (Section

5.
6.6)
Click on the OK button. If a new error message appears, do the
(E002) Pump Error (start) shutdown procedure. After cycling power, don't click on any icon
(E003) Pump Error (stop) 1.
on the touch screen! If the error message appears again, go to
(E004) Load method failed step 2.
(E005) Initialisation failed

(E006) Warmup gradient failed
2. interface board. Verify if the ribbon cable is plugged correctly into
(E007) GetSysTable Failed
(E008) Conditioning gradient
Check if the MC controller runs: check the MC Activity LED. If not
failed MC or HPPC not
3. OK, shutdown the system and re-boot. If the failure persists,
(E009) Gradient error (stop) responding.
(E010) End run gradient failed
Check if the HPPC controller runs: check the HPPC Activity LED.
(E031) Stop sequencer failed
4. If not OK, shutdown the system and re-boot. If the failure persists,
(E032) Error loading gradient
to HPPC
(E034) ResetBarcodeList Check the +5VDC power supply (see Figure 3-45). The value
5.
failed should be +5.15VDC.
(E035) BarcodeList failed If the problem persists, replace the electronic module. (Section
6.
6.6)
8-7
8-8

Go to the Service software. Select Sample Arm, X Move. Select
1. the speed index 9 for the service movement (highest speed). This
is the worst case for the motor (lowest torque).
Check if the pulley is properly tightened on the motor shaft. Check
2. if the belt holder is properly tightened. Check if the slotted disk is
properly tightened.
Check the stepper motor by connecting it to the plug of another
motor (X, TH and Z motors are identical). You may use the 6-pin
3. extension lead (P/N: 2200418). If the motor does not move, check
the electrical connections on the X board and between the X
board and the interface board.
Mechanical error: the X
If the motor is OK, check the interface board circuit connections. If
position (axis) sensor did not
4. the connection is OK, the hardware on the interface board failed.
(E011) X motor error sense any movement or the
Replace the interface board. (Section 6.15)
X home sensor cannot be
Service Manual
Check the sensors in the Service software: axis sensor and home
reached.
sensor. If a sensor does not give the right answer, check it by
5. connecting it to the plug of another sensor (see 8.4). You may use
the 5-pin extension lead (P/N: 2200417). Replace the sensor(s) if
necessary. (Sections 6.67 & 6.68)
Check if the X motor can close (high effort) and open (low effort)
the rack door. If the motor cannot open the door, check the rack
6.
door movement. If the rack door movement is stiff, replace the
rack door module. (Section 6.16)
Check if the X movement is stiff by manually moving the sample
7. arm. If yes, the sample arm module should be replaced. (Section
6.36)
Go to the Service software. Select Sample Arm, Z Move. Select
Mechanical error: the Z
Check if the Z movement is not blocked in the upper position:
(E012) Z motor error sense any movement or the 2.
manually turn the pulley.
L20015501
Z home sensor cannot be

reached. Check if the pulleys are properly tightened on the motor shaft and
3. on the lead screw. Check if the slotted disk is properly tightened.
Check if the lead screw ball bearing is secured.
L20015501

Check if the Z movement is blocked by the TH assembly. It can
happen when the tube holder sensor gives incorrect information
4. and stops the TH movement in a high position. In this case, the
tube height sensor must be checked and replaced if necessary.
(Section 6.41)
Check the stepper motor by connecting it to the plug of another
extension lead (P/N: 2200418). If the motor does not move, check
5.
Mechanical error: the Z the electrical connections on the Z board, between the Z board
position (axis) sensor did not and the X board and between the X board and the interface
(E012) Z motor error
sense any movement or the board.
(continued)
Z home sensor cannot be If the motor is OK, check the interface board circuit connections. If
reached. 6. the connection is OK, the hardware on the interface board failed.
Service Manual
Check the sensors in the Service software: axis sensor and home
sensor. If a sensor does not give the right answer, check it by
7. connecting it to the plug of another sensor (see 8.4). You may use
the 5-pin extension lead (P/N: 2200417). Replace the sensor(s) if
necessary. (Sections 6.22 & 6.71)
8. Check if the Z movement is noisy. If yes, lubricate the lead screw.
9. Check if the Z movement is stiff. If yes, adjust the belt tension.

Go to the Service software. Select Sample Arm, Z Move. Select
Check if the TH movement is not blocked in the upper position:
2.
manually turn the pulley.
Mechanical error: the TH
Check if the pulleys are properly tightened on the motor shaft and
3. on the lead screw. Check if the slotted disk is properly tightened.
(E013) T.H. motor error sense any movement or the
Check if the lead screw ball bearing is secured.
TH home sensor cannot be
reached. Check the stepper motor by connecting it to the plug of another
extension lead (P/N: 2200418). If the motor does not move, check
4.
the electrical connections on the Z board, between the Z board
and the X board and between the X board and the interface
8-9
board.
8 - 10

If the motor is OK, check the interface board circuit connections. If
5. the connection is OK, the hardware on the interface board failed.
Mechanical error: the TH Check the sensors in the Service software: axis sensor and home
position (axis) sensor did not sensor. If a sensor does not give the right answer, check it by
(E013) T.H. motor error
sense any movement or the 6. connecting it to the plug of another sensor (see 8.4). You may use
(continued)
TH home sensor cannot be the 5-pin extension lead (P/N: 2200417). Replace the sensor(s) if
reached. necessary. (Sections 6.22 & 6.71)
Check if the TH movement is noisy. If yes, lubricate the lead
7.
screw.
8. Check if the TH movement is stiff. If yes, adjust the belt tension.
1. Go to the Service software. Select Syringe.
Check the syringe stepper motor movement. If the motor does not
move, check the electrical connections on the syringe module
Service Manual
board and between the syringe module board and the interface
board. If the motor does not move, inspect the syringe module
2.
board (connectors, soldered points and wires). Replace the board
if necessary. (Section 6.51) If the syringe module board is OK,
(E014) Syringe motor error Mechanical error.
replace the motorized syringe. (Section 6.11) If the problem
persists, replace the interface board. (Section 6.15)
Check the syringe home sensor in the Service software. If the
sensor fails, inspect the syringe module board (connectors,
3. soldered points and wires). Replace the board if necessary.
(Section 6.51) If the syringe module board is OK, replace the
motorized syringe. (Section 6.11)
1. Go to the Service software. Select HP: Pump + Valve (4/17).
Check the HP valve stepper motor movement. If the motor does
not move or if it moves with a bad noise, check the electrical
connections on the HPLC module board and between the HPLC
module board and the interface board. If the motor does not
(E015) Inj. Valve motor error Mechanical error.
2. move, inspect the HPLC module board (connectors, soldered
L20015501
points and wires). Replace the board if necessary. (Section 6.48)

if the HPLC module board is OK, replace the HP valve. (Section
6.19) If the problem persists, replace the interface board.
(Section 6.15)
L20015501

Check the HP valve sensors in the Service software. The sensor
status is 5 for the Load position, 6 for the Inject position and 4 for
the Prime position. Status of the sensors and associated test
points on the HPLC module board (see Figure 3-12):
Position Sensor 0 S0I test point S0O test point
Load 1 5V 0V
Inject 0 0V 5V
Prime 0 0V 5V

(E015) Inj. Valve motor error Load 0 0V 5V
Mechanical error. 3.
(continued) Inject 1 5V 0V
Prime 0 0V 5V
Service Manual

Load 1 5V 0V
Inject 1 5V 0V
Prime 1 5V 0V
If a sensor fails, inspect the HPLC module board (connectors,

soldered points and wires). Replace the board if necessary.
(Section 6.48) if the HPLC module board is OK, replace the HP
valve. (Section 6.19)
Go to the Service software. Select Detector (1/4). Enter 150 and
64 as nominal values for Set Light and Set Gain. Run the HP
pump for a 1.5mL/min flow rate. Open the fluidic circuit at the
The reference adjustment 1. outlet of the flow cell. Close the outlet tube with a finger and
(E020) Reference adjustment
on the flow cell was observe if the Abs. Meas. value changes. If it increases when the
error
impossible. tube is closed, there is a bubble in the flow cell. Evacuate the
bubble by opening and closing the outlet until the value is stable.
The detector cannot be adjusted. Perform the procedure from
2.
Section 7.2 Detector Adjustment.
8 - 11
8 - 12

The sample rate or the
This error can happen when trying to modify a 'Profile2.ini' file and
duration in the parameter file
(E021) Too many data points entering parameters that result in more than 1800 data points per
generates more than the
requested. Please adjust - run. Correct the [chromaprofile] section in 'Profile2.ini' to give
1800 data points that can be
duration or sampling rate. compatible parameters. This error should not happen to the end
stored in MC. The
user.
parameter file is not correct.
Go to the Service software. Select Rack Door. Test the rack door
movement by opening and closing the door. If the X motor cannot
1.
open the door, check to see if the rack door movement is stiff. If
necessary, replace the rack door module. (Section 6.16)
Check the sensor status with the Service software. When the door
is closed, the "closed door" sensor is free and the "open door"
sensor is obstructed. When the door is open, the "closed door"
Error during rack door
(E022) Rack door error 2. sensor is obstructed and the "open door" sensor is free. Check to
handling.
Service Manual
see if there is a safety margin for each situation: the sensors

should give the final values before the door reaches its final
position. If necessary, adjust the sensor positions.
Check the rack door solenoid. If it does not work, check the
solenoid impedance (35Ω approximately). If the circuit is open,
3.
the rack door solenoid is broken and should be replaced.
(Section 6.63)
The front door is open
1. while it should be 1. Close the front door if open.
closed.
Low sensitivity on the
2. 2. The interface board must be updated (see 7.18).
(E023) Front door open interface board.
Incorrect distance
between the sensor and Move the sensor or bend the metal plate to reach the nominal
3. 3.
the reflective metal distance of 5mm. Tolerance: ±1.5mm.
plate.
During the chromatogram,
L20015501
the reference signal moved

Failure on the detector. The detector module should be replaced.
(E024) Reference drift error too far from the start value -
(Section 6.32)
for which the reference
adjustment was done.
L20015501

The final position of the rack
(E025) Error on rack Validate the error and restart the operation from the Sleep
sensor does not correspond -
introduction screen.
to what was expected.
1. interface board. Verify if the ribbon cable is plugged correctly into
Check if the MC controller runs: check the MC Activity LED. If not
2. OK, shutdown the system and re-boot. If the failure persists,
(E027) HLaunchInjection error Communication problem.
Check the +5VDC power supply (see Figure 3-45). The value
3.
should be +5.15VDC.
If the problem persists, replace the electronic module. (Section
4.
6.6)
The *.raw file used to
The *.dam file selected in the DATA screen did not have a
Service Manual
(E028) display the chromatogram

- corresponding *.raw file. Should not happen. Suppress the *.dam
CmChromato::load_raw failed was not found on the hard
file for consistency.
disk.
The final position of the rack
Validate the error and restart the operation from the Sleep
(E029) Rack jam error sensor does not correspond -
screen.
to what was expected.
This error is declared while processing the raw data for a given

vial. This occurs only once for a given injection, so the error will
not be seen again for this injection.
It is important to collect the data associated with the vial analysis
and return it to Bio-Rad for investigation. The most complete
information is in the *.log file associated with the analysis (in the
The Data Analysis Module
\Dia\Log folder). The file is named after the vial raw data file
(E030) Data Analysis Error encountered an error while -
name. For example:
processing the raw data.
vial barcode: smpl123
rack position: 8
injection number: 38
injection date: 2003/02/20
raw data file: smpl123 8-38-20-2-2003.raw
8 - 13
log file: smpl123 8-38-20-2-2003.030220182008038.log

8 - 14

The cam flag signal did not
occur within 10 seconds
(E036) Cam flag time out error - ---
after the gradient was
launched.
(E037) HP Pump stopped due The safety pressure limit The high-pressure circuit is blocked. Determine the location of the
-
to too high pressure (2000psi) was reached. blockage by opening the high-pressure circuit at different spots.
The cartridge is not properly installed into the cartridge holder or
1. the cartridge holder is not properly installed in the cartridge
The average pressure was
module.
(E038) Error:Pressure too low below 130psi for 30 seconds
The dummy cartridge is installed instead of the analytical
during the run. 2.
cartridge.
3. The high-pressure circuit is open or has a leak. Check the circuit.
1. The cartridge should be replaced.
The average pressure was The high-pressure circuit is blocked. Determine the location of the
2.
Service Manual
(E039) Error:Pressure too high over 800psi for more than 6 blockage by opening the high-pressure circuit at different spots.
seconds during the run. Check the pressure sensor. Perform the procedure from Section
3.
7.5 Pressure Sensor Verification.
The adjustment of the LED Check the flat cable going from interface board to the detector
1.
source was impossible: the board.
maximum current intensity Check the connection of the reference sensor to the detector
2.
on the LED command circuit board.
(E040) Replace Light source !!! was reached, without a If all connections are OK, replace the detector module. (Section
correct light intensity. 3.
6.32)
4. Perform the procedure from Section 9.2.5 Flow Cell Cleaning.
The flat cable going to the
detector board is broken. 5. Perform the procedure from Section 7.2 Detector Adjustment.
L20015501
L20015501

Update Kit disk failure. - ---
The parameters
provided in the floppy In the LOT INFO screen, select the assay that matches the
1. 1.
disk are not for the parameter set.
selected assay.
Analysis : Update Failed Try to read the floppy disk on another computer. Copy the content
Damaged/unreadable
2. 2. to a temporary folder to be sure the floppy is readable. If the
floppy disk.
floppy is damaged, obtain a new one from Bio-Rad.
If the floppy is readable in another computer without any trouble,
3. Damaged floppy disk. 3. try the update again and listen carefully to the noise that the
floppy drive makes. Replace it if necessary. (Section 6.88)
The Data Analysis Module
was not able to obtain
calibration values from the
Service Manual
two calibrators processed.

- ---
This error is declared when
working on the second
calibrator data (after the two
vials were processed).
1. Data entry error. 1. Verify correct entry for calibrator values.
Wrong calibrator used

2. or vial barcoded 2. Verify correct calibrator is used and is correctly barcoded.
Analysis module: Calibration incorrectly.
failed Calibrators are placed
3. in the wrong rack 3. Check calibrator position in rack.
position.
Inadequate calibrator
4. 4. Verify that sample vials contain sufficient volume of calibrator.
volume.
Improper reconstitution
5. 5. Reconstitute new vials of calibrator.
of calibrators.
Air bubble in detector
6. 6. Flush system.
and/or pump system.
8 - 15
7. Dirty flow cell. 7. "Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path" on page 5-2 of the
Operation Manual.
8 - 16

Analysis : Memory allocation
Memory leakage.
error
Disk or file system
Analysis : File read error These are internal errors. They always reflect an abnormal
corruption.
Analysis : bad data source Disk or file system situation (disk corruption) or abnormally low resources (memory
error corruption. leakage). Internal errors should never occur, so it is very
Analysis : SafeArray error Memory leakage. important to report the problem.
The first thing is to collect the maximum information of the context
Analysis : DataBase access Disk or file system
of the error: was the instrument running, which tube was under
error corruption.
process, tube position in the rack, did the error occur by itself or is
Analysis : Multiple Initialisation
- it the result of a user action, what action, etc…
error
After that, try to properly shutdown and re-boot the instrument. If
Analysis : Unknown assay Disk or file system
the error persists, replace the hard disk (Section 6.30) and return
error corruption.
the original disk to Bio-Rad for investigation.
Analysis : Corrupted ini file Disk or file system
Service Manual
error corruption. Warning: never re-install over an existing faulty hard disk as
Analysis : Not Initialised error this will erase any hint of the actual problem. Return the
Analysis : Log Error faulty disk to Bio-Rad for investigation.
Disk or file system
Analysis : Write Init Failed
corruption.
Analysis : Not loaded
L20015501
8.4 Sensor Check

If a motion sensor (X, Z, TH, rack door, rack introduction, front door) does not give the
right status, determine if the problem is with the sensor itself, with the cable or on the
interface board.
Most sensors can be tested by connecting them to another (compatible) position,

which is known to be OK. If a sensor type is unique, it can only be replaced with a
working identical part for testing.
The following table lists sensor compatibility. All sensors with the same identification
can be connected alternately for testing.
Sensor Connector
Designation Connection board Identification
Type Number
Syringe home Syringe module
Optical switch CN2 A
sensor board
CN1
Analog Degasser module
Bubble detectors CN3 B
opto-sensors board
CN6
Reflective
Front cover sensor HPLC module board CN1 C
sensor
Reflective
Rack input sensor X board CN8 C
sensor
Reflective
Rack output sensor X board CN9 C
sensor
Cam flag sensor Optical switch HPLC module board CN9 D
Closed door sensor
Optical switch X board CN7 D
(rack door)
Open door sensor
Optical switch X board CN12 D
(rack door)
X home sensor Optical switch X board CN11 D
X position sensor Optical switch X board CN10 D
Z home sensor Optical switch Z board CN2 D
Z position sensor Optical switch Z board CN13 D
TH home sensor Optical switch Z board CN12 D
TH position sensor Optical switch Z board CN5 D
HP pump encoder HP encoder HPLC module board CN8 E
Optical
HP valve sensors HPLC module board CN7 F
switches
Tube height sensor Optical switch Z board CN8 G

8 - 18

8.5 Warning Messages
Check if the vacuum pump is running (listen to the noise)
1. when the test is launched. If not, replace the vacuum
A. Mechanical problem with the pump.
pump. (Section 6.77)
2. Check the vacuum pump efficiency (see 7.11).
On the internal waste bottle cap, disconnect the silicon
1. tubing that comes from the vacuum sensor. Remove the
LUER fitting from the tubing.
Connect the silicon tubing to the 50mL syringe (the syringe
2.
must be empty).
B. Defective vacuum sensor.
Go to the Service software. Select Syringe. Observe the
waste vacuum signal: slowly pull on the syringe piston
3. (~2cm) and check if the waste vacuum signal increases
Service Manual
significantly or not. If not, the sensor is defective and the

syringe module board must be replaced. (Section 6.51)
Manually pinch the tube that goes from the internal waste
The internal waste bottle and/or the 1.
C. bottle to the waste manifold 1.
Waste bottle check tubings are not correctly sealed.
2. Check the vacuum (see 7.11).
failed
Mechanical problem with a pinch Go to the Service software. Select Syringe. Test both
D. -
valve. pinch valves. Replace them if necessary. (Section 6.82)
On the syringe module, disconnect the silicon tubes
1. coming from the wash/dilution station (yellow and green
LUER fittings).
Remove the pinch valve tubings from the pinch valves (pull
2.
E. Defective pinch valve tubing. down to release).
With the fingers, close the yellow and the green plugs on
the syringe module and check the vacuum (see 7.11). If
3.
the check fails, there is a leak on one of the pinch valve
tubings. Replace the faulty part. (Section 6.81)
L20015501
Disconnect the silicon tubes from the wash/dilution station

1.
Air leak in the tubes from the (yellow and green LUER fittings).
F. dilution/wash station to the syringe With the fingers, close the yellow and the green tubes and
module. 2. check the vacuum (see 7.11). If the check fails, identify
which tube is leaking and replace the faulty part.
L20015501

Disconnect the silicon tubes from the wash/dilution station
Blockage in the tubes from the 1.
(yellow and green LUER fittings).
G. dilution/wash station to the syringe
Check the vacuum fall time (see 7.11). If the check fails,
Waste bottle check module. 2.
identify which tube is blocked and replace the faulty part.
failed (continued)
Check the vacuum fall time (see 7.11). If the check fails, it
H. Blockage in the dilution/wash station. - will indicate which line caused the failure. Clean the
corresponding well of the dilution/wash station.
Check the thermal fuse and the Peltier modules.
Disconnect them from the HPLC module board
(connectors CN10, CN11 and CN13). These three wires
are not identified and are fully interchangeable. Check the
impedance for each device:
Thermal fuse or Peltier module(s) • Peltier modules should have an impedance of ~1Ω
A. -
failure. for one polarity and a higher value (~10Ω) for the
Service Manual
reversed polarity
• the thermal fuse should have a nominal short
circuited value (0Ω) for both polarities
If one value is abnormal, replace the failed component.
(Sections 6.12 & 6.56)
Check the temperature sensor (Pt100 sensor). Disconnect
Temperature check
it from the HPLC module board (connector CN4). Check
failed

the impedance:
• between the white wire and the blue wire: the value
B. Temperature sensor failure. - should be between 100Ω (0°C) and 120Ω (~52°C)
• between the blue wire and the red wire: the value
should be 0Ω (short circuit)
If one value is abnormal, replace the temperature sensor.
(Section 6.55)
Check if the TC controller runs: check the TC Activity LED.
C. TC not responding. - If not OK, shutdown the system and re-boot. If the failure
persists, replace the interface board. (Section 6.15)
Check the +12VDC power supply (see Figure 3-45).
D. Temperature interface failure. 1. Typical values: from 11.6VDC to 12.4VDC. Replace power
8 - 19
supply #1 if necessary. (Section 6.24)

8 - 20

Check the voltage applied to the Peltier modules. Go to the
Service software. Select Thermal Control (3/7). Stop the
thermal regulation by clicking on the STOP THERMAL
REGULATION button. Then click on the SET PELTIER
100% PWM button to switch on the Peltier modules
2. continuously. Since all thermal devices (the two Peltier
modules and the thermal switch) are connected to the
HPLC module board, measure the voltage between
CN11/pin 1 and CN13/pin 2 (see Figure 3-12). At the end,
click on RESET PELTIER 0% PWM and START
THERMAL REGULATION.
Check the temperature gain and offsets parameters. Go to
the Service software. Select Thermal Control (4/7). The
typical ranges are:
• System Gain: 0.9 to 1.10
Service Manual
• System Offset: -4 to +4
• Sensor Offset: -2 to +2
Temperature check
failed (continued)
D. Temperature interface failure. • Gradient Offset: -2 to +2
Check the parameters:
3.
• the System Gain and System Offset are indicated on
the interface board
• the Sensor Offset is indicated on a sticker on the
temperature sensor wire
• the Gradient Offset is indicated on a sticker on the
cartridge module
If the values are out of range, perform the procedure from
Section 7.10 Thermal Module Calibration.
If the temperature sensor is in the nominal range
(impedance), check the temperature measurement
interface by examining the value displayed on the Thermal
Control (1/7). Check the Calculated temperature. If not
L20015501
4.
OK, perform the procedure from Section 7.10 Thermal
Module Calibration and check if the interface board is
responding. If not OK, replace the interface board.
(Section 6.15)
L20015501

This is only a warning, meaning that there is no tube to
No tube in the Worklist, process because the worklist is empty. A rack must be
- Empty worklist for the run. -
Please introduce a rack inserted or, if the tubes are not barcoded, the tube IDs
must be edited manually.
Warning message: check the liquid level in the reagent
Reagent Low warning Insufficient remaining injections to
- - bottles. Replace the bottles if necessary and/or the
injection count reached perform the run.
cartridge.
Service Manual

8 - 21
Service Manual L20015501

9 MAINTENANCE
This section contains the minimum requirements for performing annual Preventive
Maintenance on the D-10. Any additional maintenance items can be performed based
on regional requirements. Refer to the D-10 Operation Manual for daily, monthly and
periodic maintenance procedures.
Preventive Maintenance must be performed ONLY by properly trained Service

personnel.
9.1 Tools/Materials
Tools Part Number

front cover sensor simulator 2200415
front cover switch simulator 2200416
PLCC EPROM extractor 2200420
dummy PEEK cartridge holder 2200435
cartridge module temperature control tool 2200438
mini-screwdriver 2200412
lubricant oil 2200406
flow cell cleaning kit 1957263
Required Parts Part Number

sample probe 2200247*
pinch valve tubing 2200255*
DuoFlow F-10 piston seals 2200377*
RheBuild Kit for HP valve 2702170*
* all these parts are included in the preventive maintenance kit (P/N: 2200320)
Additional Parts as Needed Part Number

Teflon internal tubing 2200315
PEEK tubing 2200316
silicon internal tubing 2200317
internal waste bottle filter assembly 2200449
sample arm flex cable (12-pin) 2200244
sample arm flex cable (8-pin) 2200245
external waste tubing 2200321
liquid pump 2200251
DuoFlow F-10 pistons kit 2200378

Additional Materials as Needed Part Number

bleach (5% to 10% hypochlorite) N/A
deionized water in a squirt bottle N/A
labeled floppy disk N/A
9.2 Maintenance Procedures

9.2.1 Safety
1. The sample probe must be removed before performing any maintenance on the
D-10.
2. The external power cord must be removed when the D-10 is switched off and
the bypass tools are in place.
9.2.2 Preparation
1. Clean and decontaminate the sample fluid path. Follow the steps in
"Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path" on page 5-2 of the Operation
Manual.
2. Remove the front cover assembly. (Section 6.2)
3. Install the front cover sensor simulator (P/N: 2200415) and front cover switch
simulator (P/N: 2200416). Refer to Section 3.3.13 for details.
The system is fully functional with these bypass tools in place. Use extreme
caution when working with the instrument in this state.
4. Switch on the D-10.

5. If a sample rack is present, remove it using the D-10 User software.
6. Remove the sample probe.
Use extreme caution when removing the sample probe as it is very sharp and a
potential biohazard.
7. Select Exit to Service software in the MAINTAIN screen. Enter the appropriate
password.
8. Check the current firmware and software versions in the VERSIONS (1/1) screen.
Update the software and/or firmware if needed (see 7.20.2).

9.2.3 Dilution/Wash Station
1. Select SAMPLE ARM from the main (2/2) screen. Select the DILUT./WASH
STAT. REPLA. button to move the arm for easy access to the dilution/wash
station.
2. Press the lever on the left side of the dilution/wash station. Slowly lift it and
disconnect the 2 LUER fittings. Remove the dilution/wash station completely.
3. Clean the dilution/wash station with bleach and rinse thoroughly with deionized
water. Verify that the drain holes are cleared of debris.
4. Check the tubing (S4 and S5) from the dilution/wash station to the pinch valves
on the syringe module. Open and/or remove the side doors if needed. Replace
the tubing if damaged (P/N: 2200317).
5. Install the dilution/wash station. Connect the color-coded LUER fittings before
pushing the dilution/wash station completely into place. A click from the lever will
be heard when it is secured properly. Try to lift the dilution/wash station again, in
order to make sure that it is secured properly.
6. Check evacuation of the drain lines. Select SYRINGE from the main (1/2)
screen.
7. Select START DILUTION VALVE and START WASH VALVE from the SYRINGE
(1/6) screen.
8. Using a squirt bottle filled with deionized water, fill the dilution well and wash well
with about 1mL of water each.
9. Select START LIQUID PUMP.
10. Open the dilution valve by selecting STOP DILUTION VALVE and verify that the
water is evacuated properly. Close the dilution valve again by selecting START
DILUTION VALVE.
11. Open the wash valve by selecting STOP WASH VALVE and verify that the
water is evacuated properly.
12. Open the dilution valve by selecting STOP DILUTION VALVE.
13. Select STOP LIQUID PUMP.
9.2.4 Tube Holder Cleaning
The tube holder is biohazardous. Use disposable gloves and extreme caution
when handling.
1. Select SAMPLE ARM from the main (2/2) screen. Select the X MOVE button.
2. On the X MOVE (1/4) screen (see Figure 9-1):
select To tube
set the tube number to 3

Figure 9-1:
3. Select START to begin movement.

4. Go to the TH MOVE (2/4) screen (see Figure 9-2):
set Direction to from up to down
set Movement select to 60 strips
Figure 9-2:

6. Using a Q-tip impregnated with bleach, clean the tube holder hole and cone.
7. Go to the SAMPLE ARM MODULE screen (see Figure 9-3):
Figure 9-3:
D-10 Sample arm module
8. Select SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION.

9.2.5 Vertical Lead Screw Lubrication (Z and TH movements)
1. Select SAMPLE ARM from the main (2/2) screen. Select the Z MOVE button.
2. On the Z MOVE (1/4) screen (see Figure 9-4):
select To sample aspiration position (tube)
set Test selection to A1c
set Tube position to 2
Figure 9-4:
3. Select START to move the arm to its final position for lubrication.
4. Place an absorbent towel under the bottom of the lead screws to collect excess
oil.
5. Place a drop of lubricant oil in the upper part of the nut for both the Z and TH
movements.
6. Select Home movement and START to begin the movement (see Figure 9-4).
7. Go to the Z MOVE (2/4) screen (see Figure 9-5):
select Direction to from up to down
Figure 9-5:

9. When movement has stopped, change the Direction to from down to up and
select START again.
10. Repeat the same movements 9 more times for a total of 10 ups and 10 downs.
Close the screen after the last up movement.

11. Select the TH MOVE button.

12. On the TH MOVE (1/4) screen, select Home movement and select START to
begin the movement.
13. Go to the TH MOVE (2/4) screen:
select Direction to from up to down
select START to begin movement
14. When movement has stopped, change the Direction to from down to up and
select START again.
15. Repeat the same movements 9 more times for a total of 10 ups and 10 downs.
Close the screen after the last up movement.
16. Wipe the lower part of the lead screws with the absorbent towel to remove any
excess oil. Dispose of the towel.
17. Select SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION from the SAMPLE ARM MODULE screen
(see Figure 9-3).
Sections 9.2.6 through 9.2.13 require the system to be shut down, turned off and
the external power cord removed.
9.2.6 Flow Cell Cleaning
2. Make a dilution of the flow cell cleaning solution using one part cleaning solution
to two parts deionized water. Total volume should be at least 10mL.
3. Remove the tubing at the detector in the following order to avoid twisting the
backpressure tube:
disconnect the detector outlet tubing (orange PEEK) from the union
remove the union from the backpressure tube and connect it to the
detector outlet PEEK tube
connect the Teflon tube from the flow cell cleaning kit (P/N: 1957263) to
the other end of the union using the appropriate nut and ferrule
place the open end of the Teflon tube into the cleaning solution
4. Open the cartridge module and remove the cartridge holder with the analytical
cartridge. Remove the cartridge and cap the ends.
5. Install the dummy PEEK cartridge holder (P/N: 2200435). Place an absorbent
towel under the outlet to catch any liquid.
6. Remove the rubber plug from the cartridge module door and close the door.
7. Connect the 10mL syringe of the flow cell cleaning kit to the LUER connector at
the outlet of the dummy PEEK cartridge holder.
8. Gently pull back on the syringe plunger until 1mL of cleaning solution has been
aspirated. Soak for 10 minutes.
9. Repeat step 8.
10. Remove the Teflon tube from the cleaning solution and place it into a container
of deionized water.

11. Gently pull back on the syringe plunger until 2mL of deionized water has been
aspirated. Disconnect the syringe and empty it.
12. Reconnect the syringe to the dummy PEEK cartridge holder and pull an
additional 6mL, 2mL at a time. Remove the syringe.
13. Remove the union at the outlet of the detector.
14. Remove the union from the Teflon tube, connect it to the backpressure tube and
to the outlet of the detector.
15. Remove the dummy PEEK cartridge holder.
16. Wash the internal surface of the cartridge module, near the outlet to the flow cell,
with deionized water. Replace the analytical cartridge.
17. Replace the rubber plug in the cartridge module door and close the door.
18. After the system has been powered up, flush the fluid line with the HP pump
(see 9.3.1).
9.2.7 Inspection and Cleaning
9.2.7.1 HPLC Module
1. Verify that the system is switched off and the external power cord is removed.
2. Inspect all internal tubing for signs of leakage. Tighten or replace fittings and
tubing as needed.
3. Clean the bottom of the HPLC module. A small leak behind the pump head, at
the piston flush circuit, is not unusual.
4. Clean all other internal and external surfaces.
9.2.7.2 Cartridge Module
2. Place an absorbent towel under the cartridge module.
3. Open the cartridge module. Check the movement of the cartridge module door
as it is opened.
4. Remove the cartridge holder.
5. Clean the internal surface of the cartridge module.
6. Re-install the cartridge holder, checking the installation.
7. Close the cartridge module and dispose of the towel.
9.2.7.3 Syringe Module
The internal waste bottle is biohazardous. Use disposable gloves and extreme
caution when handling.
2. Inspect all internal tubing for signs of leakage. Tighten or replace fittings and
tubing as needed.

3. Clean the bottom of the syringe module.

4. Clean the internal waste bottle. Follow the steps in "Clean Internal Waste Bottle"
on page 5-2 of the Operation Manual.
5. Verify that there are no rubber particles in the bottle.
6. Clean and inspect the internal waste bottle filter. Replace if damaged or clogged
(P/N: 2200449). If the internal waste bottle was not equipped with a filter,
remove the silicon tubing attached to the waste bottle cap and install an internal
waste bottle filter assembly (P/N: 2200449).
9.2.7.4 Wiring
2. Check the connection of the flex cables to the Z board (see Figure 9-6).
Figure 9-6:
Flex Cables on Z Board
3. Inspect the flex cables at the X board (see Figure 9-7).
Figure 9-7:
Flex Cables on X Board
4. Check the tube height sensor flex cable and its connection to the Z board.
9.2.7.5 Barcode Reader
2. Clean the barcode reader window using a soft cloth dampened with deionized
water.

9.2.7.6 External Waste Tubing
2. Check the external waste tubing. Replace if needed (P/N: 2200321).
9.2.7.7 Rear Panel Fan
2. Remove the external grid and clean it.
3. Clean the dust off the blades of the fan.
4. Check the free rotation of the motor.
5. Replace the external grid.
9.2.7.8 Sample Rack Track
2. Clean the external surface of the rack track.
3. Clean the dust off the external surface of the rack reflective sensors.
4. Check the position of the rubber disk mounted on the rack positioning motor
assembly.
9.2.8 Liquid Pump Inspection and Cleaning
If the internal waste bottle is equipped with a filter, the liquid pump cleaning is not
necessary.
The liquid pump is biohazardous. Use disposable gloves and extreme caution
when handling.
2. Loosen – but don't remove – the 4 screws which secure the pump head (see
Figure 9-8).
Figure 9-8:
Liquid Pump

3. The pump head consists of two green plastic parts; remove only the upper part
(see Figure 9-9).
Figure 9-9:
Liquid Pump Components
4. Clean the upper part, making sure there are no rubber particles trapped in the
nozzles.
5. Remove the two black rubber parts (see Figure 9-9) from the pump, being
careful not to tear them. Clean the pump head. DO NOT remove the green
plastic part from the pump body.
Liquid pump replacement may be performed in case the liquid pump is damaged.
(Section 6.77)
6. Re-install the two black rubber parts and re-assemble the pump. When re-
installing the two green plastic parts, be careful to respect the alignment of the
two lines etched on one side of the pump head (see Figure 9-10).
Figure 9-10:
Correct Pump Head Orientation
9.2.9 Pinch Valve Tubing Replacement
2. Disconnect the ends of each pinch valve tube from the LUER fitting and the
stainless steel tube on the waste manifold 1 (see Figure 9-11).

Figure 9-11:
Pinch Valve Tubing Connections
3. Remove the two pinch valve tubes (pull down to release).

4. Connect the new tubing at the waste manifold 1 and LUER fitting. Make sure
that the tubing is NOT TWISTED and that it is centered on the pinch valve.
5. Perform an internal waste bottle check after the system is powered up (see
9.3.1).
9.2.10 Firmware Verification
1. Verify that the latest firmware is on the MC controller, the HPPC controller and
the TC controller (see Figure 3-42).
9.2.11 7-Port, 3-Position HP Valve
1. Replace the rotor seal and stator face. (Section 6.42)
9.2.12 HPLC Pump
1. Replace the piston seals. (Section 6.40)

2. Clean and inspect the pistons. Replace if scratched. (Section 6.39)
9.2.13 Sample Probe Replacement
The sample probe is very sharp and a potential biohazard. Use extreme caution
when handling.
1. Dispose of the old sample probe according to local requirements for the disposal
of sharps.
2. Install the new probe and connect the sample tubing.

9.3 Checks and Adjustment Procedures

Replace the external power cord and turn on the D-10.
9.3.1 Detector Flush and Internal Waste Bottle Check
1. Select MAINTAIN from the D-10 User software.

2. Set the Flowrate to 1.5ml/min and select Start Pump. Let the pump run for 6
minutes.
3. Select Stop Pump.
4. Select Service.
5. Select Check Waste bottle. Verify that the check passed.
9.3.2 7-Port, 3-Position HP Valve Check
1. Select HP: PUMP + VALVE from the main (2/2) screen.

2. Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (4/17) screen.
3. Select HOME MVT (RESET) to initialize the valve. The sensor status should be
load.
4. Select TO INJECT POSITION to move the valve to Inject position. The sensor
status should be inject.
5. Select TO LOAD POSITION to move the valve to Load position. The sensor
status should be load.
6. Select TO PRIME POSITION to move to Prime position. The sensor status
should be prime.
7. Select TO LOAD POSITION to move the valve to Load position. The sensor
status should be load.
9.3.3 Sample Rack Track Check
1. Select RACK INTRO. from the main (1/2) screen.

2. Select LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION. Place an empty sample rack in
position and verify that the rack is introduced smoothly.
3. Select LAUNCH RACK EJECTION. Verify that the rack is ejected smoothly.
9.3.4 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check
1. Perform the Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check procedure from

Section 7.11.
9.3.5 Detector Adjustment
1. Perform the Detector Adjustment procedure from Section 7.2.

9.3.6 Temperature Check
1. Perform the Thermal Module Check procedure from Section 7.9.
9.4 Post Maintenance

2. Remove the front cover sensor simulator and front cover switch simulator and
replace the front cover assembly.
3. Replace the external power cord and turn on the D-10.
9.5 Performance Verification
1. Set up a sample run using controls.

2. Check the pressure stability during the warm-up gradient.
3. Review the chromatography and verify that it meets all criteria listed in the
Operation Manual for the kit used.
9.6 'instrument.ini' File Backup
1. Perform the 'instrument.ini' File Backup procedure from Section 7.19.
9.7 Maintenance Report

1. Complete the D-10 Maintenance Report. Leave a copy at the customer site.


D-10 Maintenance Report
Date: Site: City:
State: Country: S/N: Assays:
Software Version: Service Software Version: Firmware Version: Injection Count:
Required as part of PM ~ As Needed
Component Clean/Check Replace Lubricate
Interior/Exterior /
Dilution/Wash Station S4 and S5 Tubing / ~
Drain Evacuation /
Tube Holder /
Sample Arm
Sample Probe
Z Movement /
Vertical Lead Screws
TH Movement /
Flow Cell/Flush /
Detector
Adjustment /
HPLC Module Interior/Exterior /
Cartridge Module Internal Surface /
Tubing / ~
Exterior /
Syringe Module
Internal Waste Bottle /
Internal Waste Bottle Filter / ~
Flex Cables on Sample Arm / ~
Wiring
Flex Cables at X Board / ~
Barcode Reader Window /
External Waste Bottle Tubing / ~
Grid /
Rear Panel Fan Blades /
Rotation /
Track /
Sample Rack Track Rack Introduction /
Rack Ejection /
Liquid Pump Interior / ~
Pinch Valve Tubing
Interface Board EPROMS /
Rotor/Stator
7-Port, 3-Position HP Valve
Positioning /
Piston Seals
HPLC Pump
Pistons / ~
Thermal Module Temperature Adjustment /
Performance Pre PM Post PM Verification

Pump Pressure/Fluctuation _____ / _____ _____ / _____
Pump Purge and Leak Check
Retention Times: A1c/Ao _____ / _____ _____ / _____
Calibrator Slope/Intercept _____ / _____ _____ / _____
Baseline Quality ____________ ____________
Comments
10 SPARE PARTS
Bio-Rad
Part Description Picture Comments
P/N
LCD display
(with touch screen)
2200221
(U.S.) BaaN Description:

D10 LCD DISPLAY/TOUCH SCREEN
Reagent tray
2200222

D10 REAGENT TRAY
Hard disk
2200223 capacity: 40GB

D10 HARD DISK
Floppy drive
designed for 3.5" floppy disks, with a

2200224
memory capacity of 1.44MB

D10 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE, 1.44MB
Thermal printer
2200225 Kyosha Kyoline XT model C029-W6

D10 THERMAL PRINTER ASSEMBLY

Bio-Rad
P/N
Upper front door
complete assembly
2200226
(with hinges)

D10 DOOR W/HINGES: FRONT, TOP
Lower front door
complete assembly
2200227
(with hinges)

D10 DOOR W/HINGES: FRONT, BOT.
Gas spring
2200228 screws, flat washers and pin included

D10 SPRING, GAS FRONT TOP DOOR
Front cover solenoid/sensor
2200229 complete with the cable

D10 SOLENOID + SENSOR FRONT DR
Arm
(w/ barcode reader)
2200231

D10 ARM (W/BAR-CODE READER)

Bio-Rad
P/N
X gear belt
2200232

D10 DRIVE BELT: X MOVEMENT
Z gear belt
2200233

D10 DRIVE BELT: NEEDLE Z
TH gear belt
2200234

D10 DRIVE BELT: TUBE HOLDER
Hall effect adapter sensor
2200235

D10 SENSOR & CABLE:HALL EFFECT
Z home sensor
2200236

D10 Z HOME SENSOR

Bio-Rad
P/N
TH position sensor
2200237

D10 TH POSITION SENSOR
Tube height sensor
2200238 with flex cable and adhesive tape

D10 TH TUBE HEIGHT SENSOR
TH home sensor
2200239

D10 TH HOME SENSOR
X position sensor
2200240

D10 X POSITION SENSOR
X home sensor
2200241

D10 X HOME SENSOR

Bio-Rad
P/N
Z board
No. DAE001
Rev 3
2200242
compatible with all previous revisions
D10 PCB Z MOVEMENT DAE001 R3
X board
No. DAE002
Rev 3
2200243
D10 PCB X MOVEMENT DAE002 R2
Sample arm flex cable

(12-pin)
2200244

D10 CABLE,FLEX:SAMP ARM 12PIN
Sample arm flex cable

(8-pin)
2200245

D10 CABLE,FLEX:SAMP ARM 8PIN
Barcode reader
2200246 Opticon model NFT07175L

D10 BAR-CODE READER

Bio-Rad
P/N
Sample probe
'German 2' probe

2200247
already used on Variant II

D10 PROBE, 122MM L
Syringe module
2200248

D10 SYRINGE MODULE
Pinch valve
2200249

D10 VALVE: PINCH SIRAI S2
1mL motorized syringe
2200250

D10 PUMP SYRINGE 1ML
Liquid pump
2200251

D10 PUMP: LIQUID WASTE

Bio-Rad
P/N
Syringe module board

No. DAE004
Rev 2
2200252
D10 PCB: SYR MODULE DAE004 R2
(Syringe) 3-way valve
2200253

D10 VALVE,3-WAY:SYRINGE MODULE
Internal waste bottle
complete with LUER fittings

2200254
capacity: 50mL
D10 TANK,WASTE INTERNAL 50ML
Pinch valve tubing
2200255

D10 TUBING: PINCH VALVE, 2/PK
HPLC module
2200256 complete drawer + specifications sheet

D10 HPLC MODULE

Bio-Rad
P/N
7-port, 3-position HP valve + 23µL

sample loop
2200257

D10 VALVE, RHEODYNE 7 PORT
Proportioning valve
2200258

D10 VALVE, PROPORTIONING, PARKER
Pressure sensor
2200259

D10 HIGH PRESSURE SENSOR
HPLC module board

No. DAE003
Rev 5
2200260
D10 PCB:HP MODULE, DAE003 R3
Detector module
2200261

D10 DETECTOR MODULE

Bio-Rad
P/N
LED board
2200262

D10 PCB: DETECTOR LED
Reference board
2200263

D10 PCB: DETECTOR REFERENCE
Sample board
2200264

D10 PCB: DETECTOR ABSORPTION
Detector board
No. DAE011
Rev 4
2200265
D10 PCB: DETECTOR DAE011 R1
Flow cell
2200266 complete with fittings (not crimped)

D10 FLOW CELL: DETECTOR

Bio-Rad
P/N
Cartridge module
complete with hexagonal fitting

2200267
(not crimped)

D10 MODULE: CARTRIDGE HEATER
Temperature sensor
2200268

D10 TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Peltier module
2200269

D10 HEATER, PELTIER, 2/PK
Thermal fuse
2200270

D10 THERMAL FUSE
Cartridge holder
2200271

D10 CARTRIDGE HOLDER

Bio-Rad
P/N
HPLC pump assembly
2200272

D10 HPLC PUMP ASSEMBLY
23µL sample loop
not compatible
2200273
with Variant II injection loop

D10 23UL SAMPLE LOOP BIO-RAD
Electronic module
including the power supply 1,

2200274 power supply 2, motherboard,
LCD internal board and interface board
D10 MODULE, ELECTRONICS
Power supply 1
delivered voltages:
+5VDC
2200275 +12VDC
+26VDC
(U.S.) BaaN Description: (-12VDC)
D10 POWER SUPPLY, 5 VOLT
Power supply 2
delivered voltage:
2200276
+24VDC
D10 POWER SUPPLY, 24 VOLT

Bio-Rad
P/N
Processor fan (K6)
2200277

D10 PROCESSOR FAN (K6)
Motherboard (PCM-5896)
2200278

D10 MOTHERBOARD PCM-5896
Processor (K6-2E 350MHz)
2200279

D10 PROCESSOR (K6-2E-350MHZ)
Memory DIMM (64MB)
2200280

D10 MEMORY DIMM 64MB
Interface board
No. DAE010
Rev 6
2200281
D10 PCB: INTERFACE DAE010 R3

Bio-Rad
P/N
LCD internal board

No. DAE012
Rev 2
2200282
D10 PCB:LCD INTERNAL DAE012 R1
Rack drive module
2200283

D10 MODULE: RACK SUPPORT
Rubber disk
2200284 with mounting screw

D10 WHEEL,RUBBER: RACK DRIVE
Rack positioning motor assembly
2200285

D10 MOTOR W/WHEEL: RACK DRIVE
Rack input sensor
2200286

D10 RACK INPUT SENSOR

Bio-Rad
P/N
Rack output sensor
2200287

D10 RACK OUTPUT SENSOR
Dilution/wash station
2200288

D10 DILUTION/WASH STATION
Degasser module
2200289

D10 DEGASSER MODULE
Degasser module board

No. DAE005
Rev 3
2200290
D10 DEGASSER BOARD DAE005 R2
Bubble detector 1
2200291 not interchangeable with #2 and #3

D10 BUBBLE DETECTOR 1

Bio-Rad
P/N
Bubble detector 2

Bubble detector 3

Vacuum pump
2200294

D10 VACUUM PUMP NMP830KND
Degasser buffer tubing
2200295

D10 TUBING,BUFFER:DEGAS 2/PK
Degasser wash tubing
2200296

D10 TUBING, WASH: DEGASSER

Bio-Rad
P/N
Microvial adapters
2200297

D10 MICROVIAL ADAPTORS, 10/PK
Front cover
2200298 with 'Bio-Rad' and 'D-10' logos

D10 COVER: FRONT
Left door
2200299 complete assembly

D10 DOOR W/HINGES: LEFT
Right door
2200300 complete assembly

D10 DOOR W/HINGES: RIGHT
Printer plastic holder
2200301

D10 PRINTER SUPPORT

Bio-Rad
P/N
Sysmex rack
2200302

D10 RACK, SYSMEX
Sysmex adapters 12
2200303

D10 TUBE ADAPTERS, 12MM, 10/PK
Sysmex adapters 13
2200304

D10 TUBE ADAPTOR, 13MM, 10/PK
Sysmex adapters 14
2200305

D10 TUBE ADAPTER, 14MM, 10/PK
Main fan
2200306

D10 FAN: MAIN

Bio-Rad
P/N
Rack door module
2200307

D10 MODULE: RACK DOOR
Open door sensor
2200308

D10 SENSOR: RACK DOOR OPEN
Closed door sensor
2200309

D10 SENSOR: RACK DOOR CLOSED
Z position sensor
2200310

D10 SENSOR: Z POSITION
Rack door solenoid
2200311

D10 SOLENOID: RACK DOOR

Bio-Rad
P/N
LCD interface board

No. DAE013
Rev 3
2200312
D10 PCB: LCD I/F DAE013 R2
D-10 shipping crate
complete with D-10 box, 4 plastic

2200313 latches, top & bottom packing foams and
a pallet
D10 SHIPPING CRATE
External tubing
contents:
T1: 1/8" x 1/16" x 700mm + T2: 1/8" x
1/16" x 700mm + T5: 1/8" x 1/16" x
2200314
700mm + 3 bottle caps + 3x T15: 1/8" x
1/16" x 207mm + S13: 6mm x 3mm x
(U.S.) BaaN Description: 2500mm
D10 TUBING,BUFFER:EXTERNAL,SET
contents:
T3: 1/8" x 1/16" x 570mm + T4: 1/8" x
Teflon internal tubing 1/16" x 650mm + T6: 1/8" x 1/16" x
530mm
+ T7: 1/16" x 0.75mm x 115mm + T9:
2200315 1/16" x 0.75mm x 1250mm + T10: 1/16"
x 0.75mm x 210mm + T11: 1/16" x
0.75mm x 530mm + T12: 1/16" x
0.75mm x 150mm + T13: 1/16" x
D10 TUBING TEFLON INTERNAL,SET
0.75mm x 110mm + T14: 1/16" x
0.25mm x 1200mm
PEEK tubing
contents:
2200316 P1: 1/16" x 0.5mm x 170mm + P2: 1/16"
x 0.5mm x 120mm

D10 TUBING, PEEK, SET

Bio-Rad
P/N
contents:
S4: 6mm x 3mm x 550mm + S5: 6mm x
Silicon internal tubing
3mm x 550mm + S8: 6mm x 3mm x
140mm + S9: 6mm x 3mm x 270mm +
S10: 6mm x 3mm x 160mm + S12: 6mm
2200317
x 3mm x 330mm + S14: 6mm x 3mm x
30mm + S15: 6mm x 3mm x 120mm +
(U.S.) BaaN Description: S16: 6mm x 3mm x 35mm + S17: 6mm x
D10 TUBING, SILICON, SET 3mm x 60mm + S18: 6mm x 3mm x
390mm
Service manual
2200318

D10 SERVICE MANUAL
Preventive maintenance kit

contents:
sample probe + HP pump piston seals +
2200320
RheBuild Kit for HP valve + pinch valve
tubing
D10 PREVENTIVE MAINT KIT
External waste tubing
2200321 S13: 6mm x 3mm x 2500mm

D10 EXTERNAL WASTE TUBING
Waste bottle
complete with connector

2200322
capacity: 10L
D10 TANK, WASTE:EXTERNAL,10L

Bio-Rad
P/N
Complete screw kit
2200323

D10 COMPLETE SCREW KIT
LCD contrast potentiometer
2200324

D10 LCD CONTRAST POTENTIOMETER
Waste manifold 1
(large)
2200325

D10 MANIFOLD, WASTE, LARGE
Waste manifold 2
(small)
2200326

D10 MANIFOLD, WASTE, SMALL
LUER fittings for internal waste bottle
with seals
2200327
for the old internal waste bottle cap only
D10 FITTING,LUER:INT WASTE SET

Bio-Rad
P/N
Color-coded LUER fittings
2200328 male and female

D10 FITTINGS,LUER,COLORED, SET
Degasser vacuum tubing

contents:
S1: 4mm x 2.5mm x 250mm + 6mm x
3mm x 20mm (on each side) + S2: 4mm
2200329
x 2.5mm x 160mm + 6mm x 3mm x
20mm (on each side) + S3: 6mm x 3mm
(U.S.) BaaN Description: x 220mm
D10 TUBING,VACUUM: DEGASSER
Backpressure tubing
2200330 T14: 1/16" x 0.25mm x 1200mm

D10 TUBING, BACK PRESSURE
Connector for backpressure tubing
2200331

D10 CONNECTOR:BK PRESS.TUBING
Column heater coil
ready to use: cut to length, mounted on

2200332
its support and equipped with fittings

D10 TUBING,COIL:COLUMN HEATER

Bio-Rad
P/N
DuoFlow F-10 pump maintenance kit
2200333

D10 MAINTENANCE KIT,HPLC PUMP
Liquid pump supply cable
2200335

D10 CABLE,POWER:LIQUID PUMP
Pinch valve 1 supply cable
2200336

D10 CABLE,POWER:PINCH VALVE 1
Pinch valve 2 supply cable
2200337

D10 CABLE,POWER:PINCH VALVE 2
Vacuum pump supply cable
2200339

D10 CABLE,POWER:VACUUM PUMP

Bio-Rad
P/N
Flat cable: interface board > detector

board
2200340

D10 CABLE:I/F PCB>DETECTOR PCB
Flat cable: interface board > X board
2200341

D10 CABLE:I/F PCB>X MOVEMT PCB
Flat cable: interface board > HPLC module

board (24-pin)
2200342

D10 CABLE:I/F PCB>HP PCB 24PIN
Flat cable: interface board > HPLC module

board (34-pin)
2200343

D10 CABLE:I/F PCB>HP PCB 34PIN
Flat cable: interface board > syringe

module board
2200344

D10 CABLE:I/F PCB>SYRINGE PCB

Bio-Rad
P/N
Cable: power block > switch
2200345

D10 CABLE, PWR: P.E.M. SWITCH
Cable: switch > power boards
2200346

D10 CABLE,POWER:SWITCH>SUPPLY
Supply cable: power boards > interface

board
2200347

D10 CABLE,POWER:SUPPLY>I/F PCB
Supply cable: interface board >

motherboard
2200348

D10 CABLE,POWER:I/F PCB>MOBO
Hard disk supply cable
2200349

D10 CABLE,POWER:HARD DISK

Bio-Rad
P/N
Floppy drive supply cable
2200350

D10 CABLE,POWER:FLOPPY DRIVE
Flat cable: LCD internal board > LCD

interface board
2200351

D10 CABLE:LCD I/B PCB>INT PCB
Flat cable: motherboard > floppy drive
2200352

D10 CABLE:MOBO>FLOPPY DRIVE
Link cable: motherboard > LAN connector
2200353

D10 CABLE:MOBO>EXTERNAL LAN
Link cable: motherboard > VGA connector
2200354

D10 CABLE:MOBO>EXTERNAL VGA

Bio-Rad
P/N
Link cable: motherboard > mouse &

keyboard connectors
2200355

D10 CABLE:MOBO>KBD+MOUSE
Link cable: interface board > rack feeder

port
2200356

D10 CABLE:I/F PCB>EXT RACK MOD
Link cable: motherboard > RS connectors
2200357

D10 CABLE:I/F PCB>EXT RS232
Thermal printer supply cable
2200358

D10 CABLE,POWER:THERMAL HEATER
Flat cable: interface board > degasser

module board
2200359

D10 CABLE:I/F PCB>DEGASSER PCB

Bio-Rad
P/N
Ground cable (power block)
2200360

D10 WIRE,GROUND:P.E.M.
Ground cable (HPLC module)
2200361

D10 WIRE,GROUND:HP MODULE PCB
Ground cable (cartridge module)
2200362

D10 WIRE,GROUND:CART. MODULE
Link cable: HPLC module board > front

cover solenoid
2200363

D10 CABLE:HP PCB>RACK DOOR SOL
+24VDC security cable
2200364

D10 CABLE:+24VDC SECURITY

Bio-Rad
P/N
CD-ROM supply cable
2200365

D10 CABLE,POWER:CD-ROM DRIVE
Link cable: Z board > Hall effect adapter

sensor
2200366

D10 CABLE:Z MVT PCB>HALL SENSR
Flange nut
2200367

D10 FLANGE NUT
Lead screw
2200368 used on the Z and TH movements

D10 LEAD SCREW
Lead screw bearing
2200369

D10 LEAD SCREW BEARING

Bio-Rad
P/N
Slide bearing
2200370 standard, without play

D10 SLIDE BEARING
Floating slide bearing
2200371 marked 'LL', with play

D10 FLOATING SLIDE BEARING
Belt pulley
(16-tooth)
driving pulley
of the X movement
2200372
with mounting screw
D10 BELT PULLEY (16 TEETH)
Belt pulley
(15-tooth)
driving pulley
of the Z and TH movements
2200373
with mounting screw
Belt pulley
(30-tooth)
led pulley
of the Z and TH movements
2200374
with mounting screw

Bio-Rad
P/N
Printer paper
2200375 112mm (W) x 42mm (D) x 20m (L)

D10 PRINTER PAPER, 10/BX
CCFL backlight
2200376

D10 BACKLIGHT,CCFL:LCD
DuoFlow F-10 piston seals
2200377

D10 PISTON SEALS, DUOFLOW, 2/PK
DuoFlow F-10 pistons kit
2200378

D10 PISTONS:DUOFLOW, 2/PK
DuoFlow check valves kit
2200379

D10 DUOFLOW CHECK VALVE

Bio-Rad
P/N
Barcode labels sheet
2200380 2x A5 sheets

D10 BAR CODE LABELS, SET
DuoFlow motor assembly
2200381

D10 MOTOR ASSY: HP PUMP
DuoFlow pump head

(center block)
2200382

D10 PUMP HEAD: HP PUMP, CENTER
DuoFlow inlet end cap
2200383

D10 END BLOCK: HP PUMP INLET
DuoFlow outlet end cap
2200384

D10 END BLOCK: HP PUMP OUTLET

Bio-Rad
P/N
DuoFlow piston flush port 'O' rings
2200385

D10 O-RING: HP PUMP FLUSH PORT
DuoFlow ball seat
2200386

D10 BALL SEAL: HP PUMP
DuoFlow sapphire ball
2200387

D10 SAPPHIRE BALL: HP PUMP
DuoFlow priming valve seat

installation tool
2200388

D10 TOOL: PRIMING PORT SLEEVE
DuoFlow priming port
2200389

D10 PRIMING PORT: HP PUMP

Bio-Rad
P/N
DuoFlow priming port sleeve
2200390

D10 SLEEVE: HP PUMP PRIME PORT
DuoFlow head screws kit
2200391

---
DuoFlow cam sensor
2200392

D10 CAM SENSOR:HP PUMP
DuoFlow cam encoder wheel
2200393

D10 ENCODER WHEEL:HP PUMP
DuoFlow pump outlet short screws
2200394

D10 SHORT SCREW:HP PUMP OUTLET

Bio-Rad
P/N
DuoFlow pump head long screws
2200395

D10 LONG SCREW:HP PUMP HEAD
Flat cable: motherboard > hard disk
2200396

D10 CABLE: MOBO>HARD DISK
Fittings for HP valve
contains 1 yellow, 1 red, 1 blue and 1

2200397
green fitting

D10 FITTINGS: 7 PORT VALVE,SET
Waste container box
2200398

D10 BOX, WASTE
Accessories box
2200399

D10 BOX ACCESSORIES

Bio-Rad
P/N
Accessories kit
2200400

D10 ACCESSORIES KIT
50mL syringe
2200401

D10 SYRINGE, 50ML
CD-ROM flat cable extension
2200402

D10 TOOL: CDROM EXT CABLE
Fuses
2200403

D10 FUSES, 2/PK
External power cord

(US)
2200404

D10 POWER CORD, 110V

Bio-Rad
P/N
External power cord

(Europe)
2200405

D10 POWER CORD, 220V
Lubricant oil
2200406 Loctite 8000 LM200 Mineral Oil

D10 LUBRICANT OIL
Cyanoacrylate glue
2200407 Loctite 460 glue

D10 CYANOACRYLATE GLUE
Anaerobic glue
2200408 Loctite 603 Oil Tolerant glue

D10 ANAEROBIC GLUE
Gear belt tension adjustment tool
2200409

D10 TOOL: BELT TENSION ADJUST

Bio-Rad
P/N
Torque driver
2200410 with #3 Allen tip

D10 TORQUE DRIVER
Balance
2200411

D10 BALANCE
Mini-screwdriver
flat end screwdriver

2200412
designed to adjust the detector

D10 TOOL: DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT
Pressure sensor calibration tool
2200413 DRUCK DPI 610 with fittings

D10 TOOL:PRESSURE SENSOR CALIB
Pressure sensor verification tool
2200414 digital manometer with fittings

D10 PRESSURE GAUGE W/FITTINGS

Bio-Rad
P/N
Front cover sensor simulator
2200415 6-pin connector

D10 FRONT COVER SENSOR BYPASS
Front cover switch simulator
2200416 4-pin connector

D10 FRONT COVER SWITCH BYPASS
5-pin extension lead
2200417

D10 CABLE EXTENDER: 5-PIN PLUG
6-pin extension lead
2200418

D10 CABLE EXTENDER: 6-PIN PLUG
Check valves kit

contents:
2 check valves + S14: 6mm x 3mm x
2200419 30mm + S15: 6mm x 3mm x 120mm +
S17: 6mm x 3mm x 60mm + S18: 6mm x
3mm x 390mm + 1 LUER connector
D10 WASTE CHECK VALVES W/TUBES

Bio-Rad
P/N
PLCC EPROM extractor
2200420

D10 TOOL: PLCC EPROM EXTRACTOR
Power entry module
2200421 with fuses

D10 MODULE POWER ENTRY
Front cover assembly
2200422 complete front cover

D10 FRONT COVER ASSY
Micro-switch
used in the front cover assembly

2200423
complete with the cable
D10 SWITCH: FRONT COVER
Dummy probe
2200424

D10 DUMMY PROBE

Bio-Rad
P/N
X home sensor / TH tube height flag

positioning jig
2200425 2-in-1 tool

D10 TOOL: X HOME, TH HOME
Z home sensor / TH home flag positioning

jig
2200426 2-in-1 tool

D10 TOOL: Z HOME, TH HOME
Clear dilution/wash station
2200427

D10 TOOL: SEE-THRU WASH TOWER
X movement adjustment tool
clear dilution/wash station

2200428
with additional cut-out

D10 TOOL: X MOVEMENT ADJUST
Rack sensor adjustment gauge / upper

front door simulator / rack door sensor
positioning jig
2200429 3-in-1 tool

D10 TOOL:RACK &RACK DOOR SENSR

Bio-Rad
P/N
Barcode reader positioning jig
2200430

D10 TOOL: BAR CODE POSITION
Z movement control tool
2200431

D10 TOOL: Z MOVEMENT CONTROL
TH movement adjustment tool
2200432

D10 TOOL:TH VERTICAL ADJUSTMEN
Sample arm / rack support

alignment jigs
2200433 bi-functional tool

D10 TOOL:SAMPLE ARM/RACK TRAY
Slide bearings positioning tool kit
contains an alignment rail

2200434
and a thickness gauge (4-in-1 tool)

D10 TOOL: SLIDE BEARING ALIGN

Bio-Rad
P/N
Dummy PEEK cartridge holder
2200435 with LUER inlet and outlet

D10 TOOL: CARTRIDGE BYPASS
M3 standoffs
2200436

D10 STANDOFF, M3 2/PK
¼" caps
contains 3 ¼" female-female connectors

2200437
and 3 ¼" male caps

D10 UNION AND PLUG 1/4", 3/PK
Cartridge module
temperature control tool
thermocouple inserted in an analytical

2200438
cartridge

D10 TOOL:CARTRIDGE TEMP CHECK
HP pump flow rate

calibration/verification tool
2200439 backpressure regulator + fittings

D10 TOOL: PRESSURE REGULATOR

Bio-Rad
P/N
WC-FC verification kit
calibrated load mounted on a dummy

2200440
cartridge holder

D10 TOOL:COIL &DYE, WC/FC CHEK
Cartridge module
temperature calibration kit
Hanna digital thermometer + adapter
cable + temperature sensor inserted in
2200441
an analytical cartridge + 2 reference
resistors
D10 TOOL: TEMP CALIB KIT
WC-FC determination kit
'T' connector + silicon tubing + scaled

2200442
plastic pipette

D10 TOOL: WC-FC DETRM KIT
2.22 image CD
2200443

D10 IMAGE CD
Fluidic diagram
2200444

D10 FLUIDIC DIAGRAM

Bio-Rad
P/N
3.00 upgrade kit

5 floppy disks + 12 EPROM labels +
L20017200 Release Notes: Software
Version 3.00 + L20017700 Technical
2200445
Bulletin: LIS Interface Requirements +
L20017300 D-10 Customer Notification:
(U.S.) BaaN Description: Addendum to D-10 Operation Manual
D10 SOFTWARE UPGRADE KIT
Dye kit
125mL plastic bottle, with a mark at
100mL, and containing 0.22g of 'Acid
2200446
Yellow 42' powder + 10mL syringe +
technical note
D10 DYE KIT
WC-FC auto determination kit

contents:
T2: 1/8" x 1/16" x 700mm + 1 bottle cap
+ T15: 1/8" x 1/16" x 207mm + 2 unions
2200447
+ DT3: 2.1mm x 1.5mm x 15000mm +
T4: 1/8" x 1/16" x 650mm + 1 Dye kit
(U.S.) BaaN Description: (P/N: 2200446)
D10 TOOL: WC-FC AUTO DETERM KT
Internal waste bottle cap assembly
2200448 complete cap

D10 CAP ASSY INT.WASTE BOTTLE
Internal waste bottle filter assembly
2200449

D10 INTERNAL WASTE BTLE FILTER

Bio-Rad
P/N
Tamperproofing coating
2200451 Loctite 7400 coating

---
RheBuild Kit for HP valve
2702170 RheBuild Kit #7531-999

---
Dummy PEEK cartridge
9600414

---

Appendix A: File Examples
Table of Contents:
Dia.ini A-1
instrument.ini A-3
Profile.ini A-4
Profile2.ini A-6
DiaSer.ini A-9
DiaLIS.ini A-13
*.csv (partial) from Service software A-14
L20015501 Service Manual A-i

A - ii Service Manual L20015501

'Dia.ini' File:
[Status]
Version=2.29
[State]
CurrentInjNumber=130
DateTag=202
WPistonFlushTag=1
CurrentWasteVol=60400
[Language]
TotalLanguages=3
DirectoryName0=English
DisplayName0=English
DirectoryName1=Japanese
DisplayName1=Japanese
DirectoryName2=French
DisplayName2=Francais
[Settings]
Language=0
AutoWarmUpTime=27000
AutoShutDownDuration=1800
AutoShutDownDurationMin=1800
AutoShutDownDurationMax=5400
BarCodePresent=1
ArchiveToFloppy=0
ArchiveToSerial=1
ArchiveToNetwork=1
ReportCalError=1
ReportCtrlError=1
PressureUnit=1
WarmUpTimeOut=900
MaxNSRRuns=18
DisableAutoWarmUp=1
ReagentWarningLevel=5
CartWarningLevel=5
WasteWarningLevel=5
TotalWasteVol=100000
[Lis]
LisID=1
ExportActivated=0
LisAfterEachRun=0
LisAfterEachInjection=0
LisManualOnly=1
[Print]
AutoPrintOut=1
DailyLog=1
L20015501 Service Manual A-1

[Data]
ExportLis=0
ExportFloppy=0
ExportSelectedSample=1
ExportBetweenDate=0
DataOrientation=1
[Assay]
CurrentAssay=0
CurrentReagentLot=AB06256
CurrentControlLot=33560
CurrentCalibC1=0.053
CurrentCalibC2=0.119
CurrentControlLL=0.051
CurrentControlLM=0.056
CurrentControlLU=0.061
CurrentControlHL=0.093
CurrentControlHM=0.097
CurrentControlHU=0.101
MaintainBPercent=50
[Maintain]
MaintainFlowRate=2.2
MaintainBPercent=50
ServiceSoftware=DiaSer.exe
[HPPump]
EPISTONVOL=380.000000
EENCRES=1024
EMOTORREDUCTION=20
EVRESPTIME=10
EVALVEHIGHTIME=20
EVRESPTIMEP=50
EVRESETOFFSET=0
[Barcode]
Calib1Header=CAL1
Calib2Header=CAL2
ControlHighHeader=CTRH
ControlLowHeader=CTRL
PrimerHeader=PRIME
A-2 Service Manual L20015501

'instrument.ini' File:
[Status]
Version=2.20
[Instrument]
SerialNum=DA4F357306
[HPPump]
Rule1=0.0,1.0,2414.47,0.00
Rule2=1.0,1.5,2438.47,-23.86
Rule3=1.5,99.0,2344.28,116.13
HPSensor_Offset=20.5556
HPSense_Gain=12.6699
ECAMFILLSHIFT1=155
EFILLDURATION=114
[Arm]
wTHOffset=5
wZOffset=0
[BubbleDetect]
Bubble_A_1=0
Bubble_A_2=255
Bubble_B_1=0
Bubble_B_2=255
Bubble_W_1=0
Bubble_W_2=255
[TC]
TCCal_Gain=1.0046
TCCal_Offset=0.3028
TCCal_SensorOffset=-0.1000
TCCal_GradientOffset=-0.7000
[XXADILXX]
XXADIL1XX=243

'Profile.ini' File:
[Status]
Version=2.29
[General]
StandbyFlow=0.2
[Kit]
Kit0=0
Kit1=0
Kit2=0
Kit3=0
Kit4=0
[Init]
XSpeed=9
ZSpeed=2
THSpeed=2
SSpeed=2
VSpeed=0
InitType=1
NeedlePrime=1
wExhaustDelay=10
[LowPrime]
FillSyringeSpeed=7
EmptySyringeSpeed=4
XSpeed=6
THSpeed=5
ZSpeed=5
ExhaustChamberDelay=50
StrokeCount=3
[HighPrime]
FillSyringeSpeed=5
EmptySyringeSpeed=4
XSpeed=1
THSpeed=5
ZSpeed=5
WashStrokeCount=8
StrokeCount=38
[HpFlush]
FillSyringeSpeed=7
EmptySyringeSpeed=4
XSpeed=1
THSpeed=5
ZSpeed=5
ExhaustChamberDelay=50
StrokeCount=3

wPumpFlow=300
[SystemTable]
bFakeRead=0
bMXOverrun=3
wMXWarnSteps=2500
wMXWarnNbr=0
wMZWarnSteps=13001
wMZWarnNbr=0
wMTHWarnSteps=11002
wMTHWarnNbr=0
wMSWarnSteps=5200
wMSWarnNbr=0
wMVWarnSteps=2400
wMVWarnNbr=0
DegasLowPress=118
DegasHighPress=125
DegasTimeOut=120
bRackDoorMonitor=1
bFrontDoorMonitor=1
bRackDoorPresent=1
bWasteGoodVacuum=76
bWasteCheckTimeOut=30
bWasteReleaseOffset=5
bWasteRelease1TO=5
bWasteRelease2TO=5
[Misc]
SleepLightSourceLevel=0
StandbyLightsourceLevel=150
WarmUpPressureMonitoringPercent=60
[PumpParameters]
wHPAnalogPeriod=250
PumpCurrentMax=181
wPumpCurrentDefaultMax=64
wPumpSpeedMax=1000
wPumpSpeedDefaultMax=2
fProfileSpeedSteps_fudge=400.0
fPSI_fudge=2500.0
[Print]
AutoPrintOut=1

'Profile2.ini' File:
[Status]
Version=2.29
[Kit]
Name=Hb A1c
SName=Hb A1c
StName=A1c
TestFile=a1c.hpl
PrimeFile=primer.hpl
WarmUpGradient=1
WarmUpGradientFile=warmupa1c.hpl
BeginRun=1
BeginRunFile=begina1c.hpl
EndRun=1
EndRunFile=enda1c.hpl
RealTotalBuffer1Vol=20000
RealTotalBuffer2Vol=10000
RealTotalWashVol=16000
TotalBuffer1Vol=40000
TotalBuffer2Vol=10000
TotalWashVol=16000
TotalCartridgeInj=400
Buffer1InjConsuption=100
Buffer2InjConsuption=25
WashInjConsuption=40
WasteInjVolume=165
DualKit=1
CurrentBuffer1Vol=18847
CurrentBuffer2Vol=9722
CurrentWashVol=15560
CurrentCartridgeInj=389
[ReferenceValues]
Enabled=1
DisplayedDecimal=0
Up=8
Median=7
Low=6
[Inject]
wSampleVolume=20
wDiluantVolume=480
wSecondDilutionSampleVolume=20
wSecondDilutionDiluantVolume=680
wDilutionValveDelay=10
wAirBubbleVolume=60
wAntiDropBubbleVolume=0
wTHSenseMicrovialHigh=6675
wTHSenseMicrovialLow=7675

wTHSenseMin=0
wZsamplingPosition=230
wZMicrovialSampling=180
wZantiDropOffset=105
wMicroVialAntiDropVolume=25
wFromDilutionToValve=745
wChamberCleaningVolume=1000
bFillSyringeSpeed=9
bEmptySyringeSpeed=9
bAirGapSyringeSpeed=1
bAspSampleSyringeSpeed=0
bDspSampleSyringeSpeed=0
bLoopFillSyringeSpeed=0
bXSpeed=2
bTHSpeed=6
bTHTubeHoldSpeed=2
bZSpeed=6
bZPiercingSpeed=1
bSyringeValveDelay=10
bExhaustChamberDelay=50
bBCReadFlag=1
wMicroVialSampleVolume=250
wMicroFromDilutionToValve=460
wMicroVialAirBubbleVolume=10
[Chroma]
wSampleRate=36
wSampleDuration=180
wInjectionDelay=20
bRefAdjust=1
bLightSourceIntensity=150
bIOGainValue=64
dAbsMax=16106127
dAbsMin=8388608
dAbsRef=8808038
bLightSourceIntensityMax=240
wBaseLinePercent=470
wInjectionInterval=180
dMaxRefDrift=13421772
bVSpeed=4
bLightIncrement=10
bLightStartTempo=60
bLightChangeTempo=15
[Prime]
bVSpeed2=4
bVSpeed=4
wLoadDuration1=120
wInjectDuration1=12
wLoadDuration2=150
wInjectDuration2=18

wLoadDuration3=60
wInjectDuration3=60
wLoadDuration4=60
wInjectDuration4=210
wLoadDuration5=30
[PumpParameters]
wMaintainHighPRessureAlarm=2000
wRunHighPressureAlarm=1067
RunHighAverageMeasNumber=12
wRunLowPressureAlarm=130
RunLowAverageMeasNumber=60

'DiaSer.ini' File:
[Status]
Version=1.29-1A
[Maintain]
UserSoftware=Dia.exe
LoadProfile=0
CheckBeforeExit=1
AL1=81d80815851d73ee717f27e5a2ce6851
AL2=97b6efa84a8ecd3851b76273e7a6e6b8
AL3=e8f95b17eea00d1f2bf5febb3e77877e
AL4=103d20ecc62edfd70f1b198485eb2122
NonStopRunSoftware=dia_nsr.exe
TouchScreenCalib=C:\drivers-tools\V10L10\Calwin.exe
[SerialPort]
Port=4
Speed=19200
[State]
CurrentInjNumber=2
MaxInjNumber=1000
DateTag=202
[Test]
Number=3
Test1=HBA1C
Test2=BTHAL
Test3=DECONT
[Sequence]
Injection=InjectionSequence.csv
DiluChambWashing=DiluChambWashingSequence.csv
ProbeWashing=ProbeWashingSequence.csv
PickUpDilutionLoadTube=PickUpDilutionAndLoadOfASampleFromATube.csv
PickUpDilutionTube=PickUpAndDilutionOfASampleFromATube.csv
LoadDiluChamb=LoadOfASampleFromTheDilutionChamber.csv
LoadMicrovial=LoadOfASampleFromAMicrovial.csv
InjectionOfASample=InjectionOfASample.csv
DiluChambProbeWashing=DiluChambAndProbeWashingSeq.csv
[Detector]
bLightSourceIntensity=150
bIOGainValue=64
LogonTime=200
[RackDoor]
AgingPause=6

[Motor]
XStepCourseMax=2200
XStripCourseMax=44
XAllMoveSpeedDefault=5
ZStepCourseMax=12000
ZStripCourseMax=240
ZAllMoveSpeedDefault=5
THStepCourseMax=8000
THStripCourseMax=160
THAllMoveSpeedDefault=5
ZStepDilutionChamber=3500
ZStripDilutionChamber=70
ZStepWashChamber=10200
ZStripWashChamber=204
THOffsetTheo=7775
[HPPump]
FlowRateMax=30
FlowRateDefault=15
FlowRateCalibDefault=1,1.5,2,99
FlowRateTolerance=5
DensityDefault=1.001
WCMin=140
WCMax=165
FCMin=100
FCMax=130
[PropValve]
AgingDurationMax=60
[ThermalMod]
TempMin=30
TempMax=50
[WCFCDeterTest]
WCMin=144
WCMax=161
WCMinDef=153
WCMaxDef=157
FCMin=106
FCMax=120
FCMinDef=111
FCMaxDef=113
FlushFlowRate=30
FlushTimeDila=240
FlushTimeCont=480
[StaticGradTest]
GradDuration1=300
GradDuration2=300
GradDuration3=480
A - 10 Service Manual L20015501

NbWin=2
START1=150
START2=510
END1=300
END2=600
[DilamexGradTest]
NbWin=3
START1=45
START2=240
START3=510
END1=70
END2=360
END3=600
RAU100=0.005
MIN50=49.3
MAX50=50.7
MINCOR50=48
MAXCOR50=52
[Dilamex+GradTest]
NbWin=4
START1=60
START2=295
START3=475
START4=655
END1=120
END2=310
END3=490
END4=670
RAU100=0.008
AVE50=50
MIN20=13
MIN50=49.5
MAX20=14
MAX50=50.5
MINCOR50=48
MAXCOR50=52
[StepGradTest]
NbWin=11
START1=60
START2=265
START3=445
START4=625
START5=805
START6=985
START7=1165
START8=1345
START9=1525
START10=1705
L20015501 Service Manual A - 11

START11=1885
END1=120
END2=310
END3=490
END4=670
END5=850
END6=1030
END7=1210
END8=1390
END9=1570
END10=1750
END11=1930
RAU100=0.005
MIN10=3
MIN20=12.5
MIN30=21
MIN40=32
MIN50=49.3
MIN60=60
MIN70=70
MIN80=80
MIN90=90
MAX10=10
MAX20=14
MAX30=30
MAX40=40
MAX50=50.7
MAX60=68
MAX70=79
MAX80=89
MAX90=97
MINCOR10=8
MINCOR20=18
MINCOR30=28
MINCOR40=38
MINCOR50=48
MINCOR60=58
MINCOR70=68
MINCOR80=78
MINCOR90=88
MAXCOR10=12
MAXCOR20=22
MAXCOR30=32
MAXCOR40=42
MAXCOR50=52
MAXCOR60=62
MAXCOR70=72
MAXCOR80=82
MAXCOR90=92

'DiaLIS.ini' File:
[Com]
Port=3
BaudRate=9600
DataBits=8
StopBits=1
Parity=0
[LisBehaviour]
Version=1.20
ActUponQuery=1
QRespMaxNbRes=1
PushedResFN=PushRes.tsv
[LisMap]
HBA1C=4
BTHAL=1
InstName=D10
Version=3.00
L20015501 Service Manual A - 13

*.csv (partial) from Service software:

Valid TimeStamp.hms TimeStamp.ms Raw Meas Ref Meas Log I0/I Temperature Degasser HP
Pressure Pressure
Ok 10:32:06 139 11966535 12593843 0,02218986 2132 129 567
Ok 10:32:06 439 11965404 12592568 0,02218694 2132 129 567
Ok 10:32:06 740 11962765 12594946 0,02236474 2132 128 565
Ok 10:32:07 40 11963223 12592520 0,02226445 2131 129 565
Ok 10:32:07 341 11965430 12595251 0,02227852 2131 129 575
Ok 10:32:07 641 11965170 12592656 0,02219847 2131 129 575

Appendix B: Diagrams
Table of Contents:
D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position) B-1

D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in inject position) B-2
D-10: HP Circuit (HP valve in load position) B-3
D-10: HP Circuit (HP valve in inject position) B-4
D-10: General Fluidic Diagram B-5
L20015501 Service Manual B-i

B - ii Service Manual L20015501

D-10: Sample Preparation
Circuit
(HP valve in load position) wash solution
(from degasser)
T9
T6
Tubings: T7
T6: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 530mm sample

T7: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 115mm probe
T9: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 1250mm
T10: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 210mm
B NC NO B T10
T11: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 530mm
T13: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 110mm 3-way
dilution chamber
probe wash port

valve
T14: teflon 1/16'' x 0.25mm x 1200 mm (blue)
P4: peek 1/16" x 0.5mm x 190mm (orange)
S4: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 550mm (green) T13 Y R

7-port,
S5: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 550mm (yellow) 3-position
S6: silicon 3.2mm x 2mm x 27mm 6 5
HP valve G
T11
+ 6mm x 3mm x 23mm on each side (load position)
S7: silicon 3.2mm x 2mm x 27mm
+ 6mm x 3mm x 23mm on each side
1 7 4
S8: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 140mm motorized
S9: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 270mm syringe (1mL)
S10: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 160mm B dilution/
S12: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 330mm wash
S13: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 2500mm (red) station sample rack
S14: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 30mm
piston flush 2 3
Y
circuit
S16: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 35mm G
HP pump head
S4 S5
piston
from HP pump to the cartridge
and sensor module G Y
2 pinch valves
dilution probe wash

sample loop
valve valve
SS1
NO NO
S17 S18 S6 S7
check valve
T14 P4 waste manifold 1
from detector
B B outlet
(backpressure tubing)
S13 S12 S9
vacuum
S8 sensor
R R
CPC fast
connector S15 S14 S10
S16 internal waste bottle

B Blue
waste manifold 2 check valve
liquid pump
R Red
High pressure valve: High pressure valve: High pressure valve:
G Green load position inject position priming position
plastic barbed fitting
6 5 6 5 6 5
LUER fitting
W White 1 7 4 1 7 4 1 7 4 or plastic knurled fitting
stainless steel tube
waste bottle
Y Yellow 2 3 2 3 2 3 stainless steel fitting fast connector
L20015501 Service Manual B-1

D-10: Sample Preparation
Circuit
(HP valve in inject position) wash solution
(from degasser)
T9
T6
Tubings: T7
T6: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 530mm sample

T7: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 115mm probe
T9: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 1250mm
T10: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 210mm
B NC NO B T10
T11: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 530mm
T13: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 110mm 3-way
dilution chamber
probe wash port

valve
T14: teflon 1/16'' x 0.25mm x 1200 mm (blue)
S4: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 550mm (green) T13 Y R

7-port,
S5: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 550mm (yellow) 3-position
S6: silicon 3.2mm x 2mm x 27mm 6 5
HP valve G
T11
+ 6mm x 3mm x 23mm on each side (inject position)
S7: silicon 3.2mm x 2mm x 27mm
+ 6mm x 3mm x 23mm on each side
1 7 4
S8: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 140mm motorized
S9: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 270mm syringe (1mL)
S10: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 160mm B dilution/
S12: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 330mm wash
S13: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 2500mm (red) station sample rack
piston flush 2 3
Y
circuit
S16: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 35mm G
HP pump head
S4 S5
piston
from HP pump to the cartridge
and sensor module G Y
2 pinch valves
dilution probe wash

sample loop
valve valve
SS1
NO NO
S17 S18 S6 S7
check valve
T14 P4 waste manifold 1
from detector
B B outlet
(backpressure tubing)
S13 S12 S9
vacuum
S8 sensor
R R
CPC fast
connector S15 S14 S10
S16 internal waste bottle

B Blue
waste manifold 2 check valve
liquid pump
R Red
High pressure valve: High pressure valve: High pressure valve:
G Green load position inject position priming position
6 5 6 5 6 5
LUER fitting
W White 1 7 4 1 7 4 1 7 4 or plastic knurled fitting
stainless steel tube
waste bottle

D-10: HP Circuit
(HP valve in load position)
degasser HP pump
B B
to the 3-way valve pressure sensor
B T5 T6 encoder
DT1 3 bubble
detectors
M
T1 G DT2 G T3 G
NO T12 P1 P2
IN OUT
T15
T2 W W W
piston flush
G W T4 NC
circuit
IN OUT
DT3 proportioning valve
cam sensor
wash/diluent
S1 S2
S17
T15 T15
T7 to the check to the probe

valve
vacuum
pump S3 T9
buffer 1 buffer 2
vacuum
Y R
7-port,
sensor 3-position
6 5
T11 HP valve
Tubings: (load position)
to the 1mL syringe
DT1: teflon 2.1mm x 1.5mm x 3000mm to the rear of the

1 7 4
DT2, DT3: teflon 2.1mm x 1.5mm x 15000mm instrument
T1: teflon 1/8" x 1/16'' x 700mm (green) B

T2: teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 700mm (white)
T3: teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 570mm (green)
T4: teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 650mm (white) 2 3
P4 P3
T5: teflon 1/8" x 1/16'' x 700mm (blue)
T6: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 530mm G
T7: teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 115mm
T9: teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 1250mm heating
analytical
T11: teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 530mm T14 flow SS2
to waste
T12: teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 150mm cell
manifold 2
T14: teflon 1/16'' x 0.25mm x 1200mm (blue) (backpressure tubing)
T15: teflon 1/8" x 1/16'' x 205mm cartridge
loop
sample loop
P1: peek 1/16" x 0.5mm x 170mm SS1
Hb detector cartridge module
P2: peek 1/16" x 0.5mm x 120mm B Blue
P3: peek 1/16" x 0.25mm x 190mm (blue)
R Red
S1: polyamide 4mm x 2mm x 250mm High pressure valve: High pressure valve: High pressure valve:
+ silicon 6mm x 3mm x 20mm load position inject position priming position
G Green
S2: polyamide 4mm x 2mm x 250mm plastic barbed fitting
6 5 6 5 6 5 LUER fitting
+ silicon 6mm x 3mm x 20mm
S3: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 220mm W White or plastic knurled fitting
1 7 4 1 7 4 1 7 4 stainless steel tube
SS1: stainless steel 23µL calibrated loop
Y Yellow stainless steel fitting fast connector
SS2: stainless steel 1/16" x 0.5mm x 650mm 2 3 2 3 2 3

D-10: HP Circuit
(HP valve in inject position)
degasser HP pump
B B
to the 3-way valve pressure sensor
B T5 T6 encoder
DT1 3 bubble
detectors
M
T1 G DT2 G T3 G
NO T12 P1 P2
IN OUT
T15
T2 W W W
piston flush
G W T4 NC
circuit
IN OUT
DT3 proportioning valve
cam sensor
wash/diluent
S1 S2
S17
T15 T15
T7 to the check to the probe

valve
vacuum
pump S3 T9
buffer 1 buffer 2
vacuum
Y R
7-port,
sensor 3-position
6 5
T11 HP valve
Tubings: (inject position)
to the 1mL syringe
DT1: teflon 2.1mm x 1.5mm x 3000mm to the rear of the

1 7 4
DT2, DT3: teflon 2.1mm x 1.5mm x 15000mm instrument
T1: teflon 1/8" x 1/16'' x 700mm (green) B

T2: teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 700mm (white)
T3: teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 570mm (green)
T4: teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 650mm (white) 2 3
P4 P3
T5: teflon 1/8" x 1/16'' x 700mm (blue)
T6: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75mm x 530mm G
T7: teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 115mm
T9: teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 1250mm heating
analytical
T11: teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 530mm T14 flow SS2
to waste
T12: teflon 1/16" x 0.75mm x 150mm cell
manifold 2
T14: teflon 1/16'' x 0.25mm x 1200mm (blue) (backpressure tubing)
T15: teflon 1/8" x 1/16'' x 205mm cartridge
loop
sample loop
P1: peek 1/16" x 0.5mm x 170mm SS1
Hb detector cartridge module
P2: peek 1/16" x 0.5mm x 120mm B Blue
P3: peek 1/16" x 0.25mm x 190mm (blue)
R Red
S1: polyamide 4mm x 2mm x 250mm High pressure valve: High pressure valve: High pressure valve:
+ silicon 6mm x 3mm x 20mm load position inject position priming position
G Green
S2: polyamide 4mm x 2mm x 250mm plastic barbed fitting
6 5 6 5 6 5 LUER fitting
+ silicon 6mm x 3mm x 20mm
S3: silicon 6mm x 3mm x 220mm W White or plastic knurled fitting
1 7 4 1 7 4 1 7 4 stainless steel tube
SS1: stainless steel 23µL calibrated loop
Y Yellow stainless steel fitting fast connector
SS2: stainless steel 1/16" x 0.5mm x 650mm 2 3 2 3 2 3

HP pump
OUTSIDE INSIDE
pressure sensor
D-10:
degasser proportioning valve
General Fluidic Diagram
M
T1 G DT2 G T3 G
NO T12 P1 P2
IN OUT
W W W
NC piston flush
T2 T4
circuit
G W bubble
DT3 OUT IN
detectors (3) sample probe
B B
T5 T6
probe wash chamber

dilution chamber
DT1
T15 T15 T10 S17 T7 T9
B NC B NO Y R 7-port,
check valve
S1 S2 3-position
3-way T11 6 5
HP valve G
valve (load position)
buffer 1 buffer 2
B
1 7 4
vacuum T13 B
pump
vacuum
sensor sample rack
2 3
Y
T15 S18 G
S3 1mL syringe S5
S4
G Y
SS2
wash/diluent SS1
sample loop
NO NO
B B dilution probe wash
P4 P3 valve valve
S6 S7
S13 S12 heating
T14 analytical
R flow
CPC fast (backpressure cell waste
connector tubing) manifold 1
cartridge loop vacuum
sensor
waste manifold 2 Hb detector cartridge module
S8
R S9
S15 S14 S10

internal
S16
waste bottle
waste bottle check valve
B Blue liquid pump
HP valve: HP valve: HP valve:

R Red load position inject position priming position
G Green 6 5 6 5 6 5
LUER fitting
1 7 4 1 7 4 1 7 4
W White or plastic knurled fitting stainless steel tube

D-10:
ELECTRONIC MODULE Electrical Block Diagram
sheet 1/2
LCD 320 x 240
with CCFL backlight RS232 rack
keyboard mouse
external LAN port VGA port feeder
touch screen port port
port port
touch screen and

LCD interface board RS232
port LAN keyboard mouse VGA fan
(COM4) interface interface interface interface
CN16 (4/ CN15 CN11 CN11 CN12
4)
main input
LCD port IDE
CN9 interface hard disk
LCD/PC connection CN5
RS232
board port
EMC main input filter (COM1)
fuses holder CN16 (1/ FDD
floppy
4) interface
disk drive
CN17
PC motherboard
K6-2E processor
RS422 RS232
ON/OFF 64MB
power supply port port thermal
bipolar switch (COM2) (COM3)
input printer to external
CN8 CN16 (2/ CN16 (3/
CD-ROM drive
4) 4)
(for Service use)
DC low power RS422 port power power

power supply 1 power
voltage supply (A16) supply supply to rack
supply
power output to output to output to feeder
(+5VDC, +12VDC, output to
input PC board floppy disk hard disk (A14)
+26VDC, -12VDC) fan (A8)
(A1) (A2) (A3 or A4) (A3 or A4)
interface board
power supply 2 to thermal and reserve reserve reserve

HPLC module to degasser to detector to syringe to X board
(+24VDC) supply 2 supply supply
(A9 & A10) module (A11) module (A12) module (A13) (A15)
(A7) (A6) (A5)
ON/OFF unipolar see sheet 2/2 see sheet 2/2 see sheet 2/2 see sheet 2/2 see sheet 2/2
switch electronic board
(front cover)
sub assembly

RS422 to PC motherboard
liquid pump CN6 syringe
(X movement)
module X stepper motor
sample arm
X board CN4
pinch valve (dilution) board
module
CN7
solenoid A16 CN11 X home sensor
pinch valve (probe wash) CN8 drivers (5) w/ interface board
syringe module
current CN10 X axis sensor
pinch valve 3 CN9 sensing
stepper motor
vacuum sensor driver w/
syringe stepper motor CN3
interface current sensing
CN3 rack positioning motor
rack drive
CN4
A13
module
syringe home sensor CN2 optosensor
rack input sensor
CN1
CN8
stepper motor interface (6)
syringe 3-way valve CN5 driver
(microsteps) w/ Hall effect CN9 rack output sensor
vacuum current sensing sensor interface
internal waste bottle sensor
optosensor solenoid and CN2 rack door solenoid
rack door
DC motor
module
interface (1) CN5
drivers w/
vacuum sensor vacuum sensor current sensing CN6
CN7 closed door sensor
degasser module
aux. vacuum sensor (option) aux. vac. sensor vacuum sensor MC

CN12 open door sensor
interface (2) µ-controller
vacuum pump CN8
+ RAM
DC motor
A11
CN4
+ ROM stepper motor
bubble detector 1 (buffer 1) CN1 driver + I/O CN4 CN1 Hall effect adapter sensor
driver w/
A15
bubble detector 2 (buffer 2) CN3 degasser current sensing
CN10
module
optosensor CN11 Z stepper motor
interface (3) optosensor
bubble detector 3 (wash/dil.) CN6 board
(Z and TH movements)
interface (2) CN2 Z home sensor
sample arm module

CN13 Z axis sensor
HP pump motor CN16
proportioning valve CN15 DC motor Z board CN6 barcode reader (RS232 link)
driver w/
HP valve (V) stepper motor CN14 RS232 port
current sensing
TH stepper motor
CN12
CN7
Peltier module 1 CN13 solenoid driver stepper motor
(2 levels) driver w/
w/ current sensing current sensing CN12 TH home sensor
Peltier module 2 CN11
HPLC module
stepper motor
TH axis sensor
A10
thermal fuse CN10 optosensor CN5
driver w/ current
interface (3)
sensing
cam flag sensor CN9 CN8 tube height sensor
Peltier module
driver w/ current
HP pump encoder CN8
sensing
CN5
HP valve sensors (3) CN7 solenoid driver
A14
I/O interface to
w/ current rack feeder unit to optional rack feeder board rear panel
pressure sensor CN6 sensing
Pt100 sensor 1 CN4 optosensor

interface (3)
Pt100 sensor 2 (option) CN3
optosensor CN2 photodetector: reference
interface (4)
A9
A12
detector
CN4
module
HPLC pressure
CN1 photodetector: sample
front cover solenoid module sensor interface
cover
front
board CN3 high-brightness LED

front cover sensor temperature detector
sensor interface board
CN2 CN1
sensor TC HPPC
µ-controller for µ-controller
heater and + RAM
electronic board temperature + ROM
sensor interface + I/O
D-10:
motor or solenoid Electrical Block Diagram
sheet 2/2
sub assembly

Appendix C: Electronic Diagrams
Table of Contents:

Detector Board: List of Components C-5
Sampling Arm Connection Board Z C-8
Sampling Arm Connection Board X C-9
High-Pressure Connection Board C-10
Syringe Connection Board C-11
Degasser Connection Board C-12
LCD Internal Board and LCD Interface Board C-13
Adaptator Sensor Board C-21
Photodetector and LED Board C-22
L20015501 Service Manual C-i

C - ii Service Manual L20015501

L1 L
P
PT10
VDD IC9 PT13
M R46 IC8 D1
8 1 1 2
R48 IDC ISWC VIN VOUT 3
PT11 7 R44 VOUT 6
IPK VOUT 5VANA
ADJ
5 7
6 COMP VOUT
3 VCC
TCAP
4
+ R47 +
4
+ 2 GND R45 C21 C24 C23 C27
ISWE
C26 C25 C22
R43
DG ND DG ND DG ND DG ND DGND N
PT12
AGND
CN4
5VANA
1 DADY
2 5VANA
3 /RESET C18
K
4 SD1
5 AGND
R41 P9 8
6 SD0
R40 IC5B
7 5 +
8 SCLK Vref
7
9 CS0 V0
6
10 CS1 -
IC7 R38
11 CS2
12 CS3 4
C19
13 DSYNC
14 DSYNC
AGND AGND AGND
15 VDD
AGND
16
DGND
4-5 Ajout des rési stances R49 20 Kohms et R50 470Kohms +

cavalier
AD IL I NST RUM ENTS
Title
DETECTOR BOARD
Size Document Number Rev

DAE011E/5 5
Date: Wednesday, February 04, 2004 Sheet 1 of 4
L20015501 Service Manual C-1

V0
V0
B +
R1
CN1 R8 PT1 C2
IC2A
1 3 +
2 1 AGND AGND
3 2
-
ABS
R5 R2
5VANA
R3 R11
C3
V0
V0 8 C
R14 IC2B
5 + PT2
7
6 +
-
D
4 C5 AIN0
Vref PT3 R4
V0
R13
R15 R12 AGND R6

-
V0
C6 V0
C10 R7
A
AGND
PT0
V0
V0
E
CN2
R25 PT4
1 IC3A
2 3 +
3 1
4 2
-
REF
R20 R16
G
PT6
Jumper 5VANA
1-2 connected R17 R26
C11
1
R50
P7 2
V0
V0 8 IC .3 A2 IC .4 W2
R29 IC2B
3
5 + R18
7
6
-
H
4 C12 +
Vref PT7
V0
R28
AIN1
R30 R27 AGND R23 R19
V0
C13
-
C15 R24 V0
AGND
V0

cavalier
Title
DETECTOR BOARD

DAE011E/5 5
C-2 Service Manual L20015501

F
IC4
PT5
7
PDWN VDD
1
11 DV 2 C14
AI N1 +
-
12 Ain0
Ain1
DGND
DGND
8
C9 DGND
13 3
AI N0 +
-
14 Ain2
Ain3
Xin
Y1 C8
9 4
Vref Vref+ Xout
10
16 Vref- 6
AGND AGND DSYNC DSYNC
15 21
V0 Aincom Dout SD0
17 20
5VANA AVdd Din SD1
22
SCLK SCLK
5
RST /RESET
19
CS CS1
DRDY
Ain3
BUF
R31
R21
18
24
23
P6 VDD
DG ND
R33
P5
VDD
P4 VDD R32
P3 DG ND
R34
P2 IC1
P1 VDD 7 R22
PDWN VDD
1
11 DV 2 C4
AI N0 +
-
12 Ain0
Ain1
DGND
DGND
8
DGND
C1 13 3
14 Ain2 Xin
AGND Ain3
9 4
Vref Vref+ Xout VDD
10
16 Vref- 6
AGND AGND DSYNC
15 21
V0 Aincom Dout
17 20
5VANA AVdd Din 22 R9
SCLK 5
RST 19
CS CS0
DRDY
Ain3
BUF
C7
AGND
18
24
23
R10
DADY

cavalier
Title
DETECTOR BOARD

DAE011E/5 5

CN3
Vref
1
AGND 2
R
5VANA 3
4
PT14
5
LED
R35
IC5A
A1
3
3 + R37 R49
W1
1 2 Q1
B1
2
-
J
R39
1
PT8
R36
C16 C17
AGND
AGND AGND
VDD
C20
DGND
16
IC6
23
VCC
A1 A1
22
W1 W1
24
B1 B1
12 21
SD1 SDI ADGN1
13
SD0 SDO
14 3
SCLK CLK A2 IC .3 A2
4
W2 IC .4 W2
2
B2 1
ADGN2
11 19
CS2 CS A3
15 18
/RESET RS W3 20
B3 17
ADGN3
7
R42 A4 8
10 W4 6
VDD SHDN B4 5
ADGN4
GND
VDD
AD8403AR-10 AGND
9
DGND

cavalier
Title
DETECTOR BOARD

DAE011E/5 5

VALEUR VALEUR VALEUR VALEUR

Qté DESIGNATION
Révision 2 Révision 4 Révision 5 Révision 6
R1 1 RESISTANCE 0805 1K 1K 1K 1K
R5 1 RESISTANCE MINIMELF 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2
R8 1 RESISTANCE 0805 8K2 8K2 8K2 8K2
R9 1 RESISTANCE 0805 NC NC NC NC
R11 1 RESISTANCE 0805 0 0 0 0
R12 1 RESISTANCE 0805 1M 1M 1M 1M
R14 1 POTENTIOMETRE 3224G 20K 20K 20K 20K
R20 1 RESISTANCE MINIMELF 1M 1M 1M 1M
R27 1 RESISTANCE 0805 1M 1M 1M 1M
R28 1 RESISTANCE 0805 10K 6K8 6K8 6K8
R36 1 RESISTANCE 0805 10 10 10 10
R39 1 RESISTANCE 0805 0 0 0 0
1/3 NOMENCLATURE : DAE011/2+4 DAE011/5+6


Qté DESIGNATION
R44 1 RESISTANCE 0805 5K1 5K1 5K1 5K1
R46 1 RESISTANCE 0805 180 180 180 180
R48 1 RESISTANCE 2512 1.8 1,8 1,8 1,8
R49 1 RESISTANCE 0805 NM NM 20K 20K
C1 1 CONDENSATEUR 0805 100nF 50V 100nF 50V 100nF 50V 100nF 50V
TANT TANT TANT TANT
C2 1 CONDENSATEUR
10µF 10V 10µF 10V 10µF 10V 10µF 10V
C8 1 CONDENSATEUR 0805 10pF 10pF 10pF 10pF
C13 1 CONDENSATEUR 0805 68nF 68nF 68nF 68nF
47µF 16V 47µF 16V 47µF 16V 47µF 16V
C21 1 CONDENSATEUR
BOITIER / D BOITIER / D BOITIER / D BOITIER / D
C22 1 CONDENSATEUR 0805 470pF 50V 470pF 50V 470pF 50V 470pF 50V
47µF 16V 47µF 16V 47µF 16V 47µF 16V
C25 1 CONDENSATEUR
BOITIER / D BOITIER / D BOITIER / D BOITIER / D
22µF 6V3 22µF 6V3 22µF 6V3 22µF 6V3
C27 1 CONDENSATEUR
BOITIER / C BOITIER / C BOITIER / C BOITIER / C
C28 1 CONDENSATEUR 1nF 50V 100nF 50V 100nF 50V 100nF 50V
IC1 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE ADS 1240 E ADS 1240 E ADS 1240 E ADS 1240 E
IC2 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE AD 8572 AR AD 8572 AR AD 8572 AR AD 8572 AR
IC3 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE AD 8572 AR AD 8572 AR AD 8572 AR AD 8572 AR
IC4 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE ADS 1240 E ADS 1240 E ADS 1240 E ADS 1240 E


Qté DESIGNATION
IC5 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE LM 358 D LM 358 D LM 358 D LM 358 D
AD 8403 AD 8403 AD 8403 AD 8403
IC6 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE
AR10 AR10 AR10 AR10
LM 4040 LM 4040 LM 4040 LM 4040
IC7 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE CIM3-2.5 / CIM3-2.5 / CIM3-2.5 / CIM3-2.5 /
ZRA 250 F01 ZRA 250 F01 ZRA 250 F01 ZRA 250 F01
IC8 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE MC 34063 A MC 34063 A MC 34063 A MC 34063 A
IC9 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE LM 317 LD LM 317 LD LM 317 LD LM 317 LD
Y1 1 QUARTZ 86 SMX 4.9152MHz 4.9152MHz 4.9152MHz 4.9152MHz
D1 1 DIODE 10 MQ 090 10 MQ 090 10 MQ 090 10 MQ 090
Q1 1 TRANSISTOR BC 817-25 BC 817-25 BC 817-25 BC 817-25
L1 1 SELF 470µH HM 7610471 J HM 7610471 J HM 7610471 J HM 7610471 J
B 3B-PH- B 3B-PH- B 3B-PH- B 3B-PH-

CN1 CONNECTEUR
SM3-TB SM3-TB SM3-TB SM3-TB
CN2 CONNECTEUR
CN3 CONNECTEUR
HE10 16pts HE10 16pts HE10 16pts HE10 16pts
CN4 CONNECTEUR
DROIT / M DROIT / M DROIT / M DROIT / M
PT-V0 1 PLOT TEST

PT12 1 PLOT TEST
PT7 1 BARRETTE 2pts M / M 2pts M / M

V CC
C21 C17 C8 C6
100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF
CN11 Moteur Z
CN7 Moteur TH 2A
2A OUT1A _Z 2A 1
R10 R11 C26 C25
hall se nsor is moun t OUT1A _TH 2A 1 OUT2A _Z 2
2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
OUT2A _TH 2 3
3 2A 4
AD 4 SENSE1_Z 5
CN1 2A 2A
1.2mm SENSE1_TH 5 SENSE2_Z 6
adapter sensor 2A
1 (Hall e ffect). SENSE2_TH 6
1
C9 C13 JST B6B-EH-A
2 C22 C23 100pF 100pF
JST B6B-EH-A
3 100pF 100pF
4
A DAPTATOR_SENSOR 5
C24 JST B5B-PH-K- S
100pF
V CC
V CC
NC
NC R4 R1 C1 C2
R17 R16 C33 C34 if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
CN4 if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
2A
1 OUT1A _Z ZP
2A CN13 Z posit ion sensor
2 OUT2A _Z THP 1.2mm
2A CN5
3 SENSE1_Z 1.2mm 1
2A TH posi tion sensor
1
4 2A SENSE2_Z 1 2
1
5 2A OUT1A _TH 2 3
6 2A OUT2A _TH 3 4
7 2A SENSE1_TH 4 Z_POS_SENSOR 5
8 SENSE2_TH V CC TH_POS_SENSOR 5
1.2mm C7 JST B5B-PH-K- S
HE14 8cts C35 JST B5B-PH-K- S 100pF
1
100pF
CN10
1A V CC
1
2 Z_POS_SENSOR
V CC
3 Z_HOME_SENSOR
GND C36 V CC
4 TH_POS_SENSOR
1.2mm + 10µF/10V C37
5 TH_HOME_SENSOR
100nF
6 TH_HIGHT_ SENSOR NC
1
7 A DAPTATOR_SENSOR NC R12 R13 C29 C28

8 BA RCODE_RxD if hall sensor is m ount
R2 R3 C5 C4 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
9 1A BA RCODE_Tx D if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
10
11 TH_RES_SENSOR THH ZH
1.2mm CN12 1.2mm CN2
12 Z_RES_SENSOR TH home sensor Z home sensor
1 1
1
HE14 12cts
2 2
3 3
4 4
TH_HOME_SENSOR 5 Z_HOME_SENSOR 5
C3 JST B5B-PH-K- S JST B5B-PH-K- S
100pF C27
100pF
V CC
V CC NC NC NC NC
R14 R15 C32 C31
if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
NC
ZR
R7 R8 C16 C15 1.2mm CN3 NC
if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
1
1
THT 2
1.2mm CN8
TH high t sensor 3
1 4
1
2 Z_RES_SENSOR NC 5
3 C30 JST B5B-PH-K- S
4 100pF
TH_HIGHT_ SENSOR 5
C14 JST 05FE-ST- V K-N
100pF
V CC V CC
TX
1.2mm
1
V CC C20 R9 C19 C18 NC NC NC NC

NFM40R01C101 100pF 10K 100pF 100pF R5 R6 C12 C11
2
L2 if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF

CN6 THR
GND
1 3 1.2mm CN9 NC
BA RCODE_Tx D OUT IN 1 TH sens or
2 1
1
reserve d
3 2
4 3 Modification :
L1
3 1 5 4 Ajout du condensateur C36 de 10µF/10 V en boitier B.
GND
BA RCODE_RxD IN OUT 6 TH_RES_SENSOR NC 5 Ajout du condensateur C37 de 100nF en boitier 0805.

7 C10 JST B5B-PH-K- S
NFM40R01C101 8 100pF
9 ADIL INSTRUMENTS
2
10 Title
1
JST B10B-PH- K-S DIA90 4 SA MPLING A RM CONNECTION BOA RD Z

1.2mm
RX Size Document Number Rev
A3 DA E 001 E/3 3
Date: Friday, June 07, 2002 Sheet 1 of 1

VCC
CN1 Découplage des signaux des connecteurs

2A
1 2A SOL_POS NC
CN5 et CN6
2 2A SOL_POS
R1 R4 C7 C4
3 2A SOL_NEG
2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF C35 100pF
4 2A SOL_NEG
5 2A MOT_POS OUT1A_Z
6 2A MOT_NEG
XP CN10 C33 100pF
7 2A OUT1A_X
1.2mm
8 2A OUT1A_X 1 OUT2A_Z
1
9 2A SENSE1_X 2 X posit ion sensor C30 100pF
10 2A SENSE1_X 3
11 2A OUT2A_X 4 SENSE1_Z
12 2A OUT2A_X X_POS_SENSOR 5 C28 100pF
13 2A SENSE2_X
C1 JST B5B-PH-K- S
14 2A SENSE2_X SENSE2_Z
TPA 100pF
15 2A OUT1A_Z
1.2mm C26 100pF
16 2A OUT1A_Z
VCC
1
17 2A SENSE1_Z OUT1A_TH
SENSE1_Z U1F
18 2A C24 100pF
19 2A OUT2A_Z
12 13
20 2A OUT2A_Z ADAPTATOR_SENSOR_TRIGGERED A DAPTATOR_SENSOR NC OUT2A_TH
21 2A SENSE2_Z
R2 R5 C8 C5 C22 100pF
22 2A SENSE2_Z
74HC14A /SO 2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF
23 2A OUT1A_TH SENSE1_TH
24 2A OUT1A_TH
XH CN11 C20 100pF
25 2A SENSE1_TH
V CC 1.2mm
26 2A SENSE1_TH 1 SENSE2_TH
1
1.2mm
27 2A OUT2A_TH 2 X home sensor
1
U1E C37 100pF
28 2A OUT2A_TH 3 V CC
29 2A SENSE2_TH 4
10 11
30 1A SENSE2_TH X_HOME_SENSOR 5
VCC C36 100pF
31 1A C2 CN5
JST B5B-PH-K- S Z_POS_SENSOR
32 100pF 2A
X_POS_SENSOR 74HC14A /SO OUT1A_Z
33 + C48 C49 1 2A C34 100pF
34 X_HOME_SENSOR 10µF/10V 2 2A OUT2A_Z
100nF VCC
35 OPEN_DOOR_SENSOR 3 2A SENSE1_Z Z_HOME_SENSOR
36 Z_POS_SENSOR 4 2A SENSE2_Z
C32 100pF
37 1A Z_HOME_SENSOR 5 2A OUT1A_TH
38 6 2A OUT2A_TH TH_POS_SENSOR
39 TH_POS_SENSOR 7 2A SENSE1_TH
R3 R6 C9 C6 C31 100pF
40 TH_HOME_SENSOR 8 SENSE2_TH
2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF
41 TH_HEIGHT_SENSOR TH_HOME_SENSOR
HE14 8cts
42 1A ADAPTATOR_SENSOR_TRIGGERED
C29 100pF
43 DL CN12
44 BA RCODE_RxD TH_HEIGHT_SENSOR
GND 1.2mm
45 1A BA RCODE_Tx D 1
1.2mm C27 100pF
1
46 2 Door lo cking
1
CLOSED_DOOR_SENSOR U1D A DAPTATOR_SENSOR

47 3 sensor
48 RA CK_IN_SENSOR_TRIGGERED 4
8 9 C25 100pF
49 1A RA CK_OUT_SENSOR_TRIGGERED OPEN_DOOR_SENSOR 5
50 BARCODE_RxD
C3 JST B5B-PH-K- S
74HC14A /SO 100pF C23 100pF
HE10 50cts
BARCODE_Tx D
VCC
C47 C45 CN6 C21 100pF
100pF 100pF VCC
1 RACK_OUT_SENSOR
CN4 Z_POS_SENSOR
2A NC 2 C19 100pF
OUT1A _X 2A 1 3 Z_HOME_SENSOR
R7 R13 C16 C13
OUT2A _X 2 4 TH_POS_SENSOR RACK_IN_SENSOR
2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF
3 Moteur X 5 TH_HOME_SENSOR
2A 4 6 TH_HIGHT_ SENSOR
RP CN7
SENSE1_X 2A 5 7 A DAPTATOR_SENSOR
1.2mm
SENSE2_X 6 1 Rack 8 BARCODE_RxD
1
2 9 BARCODE_Tx D
C38 C39 JST B6B-EH-A U1C positio n
100pF 100pF 3 10
sensor
6 5 4 11 R17 NC
CLOSED_DOOR_SENSOR 5 12 RACK_OUT_SENSOR
RACK_IN_SENSOR
C10 R10 NC JST B5B-PH-K- S HE14 12cts
2A 74HC14A /SO 100pF 4.7K 0R0
R16 NC
C42 VCC
100pF
CN2 0R0
SOL_POS
C44 1 Solenoi d for door l ocking
D1 47nF (2220 ) p lastique 2 R8 R14 C17 C14
SMBJ33A 3 2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF
SOL_NEG JST B3B-PH-K-S
RI CN8
C40 1.2mm
100pF 2A 1
1
U1A 2 Rack in put

3 sensor
2 1 4
RACK_IN_SENSOR_TRIGGERED 5
C43 C11 R11 NC JST B5B-PH-K- S
100pF 74HC14A /SO 100pF 4.7K
CN3
MOT_POS 2A VCC
NC 2A 1 Rack po sitionning D C motor RACK_IN_SENSOR
C46
D2 47nF (2220 ) p lastique 2
SMBJ33A JST B2B-PH-K-S Modifications :
MOT_NEG
R9 R15 C18 C15 Ajout du condensateur C48 10µF/10Ven boitier B
C41 2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF Ajout du condensateur C49 100nF en boitier 0805
100pF Remplacement du connecteur CN2 JST B2B-PH-K-S par un
RO CN9
1.2mm JST B3B-PH-K-S
1
DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR replaced by OPEN_DOOR_SENSOR
1
2 Rack ou tput
U1B
3 sensor RACK_POS_SENSOR replaced by CLOSED_DOOR_SENSOR
4 3 4
RACK_OUT_SENSOR_TRIGGERED 5 ADIL INSTRUMENTS
C12 R12 NC JST B5B-PH-K- S
74HC14A /SO 100pF 4.7K Title
DIA 904 SAMPLING ARM CONNECTION BOARD X
RACK_OUT_SENSOR Size Document Number Rev
A3 DA E 002 E/3 3
Date: Friday, October 25, 2002 Sheet 1 of 1

VCC
VCC GND CN4 CN3
1.2mm 1.2mm
PT100_HEAT_S1 1 PT100_EXT_S1 1
1
PT100_HEAT_S2 2 PT100_EXT_S2 2
C19 PT100_HEAT_S3 3 PT100_EXT_S3 3
R2 R1 C17 C22
NC 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF 4 4
VCC
C39 C41 C44 JST B4B-EH-A C38 C40 C43 JST B4B-EH-A
+
CN5 CAMO CAMI 100pF 100pF 100pF HE AT S 100pF 100pF 100pF EX T S
10µF/10V 1.2mm 1.2mm CN9
1
1
2 1
3 CAM_FLAG 2
U1A
4 3
5 TACKY_A 4
2 1
6 CAM_FLAG 5 TAO TAI
7 TACKY_B
C24 JST B5B-PH-K-S 1.2mm 1.2mm C20
8
1
74HC14A /SO 100pF CA M S C21 100pF
9 SENSOR_0
U1B 100pF CN8
10 SENSOR_1
11 SENSOR_2 VCC 1
4 3
12 FRONT_DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR TACKY_A 2
13 3
HP_SENSOR_SUPPLY U1C
14 VCC C23 4
74HC14A /SO
15 6 5 100pF JST B4B-PH-K-S
16 HP_SENSOR_POS TACKY_B HP P E
17
18 HP_SENSOR_NEG
74HC14A /SO
19 R10 R9 C45 C48
1
20 HP_SENSOR_GND
20K 150 100pF 100pF
21 1.2mm 1.2mm
22 PT100_HEAT_S1
TBO TBI
23 FDL CN1
24 PT100_HEAT_S2
1.2mm
25 1
1
26 PT100_HEAT_S3 2 C31 C27
27 3 100pF R3 100pF
28 PT100_EXT_S1 4 0R0 CN6
29 FRONT_DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR 5
2
L1
30 PT100_EXT_S2 HP_SENSOR_SUPPLY 1
C47 JST B5B-PH-K-S
GND
31 100pF F DOOR S 1 3 2
32 PT100_EXT_S3 HP_SENSOR_NEG OUT IN 3
33 NFM40R01C101 4
34 VCC 5
NFM40R01C101 6
HE10 34 CTS
1 3 JST B6B-PH-K-S
GND
HP_SENSOR_POS OUT IN HP S
VCC
HP_SENSOR_GND
L2 C34 C37
C18 100pF 100pF
2
S0I S1I S2I
VCC
S0O 1.2mm 1.2mm 1.2mm C26
1
1.2mm 100nF R4 R5 R6 R7 100pF
1
10K 10K 10K 10K

U1D CN7
VCC 1
8 9
SENSOR_0 2
S1O
1.2mm 3
4
1
74HC14A /SO
5
U1E
6
10 11 R8 Molex 70543
SENSOR_1 HP V S
S2O 0R0 C25 C29 C32 C35 C28 C30 C33 C36
1.2mm NC 100nf 100nF 100nF 100nF 100pF 100pf 100pf 100pf
1
74HC14A /SO
U1F
12 13
SENSOR_2
74HC14A /SO
FRONT_DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR
C5 C3
100pF 100pF HP VAL VE
CN14
2A C13 C9
OUT1A_HPV 8 100pF 100pF
2A 7 CN11 1A
CN12 OUT2A_HPV MIXING_VALVE_POS
6 2A CN15
1 HP_PUMP_POS 5 HEATER_POS 1 C12
2 HP_PUMP_POS SENSE1_HPV 2A 4 C15 2 1
D2 47nF (2220)
3 HP_PUMP_POS 3 2
Molex 5566-02 SMBJ33A
4 HP_PUMP_POS SENSE2_HPV 2A 2
HP_PUMP_NEG MIXING_VALVE_NEG JST B2B-PH-K-S
5 1 100pF 2A 1A LP M V
6 HP_PUMP_NEG HP V M
C8 C11 C10
7 HP_PUMP_NEG
100pF 100pF Molex 6373 8cts C14 100pF
8 HP_PUMP_NEG
9 MIXING_VALVE_POS
CN10
10 MIXING_VALVE_NEG
100pF
11 OUT1A_HPV
C2 1 Modificat ion :
12 OUT1A_HPV 2 5 La résistance R8 n'est plus montée
100pF C16
13 SENSE1_HPV
SENSE1_HPV Molex 5566-02
14 Im ax = 4A HP PUM P
15 OUT2A_HPV HP_PUMP_POS
100pF C46 4 Remplacement de la valeur de la rési stance R10 elle passe
16 OUT2A_HPV
17 SENSE2_HPV CN16 2A 100pF de 2.2K a 20K
D1 C4 1 2 1A CN2
18 SENSE2_HPV + + C6 SOL_B_POS
SMBJ33A 47nF (2220) 3 4
19 HEATER_POS + + 1 3 Retournement du connecteur CN14, Les sorti es sont sur
C42
20 HEATER_POS 2
Molex 5566-04 CN13 D3 47nF (2220) les broches 1, 3,5,7. La mise en série des bobines se fait sur
21 HEATER_NEG HP P M 3
100pF SMBJ33A
22 HEATER_NEG HP_PUMP_NEG Im ax = 4A 1
JST B3B-PH-K-S les broches 2 et 6, 4 et 8.
23 SOL_B_POS HEATER_NEG 2A 2 SOL_B_NEG 1A SO L
C1
24 SOL_B_NEG
100pF C7 Molex 5566-02 C49
HE10 24 CTS 100pF 100pF ADIL INSTRUMENTS
Title
DIA904 HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTION BOARD

A3 DAE003E/5 5
L20015501 Service Manual C - 10

HE10 26cts
1 OUT1A_SYR
C14 C24 C18
2 OUT1A_SYR
100pF
3 SENSE1_SY R
100pF 100pF
4 SENSE1_SY R 1A
OUT2A_SYR SY RINGE_VA LVE_POS CN3
5 2A
OUT2A_SYR CN5 OUT1A_SYR
6 2A 1
7 SENSE2_SY R 1 SENSE1_SY R 2A 2 SYR M
D5 C16
8 SENSE2_SY R 2 SENSE2_SY R 3
SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) p lastique
9 SYRINGE_VA LV E_POS OUT2A_SYR 4
SYRINGE_VA LV E_NEG JST B2B-PH-K- S
10 3W V 2A
LIQUID_PUMP_POS Panduit idc 4 cts
11 1A C20 C22
12 LIQUID_PUMP_NEG SY RINGE_VA LVE_NEG
13 PINCH_VA LV E_1_POS
V CC C13 100pF 100pF
14 PINCH_VA LV E_1_NEG
1.2mm 100pF
1
19 V CC
20
21 SYR_HOME_SENSOR
C4
22 100pF
23 L_VA C_SENSOR_SUPPLY
A GND_V AC_SENSOR
1
24 GND 1A
25 L_VA C_SIGNAL PINCH_VA LVE_3_POS
1.2mm
26 C9
CN4 100pF CN9
D2 C6
1A SMBJ33A 47nF (2220) p lastique 1
LIQUID_PUMP_POS 2
JST B2B-PH-K-S
CN6 RED PV
D3 C11 1A
1 PINCH_VA LVE_3_NEG
SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) p lastique
2 C2
JST B2B-PH-K- S 100pF
LIQ P
1A
LIQUID_PUMP_NEG
C7
100pF
C3
100pF
1A
PINCH_VALVE_2_POS
CN8
D1 C5 1A
SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) plastique 1A 1
2
JST B2B-PH-K- S
YELL PV
1A
PINCH_VALVE_2_NEG
C1
V CC 100pF
if hall sensor is R1 R2 C27 C21

mount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
SY R CN2 C10
1.2mm 100pF
1 Syringe home
1
2 sensor 1A
3 PINCH_VALV E_1_POS
4
SY R_HOME_SENSOR 5
CN7
C19 Panduit idc 5 cts D4 C12
100pF SYR M SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) plastique 1
2
JST B2B-PH-K- S
GREEN PV
1A
PINCH_VALV E_1_NEG
C8
100pF
A GND VA C
1.2mm 1.2mm
1
VACUUM SENSOR
U1
L_VA C_SIGNA L 1
AGND_VA C_SENSOR 2
L_V A C_SENSOR_SUPPLY 3
C17 4
5
6
1
VDD 100nF MPX5100 DP CASE 8 67C-05 iss ue F

1.2mm
10µF/10V
+
C15 CN1
1 ADIL INSTRUMENTS
2 Title
3 DIA 904 SYRINGE CONNECTION BOARD
4
C26 C25 C23 JST B4B-PH-K-S Size Document Number Rev
100pF 100pF 100pF VAC S A3 DAE 004 E/2 2
Date: Friday, June 0 7, 2002 Sheet 1 of 1

C12 VCC
1.2mm
+
VCC
1
CN4 10µF/10V
1 D_VA C_ SENSOR_SUPPLY
2 D_VA C_ SIGNAL2
3 D_VA C_ SIGNAL1
R7 R9 C20 C18
4 AGND_V AC_SENSOR NC 2.2K 825R 100pF 100pF
5 VCC
6 BD1
7 BUB_DET_1 Bubble detector 1
1.2mm Grain de caf e CN1
8 BUB_DET_2
1
9 BUB_DET_3 1
1
10 JP3 2 2
11 D_VA CUUM_PUMP_POS 3
12 4
13 D_VA CUUM_PUMP_NEG BUB_DET_1 5
3
14 C16 JST B5B-PH-K-S
100pF R8
HE10 14 cts 1K NC
D_VAC_SENSOR_SUPPLY
1
GND
1.2mm
VCC
U1
1
2
3 R4 R6 C14 C13
4 NC 2.2K 825R 100pF 100pF
5
AGND VA C1 6 BD2
1.2mm 1.2mm MPX5100DP CASE 867C-0 5 issue F 1.2mm Grain de caf e CN3 Bubble detector 2
1
1
1
JP2 2 2
3
CN2
4
VA CUUM_SIGNAL_1 1 BUB_DET_2 5
3
AGND_VA C_SENSOR 2 C11 JST B5B-PH-K-S
D_VAC_SENSOR_SUPPLY 3 100pF R5
C15 4 1K NC
D_VAC_SENSOR_SUPPLY
JST B4B-PH-K- S
C21 C19 C17
100pF 100pF 100pF 100nF
1
1.2mm
VDD
VCC
U2
R1 R3 C10 C9
1 NC 2.2K 825R 100pF 100pF
2
3 BD3
4 1.2mm Grain de caf e CN6 Bubble detector 3
5
1
6 1
1
VA C2 JP1 2 2
MPX5100DP CASE 867C-0 5 issue F
1.2mm 3
4
1
BUB_DET_3 5
3
C8 JST B5B-PH-K-S
100pF R2
CN5 1K NC
VA CUUM_SIGNAL_2 1 D_VAC_SENSOR_SUPPLY
AGND_VA C_SENSOR 2
D_VA C_SENSOR_SUPPLY 3
C7 4
JST B4B-PH-K- S
C3 C2 C1 100nF
100pF 100pF 100pF
C6 3 : Changement de valeurs des résistances

100pF Vaccum Pump
CN8 R3,R6,R9 442R -> 825R 1%
D_VA CUUM_PUMP_POS 2A 2 : Changement de valeur des résistances
C5 2A 1
2 R3, R6, R9 390R -> 442R 1%
D1 47nF (2220) plastique
SMBJ33A JST B2B-PH-K- S ADIL instruments
D_VA CUUM_PUMP_NEG Title
C4 CN7 DIA 904 DEGA SSER CONNECTION BOA RD
100pF
1 Size Document Number Rev
2 A3 DAE 005 E /3 3
Molex 5566-02
Date: Thursday, Febr uary 13, 2003 Sheet 1 of 1

R27
E
PSW0
10K VC CAFF
PSW1 VCCAFF VC CAFF
PSW2 R28 B Q2
PSW3 10K BC 857B
NFM41P11C204T1
15 CL2(SHFCLK)
+12LCD R34 D2 D3
F3 B1 PSW4 R21 VC CAFF
+ C11 20K BAT54S BAT54S
FLM(FLM)
E
+12LCD 1
C
C1 10uFCTT16V 10K
CL1(LP)
RXD
TXD
2 100nF R10 R14 GND1
GND GND B2 ANL0 B Q1
GND 3 8K2 1K C39 R22 10K BC 857B
D0
D1
D2
15 D3
M
GND 4 NFM40R01C101T1 1 4,7nF NC
GND 680pF
+5LCD 5 +5LCD 2
12
12
DS90C031TM RXD F4 C17 C21 MOLEX 52043-0410
4
6 3 GND1 GND1 GND1
C
F2 NFM41P11C204T1 + C12
C
U2 VC C R11 R15 B7
7 C2 10uFCTT16V 4
TXD ANL1 R23 GND1 TC1
GND 8 5 1
EN
EN
8K2 1K
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
EN1
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
EN1
D3 100nF NC B Q4 TC2
9 C3 C4 NFM40R01C101T1 F5 6 10K 2
D2 680pF 4,7nF C37 BC 847B TC3
10 7 C22 R24 3
D1 GND C18 VCCAFF TC4
DO1+
DO2+
DO3+
DO4+
DO1+
DO2+
DO3+
DO4+
100nF 100nF
DO1-
DO2-
DO3-
DO4-
DO1-
DO2-
DO3-
DO4-
11 8 GND1 GND1 10K GND1 4
E
D0 R12 R16 GND1
E
12 GND 9 10K R29
U1 GND ANL2 VC CAFF VC CAFF
13 10 8K2 1K R30 Q3
DS90C031TM B
14 NFM41P11C204T1 4,7nF C40 10K BC 857B
VCCPC HE10-10C 680pF
15
2
3
6
5
10
11
14
13
2
3
6
5
10
11
14
13
F6 C19 C23 NC D4
16 GND1 GND1 BAT54S
C
B5 R13 R17
17
C
+ C13 ANL3 R25
18 C5 10uFCTT16V 1 8K2 1K NC Q5 D1
B
19 100nF 2 4,7nF C38 10K BC 847B BAT54S
680pF
20 JST B 2B-PH-SM3-TB C24 GND1 R26
C20
21 GND1 GND1 10K GND1
GND B005
E
22
23 1
GND1 GND1 B007
RX
EEPCK
TX
EEPSO
EEPCS
24 2 GND1
EEPSI
TC1
25 NC JP3 JP4 1
TC2
26 R31 NC NC 2
TC3
27 VC CAFF R32 10K 3
VCCAFF VC CAFF TC4
28 10K GND1 4
29
NC
30
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
31 VC CAFF
U11
32
8
33
UC KI
UC KO
RXD
EROMSO
PnPCEL
VC C
EROMCS
V SS
EROMSI
TXD
EROMCK
OS0
OS1
NC
NC
NC
VC C U12
34
CL2(SHFCLK) +12LCD U5
35 +5LCD
VCC
FLM(FLM) NC 1 48 EEPCS 1
36 NC NC CS
M 2 47 EEPCK 2
NC U4 37 GND VC CAFF S/P NC SK
CL1(LP) U6 ANL0 3 46 EEPSO 3
38 NC VC CPC EMSR0 NC DI
U3 ANL1 4 45 EEPSI 4
GND
NC GND 39 EMSR1 NC DO
ANL2 5 44
40 EMSR2 NC
GND ANL3 6 43
41 B3 EMSR3 NC
7 42 PSW0 NC
42 NC PSW0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
70246-2621 8 41
43 NC NC
5
9 40
44 NC NC GND1
10 39
45 NC NC
11 38
46 VC CAFF AVCC NC VCCAFF
12 37
47 AVREF NC
C25 GND1 13 36
2
B4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
48 GND1 AVSS NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
70247-2601 14 35 U13
49 VC CAFF GND1 VC CAFF CSEL NC
VC CAFF 15 34
50 PINT NC
16
VCC
100nF RX 16 33 EEPCS 3
RXINT NC CS
HARWIN M22-6122522 VC CAFF EEPCK 4
PnPINT1
PnPINT0
R1 SK
MOD0
MOD1
VCCAFF 18 EEPSO 5
PSW4
PSW3
PSW2
PSW1
ON-OFF DI
14
GND
RST
VSS
0 EEPSI 6
NC
NC
NC
NC
X0
X1
GND
VC CAFF DO
U18A U18B U18C GND1 9 10 RX
D7 +12LCD1 R2IN R2OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 14 13 CTS MB89635R1120
BAS21LT1 GND1 R1IN R1OUT
74HC 14 74HC 14 74HC14 S29390FAJ
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
C41 GND1 8 11 TX
U18D T2OUT T2IN
7
2.2uF 9 8 15 12
T1OUT T1IN GND1
7
PSW4
PSW3
PSW2
PSW1
GND1 74HC14 GND1
GND1 GND1 6 C31 GND1 GND1
CTS
RES
C2- 100nF X1
C29 7
R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 GND1 100nF -9VOUT
5 8MHz 4HSMX VC CAFF VC CAFF
L2 C2+
4
C1-
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
VC CAFF C28 NC VEEAFF C30 3 C34 22uFCTT35V 22uFCTT35V
VC CAFF +9VOUT
VCC
100nF 2 C32 C33 22pF 22pF C35 + C36 +
C1+ C7 C15
L1 D6 100nF
NC 100nF 100nF
LQH3C100K34 220nF STPS340U
JP6
U15 GND1 GND1
SP310ECT INV2
5
17
D5 R36 3 GND1 GND1
STPS340U VC CAFF IN+
330K 1% 1
ON/OFF
VIN
VSW
2
GND
4 3
SHDN FB NC
U7
GND
GND
C27 VC CAFF NC INV1 B9
10
14
15
10
14
15
+ C26 22uFCTT35V U8 1 F10 2 1 3
2
1
6
7
2
1
6
7
R35 +12LCD1 NC 12 IN+ RTHV 4

U14 DS90C 032TM DS90C 032TM
+
22uFCTT35V 3
LT1617ES5 20K 1% U9 U10 NFM41P11C204T1 2 4
GND HV 2
RI1-
RI2-
RI3-
RI4-
RI1-
RI2-
RI3-
RI4-
2
3
RI1+
RI2+
RI3+
RI4+
RI1+
RI2+
RI3+
RI4+
VC CAFF VC CAFF 1 GND1

GND GND1 1
16 8 16 8 RES 2 NC
VC C GND VC C GND RESET
3 CAV4C
VC C VCCAFF
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
+ C16
EN1
EN1
GND1 GND1 GND1 U16 INV3

EN
EN
C10
B8 GND1 MAX809_EUR T 1 5
IN+ RTHV
1 R19 VC CAFF RES VC CAFF 100nF 10uFCTT16V OUT1
3
2 4
2 82K VC CAFF GND OUT2
3
11
13
4
12
11
13
4
12
JP1 FLM(FLM)A R20

3 R33
D
1K INVTDKCXAL10L
1
NC 4 10K
GND GND GND1 CL1(LP)A GND1 U17
1
U18E
GND
JP2 JST B4B-PH-SM3-TB VOAFF
11 10 D3A CL2(SHFCLK)A CLR R37 VC CAFF
1 F11
VC C
NC D8 74HC14 D2A RX 2 7 ICSPData BKLGT G Q6 2 B6
BAS21LT1 GP5 GP0 100 IRLR014 12
GND1 GND1 2 D1A TX 3 6 ICSPCLK NC
GP4 GP1 1
DISPOFF
CI26 NC VEEAFF CLR 4 5 BKLGT R38 + C14

R39 C6
GND
GND
GP3 GP2 2
3
PCB NC GND1 GND1
CI14 NC CI18 NC CI22 NC VCCAFF
P1 330K VOAFF NC NC
VC CAFF
PCB PCB PCB NC
GND1
C42 13
U18F
12 D0A
GND1 PROG VCCAFF NC
1
12
2
F13 NC
NC
CI15 NC CI19 NC CI23 NC 74HC14 JP5 GND1

+
3
3
PCB PCB PCB R18 10uFCTT16V ICSPCLK GND1 GND1
3K9 5 C8 C9
CI16 NC CI20 NC CI24 NC ICSPData
CI1 NC CI3 NC CI5 NC CI7 NC 4
PCB PCB PCB 100nF 100nF GND1
3 GND1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
CI17 NC CI21 NC CI25 NC PCB PCB PCB PCB

CI2 NC CI4 NC CI6 NC CI8 NC 2 VCCAFF Title
PCB PCB PCB CLR GND1 LCD INTERNA L BOARD an d LCD INTERFA CE BOA RD
MOLEX 52044-1445 1
VEEAFF PCB PCB PCB PCB
B10 NC Size Document Number Rev
A3 DA E012E/2 + DA E013E/2 2
Date: Thur sday, March 13, 2003 Sheet 1 of 1

A13 A12
OUT1A_SYR SPI_IN PE0MC PE0MC C169
1 1 GND
SPI_OUT 100pF
2 GND 2
SENSE1_SYR SPI_CLK RES RES C178
3 3
SPI_OUT 100pF
4 4
OUT2A_SYR Micro MC Commande Moteurs Commande solenoides SPI_OUT C170
5 GND 5
DIA904-3.Sch DIA904-1.Sch DIA904-2.Sch SPI_IN NC
6 6
SENSE2_SYR CSCANHP OUT1A_X LIQUID PUMP LIQUID PUMP+ SPI_IN C179
7 CSCANHP OUT1A_X LIQUID PUMP LIQUID PUMP+ GND 7
SENSE1_X PINCH VALVE1 LIQUID PUMP- SPI_CLK NC
8 SENSE1_X PINCH VALVE1 LIQUID PUMP- 8
SYRINGE_VALVE+ IO1CPLD OUT2A_X PINCH VALVE2 CS0 SPI_CLK C188
SPI_IN
SPI_CLK
SPI_CLK
SPI_OUT
SPI_OUT
9 IO1CPLD PH_1_X PH_1_X OUT2A_X PINCH VALVE2 9
MC D3 adr: 285 SYRINGE_VALVE- FAN_S SENSE2_X D_VACUUM_PUMP PINCH VALVE1+ CS1 NC
10 FAN_S PH_2_X PH_2_X SENSE2_X D_VACUUM_PUMP PINCH VALVE1+ 10
LIQUID PUMP+ SYRINGE_VALVE PINCH VALVE1- CS2 CS0 C187
11 DISABLE_X DISABLE_X SYRINGE_VALVE PINCH VALVE1- 11
MC PT3 LIQUID PUMP- BARCODE RXD VREF_X RESERVE_VALVE CS3 100pF
12 BARCODE RXD I0_1_X I0_1_X VREF_X RESERVE_VALVE 12
PINCH VALVE1+ BARCODE TXD PINCH VALVE3 PINCH VALVE2+ DSYNC CS1 C195
13 BARCODE TXD I1_1_X I1_1_X PINCH VALVE3 PINCH VALVE2+ 13
MC D0 adr: 285 PINCH VALVE1- TXDTCRS SOL PINCH VALVE2- CS5 100pF
14 TXDTCRS I2_1_X I2_1_X SOL PINCH VALVE2- 14
PINCH VALVE2+ RXD MOT1 CS2 C206
15 RXD I3_1_X I3_1_X MOT1 VCC 15
MC D1 adr: 285 PINCH VALVE2- TXD0_HP MOT2 D_VACUUM_PUMP+ 100pF
16 TXD0_HP I0_2_X I0_2_X MOT2 D_VACUUM_PUMP+ GND 16
PINCH VALVE3+ RTS_HP LP MIXING VALVE1 D_VACUUM_PUMP- CS3 C207
17 RTS_HP I1_2_X I1_2_X LP MIXING VALVE1 D_VACUUM_PUMP-
MC D5 adr: 285 PINCH VALVE3- TXD_TC LP MIXING VALVE2 HE10-16 100pF
18 TXD_TC I2_2_X I2_2_X LP MIXING VALVE2
RTS_TC HP PUMP SYRINGE_VALVE+ A15 DSYNC C212
19 VCC RTS_TC I3_2_X I3_2_X HP PUMP SYRINGE_VALVE+
FAN SYRINGE_VALVE- SOL+ 100pF
20 GND CSPOT_X CSPOT_X FAN SYRINGE_VALVE- 1
MC PD3 SYR_HOME_SENSOR R+ HEATER1 CS5 C210
21 R+ HEATER1 2
R- OUT1A_Z HEATER2 RESERVE_VALVE+ SOL- MC D6 adr: 285 100pF
22 GND R- OUT1A_Z HEATER2 RESERVE_VALVE+ 3
LV PT1 T+ SENSE1_Z RESERVE_VALVE-
23 VDDA T+ PH_1_Z PH_1_Z SENSE1_Z RESERVE_VALVE- 4
CAV1 T- OUT2A_Z LIQUID PUMP_S MOT+ MC D1 adr: 286 -> 0:+ ,1:-
24 GNDA T- PH_2_Z PH_2_Z OUT2A_Z LIQUID PUMP_S 5
MC PAD3 WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL SENSE2_Z PINCH VALVE1_S PINCH VALVE3+ MOT- MC D2 adr: 286 -> 0:OFF ,1:ON
25 DISABLE_Z DISABLE_Z SENSE2_Z PINCH VALVE1_S PINCH VALVE3+ 6
CSHPPC PINCH VALVE2_S PINCH VALVE3- OUT1A_X
26 GND CSHPPC I0_1_Z I0_1_Z PINCH VALVE2_S PINCH VALVE3- 7
CSTC D_VACUUM_PUMP_S
CSTC I1_1_Z I1_1_Z D_VACUUM_PUMP_S 8
HE10-26 CSRACK SYRINGE_VALVE_S SOL+ SENSE1_X
CSRACK I2_1_Z I2_1_Z SYRINGE_VALVE_S SOL+ 9
A10 CS0 RESERVE_VALVE_S SOL-
CS0 I3_1_Z I3_1_Z RESERVE_VALVE_S SOL- 10
HP PUMP+ CS1 PINCH VALVE3_S OUT2A_X
1 CS1 I0_2_Z I0_2_Z PINCH VALVE3_S 11
CS2 SOL_S MOT+
2 CS2 I1_2_Z I1_2_Z SOL_S MOT+ 12
CS3 MOT_S MOT- SENSE2_X
3 CS3 I2_2_Z I2_2_Z MOT_S MOT- 13
HPPC PT3 DSYNC LP MIXING VALVE_S
4 DSYNC I3_2_Z I3_2_Z LP MIXING VALVE_S 14
HP PUMP- CS5 HP PUMP_S LP MIXING VALVE+ OUT1A_Z
5 CS5 HP PUMP_S LP MIXING VALVE+ 15
DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR OUT1A_TH FAN_S LP MIXING VALVE-
6 DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR OUT1A_TH FAN_S LP MIXING VALVE- 16
PE0MC SENSE1_TH HEATER_S SENSE1_Z
7 PE0MC PH_1_TH PH_1_TH SENSE1_TH HEATER_S 17
PE1MC OUT2A_TH HP PUMP+
8 PE1MC PH_2_TH PH_2_TH OUT2A_TH HP PUMP+ 18
HPPC PD0 (12v) LP MIXING VALVE+ PE3MC SENSE2_TH HP PUMP- OUT2A_Z
9 PE3MC DISABLE_TH DISABLE_TH SENSE2_TH HP PUMP- 19
HPPC PD1 (26v) LP MIXING VALVE- XTAL_MC
10 XTAL_MC I0_1_TH I0_1_TH 20
OUT1A_HPV RES SOLB1+ SENSE2_Z
11 RES I1_1_TH I1_1_TH SOLB1+ 21
VREF_X SOLB-
12 VREF_X I2_1_TH I2_1_TH SOLB- 22
SENSE1_HPV VAC_SIGNAL OUT1A_TH
13 VAC_SIGNAL I3_1_TH I3_1_TH 23
AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG HEATER+
14 AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG I0_2_TH I0_2_TH HEATER+ 24
OUT2A_HPV WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL HEATER- SENSE1_TH
15 WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL I1_2_TH I1_2_TH HEATER- 25
VREF_SYR
16 VREF_SYR I2_2_TH I2_2_TH 26
SENSE2_HPV LIQUID PUMP_S OUT2A_TH
17 LIQUID PUMP_S I3_2_TH I3_2_TH 27
PINCH VALVE1_S
18 PINCH VALVE1_S 28
HEATER+ PINCH VALVE2_S OUT1A_HPV SENSE2_TH
19 PINCH VALVE2_S OUT1A_HPV 29
TC RC1 D_VACUUM_PUMP_S SENSE1_HPV SPI_IN C236
20 D_VACUUM_PUMP_S PH_1_HPV PH_1_HPV SENSE1_HPV 30 GND
TC RC2 HEATER- SYRINGE_VALVE_S OUT2A_HPV 100pF
21 SYRINGE_VALVE_S PH_2_HPV PH_2_HPV OUT2A_HPV VCC 31
RESERVE_VALVE_S SENSE2_HPV Micro HPPC SPI_OUT C237
22 RESERVE_VALVE_S DISABLE_HPV DISABLE_HPV SENSE2_HPV GND 32
SOLB1+ PINCH VALVE3_S DIA904-4.Sch X_POS_SENSOR MC PD0 100pF
23 PINCH VALVE3_S I0_1_HPV I0_1_HPV 33
MC D4 adr: 285 SOLB- SOL_S X_HOME_SENSOR MC PD1 SPI_CLK C239
24 SOL_S I1_1_HPV I1_1_HPV 34
MOT_S CSHPPC HP PUMP DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR MC PE7 100pF
MOT_S I2_1_HPV I2_1_HPV CSHPPC HP PUMP 35
HE10-24 SPI_CLK Z_POS_SENSOR MC PD4 CSRACK C240
I3_1_HPV I3_1_HPV SPI_CLK 36
A9 HP_SENSOR SPI_IN LP MIXING VALVE1 Z_HOME_SENSOR MC PD5 100pF
HP_SENSOR I0_2_HPV I0_2_HPV SPI_IN LP MIXING VALVE1 37
LIQUID PUMP SPI_OUT LP MIXING VALVE2 TXDTCRS C241
1 VCC LIQUID PUMP I1_2_HPV I1_2_HPV SPI_OUT LP MIXING VALVE2 GND 38
PINCH VALVE1 TH_POS_SENSOR MC PAD4 100pF
2 GND PINCH VALVE1 I2_2_HPV I2_2_HPV 39
MC PT0 CAM FLAG IN PINCH VALVE2 XTAL_MC TH_HOME_SENSOR MC PAD5 PE1MC C242
3 PINCH VALVE2 I3_2_HPV I3_2_HPV XTAL_MC 40
D_VACUUM_PUMP RES TH_HIGHT_SENSOR MC PAD6 100pF
4 GND D_VACUUM_PUMP RES 41
TACHY A IN SYRINGE_VALVE OUT1A_SYR RXD ADAPTOR_SENSOR MC PD6 IO1CPLD C243
5 SYRINGE_VALVE OUT1A_SYR RXD 42
RESERVE_VALVE SENSE1_SYR TXD0_HP 100pF
6 GND RESERVE_VALVE PH_1_SYR PH_1_SYR SENSE1_SYR TXD0_HP NFM40R100pF GND 43 F1
TACHY B IN PINCH VALVE3 OUT2A_SYR PE3MC RTS_HP BARCODE RXD IO2CPLD C244
7 PINCH VALVE3 PH_2_SYR PH_2_SYR OUT2A_SYR PE3MC RTS_HP 44 F2
SOL SENSE2_SYR BARCODE TXD NFM40R100pF 100pF
8 GND SOL DISABLE_SYR DISABLE_SYR SENSE2_SYR 45
MC PT4 SENSOR IN 0 MOT1 IO3CPLD C245
9 MOT1 I0_1_SYR I0_1_SYR GND 46
MC PT5 SENSOR IN 1 MOT2 VREF_SYR HP_SENSOR RACK_POS_SENSOR MC PD2 100pF
10 MOT2 I1_1_SYR I1_1_SYR VREF_SYR HP_SENSOR 47
MC PT6 SENSOR IN 2 X_POS_SENSOR LP MIXING VALVE_S RACK_IN_SENSOR MC PD7
11 X_POS_SENSOR I2_1_SYR I2_1_SYR LP MIXING VALVE_S 48
MC PT7 FR D LOCK SENSOR X_HOME_SENSOR HP PUMP_S RACK_OUT_SENSOR MC PAD7
12 X_HOME_SENSOR I3_1_SYR I3_1_SYR HP PUMP_S 49
RACK_POS_SENSOR
13 GND RACK_POS_SENSOR I0_2_SYR I0_2_SYR 50
SYR_HOME_SENSOR CAM FLAG
14 VRef SYR_HOME_SENSOR I1_2_SYR I1_2_SYR CAM FLAG C233 C234 C235 C238
Z_POS_SENSOR TACHY A GND HE10-50
15 GND Z_POS_SENSOR I2_2_SYR I2_2_SYR TACHY A 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF
HP_SENSOR+ Z_HOME_SENSOR TACHY B A14
16 Z_HOME_SENSOR I3_2_SYR I3_2_SYR TACHY B
ADAPTOR_SENSOR R+
17 GND ADAPTOR_SENSOR CSPOT_SYR CSPOT_SYR 1
HP_SENSOR- RACK_IN_SENSOR R-
18 RACK_IN_SENSOR 2
TH_POS_SENSOR T+
19 GND TH_POS_SENSOR U1A 3 CI7 CI11
TH_HOME_SENSOR C265 Micro TC T-
20 GNDA TH_HOME_SENSOR 4
TH_HIGHT_SENSOR 1 2 CAM FLAG DIA904-5.Sch SPI_IN D I V E RS D I V E RS
21 GND TH_HIGHT_SENSOR 5
PT100HEAT1 RACK_OUT_SENSOR 74HC14SO R66 NC NC
22 RACK_OUT_SENSOR GND 6
SENSOR 0 10nF CAM FLAG IN CSTC HEATER1 SPI_OUT
23 GND SENSOR 0 U1F 10K CSTC HEATER1 7 CI8 CI10
PT100HEAT2 SENSOR 1 SPI_IN HEATER2
24 SENSOR 1 SPI_IN HEATER2 GND 8
SENSOR 2 13 12 TACHY A SPI_OUT FAN SPI_CLK D I V E RS D I V E RS
25 GND SENSOR 2 SPI_OUT FAN 9
FR D LOCK SENSOR 74HC14SO SPI_CLK NC NC
26 2V5 FR D LOCK SENSOR SPI_CLK GND 10
IO2CPLD TACHY A IN CSRACK
27 GND IO2CPLD U1B 11 CI6 CI12
PT100EXT1 IO3CPLD RXD PT100HEAT1 TXDTCRS
28 IO3CPLD RXD PT100HEAT1 12
GEN FAN_S 3 4 TACHY B TXD_TC PT100HEAT2 PE1MC MC PE1 D I V E RS D I V E RS
29 GND GEN FAN_S TXD_TC PT100HEAT2 13
PT100EXT2 BUB1 74HC14SO RTS_TC NC NC
30 BUB1 RTS_TC GND 14
BUB2 TACHY B IN PT100EXT1 IO1CPLD
31 GND BUB2 U1E PT100EXT1 15 CI9 CI13
BUB3 C266 XTAL_MC PT100EXT2
32 2V5 BUB3 XTAL_MC PT100EXT2 GND 16
CSPBUB1 11 10 SENSOR 0 RES IO2CPLD D I V E RS D I V E RS
33 GND CSPBUB1 RES 17
CSPBUB2 74HC14SO R165 NC NC
34 VCC CSPBUB2 GND 18
VCC +12 +24 +26 CSPBUB3 10nF SENSOR IN 0 FAN_S IO3CPLD
PT7 PT8 PT9 PT10 HE10-34 CSPBUB3 U1C 10K FAN_S 19 CI15 CI16
BUB_DET_1 C267 HEATER_S
BUB_DET_1 HEATER_S GND 20
NC 5V NC +12V NC 24V NC 26V A1 BUB_DET_2 5 6 SENSOR 1 D I V E RS D I V E RS
BUB_DET_2
+ + + + BUB_DET_3 74HC14SO R166 HE10-20 NC NC
1 GND BUB_DET_3
10nF SENSOR IN 1 13K pour INA122UA A16
2 U1D 10K 4K75 1% CI2 CI18
C268 GEN FAN- R-
3 1
9 8 SENSOR 2 R7 R9 D I V E RS D I V E RS
4 2
GND GND GND GND X_POS_SENSOR C262 74HC14SO R167 C1 T+ NC NC
C11 C10 C8 C9 5 GND GND 1 GND 3 CI3 CI17
100pF GND10nF SENSOR IN 2 100pF U4
ECEV1VA101UP ECEV1VA101UP 6 10K 4
8 1 R+ D I V E RS D I V E RS
ECEV1VA101UP ECEV1VA101UP 7 RG+ RG- 5
X_HOME_SENSOR C263 C232 WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL 7 2 HP_SENSOR- NC NC
8 GND GND VDDA VCC IN- 6
100pF C2 100pF 6 3 HP_SENSOR+ T-
9 +24 OUT IN+ 7 CI1 CI19
5 4
10 VCC GND 2V5 REF VEE 8
RACK_POS_SENSOR C92 C88 DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR D I V E RS D I V E RS
DE1 11 +26 GND GND GND 9
R1 100pF 100nF 100pF MAX4194ESA GNDA NC NC
12 -12 10
HP
GND 470 VCC 13 +12 CI20 CI4
SYR_HOME_SENSOR C230 C95 CAM FLAG IN PT2 C18 HE10-10
14 GND GND
CL150UR3000 100pF 100pF R12 CAV1 GND GNDA A6 D I V E RS D I V E RS
15 VDDA GNDA
16 VCC PT3 PT4 GND 1 NC NC
DE4 Z_POS_SENSOR C264 C98 TACHY A IN 12K1 1% 100nF
R3 GND GND CAV1 CAV1 2
MOLEX 39-28-1163 100pF 100pF CI21 CI14
GND 2K7 +24 GNDA 3
D I V E RS D I V E RS
+24 4
11
CL150UR3000 Z_HOME_SENSOR C86 C99 TACHY B IN 10K GND GNDA
GND GND R10 R11 +12 5 NC NC
100pF 100pF C12
DE5 100nF VCC 6
R4 A2 2 GND
2V5 10K 1% GNDA C61
ADAPTOR_SENSOR C89 C108 HP_SENSOR+ R15 1 HP_SENSOR MOLEX 39-28-1063
GND 3K3 +26 1 GND GND GND 10K 100pF
100pF 100pF 3 R14
2 10K 1% U5A
CL150UR3000 R20 R51 A18
3 C17
RACK_IN_SENSOR C93 C110 HP_SENSOR- TLV2374ID VCC
DE2 4 GND GND 2V5 1M 100nF VCC 150 1
R2 100pF Détecteurs de bulles 100pF C19 A17
5 +12 GND 2
4
DIA904-6.Sch R19 RESERVE_VALVE+
GND 1K2 +12 6 20K 1% GNDA VRef 1 R46 C59VCC 3
TH_POS_SENSOR C90 BUB_DET1 GNDA RESERVE_VALVE-
7 GND BUB_DET1 2 2K2 100pF GND 4
CL150UR3000 100pF BUB_DET2 VDDA 100nF V1 V2
8 VCC BUB_DET2 5
PT11 BUB_DET3 U6 PT5 PT6 NC
DE3 BUB_DET3 GND C54
R5 NC MOLEX 39-28-1083 TH_HOME_SENSOR C87 BUB1 CAV1 CAV1 A11 FR D LOCK SENSOR NC
GND BUB1 100pF
A3 A4 100pF BUB2 GNDA
GND NC -12 BUB2 VDDA 1
BUB3 CSCANHP 1 2 VAC_SIGNAL
1 GND 1 GND BUB3 CS CH0 2
NC -12V TH_HIGHT_SENSOR C91 SPI_CLK 7 3 AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG C146
2 2 GND CLK CH1 2V5 3 GND
100pF CSPBUB1 100pF
3 +12 3 +12 CSPBUB1 GNDA 4
CSPBUB2 SPI_IN 6 8 VAC_SIGNAL C147 GND
4 VCC 4 VCC CSPBUB2 DOUT VCC Vref VCC 5
RACK_OUT_SENSOR C94 CSPBUB3 SPI_OUT 5 4 100pF
GND CSPBUB3 DIN GND GNDA GND 6
MOLEX 39-28-1043 MOLEX 39-28-1043 100pF BUB_DET1 BUB_DET1 C155
7
A5 SPI_CLK BUB_DET2 100pF
SPI_CLK 8
SENSOR IN 0 C101 SPI_OUT BUB_DET3 BUB_DET2 C156
1 GND GND SPI_OUT GND 9
100pF LTC1288CS8 100pF
2 27K GND 10
BUB_DET_1 R45 D_VACUUM_PUMP+ BUB_DET3 C158
3 +12 BUB_DET_1 11
SENSOR IN 1 C102 BUB_DET_2 100pF
4 +24 GND BUB_DET_2 GND 12
CI5 100pF BUB_DET_3 D_VACUUM_PUMP-
5 BUB_DET_3 U21C 13
NC R39
6 VCC GND 14
SENSOR IN 2 C106 9 C52
+24 GND 100pF 1K GNDA
MOLEX 39-28-1063 100pF A9a GEN FAN_S 8 HE10-14
10 R6
1 VRef
A7 A8 FR D LOCK SENSOR C107 HP_SENSOR+ GEN FAN-
GND 2 1K
100pF HP_SENSOR- TLV2374ID
1 -12 1 +12 3 C3
GEN FAN- +
2 +12 2 4 GNDA 1uFCTT16V Title
3 GND PT15 5 GND INTERFA CE BOA RD
JST B2B-PH-SM3-TB NC GNDA
NC NC
A3 DA E 010 E/3 3

C208
GND VCC
100nF
8
R147
10 21 PU1 SENSE2_X
VCP1 OUT2B 1.2 SENSE2_X
VCC
C196
10nF C253
11 20 100pF
VCP2 SENSE2 GND
C197 12 C251
GND VBOOT 100pF
100nF 14 OUT2A_X
OUT2A OUT2A_X
C111
GND VCC
C209 7 35 SENSE1_X 100nF
GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_X
1nF
8
C252
R85
2 34 PU2 100pF 10 21 PU7 SENSE2_HPV
PH_1_X PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND VCP1 OUT2B 1.2 SENSE2_HPV
VCC
4 C26
I0_1_X I0_1 R134
3 C249 10nF C154
I1_1_X I1_1 100pF 100pF
32 5 OUT1A_X 11 20
I2_1_X I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_X VCP2 SENSE2 GND
33
I3_1_X I3_1 C151
17 13 C114 12
PH_2_X PH_2 VS GND VBOOT 100pF
15 31 100nF 14 OUT2A_HPV
I0_2_X I0_2 VS +24 OUT2A OUT2A_HPV
16 VCCR62
I1_2_X I1_2
23 28
I2_2_X I2_2 VREF1 NC
22 26 VREF_X C23 7 35 SENSE1_HPV
I3_2_X I3_2 VREF2 VREF_X GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_HPV
6 1nF
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
DISABLE_X DISABLE R63
R59 C144
EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C171 NC 2 34 PU8 100pF
R157 100nF 51K PH_1_HPV PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND
U43 4 R78
2K2 I0_1_HPV I0_1 C145
L6258 U37 3
I1_1_HPV I1_1 100pF
GND 1 8 32 5 OUT1A_HPV
C67 L H I2_1_HPV I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_HPV
7 GND 33
VCC W I3_1_HPV I3_1 VCC
29
30
25
24
10nF GND 3 6 17 13
CS VDD VCC PH_2_HPV PH_2 VS R23
4 5 15 31
DIN SCLK I0_2_HPV I0_2 VS +24 12K
16
C70 I1_2_HPV I1_2
MAX5400EKA-T 23 28
R145 R146 100nF I2_2_HPV I2_2 VREF1
22 26
330K 330K I3_2_HPV I3_2 VREF2
6
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
C189 C190 DISABLE_HPV DISABLE R24
GND
EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C22 10K
R17 U13 100nF
470pF 470pF 2K2 L6258
GND
CSPOT_X C29 GND
SPI_OUT VCC
29
30
25
24
10nF
SPI_CLK
C199
GND VCC
100nF
R79 R81
8
330K 330K
R150
10 21 PU3 SENSE2_Z C109 C112
VCP1 OUT2B 1.2 SENSE2_Z
VCC
C200
10nF C257
11 20 100pF 470pF 470pF
VCP2 SENSE2 GND
C201 12 C255
GND VBOOT 100pF
100nF 14 OUT2A_Z
OUT2A OUT2A_Z
C198 7 35 SENSE1_Z
GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_Z
1nF
C256
2 34 PU4 100pF
PH_1_Z PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND
4 R135
I0_1_Z I0_1 C254
3
I1_1_Z I1_1 100pF
32 5 OUT1A_Z
I2_1_Z I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_Z
33
I3_1_Z I3_1 VCC
17 13 C182
PH_2_Z PH_2 VS R64 GND VCC
15 31 100nF
I0_2_Z I0_2 VS +24 12K
16
8
I1_2_Z I1_2
23 28 R123
I2_2_Z I2_2 VREF1
22 26 10 21 PU9 SENSE2_SYR
I3_2_Z I3_2 VREF2 VCP1 OUT2B 1.2 SENSE2_SYR
VCC
6 C184
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
DISABLE_Z DISABLE R60 10nF C220
EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C177 10K 11 20 100pF

R155 100nF VCP2 SENSE2 GND
U44
2K2 L6258 C185 12 C218
GND VBOOT 100pF
GND 100nF 14 OUT2A_SYR
C68 OUT2A OUT2A_SYR
GND
VCC
29
30
25
24
10nF
C183 7 35 SENSE1_SYR
GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_SYR
1nF
C219
R148 R149 2 34 PU10 100pF
330K 330K PH_1_SYR PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND
4 R122
C191 C192 I0_1_SYR I0_1 C217
3
I1_1_SYR I1_1 100pF
32 5 OUT1A_SYR
I2_1_SYR I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_SYR
33
470pF 470pF I3_1_SYR I3_1
17 13
PH_2_SYR PH_2 VS
15 31
I0_2_SYR I0_2 VS +24
16 VCCR55
I1_2_SYR I1_2
23 28
I2_2_SYR I2_2 VREF1 NC
22 26 VREF_SYR
I3_2_SYR I3_2 VREF2 VREF_SYR
C203 6
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
GND VCC DISABLE_SYR DISABLE R58
100nF R56
EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C168 NC
8
R136 U40 100nF 51K

R154
10 21 PU5 SENSE2_TH 2K2 L6258 U31
VCP1 OUT2B 1.2 SENSE2_TH
VCC
C204 GND 1 8
10nF C261 C63 L H
7 GND
VCC W
29
30
25
24
11 20 100pF 10nF GND 3 6
VCP2 SENSE2 GND CS VDD VCC
4 5
C259 DIN SCLK
C205 12
GND VBOOT 100pF C66
100nF 14 OUT2A_TH MAX5400EKA-T
OUT2A OUT2A_TH R124 R125 100nF
330K 330K
C202 7 35 SENSE1_TH C173 C174 GND
GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_TH
1nF
C260
2 34 PU6 100pF 470pF 470pF
PH_1_TH PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND
4 R151
I0_1_TH I0_1 C258 CSPOT_SYR
3
I1_1_TH I1_1 100pF
32 5 OUT1A_TH
I2_1_TH I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_TH
33
I3_1_TH I3_1 VCC
17 13
PH_2_TH PH_2 VS R65
15 31
I0_2_TH I0_2 VS +24 12K
16
I1_2_TH I1_2
23 28
I2_2_TH I2_2 VREF1
22 26
I3_2_TH I3_2 VREF2
6
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
DISABLE_TH DISABLE R61

EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C172 10K
R156 U45 100nF
2K2 L6258
GND
C69 GND
VCC
29
30
25
24
10nF
R152 R153
330K 330K
C193 C194
470pF 470pF
Title
INTERFA CE BOA RD

A3 DA E 010E/3 3
Date: Thursday, March 13, 2003 Sheet 2 of 7

C181
VDDA
27K GND +26
R129 NC
100nF D15 C223
0
C74 C44 GND GND
U42 100pF
U38D 100nF 100nF PINCH VALVE3 10 1 PINCH VALVE3+ LIQUID PUMP+
R128 PINCH VALVE3 IN1 OUT1 LIQUID PUMP+
VCC
13 C175 9 2 LIQUID PUMP-
100pF 1K GNDA GND IN2 OUT2 LIQUID PUMP-
LIQUID PUMP_S 14 GNDA SOL 8 3 SOL+ R159
LIQUID PUMP_S SOL IN3 OUT3
12 R69 7 4 C224 1 a la place de 0.47
GND IN4 OUT4 GND 1 GND
LIQUID PUMP- 100pF
10K 6
TLV2374ID DIAG NC
+ C79 5 D16 C225
1uFCTT16V GND GND GND GND
100pF
VN330SP PINCH VALVE1+
15K GNDA PINCH VALVE1+
R139 PINCH VALVE1-
PINCH VALVE1-
C180 R160
C226
U38C GND +26 GND 1 GND
R140 100pF
9 C186 100nF
0
1K GNDA NC
PINCH VALVE1_S 8 100pF U41 D17 C227
PINCH VALVE1_S GND GND
10 R70 SYRINGE_VALVE 10 1 SYRINGE_VALVE+ 100pF
SYRINGE_VALVE IN1 OUT1
VCC
PINCH VALVE1- LIQUID PUMP 9 2 LIQUID PUMP+ PINCH VALVE2+
1K LIQUID PUMP IN2 OUT2 PINCH VALVE2+
TLV2374ID PINCH VALVE1 8 3 PINCH VALVE1+ PINCH VALVE2-
C80 PINCH VALVE1 IN3 OUT3 PINCH VALVE2-
+ PINCH VALVE2 7 4 PINCH VALVE2+ R161
1uFCTT16V PINCH VALVE2 IN4 OUT4
C228
GND 1 GND
6 100pF
15K GNDA DIAG
R130 5 NC
GNDA GND GND D4 C163
GND GND
11
VN330SP 100pF
U39A D_VACUUM_PUMP+
R131 D_VACUUM_PUMP+
2 C72 D_VACUUM_PUMP-
100pF 1K GNDA D_VACUUM_PUMP-
PINCH VALVE2_S 1 C128 R121
PINCH VALVE2_S
3 R71 C164 1 a la place de 0.47
GND +26 GND 1 GND
PINCH VALVE2- 100pF
1K 100nF
0
TLV2374ID NC
+ C81 U20 D3 D14 C221
GND GND
4
1uFCTT16V RESERVE_VALVE 10 1 SMBYW02-200 RESERVE_VALVE+ 100pF
VDDA RESERVE_VALVE IN1 OUT1
VCC
LP MIXING VALVE1 9 2 LPM LP MIXING VALVE+ SYRINGE_VALVE+
15K GNDA LP MIXING VALVE1 IN2 OUT2 SYRINGE_VALVE+
R88 8 3 SYRINGE_VALVE-
GNDA IN3 OUT3 SYRINGE_VALVE-
D_VACUUM_PUMP 7 4 D_VACUUM_PUMP+ R158
D_VACUUM_PUMP IN4 OUT4
11
C222
U17A GND 1 GND
R89 6 100pF
DIAG
2 C40 5 SM6T30A
100pF 1K GNDA GND GND D6
D_VACUUM_PUMP_S 1 C141
D_VACUUM_PUMP_S D1 GND GND
3 R52 VN330SP 100pF
D_VACUUM_PUMP- C32 SMBYW02-200 RESERVE_VALVE+
10K RESERVE_VALVE+
TLV2374ID RESERVE_VALVE-
LPMV2+
C53 GND +12 RESERVE_VALVE-
+ R105
4
1uFCTT16V 100nF C142
0
VDDA GND 0.33 GND
U16 100pF
15K GNDA
R126 LP MIXING VALVE2 10 1 NC
GNDA LP MIXING VALVE2 IN1 OUT1
VCC
FAN 9 2 SOLB+ D18 C231
FAN IN2 OUT2 GND GND
11
8 3 100pF
U38A IN3 OUT3
R127 7 4 PINCH VALVE3+
GND IN4 OUT4 PINCH VALVE3+
2 C71 PINCH VALVE3-
100pF 1K GNDA PINCH VALVE3-
SYRINGE_VALVE_S 1 6 R162
SYRINGE_VALVE_S DIAG
3 R68 5 C229
GND GND GND GND 1 GND
SYRINGE_VALVE- 100pF
1K C271 VN330SP
TLV2374ID NC
+ C78 220nF D13 C246
GND GND
4
1uFCTT16V MOT2 100pF
VDDA MOT2
MOT- SOL+
10K GNDA SOL+
R137 U32 SOL-
C270 SOL-
20 1 SMOT R163
U22D 22nF VREF SENSE
19 2 C247
U38B BOOT2 ENABLE GND 0.33 GND
R138 9 8 18 100pF
IN2
6 C75 17 4 R164
100pF 1K GNDA GND GND 1
RESERVE_VALVE_S 7 74HC14SO 16 5 C250
RESERVE_VALVE_S GND GND GND
5 R43 15 6 100pF
GND GND GND GND
RESERVE_VALVE- 14 7 MOT+
1K GND GND MOT+
TLV2374ID MOT1 13
C55 MOT1 IN1
+ 12 9 GND
1uFCTT16V BOOT1 OUT2
11 10 MOT-
C269 OUT1 VS +26 MOT-
15K GNDA 22nF C64
R141 L6201
100nF GND
C248
U39B GND MOT+ 100pF
R142
6 C76
100pF 1K GNDA
PINCH VALVE3_S 7 +12 C49 NC
PINCH VALVE3_S D5
5 R72 C139
GND GND GND
PINCH VALVE3- 100pF
1K R42 100nF LP MIXING VALVE+
TLV2374ID LP MIXING VALVE+
+ C82 1K LP MIXING VALVE-
1uFCTT16V LP MIXING VALVE-
S
R101
G C140
10K GNDA Q2 GND 1 GND
R143 100pF
R41 IRFR9014
220
U39C HP PUMP+
R144
D
9 C77 NC
100pF 1K GNDA D2
C
SOL_S 8 C136
SOL_S GND GND
10 R67 R36 100pF
SOL- HP PUMP B HP PUMP+
1K HP PUMP 1K Q1 HP PUMP+
TLV2374ID HP PUMP-
C83 R37 BC847B HP PUMP-
+ R103
1uFCTT16V 10K C138
GND GND
E
0.01 100pF
GNDA
27K
R132 NC
GND D12 C161
GND GND
100pF
U39D SOLB1+
R133 SOLB1+
13 C73 SOLB1+ SOLB-
100pF 1K GNDA SOLB-
MOT_S 14 R120
MOT_S
12 R73 CI23 C162
GND 0.33 GND
SMOT R91 NC SOLB+ 100pF
10K
TLV2374ID
+ C84 100K
1uFCTT16V CI22
R97
NC RESERVE_VALVE+
15K U17D
GNDA R90 D7 D8
13 C41
100pF 1K GNDA
HEATER_S 14
U17B HEATER_S +12 GND
R98 12 R35
6 C43 PU11 SM6T15A SM6T15A
100pF 1K GNDA 1K
LP MIXING VALVE_S 7 TLV2374ID
LP MIXING VALVE_S C46
5 R95 + C157
1uFCTT16V GND
LP MIXING VALVE- 100pF
1K
TLV2374ID GNDA
+ C37 HEATER+ HEATER+
1uFCTT16V HEATER+
R99 HEATER- HEATER-
HEATER-
100K GNDA
+12 U19 C159
C124 GND
0 20 100pF
GND GND 22nF
1
U17C C122 GND D9
R100 GND
9 C45 100nF GND 4 17
100pF 1K GNDA OUT2 ENABLE +12 GND
HP PUMP_S 8 5 16 C123
HP PUMP_S +12 VS SENSE D11
10 R94 GND 6 15 SM6T15A
OUT1 VREF GND
HP PUMP- 7 14 SM6T15A
10K BOOT1 BOOT2
TLV2374ID 8 13 220nF
C42 IN1 IN2
+
1uFCTT16V C39 10 11 R96
GND GND 0.01
R44 22nF
GNDA
GND L6201PS GND 0.01 a la place de 0.022
10K U22B
3 4
HEATER1
GND
U21D U21B 74HC14SO
R38
13 6 C50
100pF 1K GNDA HEATER2
14 FAN_S 7
FAN_S
12 5 R54
GNDA
SOLB-
1K
TLV2374ID TLV2374ID
+ C65
1uFCTT16V
Title
GNDA INTERFA CE BOA RD

A3 DA E 010E/3 3
Date: Thursday, March 13, 2003 Sheet 3 of 7

VDDA
LIQUID PUMP
4
U21A LIQUID PUMP
PINCH VALVE1
PINCH VALVE1
3 R102 C131 A16_MC 2 PINCH VALVE2
A16 SU1 PINCH VALVE2
1 MUX XFC_MC XTAL_MC A17_MC 30 12 A0_MC D_VACUUM_PUMP
100 GND GND A17 A0 D_VACUUM_PUMP
2 A18_MC 1 11 A1_MC SUP SYRINGE_VALVE
IO3CPLD
I1_2_TH
I0_2_TH
I3_2_TH
I2_2_TH
I2_1_TH
I3_1_TH
I0_1_TH
I1_1_TH
R31 X2 A18 A1 SYRINGE_VALVE
C132 100nF C34 10 A2_MC NC RESERVE_VALVE
I1_2_Z
I0_2_Z
I3_2_Z
I2_2_Z
I2_1_Z
I3_1_Z
I0_1_Z
CLK_MC
RST_MC
A2 RESERVE_VALVE
10M
22pF 16MHz L108E (IQD) D8_MC 13 9 A3_MC PINCH VALVE3
TXD
TLV2374ID
RTS
GND DQ0 A3 PINCH VALVE3
D9_MC 14 8 A4_MC SOL
DQ1 A4 SOL
11
100nF EXTAL_MC D10_MC 15 7 A5_MC SU23 MOT1
GNDA GND DQ2 A5 MOT1
C35 D11_MC 17 6 A6_MC SU P MOT2
DQ3 A6 MOT2
22pF D12_MC 18 5 A7_MC 822498-1
C47 DQ4 A7
D13_MC 19 27 A8_MC PH_1_X
100
DQ5 A8 PH_1_X
99
98
97
96
94
93
92
90
89
87
85
84
83
81
80
79
78
77
76
100pF D14_MC 20 26 A9_MC I0_1_X
DQ6 A9 I0_1_X
U34 U25 D15_MC 21 23 A10_MC U33 I1_1_X
DQ7 A10 I1_1_X
BUB1 13 3 25 A11_MC I2_1_X
BUB1 X0 X A11 I2_1_X
I
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
BUB2 14 X_POS_SENSOR 20 52 A0_MC CSROM_MC 22 4 A12_MC I3_1_X
BUB2 X1 DATA0/KWD0/PD0 ADDR0/ PB0 CE A12 I3_1_X
VREF_SYR 15 X_HOME_SENSOR 21 53 A1_MC OE_MC 24 28 A13_MC PH_2_X
VREF_SYR X2 DATA1/KWD1/PD1 ADDR1/ PB1 OE A13 PH_2_X
BUB3 12 RACK_POS_SENSOR 22 54 A2_MC RW_MC 31 29 A14_MC RES 1 75 I0_2_X
BUB3 X3 DATA2/KWD2/PD2 ADDR2/ PB2 WE A14 I/O I/O I0_2_X
SYRINGE_VALVE_S 1 SYR_HOME_SENSOR 23 55 A3_MC U23 3 A15_MC 2 I1_2_X
SYRINGE_VALVE_S X4 DATA3/KWD3/PD3 ADDR3/ PB3 A15 I/O I1_2_X
PINCH VALVE1_S 5 VDDA Z_POS_SENSOR 24 56 A4_MC MBM29F040C-90JC 73 TDO I2_2_X
PINCH VALVE1_S X5 DATA4/KWD4/PD4 ADDR4/ PB4 TDO I2_2_X
RESERVE_VALVE_S 2 16 Z_HOME_SENSOR 25 57 A5_MC TDI 4 72 I1_1_Z I3_2_X
RESERVE_VALVE_S X6 VDD DATA5/KWD5/PD5 PB5/ADDR5 TDI I/O I3_2_X
LIQUID PUMP_S 4 ADAPTOR_SENSOR 26 58 A6_MC D8_MC 11 10 A0_MC D8_MC 5 71 I0_1_X DISABLE_X
LIQUID PUMP_S X7 DATA6/KWD6/PD6 PB6/ADDR6 O0 A0 I/O I/O DISABLE_X
8 RACK_IN_SENSOR 27 59 A7_MC D9_MC 12 9 A1_MC D9_MC 6 70 I3_2_X PH_1_Z
VSS DATA7/KWD7/PD7 PB7/ADDR7 O1 A1 I/O I/O PH_1_Z
6 D10_MC 13 8 A2_MC D10_MC 7 69 I1_1_X I0_1_Z
INH O2 A2 I/O I/O I0_1_Z
VDDA 11 7 D8_MC 28 60 A8_MC D11_MC 15 7 A3_MC D11_MC 8 68 I0_2_X I1_1_Z
A VEE DATA8/PC0 PA0/ADDR8 O3 A3 I/O I/O I1_1_Z
10 D9_MC 29 61 A9_MC D12_MC 16 6 A4_MC D12_MC 9 67 I3_1_X I2_1_Z
B DATA9/ PC1 PA1/ADDR9 O4 A4 I/O I/O I2_1_Z
C166 9 GNDA D10_MC 30 62 A10_MC D13_MC 17 5 A5_MC D13_MC 10 I3_1_Z
C DATA10/ PC2 PA2/ADDR10 O5 A5 I/O I3_1_Z
D11_MC 31 63 A11_MC D14_MC 18 4 A6_MC 65 I2_1_X PH_2_Z
DATA11/ PC3 PA3/ADDR11 O6 A6 I/O PH_2_Z
HEF4051BM1 D12_MC 32 64 A12_MC D15_MC 19 3 A7_MC D14_MC 12 64 I1_2_X I0_2_Z
DATA12/ PC4 PA4/ADDR12 O7 A7 I/O I/O I0_2_Z
100nF IO_A2 D13_MC 33 65 A13_MC 25 A8_MC D15_MC 13 63 I2_2_X I1_2_Z
DATA13/ PC5 PA5/ADDR13 A8 I/O I/O I1_2_Z
C165 IO_A1 D14_MC 34 66 A14_MC U24 24 A9_MC TXD0_MC 14 62 TCK I2_2_Z
DATA14/ PC6 PA6/ADDR14 A9 I/O TCK I2_2_Z
IO_A0 D15_MC 35 67 A15_MC CY62256L-70SNC 21 A10_MC TMS 15 61 I3_1_SYR I3_2_Z
DATA15/ PC7 PA7/ADDR15 A10 TMS I/O I3_2_Z
CS_MUX1 23 A11_MC IO1CPLD 16 60 I2_1_SYR DISABLE_Z
A11 I/O I/O DISABLE_Z
100nF CS_MUX2 BKGD_MC 19 11 A16_MC 2 A12_MC A0_MC 17 PH_1_TH
BKGD / TAGHI ADDR16/PG0 A12 I/O PH_1_TH
C51 12 A17_MC 26 A13_MC 58 I2_2_SYR I0_1_TH
ADDR17/PG1 A13 I/O I0_1_TH
U35 RST_MC 40 13 A18_MC VCC 1 A14_MC A1_MC 19 57 I3_2_SYR I1_1_TH
RST ADDR18/PG2 A14 I/O I/O I1_1_TH
9 VCC 16 28 A2_MC 20 56 I0_2_SYR I2_1_TH
C ADDR19/PG3 C129 VCC I/O I/O I2_1_TH
100nF 10 GNDA XTAL_MC 47 17 CS_MUX1 20 CSRAM_MC RW_MC 21 55 I1_2_SYR I3_1_TH
B XTAL ADDR20/PG4 100nF CS I/O I/O I3_1_TH
11 7 EXTAL_MC 46 18 CS_MUX2 22 OE_MC CSPLD 22 54 I0_1_SYR PH_2_TH
A VEE R104 EXTAL ADDR21/PG5 OE I/O I/O PH_2_TH
GNDA 6 14 27 RW_MC IO2CPLD 23 53 I1_1_SYR I0_2_TH
INH 10K GND GND WE I/O I/O I0_2_TH
8 XFC_MC 44 RTS_HP 24 52 MOT2 I1_2_TH
VSS XFC I/O I/O I1_2_TH
SOL_S 4 87 MUX TXD0_HP 25 I2_2_TH
SOL_S X7 PAD0/ AN0 I/O I2_2_TH
PINCH VALVE3_S 2 16 PE0MC PE0MC 36 88 VAC_SIGNAL I3_2_TH
PINCH VALVE3_S X6 VDD XIRQ /PE0 PAD1/ AN1 I3_2_TH
MOT_S 5 PE1MC 37 89 AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG DISABLE_TH
MOT_S X5 IRQ /VPP/ PE1 PAD2/ AN2 DISABLE_TH
PINCH VALVE2_S 1 VDDA RW_MC 38 90 WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL VCC PH_1_HPV
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
PINCH VALVE2_S X4 R/ W/ PE2 PAD3/ AN3 PH_1_HPV
VREF_X 12 PE3MC 39 91 TH_POS_SENSOR I0_1_HPV
VREF_X X3 LSTRB /TAGLO/ PE3 PAD4/ AN4 I0_1_HPV
D_VACUUM_PUMP_S 15 CLK_MC 48 92 TH_HOME_SENSOR I1_1_HPV
D_VACUUM_PUMP_S X2 ECLK/ PE4 PAD5/ AN5 C167 C153 C150 C160 I1_1_HPV
GEN FAN_S 14 MODA_MC 49 93 TH_HIGHT_SENSOR I2_1_HPV
GEN FAN_S X1 MODA/ IPIPE0/ PE5 PAD6/ AN6 I2_1_HPV
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
40
41
42
44
SYRINGE_VALVE45
46
PINCH VALVE147
PINCH VALVE248
PINCH VALVE3 49
50
D_VACUUM_PUMP
FAN_S 13 3 MODB_MC 50 94 RACK_OUT_SENSOR 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF EPM7128STC100 I3_1_HPV
RESERVE_VALVE
FAN_S X0 X MODB/ IPIPE1/ PE6 PAD7/ AN7 I3_1_HPV
DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR 51 PH_2_HPV
ARST/ PE7 PH_2_HPV
I2_2_HPV
I1_2_HPV
I0_2_HPV
I3_1_HPV
I2_1_HPV
I1_1_HPV
I0_1_HPV
I3_2_HPV
HEF4051BM1 SPI_CLK 74 CS_SPI2 GND I0_2_HPV
SOL
TXD_TC
SPI_CLK PF6/CSP1 I0_2_HPV
RTS_TC
LEDMC
VTXTC
SPI_OUT 73 CSROM_MC I1_2_HPV
MOT1
SPI_OUT PF5/CSP0 U22E I1_2_HPV
SPI_IN RXD 97 72 CSRAM_MC I2_2_HPV
SPI_IN PS0/ RxD0 PF4/CSD I2_2_HPV
U18 TXD0_MC 98 71 CSPLD RW_MC 11 10 OE_MC I3_2_HPV
PS1/ TxD0 PF3/CS3 I3_2_HPV
CSPOT_X 15 1 IO_A0 70 IO_A2 DISABLE_HPV
CSPOT_X Y0 A PF2/CS2 DISABLE_HPV
CSPBUB1 14 2 IO_A1 RXD1_MC 99 69 IO_A1 74HC14SO PH_1_SYR
CSPBUB1 Y1 B PS2/ RxD1 PF1/CS1 PH_1_SYR
CSPBUB2 13 3 IO_A2 TXD1_MC 100 68 IO_A0 I0_1_SYR
CSPBUB2 Y2 C PS3/ TxD1 PF0/CS0 I0_1_SYR
CSPBUB3 12 B4 I1_1_SYR
CSPBUB3 Y3 I1_1_SYR
CSPOT_SYR 11 VCC SS_MC 104 75 DISABLE_X TCK I2_1_SYR
CSPOT_SYR Y4 PS7/ SS PH0/KWH0 1 2 GND J I2_1_SYR
CSHPPC 10 6 SPI_CLK 103 76 DISABLE_Z TDO I3_1_SYR
CSHPPC Y5 G1 PS6/ SCK PH1/KWH1 U22C DE7 3 4 VCC I3_1_SYR
CSTC 9 4 CS_SPI1 SPI_OUT 102 77 DISABLE_TH R40 VCC TMS PH_2_SYR
CSTC Y6 G2A PS5/ SDO/ MOSI PH2/KWH2 5 6 PH_2_SYR
CSRACK 7 5 SS_MC SPI_IN 101 78 DISABLE_HPV LEDMC 5 6 I0_2_SYR
CSRACK Y7 G2B PS4/ SDI/ MISO PH3/KWH3 470 7 8 I0_2_SYR
81 DISABLE_SYR TDI I1_2_SYR
PH4/KWH4 9 10 I1_2_SYR
C120 74HC138SO 82 PH_1_X 74HC14SO CL150UR3000 I2_2_SYR
VCC GND R47 PH5/KWH5 I2_2_SYR
22nF 85 83 PH_2_X CAV10 GND I3_2_SYR
10K VRef V RH PH6/KWH6 I3_2_SYR
U46 86 84 BUB_DET_3 DISABLE_SYR
GNDA V RL PH7/KWH7 DISABLE_SYR
CS5 15 1 IO_A0
CS5 Y0 A
DSYNC 14 2 IO_A1 42 105 BUB_DET_1 R115
DSYNC Y1 B VCC VDDX1 PT0/ IOC0
CS3 13 3 IO_A2 41 106 BUB_DET_2 VTXTC
CS3 Y2 C GND VSSX1 PT1/ IOC1 10K VCC
CS2 12 VCC 107 CS_SPI1
CS2 Y3 PT2/ IOC2
CS1 11 VCC 79 108 LIQUID PUMP JP4
CS1 Y4 VCC VDDX2 PT3/ IOC3
CS0 10 6 80 109 SENSOR 0 CAV2 C85
CS0 Y5 G1 GND VSSX2 PT4/ IOC4
CSCANHP 9 4 CS_SPI2 110 SENSOR 1 XTAL_MC
CSCANHP Y6 G2A PT5/ IOC5 VCC GND XTAL_MC
7 5 SS_MC 2 111 SENSOR 2 RES
Y7 G2B VCC VDDX3 PT6/ IOC6 RES
1 112 FR D LOCK SENSOR GND
GND VSSX3 PT7/ IOC7/ PAI 100nF
C211 74HC138SO VRef
VCC GND
22nF 14 3 PH_1_Z U47
VCC VDD KWJ0/PJ0
15 4 PH_2_Z 18
PE0MC C125 GND VSS KWJ1/PJ1
5 PH_1_TH
VCC ON-OFF
PE0MC 100nF KWJ2/PJ2
PE1MC 43 6 PH_2_TH RXD1_MC 10 9 BARCODE TXD
PE1MC GNDA VCC VDDPLL KWJ3/PJ3 R2OUT R2IN BARCODE TXD
PE3MC 45 7 PH_1_HPV 13 14
PE3MC GND VSSPLL KWJ4/PJ4 R1OUT R1IN GND
IO1CPLD VDDA 8 PH_2_HPV
IO1CPLD KWJ5/PJ5
95 9 PH_1_SYR TXD1_MC 11 8 BARCODE RXD
VDDA KWJ6/PJ6 T2IN T2OUT BARCODE RXD
96 10 PH_2_SYR TXD_TC 12 15 TXDTCRS
GNDA VSSA KWJ7/PJ7 T1IN T1OUT TXDTCRS
+
TXD0_HP C130 C215 6 C216
TXD0_HP C33 100nF C2-
RTS_HP 7
RTS_HP 1uFCTT16V 100nF -9VOUT 100nF GND
68HC812A4PV8 5
C2+
TXD_TC GNDA GNDA 4 C214
TXD_TC VCC C1- 100nF
RTS_TC C213 3
RTS_TC C143 C133 C119 +9VOUT GND
2
100nF 100nF 100nF C1+
RXD
RXD GND 100nF ST232CW
VCC
X_POS_SENSOR R29 U26

X_POS_SENSOR NC
X_HOME_SENSOR RXD 2 12 R+
X_HOME_SENSOR R A R+
RACK_POS_SENSOR R30 3
RACK_POS_SENSOR GND RE
SYR_HOME_SENSOR RST_MC 11 R-
SYR_HOME_SENSOR 470 B R-
Z_POS_SENSOR R33
Z_POS_SENSOR JP2
Z_HOME_SENSOR MODA_MC VCC U15 TXD 5 9 T+
Z_HOME_SENSOR 10K VCC CAV2 D Y T+
ADAPTOR_SENSOR R92 RTS 4
ADAPTOR_SENSOR DE
RACK_IN_SENSOR MODB_MC 2 10 T-
RACK_IN_SENSOR 100K C36 RESET Z T-
R93 100nF
TH_POS_SENSOR R34 GND SP491ECN
TH_POS_SENSOR 4K7 GND 100K C127 C134 C135 C126
TH_HOME_SENSOR R114 MAX809_EUR-T C48
TH_HOME_SENSOR 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF
TH_HIGHT_SENSOR GND
TH_HIGHT_SENSOR 10K VCC VCC GND
RACK_OUT_SENSOR
RACK_OUT_SENSOR
SENSOR 0 B3 100nF GND
SENSOR 0
SENSOR 1 BKGD_MC GND
SENSOR 1 1
SENSOR 2
SENSOR 2 GND 2
FR D LOCK SENSOR
FR D LOCK SENSOR 3 B
DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR RST_MC
DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR 4
5
WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL
WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL VCC 6
VAC_SIGNAL CAV6
VAC_SIGNAL
AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG
AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG
IO2CPLD
IO2CPLD
IO3CPLD
IO3CPLD
BUB_DET_1
BUB_DET_1
BUB_DET_2
BUB_DET_2
BUB_DET_3
BUB_DET_3
Title
INTERFA CE BOA RD

A3 DA E 010 E/3 3

TACHY B
HP PUMP
RES
CLK HP
R77 C103
XFC_HP
100 GND
IT2
GND
C104 100nF
100
GND
99
98
97
96
94
93
92
90
89
87
85
84
83
81
80
79
78
77
76
100nF U9
I
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
U12
LP MIXING VALVE2b 20 52 A0_HP LP MIXING VALVE1 1 75

DATA0/KWD0/PD0 ADDR0/ PB0 I/O I/O
LP MIXING VALVE1b 21 53 A1_HP LP MIXING VALVE2 2
DATA1/KWD1/PD1 ADDR1/ PB1 I/O
RTS_HP 22 54 A2_HP 73 TDOHP
DATA2/KWD2/PD2 ADDR2/ PB2 TDO
23 55 A3_HP TDIHP 4 72
DATA3/KWD3/PD3 ADDR3/ PB3 TDI I/O
24 56 A4_HP CAM FLAG 5 71
DATA4/KWD4/PD4 ADDR4/ PB4 I/O I/O
25 57 A5_HP 6 70
DATA5/KWD5/PD5 PB5/ADDR5 I/O I/O
26 58 A6_HP 7 69
27 59 A7_HP 8 68
9 67
I/O I/O
XTAL_MC D8_HP 28 60 A8_HP 10
DATA8/PC0 PA0/ADDR8 I/O
JP1 D9_HP 29 61 A9_HP 65
NC DATA9/ PC1 PA1/ADDR9 I/O
EXTAL_HP D10_HP 30 62 A10_HP 12 64 LP MIXING VALVE2b
DATA10/ PC2 PA2/ADDR10 I/O I/O
D11_HP 31 63 A11_HP 13 63
DATA11/ PC3 PA3/ADDR11 I/O I/O
D12_HP 32 64 A12_HP LP MIXING VALVE1b 14 62 TCKHP
GND DATA12/ PC4 PA4/ADDR12 I/O TCK
D13_HP 33 65 A13_HP TMSHP 15 61
R8 X1 DATA13/ PC5 PA5/ADDR13 TMS I/O
C5 D14_HP 34 66 A14_HP DIR 16 60
NC DATA14/ PC6 PA6/ADDR14 I/O I/O
NC D15_HP 35 67 A15_HP 17
NC
DATA15/ PC7 PA7/ADDR15 I/O

58
I/O
XTAL_HP BKGD_HP 19 11 A16_HP 19 57
GND BKGD / TAGHI ADDR16/PG0 I/O I/O
C4 R28 12 A17_HP 20 56
ADDR17/PG1 I/O I/O
NC RES 40 13 A18_HP RW_HP 21 55 IRQHP
470 RST ADDR18/PG2 I/O I/O
RSTHP 16 CSPLDHP 22 54 IT1
ADDR19/PG3 I/O I/O
XTAL_HP 47 17 TACHY A 23 53
XTAL ADDR20/PG4 I/O I/O
RXD EXTAL_HP 46 18 TACHYAXORB 24 52
RXD EXTAL ADDR21/PG5 I/O I/O
TXD0_HP HP PUMPb 25
TXD0_HP I/O
RTS_HP XFC_HP 44
RTS_HP XFC
87
VCC 10K PAD0/ AN0
36 88 HP_SENSOR
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
R82 XIRQ /PE0 PAD1/ AN1
IRQHP 37 89 LP MIXING VALVE_S
IRQ /VPP/ PE1 PAD2/ AN2
RW_HP 38 90 HP PUMP_S
R/ W/ PE2 PAD3/ AN3
39 91 C137
LSTRB /TAGLO/ PE3 PAD4/ AN4
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
CLK HP 48 92 SU2 100nF EPM7128STC100
ECLK/ PE4 PAD5/ AN5 SU7
MODA_HP 49 93 SU P
MODA/ IPIPE0/ PE5 PAD6/ AN6 VCC GND
D15_HP
D14_HP
D13_HP
D12_HP
D10_HP
D11_HP
TACHY
MODB_HP 50 94 NC SU P
A3_HP
A2_HP
A1_HP
A0_HP
D8_HP
D9_HP
MODB/ IPIPE1/ PE6 PAD7/ AN7
51 822498-1
ARST/ PE7
XTAL_MC 74
XTAL_MC PF6/CSP1
RES GND 73 CSROM_HP A16_HP 2
RES PF5/CSP0 A16
RXD 97 72 CSRAM_HP A17_HP 30 12 A0_HP
PS0/ RxD0 PF4/CSD A17 A0
CSHPPC TXD0_HP 98 71 CSPLDHP A18_HP 1 11 A1_HP
CSHPPC PS1/ TxD0 PF3/CS3 A18 A1
SPI_CLK 70 10 A2_HP
SPI_CLK PF2/CS2 A2
SPI_IN 99 69 D8_HP 13 9 A3_HP
SPI_IN PS2/ RxD1 PF1/CS1 DQ0 A3
SPI_OUT 100 68 D9_HP 14 8 A4_HP B2
SPI_OUT PS3/ TxD1 PF0/CS0 DQ1 A4
D10_HP 15 7 A5_HP TCKHP
DQ2 A5 1 2 GND JTAG
CSHPPC 104 75 D11_HP 17 6 A6_HP TDOHP
PS7/ SS PH0/KWH0 DQ3 A6 3 4 VCC
SPI_CLK 103 76 D12_HP 18 5 A7_HP TMSHP
PS6/ SCK PH1/KWH1 DQ4 A7 5 6
SPI_OUT 102 77 D13_HP 19 27 A8_HP
PS5/ SDO/ MOSI PH2/KWH2 DQ5 A8 7 8
SPI_IN 101 78 D14_HP 20 26 A9_HP TDIHP
PS4/ SDI/ MISO PH3/KWH3 DQ6 A9 9 10
81 D15_HP 21 23 A10_HP
PH4/KWH4 DQ7 A10
CAM FLAG 82 25 A11_HP CAV10 GND
CAM FLAG PH5/KWH5 A11
TACHY A 85 83 CSROM_HP 22 4 A12_HP
TACHY A VRef V RH PH6/KWH6 CE A12
TACHY B 86 84 OE_HP 24 28 A13_HP
TACHY B GNDA V RL PH7/KWH7 OE A13
RW_HP 31 29 A14_HP HP PUMP
WE A14 HP PUMP
42 105 CAM FLAG U7 3 A15_HP LP MIXING VALVE1
VCC VDDX1 PT0/ IOC0 A15 LP MIXING VALVE1
41 106 TACHY A MBM29F040C-90JC LP MIXING VALVE2
GND VSSX1 PT1/ IOC1 LP MIXING VALVE2
107 TACHY B
PT2/ IOC2
HP_SENSOR 79 108 HP PUMPb D8_HP 11 10 A0_HP
HP_SENSOR VCC VDDX2 PT3/ IOC3 O0 A0 U22F DE6
LP MIXING VALVE_S 80 109 IT1 D9_HP 12 9 A1_HP R18 VCC
LP MIXING VALVE_S GND VSSX2 PT4/ IOC4 O1 A1
HP PUMP_S 110 TACHYAXORB D10_HP 13 8 A2_HP LEDHPPC 13 12
HP PUMP_S PT5/ IOC5 O2 A2 470
2 111 IT2 D11_HP 15 7 A3_HP
VCC VDDX3 PT6/ IOC6 O3 A3
PE3MC 1 112 TACHY D12_HP 16 6 A4_HP 74HC14SO CL150UR3000
PE3MC GND VSSX3 PT7/ IOC7/ PAI O4 A4
VRef D13_HP 17 5 A5_HP R74
O5 A5
14 3 PE3MC D14_HP 18 4 A6_HP MODA_HP
VCC VDD KWJ0/PJ0 O6 A6 10K VCC
15 4 DIR D15_HP 19 3 A7_HP R75
C96 GND VSS KWJ1/PJ1 O7 A7
5 LEDHPPC 25 A8_HP MODB_HP
100nF KWJ2/PJ2 A8 100K
43 6 U8 24 A9_HP R76
VCC VDDPLL KWJ3/PJ3 A9
45 7 CY62256L-70SNC 21 A10_HP
GND VSSPLL KWJ4/PJ4 A10 4K7 GND
GNDA 8 23 A11_HP R83
KWJ5/PJ5 A11
VDDA 95 9 2 A12_HP
VDDA VDDA KWJ6/PJ6 A12 10K VCC
96 10 26 A13_HP
GNDA VSSA KWJ7/PJ7 A13
VCC 1 A14_HP B1
A14
+ BKGD_HP
C16 C100 1 BDM
20 CSRAM_HP
C13 100nF 100nF CS GND 2
68HC812A4PV8 22 OE_HP
1uFCTT16V OE 3
27 RW_HP RSTHP
WE 4
GNDA GNDA
VCC 5
GND
C116 C117 C105 C97 U22A VCC 6
100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF RW_HP 1 2 OE_HP CAV6
GND
74HC14SO
Title
INTERFA CE BOARD

A3 DAE010E+3 3

L3 VDDA
LQH3C100K34 U3 PT12
L78M05CDT VDDA NC
1 3
+26 IN OUT
GND
L1 +
LQH3C100K34 +
C24 C21
XTAL_MC C20 10uFCTT35V 100nF C25
2
JP3 100nF 10uFCTT35V
NC EXTAL_TC
GNDA
GND VRef
GND L2 U2 PT13
C148 X3 LQH3C100K34 LT1019CS8-5
NC NC
NC 2 6
+26 IN OUT VRef
GND
XTAL_TC
GND C7
C149 + + 560 pour INA122UA
NC 10uFCTT35V C15 C14
R21
100nF 100nF
4
B5 150 1%
NC
CLR GNDA C6 R25 R84
1 10uFCTT16V 10K 0.1% 113 0.1%
GND U10
2 VCC
8 1
3 GND RG+ RG-
ICSPData R22 7 2 GND
4 VDDA VCC IN-
ICSPCLK 6 3
5 100K OUT IN+ Vref
5 4
2V5 REF VEE C115
C27
2.2uF MAX4194ESA GNDA R80 100pF PT100HEAT2
10K 0.1% PT100HEAT2
C152
GNDA C38
VCC GND
PT100HEAT1
VDDA GNDA PT100HEAT1
100nF
100nF C113
U30 U11 100pF
R27
EXTAL_TC 9 21 RTS_TC 560 pour INA122UA
OSC1 RB0 150 1%
22 CSCAN GND
RB1
23 CKCAN CSCAN 1 2 E1
RB2 CS CH0 R32 R87
24 OUTCAN CKCAN 7 3 E2
RB3 CLK CH1 10K 0.1% 113 0.1%
XTAL_TC 10 25 INCAN U14
OSC2 RB4
26 RB5 OUTCAN 6 8 8 1
RB5 DOUT VCC Vref RG+ RG-
FAN_S 2 27 ICSPCLK INCAN 5 4 R26 7 2 GND
RA0 RB6 DIN GND GNDA VDDA VCC IN-
HEATER_S 3 28 ICSPData 6 3
RA1 RB7 100K OUT IN+ Vref
XTAL_MC LEDTC 4 5 4
XTAL_MC RA2 2V5 REF VEE C121
RES RA3 5 11 HEATER1 C30
RES RA3 RC0 GND R86 100pF
RA4 6 12 HEATER2 LTC1288CS8 2.2uF MAX4194ESA GNDA PT100EXT2
RA4 RC1 10K 0.1% PT100EXT2
CSTC 7 13 FAN C28
RA5 RC2
CSTC 14 SPI_CLK GNDA C31
CSTC RC3 GNDA VRef
SPI_CLK CLR 1 15 SPI_OUT PT100EXT1
SPI_CLK MCLR RC4 VDDA GNDA PT100EXT1
SPI_IN 16 SPI_IN 100nF
SPI_IN VCC RC5 C118
SPI_OUT 17 TXD_TC 100nF
SPI_OUT D10 RC6 100pF
18 RXD
BAS21LT1 RC7
RXD
RXD
TXD_TC R53 16F876-20SP GND
TXD_TC
RTS_TC RES
RTS_TC 1K SU36
SU P
110-97-328-41-001
FAN_S U36
FAN_S
HEATER_S EXTAL_TC 9 21 RTS_TC
HEATER_S OSC1 RB0
22 CSCAN HEATER1
RB1 HEATER1
23 CKCAN HEATER2
RB2 HEATER2
24 OUTCAN
RB3
XTAL_TC 10 25 INCAN FAN VRef
OSC2 RB4 FAN
26 RB5
RB5
FAN_S 2 27 ICSPCLK 2V5
RA0 RB6 R13
HEATER_S 3 28 ICSPData
RA1 RB7 10K 1%
LEDTC 4
RA2
RA3 5 11 HEATER1 2V5
RA3 RC0
RA4 6 12 HEATER2 13
RA4 RC1 PT14
CSTC 7 13 FAN 14
RA5 RC2
14 SPI_CLK 12 NC
RC3 U5D
CLR 1 15 SPI_OUT
MCLR RC4
16 SPI_IN TLV2374ID
RC5 R16
17 TXD_TC
RC6 C176 10K 1%
18 RXD
RC7 100nF
NC
GNDA
DE8 VCC 6
R57
LEDTC 7
470 5
GNDA U5B
CL150UR3000
TLV2374ID
9
8
10
GNDA U5C Title
INTERFACE BOA RD
TLV2374ID
A3 DAE010E+3 3

VDDA R108
6
7 BUB1
BUB1 R110 10M
5
BUB_DET1 U48B NC VDDA
4
TLV2374ID
R49 C60 U49A
4K7 100nF R107
BUB1 3
51K
1 BUB_DET_1
BUB_DET_1
2
GNDA
GNDA TLV2374ID
11
R109
11
NC
2
1 BUB2 GNDA
BUB2
3
BUB_DET2 U48A U27 VDDA GNDA
TLV2374ID 1 8
R48 C58 GNDA L H
7
W
4
4K7 100nF CSPBUB1 3 6
VDDA CS VDD VCC
SPI_OUT 4 5
DIN SCLK
MAX5400EKA-T C57
GNDA SPI_CLK 100nF
GND
13
14 BUB3 VDDA R112
BUB3
12
BUB_DET3 U48D
R111 10M
TLV2374ID
R50 C62 NC
4K7 100nF
U49B
R106
BUB2 5
51K
7 BUB_DET_2
BUB_DET_2
GNDA 6
9
8 TLV2374ID
10 R113
GNDA U48C NC
TLV2374ID
U28 VDDA GNDA

1 8
GNDA L H
7
W
CSPBUB1 CSPBUB2 3 6
CSPBUB1 CS VDD VCC
CSPBUB2 SPI_OUT 4 5
CSPBUB2 DIN SCLK
CSPBUB3
CSPBUB3 C56
MAX5400EKA-T
SPI_CLK SPI_CLK 100nF
SPI_CLK
SPI_OUT
SPI_OUT
GND
VDDA R119
R118 10M
NC
U49C
R116
BUB3 10
51K
8 BUB_DET_3
BUB_DET_3
9
TLV2374ID
R117
NC
U29 VDDA GNDA

1 8
GNDA L H
7
W
CSPBUB3 3 6
CS VDD VCC
SPI_OUT 4 5
DIN SCLK
MAX5400EKA-T
SPI_CLK
U49D
12
GNDA
14
13
TLV2374ID
Title
INTERFACE BOA RD

A3 DA E010E+3 3

U1 2SS52M
CN1
1 3
GND VCC 1
2
OUT
3
JST B3B PH K S
C1
2
100nF
ADIL INSTRUMENTS
Title
ADAPTATOR SENSOR BOARD

A4 DAE007E/0 0
Date: Monday, Febr uary 25, 2002 Sheet 1 of 1

CN1
2
D1 D2 D3
1 LED S 1 227-66BR S 1 227-33BR
2
2 x plages de cuiv re oblon gue Ø2mm x 4mm non percé es
1
A GND K
ADIL INSTRUMENTS
Title
PHOTODETECTOR A N LED BOARD

A4 DA E006E/0 0
Date: Tuesday , March 12, 2002 Sheet 1 of 1

D10 Hemoglobin Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D10 Hemoglobin Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

Technical Assistance Contact Information:

TRADEMARKS AND REFERENCES

D-10 is a trademark of Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc.

L20015501 Service Manual iii

ABOUT THIS MANUAL:

iv Service Manual L20015501

L20015501 Service Manual v

vi Service Manual L20015501

3.3.6 Sample Arm Module 3-16

L20015501 Service Manual vii

5.3.2.1.3 High-Pressure Pump Parameters 5-3

viii Service Manual L20015501

5.10.21 MISC. Button 5-84

L20015501 Service Manual ix

6.31 Barcode Reader 6-82

x Service Manual L20015501

6.78 Internal Waste Bottle 6-230

L20015501 Service Manual xi

6.123 +24VDC Security Cable 6-338

xii Service Manual L20015501

7.10.4 Gradient Offset Correction Measurement 7-42

L20015501 Service Manual xiii

9.2.7.6 External Waste Tubing 9-9

10 Spare Parts 10-1

Appendix A: File Examples

xiv Service Manual L20015501

Appendix C: Electronic Diagrams

L20015501 Service Manual xv

Figure 1-1: Sample Elution in Cartridge 1-2

xvi Service Manual L20015501

Figure 3-24: Small Reference Photodiode 3-13

L20015501 Service Manual xvii

Figure 3-71: Interlock Connector Locations, Last Chassis Version 3-39

xviii Service Manual L20015501

Figure 5-37: D-10 HP module: pump, valve (7/17) 5-39

L20015501 Service Manual xix

Figure 5-79A: D-10 Sample arm module: barcode (2/2) 5-78

xx Service Manual L20015501

1.1 G eneral Description

1.2 High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC)

1.2.2 General Principle

L20015501 Service Manual 1-1

1.3 HPLC Applied to the D-10

1.3.1 G eneral Principle

Ion-exchange HPLC operates on the basis of selective exchange of ions in the

Stationary Phase: Resin

Figure 1-1: Sample Elution in Cartridge

1-2 Service Manual L20015501

1.3.2 Stationary Phase: the Cartridge

Figure 1-2: Cartridge Material

1.3.3 Mobile Phase: the Buffers

L20015501 Service Manual 1-3

1.3.5 Bio-Rad D-10 Hemoglobin A1c

Elution gradient: HbA1c

Figure 1-3: HbA1c Gradient

1.3.6 Bio-Rad D-10 Dual Program

Elution gradient: Dual Program

Figure 1-4: Dual Program Gradient

1-4 Service Manual L20015501

1.4 Operating Principles

Sample preparation, and associated operations, use a sampling probe mounted on

The system is controlled by an integrated personal computer, which is the interface

1.4.1.2 Sample Preparation